A Vedic Reader for Students

Arthur Anthony Macdonell

amagi symbol
Published by Liberty Fund, Inc.

Liberty Fund, Inc.

Liberty Fund, Inc. is a private, educational foundation established to encourage the study of the ideal of a society of free and responsible individuals. It was founded in 1960 thus making 2010 its 50th Anniversary Year.

The Foundation develops, supervises, and finances its own educational activities to foster thought and encourage discourse on enduring intellectual issues pertaining to liberty. This is done through the implementation of different programs:

Each year, Liberty Fund conducts over 150 conferences throughout the United States, Canada, Latin America, and Europe.

Liberty Fund publishes about 10 books each year, many of which are classic works which have gone out of print. There is an online catalog where these books can be ordered <http://www.libertyfund.org/books.aspx>.

Liberty Fund has produced video and audio tapes including The Intellectual Portrait Series of videotapes and DVDs which records conversations with some of the most significant thinkers of our time.

Liberty Fund hosts two websites which contain books, articles, discussion, and podcasts about liberty: the Library of Economics and Liberty <http://www.econlib.org/> and the Online Library of Liberty <http://oll.libertyfund.org/>.

These programs focus on the place individual liberty has in an intellectual heritage evident from ancient times and continuing through our own times. The programs are intended to enrich understanding and appreciation of the complex nature of a society of free and responsible individuals and to contribute to its preservation.

Liberty Fund also sponsors the following websites:

Liberty Fund’s main website <http://www.libertyfund.org>

LF online catalog <http://www.libertyfund.org/books.aspx>

The Goodrich Seminar Room Virtual Tour <http://goodrich.libertyfund.org/goodrich/>

The Online Library of Liberty <http://oll.libertyfund.org/>

Library of Economics and Liberty <http://www.econlib.org/>

As a tax-exempt, private operating foundation, Liberty Fund’s purposes are educational. It does not, therefore, engage in political action of any kind. It fulfills its mission by conducting programs, not by awarding grants to outside organizations or individuals.

The cuneiform inscription that appears in the logo and serves as a design element in all Liberty Fund books and websites is the earliest-known written appearance of the word “freedom” (amagi), or “liberty.” It is taken from a clay document written about 2300 B.C. in the Sumerian city-state of Lagash.

LIBERTY FUND, INC.
8335 Allison Pointe Trail, Suite 300
Indianapolis, Indiana 46250-1684
U.S.A.
Phone no.: 1.800.955.8335

Liberty Fund’s Collection of Epub Titles on Liberty

The text you are currently reading comes from Liberty Fund’s Online Library of Liberty (OLL) <http://oll.libertyfund.org>. Additional titles in ePub format can be downloaded from the main OLL website from each title’s Table of Contents page or from this list <http://files.libertyfund.org/output/epub/>. One convenient way to load titles directly into your iPad is to email yourself this link, click on the title of your choice, and open it directly in iBook on your iPad (thus circumventing the need to load titles from your laptop or desktop computer.

Epub and Kindle versions of books published by Liberty Fund are not available for free download. They can be purchased from Amazon.com.

The Online Library of Liberty

The OLL was established in 2004 in order to further the educational goals of Liberty Fund, Inc, namely “to encourage study of the ideal of a society of free and responsible individuals”. It is a multi-award winning website which makes available at no charge to the public outstanding resources for teaching and learning about the humanities and the social sciences.

Awards

The OLL has won a number of international awards for its outstanding collection of online material in the humanities and social sciences. It has been recognised by

the Library of Congress for its Minerva archiving project

the National Endowment for the Humanities

the British Arts and Humanities Research Council, and

the International Political Science Association.

The Portable Library of Liberty

The 50th Anniversary Edition (2010) of the Portable Library of Liberty data DVD (PLL) contains 1,002 books in PDF format & 34 hours of MP3 audio files from Liberty Fund’s website The Online Library of Liberty (OLL) <oll.libertyfund.org>. Highlights include the complete scholarly editions of the works of Adam Smith, David Ricardo, J.S. Mill, the collected works of Jefferson, Madison, J. Adams,and 166 books published by Liberty Fund. It also contains a collection of Quotations about Liberty and Power, MP3 audio files from the Intellectual Portrait Series: Conversations with Leading Classical Liberal Figures of Our Time and the lecture series The Legacy of Friedrich Hayek.

The books and other resources in the Portable Library of Liberty data DVD are designed to be read or listened to on portable devices such as MP3 Players, smart phones, and E-Book Readers. Hence, this collection is called the “Portable” Library of Liberty and has material in the following formats: text-based PDF, MP3, and ePub.

Liberty Fund is happy to send a copy of this data DVD free of charge upon request for educational purposes. Please email the Director at <oll@libertyfund.org> and make sure you include your postal address.

copyright symbol Copyright and Fair Use Statement

There are four different types of texts which Liberty Fund has made available as part of the Online Library of Liberty website, the Portable Library of Liberty data DVD (PLL), and ePub titles for hand held reading devices:

public domain texts published before 1923. These texts are no longer under copyright and are in the public domain. We have put them online in order to further the educational aims of Liberty Fund.

texts to which the Liberty Fund has electronic rights, such as the books published by Liberty Fund in both print and online formats

other texts to which Liberty Fund has acquired the electronic rights from third parties, such as the journal Literature of Liberty (from the Institute for Humane Studies)

titles which are put online under license from third parties, such as the Glasgow Edition of the Works of Adam Smith (from Oxford University Press).

For titles in the first three categories listed above, no special permission from Liberty Fund is required for quoting material in papers and essays, or for limited photocopying and distribution for academic or other educational or non-profit purposes. The only requirements are that you include proper attribution on the first page of the document being distributed - e.g. for John Locke’s The Two Treatises of Government you would say one of the following:

if using the OLL website - “This material originally appeared on the Online Library of Liberty hosted by Liberty Fund, Inc. URL: http://oll.libertyfund.org/title/222 and accessed on 2010-01-22.” This information can be found in the “Citation” button on the title’s table of contents page.

or if using the copy on the PLL DVD - “This material originally appeared in the Portable Library of Liberty published by Liberty Fund, Inc. URL: http://oll.libertyfund.org/title/222 and PLL v5 (generated 22 January, 2010).” This information can be found in the footer of the EBook PDF.

or if using the ePub version on a portable reading device: “This material is part of the collection of ePub titles in the Online Library of Liberty website hosted by Liberty Fund, Inc. Source Text URL http://oll.libertyfund.org/title/222 accessed on 2010-04-20.” This information can be found on the “Introduction to the Book” page in this file.

For titles in category two and three, any reprint of material “for profit”, such as a chapter or a substantial section of an online book for inclusion in a book or other publication for sale, requires written permission from Liberty Fund.

For titles in the fourth category you must follow the specific requirements of the copyright holder whose work we publish online under license. This information can be found in the “Introduction to the Book” page under the section “Copyright Information.” In the case of the Glasgow Edition of the Works of Adam Smith published under license from Oxford University Press, for reprint or copying permission you need to contact OUP directly. Under our contractual obligations with OUP we have placed the following declaration on the front page of every book and section of the online version of the Glasgow Edition of the Works of Adam Smith:

The Glasgow Edition of the Works and Correspondence of Adam Smith and the associated volumes are published in hardcover by Oxford University Press. The six titles of the Glasgow Edition, but not the associated volumes, are being published in soft cover by Liberty Fund. The online edition is published by Liberty Fund under license from Oxford University Press.
© Oxford University Press 1976. All rights reserved. No part of this material may be stored transmitted retransmitted lent or reproduced in any form or medium without the permission of Oxford University Press.

Thus, for reprint or copying permission you need to contact OUP directly. Liberty Fund cannot grant you this permission because it is not the copyright holder.

A VEDIC READER

BY THE SAME AUTHOR

uniform with the present work

A VEDIC GRAMMAR FOR STUDENTS

Including a chapter on Syntax and three Appendices: List of Verbs, Metre, Accent

A VEDIC READER FOR STUDENTS

BY ARTHUR ANTHONY MACDONELL M.A., Ph.D. boden professor of sanskrit fellow of balliol college; fellow of the british academy fellow of the royal danish academy

CONTAINING THIRTY HYMNS OF THE RIGVEDA IN THE ORIGINAL SAṂHITĀ AND PADA TEXTS, WITH TRANSLITERATION, TRANSLATION, EXPLANATORY NOTES, INTRODUCTION, VOCABULARY

OXFORD

AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

1917

OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS

LONDON EDINBURGH GLASGOW NEW YORK TORONTO MELBOURNE CAPE TOWN BOMBAY HUMPHREY MILFORD publisher to the university

PREFACE

This Reader is meant to be a companion volume to my Vedic Grammar for Students. It contains thirty hymns comprising just under 300 stanzas. These hymns have been taken exclusively from the Rigveda, not only because that Veda represents the earliest and most important phase of the sacred language and literature of India, but because the addition of specimens from the later Vedic literature with their divergences in speech and thought would tend to confuse the learner beginning the study of the oldest period. All the books of the Rigveda have been drawn upon except the ninth. The reason of this exception is that, though the whole of the ninth book practically consists of hymns addressed to Soma only, the hymn which in my opinion represents that deity best occurs in another (the eighth) book. All the most important metres are represented, though no specimens of the rare and complex strophic measures could be given because none of the hymns composed in them seemed to be suitable for the Reader. I have also considered literary merit as far as possible in making the selection. As regards subject-matter, each of the more important deities is represented by one hymn, Agni alone by two. There are besides a few hymns of a different type. One is concerned with social life (x. 34) , one with magical ideas (vii. 103) , two with cosmogony (x. 90. 129) , and three with eschatology (x. 14. 15. 135) . The selection thus forms a brief epitome of the Rigveda, the earliest monument of Indian thought. The arrangement of the hymns follows their order in the text of the Rigveda as shown, together with their respective deities and subjects, in the table of contents (p. ix) . As the latter list is so short, the name of the deity addressed in any selected hymn can be found at once, but it also appears in its alphabetical order in the General Index.

Unlike all Sanskrit and Vedic chrestomathies known to me, the present work is intended primarily for students who, while acquainted with Classical Sanskrit, are beginners of Vedic lacking the aid of a teacher with an adequate knowledge of the earliest period of the language and literature of India. It will moreover, I think, be found to contain much detailed information useful even to more advanced students. Hence difficult and obscure stanzas have never been omitted from any of the selected hymns, because the notes here afford an opportunity of illustrating the methods of critical interpretation (see, for instance, pages 36, 47, 139-40, 152, 166, 175).

In conjunction with my Vedic Grammar for Students, the Reader aims at supplying all that is required for the complete understanding of the selections without reference to any other book. Each hymn is preceded by a special introduction describing briefly the deity or the subject with which it deals. The text of every stanza is printed in three different forms. The first is the Saṃhitā text, in Devanāgarī characters, exactly as handed down by tradition, without change or emendation. But each Pāda or metrical line is printed separately so as to exhibit to the eye the versification of the stanza. Then comes on the right half of the page the traditional Pada text in which each word of the Saṃhitā text is given separately without Sandhi, and in which compounds and certain derivatives and case-forms are analysed. This is an important addition because the Pada text, as nearly contemporary in origin with the Saṃhitā text, furnishes us with the earliest interpretations, within the sphere of phonetics and word-formation, of the Rigveda. Next follows the transliterated Saṃhitā text, in which by the removal of vowel-contractions, the resolution of semivowels, and the replacement of a, the original metre of the Rigveda is restored and, by the use of punctuation, the sense is made clearer. The translation, which follows, is close, accounting for every word of the original, and is based on the critical method of interpretation. The notes furnish minute explanations of all matters concerned with grammar, metre, accent, syntax, and exegesis. The general introduction gives a concise account of the form and matter of the Rigveda, describing in outline its arrangement, its language and metre, its religion and mythology, besides the critical method here applied to the interpretation of its hymns. The vocabulary supplements the translation and notes by giving the derivation of every word and adding in brackets the most obvious cognates from the other Indo-European languages allied to Sanskrit, especially Avestic, Greek, Latin, and English. I have added a copious general Index for the purpose of enabling the student to utilize to the full the summary of Vedic philology which this book contains. Any one who has worked his way carefully through the pages of the Reader ought thus to have laid a solid foundation in Vedic scholarship, and to be prepared for further studies on independent lines.

Freedom from serious misprints is a matter of great importance in a book like this. Such freedom has, I trust, been achieved by the aid of my two friends, Dr. James Morison, Librarian of the Indian Institute, and my former pupil, Dr. A. Berriedale Keith, Regius Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology in the University of Edinburgh. In the course of this obliging task Prof. Keith has supplied me with a number of suggestions, the adoption of which has undoubtedly improved the notes in many points of detail.

Balliol College, Oxford.

October, 1917

.

CONTENTS

|  | PAGES
P REFACE |  | v
I NTRODUCTION |  | xi-xxxi
V EDIC H YMNS |  | 1-219
Agni | i. 1 | 1-10
Savitṛ | i. 35 | 10-21
Marutas | i. 85 | 21-30
Viṣ ṇ u | i. 154 | 30-6
Dyāvāpṛthivī | i. 160 | 36-41
Indra | ii. 12 | 41-56
Rudra | ii. 33 | 56-67
Apā ṃ napāt | ii. 35 | 67-78
Mitra | iii. 59 | 78-83
Bṛhaspati | iv. 50 | 83-92
Uṣas | iv. 51 | 92-9
Agni | v. 11 | 100-4
Parjanya | v. 83 | 104-11
Pūṣan | vi. 54 | 111-15
Āpas | vii. 49 | 115-18
Mitrā-Varu ṇ ā | vii. 61 | 118-24
Sūrya | vii. 63 | 124-28
Aśvinā | vii. 71 | 128-34
Varu ṇ a | vii. 86 | 134-41
Ma ṇ ḍūkās | vii. 103 | 141-7
Viśve devās | viii. 29 | 147-52
Soma | viii. 48 | 152-64
Funeral Hymn | x. 14 | 164-75
Pitaras | x. 15 | 176-86
Gamb l̀ er | x. 34 | 186-95
Puruṣa | x. 90 | 195-203
Rātrī | x. 127 | 203-7
Hymn of Creation | x. 129 | 207-11
Yama | x. 135 | 212-16
Vāta | x. 168 | 216-19
V OCABULARY |  | 221-56
G ENERAL I NDEX |  | 257-63

INTRODUCTION

1.: Age of the Rigveda.

The Rigveda is undoubtedly the oldest literary monument of the Indo-European languages. But the exact period when the hymns were composed is a matter of conjecture. All that we can say with any approach to certainty is that the oldest of them cannot date from later than the thirteenth century bc This assertion is based on the following grounds. Buddhism, which began to spread in India about 500 bc , presupposes the existence not only of the Vedas, but also of the intervening literature of the Brāhmaṇas and Upanishads. The development of language and religious thought apparent in the extensive literature of the successive phases of these two Vedic periods renders it necessary to postulate the lapse of seven or eight centuries to account for the gradual changes, linguistic, religious, social, and political, that this literature displays. On astronomical grounds, one Sanskrit scholar has (cf. p. 146) concluded that the oldest Vedic hymns date from 3000 bc , while another puts them as far back as 6000 bc These calculations are based on the assumption that the early Indians possessed an exact astronomical knowledge of the sun’s course such as there is no evidence, or even probability, that they actually possessed. On the other hand, the possibility of such extreme antiquity seems to be disproved by the relationship of the hymns of the Rigveda to the oldest part of the Avesta, which can hardly date earlier than from about 800 bc That relationship is so close that the language of the Avesta, if it were known at a stage some five centuries earlier, could scarcely have differed at all from that of the Rigveda. Hence the Indians could not have separated from the Iranians much sooner than 1300 bc But, according to Prof. Jacobi, the separation took place before 4500 bc In that case we must assume that the Iranian and the Indian languages remained practically unchanged for the truly immense period of over 3000 years. We must thus rest content with the moderate estimate of the thirteenth century bc as the approximate date for the beginning of the Rigvedic period. This estimate has not been invalidated by the discovery in 1907 of the names of the Indian deities Mitra, Varuṇa, Indra, Nāsatya, in an inscription of about 1400 bc found in Asia Minor. For the phonetic form in which these names there appear may quite well belong to the Indo-Iranian period when the Indians and the Persians were still one people. The date of the inscription leaves two centuries for the separation of the Indians, their migration to India, and the commencement of the Vedic hymn literature in the north-west of Hindustan.

2.: Origin and Growth of the Collection.

When the Indo-Aryans entered India, they brought with them a religion in which the gods were chiefly personified powers of Nature, a few of them, such as Dyaus, going back to the Indo-European, others, such as Mitra, Varuṇa, Indra, to the Indo-Iranian period. They also brought with them the cult of fire and of Soma, besides a knowledge of the art of composing religious poems in several metres, as a comparison of the Rigveda and the Avesta shows. The purpose of these ancient hymns was to propitiate the gods by praises accompanying the offering of melted butter poured on the fire and of the juice of the Soma plant placed on the sacrificial grass. The hymns which have survived in the Rigveda from the early period of the Indo-Aryan invasion were almost exclusively composed by a hereditary priesthood. They were handed down in different families by memory, not by writing, which could hardly have been introduced into India before about 700 bc These family groups of hymns were gradually brought together till, with successive additions, they assumed the earliest collected form of the Rigveda. Then followed the constitution of the Saṃhitā text, which appears to have taken place about 600 bc , at the end of the period of the Brāhmaṇas, but before the Upanishads, which form appendages to those works, came into existence. The creators of the Saṃhitā did not in any way alter the diction of the hymns here collected together, but only applied to the text certain rules of Sandhi which prevailed in their time, and by which, in particular, vowels are either contracted or changed into semi-vowels, and a is often dropped after e and o, in such a way as constantly to obscure the metre. Soon after this work was concluded, extraordinary precautions were taken to preserve from loss or corruption the sacred text thus fixed. The earliest expedient of this kind was the formation of the Pada or ‘word’ text, in which all the words of the Saṃhitā text are separated and given in their original form as unaffected by the rules of Sandhi, and in which most compounds and some derivatives and inflected forms are analysed. This text, which is virtually the earliest commentary on the Rigveda, was followed by other and more complicated methods of reciting the text, and by various works called Anukramaṇīs or ‘Indexes’, which enumerate from the beginning to the end of the Rigveda the number of stanzas contained in each hymn, the deities, and the metres of all the stanzas of the Rigveda. Thanks to these various precautions the text of the Rigveda has been handed down for 2,500 years with a fidelity that finds no parallel in any other literature.

3.: Extent and Divisions of the Rigveda.

The Rigveda consists of 1,017 or, counting eleven others of the eighth Book which are recognized as later additions, 1,028 hymns. These contain a total of about 10,600 stanzas, which give an average of ten stanzas to each hymn. The shortest hymn has only one stanza, while the longest has fifty-eight. If printed continuously like prose in Roman characters, the Saṃhitā text would fill an octavo volume of about 600 pages of thirty-three lines each. It has been calculated that in bulk the RV. is equivalent to the extant poems of Homer.

There is a twofold division of the RV. into parts. One, which is purely mechanical, is into Aṣṭakas or ‘eighths’ of about equal length, each of which is subdivided into eight Adhyāyas or ‘lessons’, while each of the latter consists of Vargas or ‘groups’ of five or six stanzas. The other division is into ten Maṇḍalas or ‘books’ (lit. ‘cycles’) and Sūktas or ‘hymns’. The latter method is an historical one, indicating the manner in which the collection came into being. This system is now invariably followed by Western Scholars in referring to or quoting from the Rigveda.

4.: Arrangement of the Rigveda.

Six of the ten books, ii to vii, are homogeneous in character. The hymns contained in each of them were, according to native Indian tradition, composed or ‘seen’ by poets of the same family, which handed them down as its own collection. The tradition is borne out by the internal evidence of the seers’ names mentioned in the hymns, and by that of the refrains occurring in each of these books. The method of arrangement followed in the ‘family books’ is uniform; for each of them is similarly divided into groups addressed to different gods. On the other hand, Books i, viii, and x were not composed each by a distinct family of seers, while the groups of which they consist are constituted by being the hymns composed by different individual seers. Book ix is distinguished from the rest by all its hymns being addressed to one and the same deity, Soma, and by its groups being based not on identity of authorship, but of metre.

Family books. —In these the first group of hymns is invariably addressed to Agni, the second to Indra, and those that follow to gods of less importance. The hymns within these deity groups are arranged according to the diminishing number of stanzas contained in them. Thus in the second Book the Agni group of ten hymns begins with one of sixteen stanzas and ends with one of only six. The first hymn of the next group in the same book has twenty-one, the last only four stanzas. The entire group of the family books is, moreover, arranged according to the increasing number of the hymns in each of those books, if allowance is made for later additions. Thus the second Book has forty-three, the third sixty-two, the sixth seventy-five, and the seventh one hundred and four hymns. The homogeneity of the family books renders it highly probable that they formed the nucleus of the RV., which gradually assumed its final shape by successive additions to these books.

The earliest of these additions appears to be the second half of Book i, which, consisting of nine groups, each by a different author, was prefixed to the family books, the internal arrangement of which it follows. The eighth is like the family books as being in the main composed by members of one family, the Kaṇvas; but it differs from them in not beginning with hymns to Agni and in the prevalence of the strophic metre called Pragātha. The fact of its containing fewer hymns than the seventh book shows that it did not form a unit of the family books; but its partial resemblance to them caused it to be the first addition at the end of that collection. The first part of Book i (1-50) is in several respects like Book viii: Kaṇvas seem to have been the authors of the majority of these hymns; their favourite strophic metre is again found here; and both collections contain many similar or identical passages. There must have been some difference between the two groups, but the reason why they should have been separated by being added at the beginning and the end of an older collection has not yet been shown.

The ninth book was added as a consequence of the first eight being formed into a unit. It consists entirely of hymns addressed to Soma while the juice was ‘clarifying’ (pavamāna); on the other hand, the family books contain not a single Soma hymn, and Books i and viii together only three hymns invoking Soma in his general character. Now the hymns of Book ix were composed by authors of the same families as those of Books ii to vii, as is shown, for instance, by the appearance here of refrains peculiar to those families. Hence it is to be assumed that all the hymns to Soma Pavamāna were removed from Books i to viii, in order to form a single collection belonging to the sphere of the Udgātṛ or chanting priest, and added after Books i-viii, which were the sphere of the Hotṛ or reciting priest. The diction and recondite allusions in the hymns of this book suggest that they are later than those of the preceding books; but some of them may be early, as accompanying the Soma ritual which goes back to the Indo-Iranian period. The hymns of the first part of this book (1-60) are arranged according to the decreasing number of their stanzas, beginning with ten and ending with four. In the second part (61-114) , which contains some very long hymns (one of forty-eight and another of fifty-eight stanzas), this arrangement is not followed. The two parts also differ in metre: the hymns of the first are, excepting four stanzas, composed in Gāyatrī, while the second consists mainly of groups in other metres; thus 68-84 form a Jagatī and 87-97 a Triṣṭubh group.

The tenth book was the final addition. Its language and subject-matter show that it is later in origin than the other books; its authors were, moreover, clearly familiar with them. Both its position at the end of the RV. and the fact that the number of its hymns (191) is made up to that of the first book indicate its supplementary character. Its hymns were composed by a large number of seers of different families, some of which appear in other books; but the traditional attribution of authorship is of little or no value in the case of a great many hymns. In spite of its generally more modern character, it contains some hymns quite as old and poetic as the average of those in other books. These perhaps found a place here because for some reason they had been overlooked while the other collections were being formed. As regards language, we find in the tenth book earlier grammatical forms and words growing obsolete, while new words and meanings begin to emerge. As to matter, a tendency to abstract ideas and philosophical speculation, as well as the introduction of magical conceptions, such as belong to the sphere of the Atharvaveda, is here found to prevail.

5.: Language.

The hymns of the RV. are composed in the earliest stage of that literary language of which the latest, or Classical Sanskrit, was stereotyped by the grammar of Pāṇini at the end of the fourth century bc It differs from the latter about as much as Homeric from Attic Greek. It exhibits a much greater variety of forms than Sanskrit does. Its case-forms both in nominal and pronominal inflexion are more numerous. It has more participles and gerunds. It is, however, in verbal forms that its comparative richness is most apparent. Thus the RV. very frequently uses the subjunctive, which as such has entirely died out in Sanskrit; it has twelve forms of the infinitive, while only a single one of these has survived in Sanskrit. The language of the RV. also differs from Sanskrit in its accent, which, like that of ancient Greek, is of a musical nature, depending on the pitch of the voice, and is marked throughout the hymns. This accent has in Sanskrit been changed not only to a stress accent, but has shifted its position as depending on quantity, and is no longer marked. The Vedic accent occupies a very important position in Comparative Philology, while the Sanskrit accent, being secondary, has no value of this kind.

The Sandhi of the RV. represents an earlier and a less conventional stage than that of Sanskrit. Thus the insertion of a sibilant between final n and a hard palatal or dental is in the RV. restricted to cases where it is historically justified; in Sanskrit it has become universal, being extended to cases where it has no justification. After e and o in the RV. ă is nearly always pronounced, while in Sanskrit it is invariably dropped. It may thus be affirmed with certainty that no student can understand Sanskrit historically without knowing the language of the RV.

6.: Metre.

The hymns of the RV. are without exception metrical. They contain on the average ten stanzas, generally of four verses or lines, but also of three and sometimes five. The line, which is called Pāda (‘quarter’) and forms the metrical unit, usually consists of eight, eleven, or twelve syllables. A stanza is, as a rule, made up of lines of the same type; but some of the rarer kinds of stanza are formed by combining lines of different length. There are about fifteen metres, but only about seven of these are at all common. By far the most common are the Triṣṭubh (4 × 11 syllables), the Gāyatrī (3 × 8), and the Jagatī (4 × 12), which together furnish two-thirds of the total number of stanzas in the RV. The Vedic metres, which are the foundation of the Classical Sanskrit metres except two, have a quantitative rhythm in which short and long syllables alternate and which is of a generally iambic type. It is only the rhythm of the last four or five syllables (called the cadence) of the line that is rigidly determined, and the lines of eleven and twelve syllables have a caesura as well. In their structure the Vedic metres thus come half way between the metres of the Indo-Iranian period, in which, as the Avesta shows, the principle is the number of syllables only, and those of Classical Sanskrit, in which (except the śloka) the quantity of every single syllable in the line is fixed. Usually a hymn of the Rigveda consists of stanzas in the same metre throughout; a typical divergence from this rule is to mark the conclusion of a hymn with a stanza in a different metre. Some hymns are strophic in their construction. The strophes in them consist either of three stanzas (called tṛca) in the same simple metre, generally Gāyatrī, or of two stanzas in different mixed metres. The latter type of strophe is called Pragātha and is found chiefly in the eighth book.

7.: Religion of the Rigveda.

This is concerned with the worship of gods that are largely personifications of the powers of nature. The hymns are mainly invocations of these gods, and are meant to accompany the oblation of Soma juice and the fire sacrifice of melted butter. It is thus essentially a polytheistic religion, which assumes a pantheistic colouring only in a few of its latest hymns. The gods are usually stated in the RV. to be thirty-three in number, being divided into three groups of eleven distributed in earth, air, and heaven, the three divisions of the Universe. Troops of deities, such as the Maruts, are of course not included in this number. The gods were believed to have had a beginning. But they were not thought to have all come into being at the same time; for the RV. occasionally refers to earlier gods, and certain deities are described as the offspring of others. That they were considered to have been originally mortal is implied in the statement that they acquired immortality by drinking Soma or by receiving it as a gift from Agni and Savitṛ.

The gods were conceived as human in appearance. Their bodily parts, which are frequently mentioned, are in many instances simply figurative illustrations of the phenomena of nature represented by them. Thus the arms of the Sun are nothing more than his rays; and the tongue and limbs of Agni merely denote his flames. Some of the gods appear equipped as warriors, especially Indra, others are described as priests, especially Agni and Bṛhaspati. All of them drive through the air in cars, drawn chiefly by steeds, but sometimes by other animals. The favourite food of men is also that of the gods, consisting in milk, butter, grain, and the flesh of sheep, goats, and cattle. It is offered to them in the sacrifice, which is either conveyed to them in heaven by the god of fire, or which they come in their cars to partake of on the strew of grass prepared for their reception. Their favourite drink is the exhilarating juice of the Soma plant. The home of the gods is heaven, the third heaven, or the highest step of Viṣṇu, where cheered by draughts of Soma they live a life of bliss.

Attributes of the gods. —Among these the most prominent is power, for they are constantly described as great and mighty. They regulate the order of nature and vanquish the potent powers of evil. They hold sway over all creatures; no one can thwart their ordinances or live beyond the time they appoint; and the fulfilment of desires is dependent on them. They are benevolent beings who bestow prosperity on mankind; the only one in whom injurious traits appear being Rudra. They are described as ‘true’ and ‘not deceitful’, being friends and protectors of the honest and righteous, but punishing sin and guilt. Since in most cases the gods of the RV. have not yet become dissociated from the physical phenomena which they represent, their figures are indefinite in outline and deficient in individuality. Having many features, such as power, brilliance, benevolence, and wisdom in common with others, each god exhibits but very few distinctive attributes. This vagueness is further increased by the practice of invoking deities in pairs—a practice making both gods share characteristics properly belonging to one alone. When nearly every power can thus be ascribed to every god, the identification of one deity with another becomes easy. There are in fact several such identifications in the RV. The idea is even found in more than one late passage that various deities are but different forms of a single divine being. This idea, however, never developed into monotheism, for none of the regular sacrifices in the Vedic period were offered to a single god. Finally, in other late hymns of the RV. we find the deities Aditi and Prajāpati identified not only with all the gods, but with nature as well. This brings us to that pantheism which became characteristic of later Indian thought in the form of the Vedānta philosophy.

The Vedic gods may most conveniently be classified as deities of heaven, air, and earth, according to the threefold division suggested by the RV. itself. The celestial gods are Dyaus, Varuṇa, Mitra, Sūrya, Savitṛ, Pūṣan, the Aśvins, and the goddesses Uṣas, Dawn, and Rātrī, Night. The atmospheric gods are Indra, Apāṃ napāt, Rudra, the Maruts, Vāyu, Parjanya, and Āpas, the Waters. The terrestrial deities are Pṛthivī, Agni, and Soma. This Reader contains hymns addressed to all these gods, with detailed introductions describing their characters in the words, as far as is possible, of the RV. itself. A few quite subordinate deities are not included, partly because no entire hymn is addressed to them. Two such belong to the celestial sphere. Trita, a somewhat obscure god, who is mentioned only in detached stanzas of the RV., comes down from the Indo-Iranian period. He seems to represent the ‘third’ or lightning form of fire. Similar in origin to Indra, he was ousted by the latter at an early period. Mātariśvan is a divine being also referred to only in scattered stanzas of the RV. He is described as having brought down the hidden fire from heaven to men on earth, like the Prometheus of Greek mythology. Among the terrestrial deities are certain rivers that are personified and invoked in the RV. Thus the Sindhu (Indus) is celebrated as a goddess in one hymn (x. 75, 2. 4. 6) , and the Vipāś (Bïas) and the Śutudrī (Sutlej), sister streams of the Panjāb, in another (iii. 33) . The most important and oftenest lauded is, however, the Sarasvatī (vi. 61; vii. 95) . Though the personification goes much further here than in the case of other streams, the connexion of the goddess with the river is never lost sight of in the RV.

Abstract deities. —One result of the advance of thought during the period of the RV. from the concrete towards the abstract was the rise of abstract deities. The earlier and more numerous class of these seems to have started from epithets which were applicable to one or more older deities, but which came to acquire an independent value as the want of a god exercising the particular activity in question began to be felt. We find here names denoting either an agent (formed with the suffix tṛ or tar), such as Dhātṛ ‘Creator’, or an attribute, such as Prajāpati, ‘Lord of Creatures’. Thus Dhātṛ, otherwise an epithet of Indra, appears also as an independent deity who creates heaven and earth, sun and moon. More rarely occur Vidhātṛ, the ‘Disposer’, Dhartṛ, the ‘Supporter’, Trātṛ, the ‘Protector’, and Netṛ, the ‘Leader’. The only agent god mentioned at all frequently in the RV. is Tvaṣṭṛ, the ‘Artificer’, though no entire hymn is addressed to him. He is the most skilful of workmen, having among other things fashioned the bolt of Indra and a new drinking-cup for the gods. He is a guardian of Soma, which is called the ‘food of Tvaṣṭṛ’, and which Indra drinks in Tvaṣṭṛ’s house. He is the father of Saraṇyū, wife of Vivasvant and mother of the primaeval twins Yama and Yamī. The name of the solar deity Savitṛ, the ‘Stimulator’, belongs to this class of agent gods (cf. p. 11) .

There are a few other abstract deities whose names were originally epithets of older gods, but now become epithets of the supreme god who was being evolved at the end of the Rigvedic period. These appellations, compound in form, are of rare and late occurrence. The most important is Prajāpati, ‘Lord of Creatures’. Originally an epithet of such gods as Savitṛ and Soma, this name is employed in a late verse of the tenth book to designate a distinct deity in the character of a Creator. Similarly, the epithet Viśvakarman, ‘all-creating’, appears as the name of an independent deity to whom two hymns (x. 81. 82) are addressed. Hiraṇyagarbha, the ‘Golden Germ’, once occurs as the name of the supreme god described as the ‘one lord of all that exists’. In one curious instance it is possible to watch the rise of an abstract deity of this type. The refrain of a late hymn of the RV. (x. 121) is kásmai devá̄ya havíṣā vidhema? ‘to what god should we pay worship with oblation?’ This led to the word ká, ‘who?’ being used in the later Vedic literature as an independent name, Ka, of the supreme god. The only abstract deity of this type occurring in the oldest as well as the latest parts of the RV. is Bṛhaspati (p. 83) .

The second and smaller class of abstract deities comprises personifications of abstract nouns. There are seven or eight of these occurring in the tenth book. Two hymns (83. 84) are addressed to Manyu, ‘Wrath’, and one (x. 151) to Śraddhā, ‘Faith’. Anumati, ‘Favour (of the gods)’, Aramati, ‘Devotion’, Sūnṛtā, ‘Bounty’, Asunīti, ‘Spirit-life’, and Nirṛti, ‘Decease’, occur only in a few isolated passages.

A purely abstract deity, often incidentally celebrated throughout the RV. is A-diti, ‘Liberation’, ‘Freedom’ (lit. ‘un-binding’), whose main characteristic is the power of delivering from the bonds of physical suffering and moral guilt. She, however, occupies a unique position among the abstract deities, owing to the peculiar way in which the personification seems to have arisen. She is the mother of the small group of deities called Ādityas, often styled ‘sons of Aditi’. This expression at first most probably meant nothing more than ‘sons of liberation’, according to an idiom common in the RV. and elsewhere. The word was then personified, with the curious result that the mother is mythologically younger than some at least of her sons, who (for instance Mitra) date from the Indo-Iranian period. The goddess Diti, named only three times in the RV., probably came into being as an antithesis to Aditi, with whom she is twice mentioned.

Goddesses play an insignificant part in the RV. The only one of importance is Uṣas (p. 92) . Next come Sarasvatī, celebrated in two whole hymns (vi. 61 ; vii. 95 ) as well as parts of others, and Vāc, ‘Speech’ (x. 71. 125) . With one hymn each are addressed Pṛthivī, ‘Earth’ (v. 84) , Rātrī, ‘Night’ (x. 127 , p. 203 ), and Araṇyānī, ‘Goddess of the Forest’ (x. 146) . Others are only sporadically mentioned. The wives of the great gods are still more insignificant, being mere names formed from those of their consorts, and altogether lacking in individuality: such are Agnāyī, Indrāṇī, Varuṇānī, spouses of Agni, Indra, and Varuṇa respectively.

Dual Divinities. —A peculiar feature of the religion of the RV. is the invocation of pairs of deities whose names are combined as compounds, each member of which is in the dual. About a dozen such pairs are celebrated in entire hymns, and about a dozen more in detached stanzas. By far the largest number of hymns is addressed to the couple Mitrā-Varuṇā, though the names most frequently found as dual compounds are those of Dyāvā-pṛthivī, ‘Heaven and Earth’ (p. 36) . The latter pair, having been associated as universal parents from the Indo-European period onwards, in all probability furnished the analogy for this dual type.

Groups of Deities. —There are also a few more or less definite groups of deities, generally associated with some particular god. The Maruts (p. 21) , who attend on Indra, are the most numerous group. The smaller group of the Ādityas, of whom Varuṇa is the chief, is constantly mentioned in company with their mother Aditi. Their number is stated in the RV. to be seven or, with the addition of Mārtāṇḍa, eight. One passage (ii. 27, 1) enumerates six of them, Mitra, Aryaman, Bhaga, Varuṇa, Dakṣa, Aṃśa: Sūrya was probably regarded as the seventh. A much less important group, without individual names or definite number, is that of the Vasus, whose leader is generally Indra. There are, finally, the Viśve devās (p. 147) , who, invoked in many hymns, form a comprehensive group, which in spite of its name is, strange to say, sometimes conceived as a narrower group associated with others like the Vasus and Ādityas.

Lesser Divinities. —Besides the higher gods, a number of lesser divine powers are known to the RV. The most prominent of these are the Ṛbhus, who are celebrated in eleven hymns. They are a deft-handed trio, who by their marvellous skill acquired the rank of deities. Among their five main feats of dexterity the greatest consisted in transforming the bowl of Tvaṣṭṛ into four shining cups. The bowl and the cups have been variously interpreted as the moon with its four phases or the year with its seasons. The Ṛbhus further exhibited their skill in renewing the youth of their parents, by whom Heaven and Earth seem to have been meant.

Occasional mention is made in the RV. of an Apsaras, a celestial water-nymph, the spouse of a corresponding genius named Gandharva. In a few passages more Apsarases than one are spoken of; but the only one mentioned by name is Urvaśī. Gandharva is in the RV. a single being (like the Gandarewa of the Avesta), who dwells in the aerial sphere, guards the celestial Soma, and is (as in the Avesta) connected with the waters.

There are, lastly, a few divinities of the tutelary order, guardians watching over the welfare of house or field. Such is the rarely mentioned Vāstoṣpati, ‘Lord of the Dwelling’, who is invoked to grant a favourable entry, to remove disease, and to bestow protection and prosperity. Kṣetrasya pati, ‘Lord of the Field’, is besought to grant cattle and horses and to confer welfare. Sītā, the ‘Furrow’, is once invoked to dispense crops and rich blessings.

In addition to the great phenomena of nature, various features of the earth’s surface as well as artificial objects are to be found deified in the RV. Thus besides Rivers and Waters (p. 115) , already mentioned as terrestrial goddesses, mountains are often addressed as divinities, but only along with other natural objects, or in association with gods. Plants are regarded as divine powers, one entire hymn (x. 97) being devoted to their praise, chiefly with reference to their healing properties. Sacrificial implements, moreover, are deified. The most important of these is the sacrificial post which is praised and invoked in a whole hymn (iii. 8) . The sacrificial grass (barhis) and the Divine Doors (dvāro devīḥ), which lead to the place of sacrifice, are addressed as goddesses. The pressing stones (grāvāṇas) are invoked as deities in three hymns (x. 76. 94. 175) : spoken of as immortal, unaging, mightier than heaven, they are besought to drive away demons and destruction. The Mortar and Pestle used in pounding the Soma plant are also invoked in the RV. (i. 28, 5. 6) . Weapons, finally, are sometimes deified: armour, bow, quiver, arrows, and drum being addressed in one of the hymns (vi. 75) .

The Demons often mentioned in the hymns are of two kinds. The higher and more powerful class are the aerial foes of the gods. These are seldom called asura in the RV., where in the older parts that word means a divine being, like ahura in the Avesta (cf. p. 134) . The term dāsa or dasyu, properly the name of the dark aborigines, is frequently used in the sense of fiend to designate the aerial demons. The conflict is regularly one between a single god and a single demon, as exemplified by Indra and Vṛtra. The latter is by far the most frequently mentioned. His mother being called Dānu, he is sometimes alluded to by the metronymic term Dānava. Another powerful demon is Vala, the personified cave of the cows, which he guards, and which are set free by Indra and his allies, notably the Angirases. Other demon adversaries of Indra are Arbuda, described as a wily beast, whose cows Indra drove out; Viśvarūpa, son of Tvaṣṭṛ, a three-headed demon slain by both Trita and Indra, who seize his cows; and Svarbhānu, who eclipses the sun. There are several other individual demons, generally described as Dāsas and slain by Indra. A group of demons are the Paṇis (‘niggards’), primarily foes of Indra, who, with the aid of the dog Saramā, tracks and releases the cows hidden by them.

The second or lower class of demons are terrestrial goblins, enemies of men. By far the most common generic name for them is Rakṣas. They are nearly always mentioned in connexion with some god who destroys them. The much less common term Yātu or Yātudhāna (primarily ‘sorcerer’) alternates with Rakṣas. and perhaps expresses a species. A class of demons scarcely referred to in the RV., but often mentioned in the later Vedas, are the Piśācas, eaters of raw flesh or of corpses.

Not more than thirty hymns are concerned with subjects other than the worship of gods or deified objects. About a dozen of these, almost entirely confined to the tenth book, deal with magical practices, which properly belong to the sphere of the Atharvaveda. Their contents are augury (ii. 42. 43) or spells directed against poisonous vermin (i. 191) or disease (x. 163) , against a demon destructive of children (x. 162) , or enemies (x. 166) , or rival wives (x. 145) . A few are incantations to preserve life (x. 58. 60) , or to induce sleep (v. 55) , or to procure offspring (x. 183) ; while one is a panegyric of frogs as magical bringers of rain (vii. 103 , p. 141 ).

8.: Secular Matter in the Rigveda.

Secular hymns. —Hardly a score of the hymns are secular poems. These are especially valuable as throwing direct light on the earliest thought and civilization of India. One of the most noteworthy of them is the long wedding hymn (x. 85) . There are also five funeral hymns (x. 14-18) . Four of these are addressed to deities concerned with the future life; the last, however, is quite secular in tone, and gives more information than any of the rest about the funeral customs of early Vedic India (cf. p. 164) .

Mythological dialogues. —Besides several mythological dialogues in which the speakers are divine beings (iv. 62 ; x. 51. 52. 86. 108 ), there are two in which both agents are human. One is a somewhat obscure colloquy (x. 95) between a mortal lover Purūravas and the celestial nymph Urvaśī, who is on the point of forsaking him. It is the earliest form of the story which much more than a thousand years later formed the subject of Kālidāsa’s drama Vikramorvaśī. The other (x. 10) is a dialogue between Yama and Yamī, the twin parents of the human race. This group of hymns has a special literary interest as foreshadowing the dramatic works of a later age.

Didactic hymns. —Four hymns are of a didactic character. One of these (x. 34) is a striking poem, being a monologue in which a gambler laments the misery he has brought on himself and his home by his inability to resist the attraction of the dice. The rest which describe the various ways in which men follow gain (ix. 112) , or praise wise speech (x. 71) , or the value of good deeds (x. 117) , anticipate the sententious poetry for which post-Vedic literature is noted.

Riddles. —Two of the hymns consist of riddles. One of these (viii. 29 , p. 147 ) describes various gods without mentioning their names. More elaborate and obscure is a long poem of fifty-two stanzas (i. 164) , in which a number of enigmas, largely connected with the sun, are propounded in mystical and symbolic language. Thus the wheel of order with twelve spokes, revolving round the heavens, and containing within it in couples 720 sons, means the year with its twelve months and 360 days and 360 nights.

Cosmogonic hymns. —About half a dozen hymns consist of speculations on the origin of the world through the agency of a Creator (called by various names) as distinct from any of the ordinary gods. One of them (x. 129 , p. 207 ), which describes the world as due to the development of the existent (sat) from the non-existent (a-sat), is particularly interesting as the starting-point of the evolutional philosophy which in later times assumed shape in the Sāṇkhya system.

A semi-historical character attaches to one complete hymn (i. 126) and to appendages of 3 to 5 stanzas attached to over thirty others, which are called Dānastutis, or ‘praises of gifts’. These are panegyrics of liberal patrons on behalf of whom the seers composed their hymns. They yield incidental genealogical information about the poets and their employers, as well as about the names and the habitat of the Vedic tribes. They are late in date, appearing chiefly in the first and tenth, as well as among the supplementary hymns of the eighth book.

Geographical data. —From the geographical data of the RV., especially the numerous rivers there mentioned, it is to be inferred that the Indo-Aryan tribes when the hymns were composed occupied the territory roughly corresponding to the north-west Frontier Province, and the Panjāb of to-day. The references to flora and fauna bear out this conclusion.

The historical data of the hymns show that the Indo-Aryans were still engaged in war with the aborigines, many victories over these foes being mentioned. That they were still moving forward as conquerors is indicated by references to rivers as obstacles to advance. Though divided into many tribes, they were conscious of religious and racial unity, contrasting the aborigines with themselves by calling them non-sacrificers and unbelievers, as well as ‘black-skins’ and the ‘Dāsa colour’ as opposed to the ‘Āryan colour’.

Incidental references scattered throughout the hymns supply a good deal of information about the social conditions of the time. Thus it is clear that the family, with the father at its head, was the basis of society, and that women held a freer and more honoured position than in later times. Various crimes are mentioned, robbery, especially of cattle, apparently being the commonest. Debt, chiefly as a result of gambling, was known. Clothing consisted usually of an upper and a lower garment, which were made of sheep’s wool. Bracelets, anklets, necklaces, and earrings were worn as ornaments. Men usually grew beards, but sometimes shaved. Food mainly consisted of milk, clarified butter, grain, vegetables, and fruit. Meat was eaten only when animals were sacrificed. The commonest kind appears to have been beef, as bulls were the chief offerings to the gods. Two kinds of spirituous liquor were made: Soma was drunk at religious ceremonies only, while Surā, extracted from some kind of grain, was used on ordinary occasions.

Occupations. —One of the chief occupations of the Indo-Aryan was warfare. He fought either on foot or from a chariot, but there is no evidence to show that he ever did so on horseback. The ordinary weapons were bows and arrows, but spears and axes were also used. Cattle-breeding appears to have been the main source of livelihood, cows being the chief objects of desire in prayers to the gods. But agriculture was also practised to some extent: fields were furrowed with a plough drawn by bulls; corn was cut with sickles, being then threshed and winnowed. Wild animals were trapped and snared, or hunted with bows and arrows, occasionally with the aid of dogs. Boats propelled by paddles were employed, as it seems mainly for the purpose of crossing rivers. Trade was known only in the form of barter, the cow representing the unit of value in exchange. Certain trades and crafts already existed, though doubtless in a rudimentary stage. The occupations of the wheelwright and the carpenter were combined. The smith melted ore in a forge, and made kettles and other vessels of metal. The tanner prepared the skins of animals. Women plaited mats of grass or reeds, sewed, and especially wove, but whether they ever did so professionally is uncertain.

Amusements. —Among these chariot-racing was the favourite. The most popular social recreation was playing with dice (cp. p. 186) . Dancing was also practised, chiefly by women. The people were fond of music, the instruments used being the drum (dundubhi), the flute (vāṇa), and the lute (vīṇā). Singing is also mentioned.

9.: Literary merit of the Rigveda.

The diction of the hymns is on the whole natural and simple, free from the use of compounds of more than two members. Considering their great antiquity, the hymns are composed with a remarkable degree of metrical skill and command of language. But as they were produced by a sacerdotal class and were generally intended to accompany a ritual no longer primitive, their poetry is often impaired by constant sacrificial allusions. This is especially noticeable in the hymns addressed to the two ritual deities Agni and Soma, where the thought becomes affected by conceits and obscured by mysticism. Nevertheless the RV. contains much genuine poetry. As the gods are mostly connected with natural phenomena, the praises addressed to them give rise to much beautiful and even noble imagery. The degree of literary merit in different hymns naturally varies a good deal, but the average is remarkably high. The most poetical hymns are those addressed to Dawn, equal if not superior in beauty to the religious lyrics of any other literature. Some of the hymns to Indra show much graphic power in describing his conflict with the demon Vṛtra. The hymns to the Maruts, or Storm gods, often depict with vigorous imagery the phenomena of thunder and lightning, and the mighty onset of the wind. One hymn to Parjanya (v. 83) paints the devastating effects of the rain-storm with great vividness. The hymns in praise of Varuṇa describe the various aspects of his sway as moral ruler of the world in an exalted strain of poetry. Some of the mythological dialogues set forth the situation with much beauty of language; for example, the colloquy between Indra’s messenger Saramā and the demons who stole the cows (x. 108) , and that between the primaeval twins Yama and Yamī (x. 10) . The Gambler’s lament (x. 34) is a fine specimen of pathetic poetry. One of the funeral hymns (x. 18) expresses ideas connected with death in language of impressive and solemn beauty. One of the cosmogonic hymns (x. 129) illustrates how philosophical speculation can be clothed in poetry of no mean order.

10.: Interpretation.

In dealing with the hymns of the RV. the important question arises, to what extent are we able to understand their real sense, considering that they have come down to us as an isolated relic from the remotest period of Indian literature? The reply, stated generally, is that, as a result of the labours of Vedic scholars, the meaning of a considerable proportion of the RV. is clear, but of the remainder many hymns and a great many single stanzas or passages are still obscure or unintelligible. This was already the case in the time of Yāska, the author of the Nirukta, the oldest extant commentary ( c. 500 bc ) on about 600 detached stanzas of the RV.; for he quotes one of his predecessors, Kautsa, as saying that the Vedic hymns were obscure, unmeaning, and mutually contradictory.

In the earlier period of Vedic studies, commencing about the middle of the nineteenth century, the traditional method, which follows the great commentary of Sāyaṇa (fourteenth century a.c. ), and is represented by the translation of the RV., begun by H. H. Wilson in 1850, was considered adequate. It has since been proved that, though the native Indian commentators are invaluable guides in explaining the theological and ritual texts of the Brāhmaṇas and Sūtras, with the atmosphere of which they were familiar, they did not possess a continuous tradition from the time when the Vedic hymns were composed. That the gap between the poets and the interpreters even earlier than Yāska must have been considerable, is shown by the divergences of opinion among his predecessors as quoted by him. Thus one of these, Aurṇavābha, interprets nāsatyau, an epithet of the Aśvins, as ‘true, not false’, another Āgrāyaṇa, as ‘leaders of truth’ (satyasya praṇetārau), while Yāska himself thinks it may mean ‘nose-born’ (nāsikā-prabhavau)! Yāska, moreover, mentions several different schools of interpretation, each of which explained difficulties in accordance with its own particular theory. Yāska’s own interpretations, which in all cases of doubt are based on etymology, are evidently often merely conjectural, for he frequently gives several alternative explanations of a word. Thus he explains the epithet jātá-vedas in as many as five different ways. Yet he must have had more and better means of ascertaining the sense of various obscure words than Sāyaṇa who lived nearly 2,000 years later. Sāyaṇa’s interpretations, however, sometimes differ from those of Yāska. Hence either Yāska is wrong or Sāyaṇa does not follow the tradition. Again, Sāyaṇa often gives several inconsistent explanations of a word in interpreting the same passage or in commenting on the same word in different passages. Thus asura, ‘divine being’, is variously rendered by him as ‘expeller of foes’, ‘giver of strength’, ‘giver of life’, ‘hurler away of what is undesired’, ‘giver of breath or water’, ‘thrower of oblations, priest’, ‘taker away of breath’, ‘expeller of water, Parjanya’, ‘impeller’, ‘strong’, ‘wise’, and ‘rain-water’ or ‘a water-discharging cloud’! In short it is clear from a careful examination of their comments that neither Yāska nor Sāyaṇa possessed any certain knowledge about a large number of words in the RV. Hence their interpretations can be treated as decisive only if they are borne out by probability, by the context, and by parallel passages.

For the traditional method Roth, the founder of Vedic philology, substituted the critical method of interpreting the difficult parts of the RV. from internal evidence by the minute comparison of all words parallel in form and matter, while taking into consideration context, grammar, and etymology, without ignoring either the help supplied by the historical study of the Vedic language in its connexion with Sanskrit or the outside evidence derived from the Avesta and from Comparative Philology. In the application of his method Roth attached too much weight to etymological considerations, while he undervalued the evidence of native tradition. On the other hand, a reaction arose which, in emphasizing the purely Indian character of the Vedic hymns, connects the interpretation of them too closely with the literature of the post-Vedic period and the much more advanced civilization there described. It is important to note that the critical scholar has at his disposal not only all the material that was open to the traditional interpreters, and to which he is moreover able to apply the comparative and historical methods of research, but also possesses over and above many valuable aids that were unknown to the traditional school—the Avesta, Comparative Philology, Comparative Religion and Mythology, and Ethnology. The student will find in the notes of the Reader many exemplifications of the usefulness of these aids to interpretation. There is good reason to hope from the results already achieved that steady adherence to the critical method, by admitting all available evidence and by avoiding onesidedness in its application, will eventually clear up a large proportion of the obscurities and difficulties that still confront the interpreter of the Rigveda.

ERRATA

Vedic Hymns

AGNİ

As the personification of the sacrificial fire, Agni is second in importance to Indra (ii. 12) only, being addressed in at least 200 hymns. The anthropomorphism of his physical appearance is only rudimentary, and is connected chiefly with the sacrificial aspect of fire. Thus he is butter-backed, flame-haired, and has a tawny beard, sharp jaws, and golden teeth. Mention is often made of his tongue, with which the gods eat the oblation. With a burning head he faces in all directions.

He is compared with various animals: he resembles a bull that bellows, and has horns which he sharpens; when born he is often called a calf; he is kindled like a horse that brings the gods, and is yoked to convey the sacrifice to them. He is also a divine bird; he is the eagle of the sky; as dwelling in the waters he is like a goose; he is winged, and he takes possession of the wood as a bird perches on a tree.

Wood or ghee is his food, melted butter his beverage; and he is nourished three times a day. He is the mouth by which the gods eat the sacrifice; and his flames are spoons with which he besprinkles the gods; but he is also asked to consume the offerings himself. He is sometimes, though then nearly always with other gods, invited to drink the Soma juice.

His brightness is much dwelt upon: he shines like the sun; his lustre is like the rays of the dawn and the sun, and like the lightnings of the rain-cloud. He shines even at night, and dispels the darkness with his beams. On the other hand, his path is black when he invades the forests and shaves the earth as a barber a beard. His flames are like roaring waves, and his sound is like the thunder of heaven. His red smoke rises up to the firmament; like the erector of a post he supports the sky with his smoke. ‘Smoke-bannered’ (dhūmá-ketu) is his frequent and exclusive epithet.

He has a shining, golden, lightning car, drawn by two or more ruddy and tawny steeds. He is a charioteer of the sacrifice, and with his steeds he brings the gods on his car.

He is the child of Heaven (Dyáus), and is often called the son of Heaven and Earth (i. 160) . He is also the offspring of the waters. The gods generated him as a light for the Āryan or for man, and placed him among men. Indra is called Agni’s twin brother, and is more closely associated with him than any other god.

The mythology of Agni, apart from his sacrificial activity, is mainly concerned with his various births, forms, and abodes. Mention is often made of his daily production from the two kindling sticks (aráṇīs), which are his parents or his mothers. From the dry wood Agni is born living; as soon as born the child devours his parents. By the ten maidens that produce him are meant the ten fingers of the kindler. Owing to the force required to kindle Agni he is often called ‘son of strength’ (sáhasaḥ sūnúḥ). Being produced every morning he is young; at the same time no sacrificer is older than Agni, for he conducted the first sacrifice. Again, Agni’s origin in the aerial waters is often referred to: he is an embryo of the waters; he is kindled in the waters; he is a bull that has grown in the lap of the waters. As the ‘son of Waters’ (ii. 35) he has become a separate deity. He is also sometimes conceived as latent in terrestrial waters. This notion of Agni in the waters is a prominent one in the RV. Thirdly, a celestial origin of Agni is often mentioned: he is born in the highest heaven, and was brought down from heaven by Mātariśvan, the Indian Prometheus; and the acquisition of fire by man is regarded as a gift of the gods as well as a production of Mātariśvan. The Sun (vii. 63) is further regarded as a form of Agni. Thus Agni is the light of heaven in the bright sky; he was born on the other side of the air and sees all things; he is born as the sun rising in the morning. Hence Agni comes to have a triple character. His births are three or threefold; the gods made him threefold; he is threefold light; he has three heads, three bodies, three stations. This threefold nature of Agni is clearly recognized in the RV., and represents the earliest Indian trinity.

The universe being also regarded as divided into the two divisions of heaven and earth, Agni is sometimes said to have two origins, and indeed exclusively bears the epithet dvi-jánman having two births. As being kindled in numerous dwellings Agni is also said to have many births.

Agni is more closely associated with human life than any other deity. He is the only god called gṛhá-pati lord of the house, and is constantly spoken of as a guest (átithi) in human dwellings. He is an immortal who has taken up his abode among mortals. Thus he comes to be termed the nearest kinsman of men. He is oftenest described as a father, sometimes also as a brother or even as a son of his worshippers. He both takes the offerings of men to the gods and brings the gods to the sacrifice. He is thus characteristically a messenger (dūtá) appointed by gods and by men to be an ‘oblation-bearer’.

As the centre of the sacrifice he comes to be celebrated as the divine counterpart of the earthly priesthood. Hence he is often called priest (ṛtvíj, vípra), domestic priest (puróhita), and more often than by any other name invoking priest (hótṛ), also officiating priest (adhvaryú) and praying priest (brahmán). His priesthood is the most salient feature of his character; he is in fact the great priest, as Indra is the great warrior.

Agni’s wisdom is often dwelt upon. As knowing all the details of sacrifice, he is wise and all-knowing, and is exclusively called jātá-vedas he who knows all created beings.

He is a great benefactor of his worshippers, protecting and delivering them, and bestowing on them all kinds of boons, but pre-eminently domestic welfare, offspring, and prosperity.

His greatness is often lauded, and is once even said to surpass that of the other gods. His cosmic and creative powers are also frequently praised.

From the ordinary sacrificial Agni who conveys the offering (havya-vá̄hana) is distinguished his corpse-devouring (kravyá̄d) form that burns the body on the funeral pyre (x. 14) . Another function of Agni is to burn and dispel evil spirits and hostile magic.

The sacrificial fire was already in the Indo-Iranian period the centre of a developed ritual, and was personified and worshipped as a mighty, wise, and beneficent god. It seems to have been an Indo-European institution also, since the Italians and Greeks, as well as the Indians and Iranians, had the custom of offering gifts to the gods in fire. But whether it was already personified in that remote period is a matter of conjecture.

The name of Agni (Lat. igni-s, Slavonic ogni ) is Indo-European, and may originally have meant the ‘agile’ as derived from the root ag to drive (Lat. ago, Gk. ἄγω, Skt. ájāmi).

Rigveda i. 1.

The metre of this hymn is Gāyatrī (p. 438) in which nearly one-fourth of the RV. is composed. It consists of three octosyllabic verses identical in construction, each of which, when normal, ends with two iambics (ᴗ–ᴗ bhalfOoverdash ). The first two verses are in the Saṃhitā treated as a hemistich; but there is no reason to suppose that in the original text the second verse was more sharply divided from the third than from the first.

See Page Number 3, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 Agním īḷe puróhitaṃ,

yajñásya devám ṛtvíjam,

hotāraṃ ratnadhá̄tamam.

I magnify Agni the domestic priest, the divine ministrant of the sacrifice, the invoker, best bestower of treasure.

On the marking of the accent in the RV. see p. 448, 2. The verb īḷe (1. s. pr. Ā. of īḍ: ḷ for ḍ between vowels, p. 3, f. n. 2) has no Udātta because it is in a principal sentence and does not begin a sentence or Pāda (p. 466, 19 A.) ; its first syllable bears the dependent Svarita which follows the Udātta of the preceding syllable (p. 448, 1) . puró-hitam has the accent of a Karmadhāraya when the last member is a pp. (p. 456, top) . yajñásya is to be taken with ṛtvíjam (not with puróhitam according to Sāyaṇa), both because the genitive normally precedes the noun that governs it (p. 285 e ) , and because it is in the same Pāda; cp. RV. viii. 38, 1; yajñásya hí sthá ṛtvíjā ye two (Indra-Agni) are ministrants of the sacrifice. The dependent Svarita which the first syllable of ṛtvíjam would otherwise bear (like īḷe), disappears because this syllable must be marked with the Anudātta that precedes an Udātta. ṛtv-íj though etymologically a compound (ṛtu + ij = yaj) is not analysed in the Pada text, because the second member does not occur as an independent word; cp. x. 2, 5: agnír devá̄ṁ̆ ṛtuśó yajāti may Agni sacrifice to the gods according to the seasons. ratna-dhá̄-tama (with the ordinary Tp. accent: p. 456, 2): the Pada text never divides a cd. into more than two members. The suffix tama, which the Pada treats as equivalent to a final member of a cd., is here regarded as forming a unit with dhā; cp. on the other hand virá-vat + tama in 3 c and citrá-śravas + tama in 5 b. rátna never means jewel in the RV.

See Page Number 4, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 Agníḥ pú̄rvebhir ṛ́ṣibhir

í̄ḷio nú̄tanair utá,

sá devá̄ṁ̆ éhá vakṣati.

Agni to be magnified by past and present seers, may he conduct the gods here.

ṛ́ṣibhis: The declensional endings bhyām, bhis, bhyas, su are in the Pada text treated like final members of compounds and separated, but not when the pure stem, as in the a dec., is modified in the preceding member; hence pú̄rvebhis (p. 77 , note 9 ) is not analysed. í̄ḍyas: to be read as í̄ḷias (p. 16, 2 d ) . nú̄tanais: note that the two forms of the inst. pl. of the a dec. in ais and ebhis constantly occur in the same stanza. sá (49) being unmarked at the beginning of a Pāda, has the Udātta; the dependent Svarita of the following syllable disappears before the Anudātta required to indicate the following Udātta of vá̄ṁ̆ (Sandhi, see 39). This Anudātta and the Svarita of vàkṣati show that all the intervening unmarked syllables vá̄ṁ̆ éhá have the Udātta. All the unaccented syllables following a Svarita (till the Anudātta preceding an Udātta) remain unmarked; hence the last two syllables of vàkṣati are unmarked; but in the Pada text every syllable of a word which has no Udātta is marked with the Anudātta; thus vākṣātī. The latter word is the s ao. sb. of vah carry for vah-s-a-ti (143, 2 ; 69 a ). In á̄ ihá vakṣati, the prp. because it is in a principal sentence is uncompounded and accented (p. 468, 20) , besides as very often being separated from the verb by another word. The verb vah is constantly connected with Agni, who conveys the sacrifice and brings the gods. Syntactically the first hemistich is equivalent to a rel. clause, sá being the correlative (cp. p. 294 a ) . The gerundive í̄ḍyas strictly speaking belongs in sense to nú̄tanais, but is loosely construed with pú̄rvebhis also, meaning ‘is to be magnified by present seers and (was) to be magnified by past seers’. The pcl. utá and (p. 222) is always significant in the RV.

See Page Number 5, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 Agnínā rayím aśnavat

póṣam evá divé-dive,

yaśásaṃ vīrávattamam.

Through Agni may one obtain wealth day by day (and) prosperity, glorious (and) most abounding in heroes.

aśnav-a-t: sb. pr. of aṃś attain, 3. s. ind. pr. aśnóti (cp. p. 134) ; the prn. ‘he’ inherent in the 3. s. of the vb. is here used in the indefinite sense of ‘one’, as so often in the 3. s. op. in classical Sanskrit. rayím, póṣam: co-ordinate nouns are constantly used in the RV. without the conjunction ca. divé-dive: this is one of the numerous itv. compounds found in the RV., which are always accented on the first member only, and are analysed in the Pada text like other compounds (189 C a ) . yaśásam: this is one of the few adjectives ending in -ás that occur in the RV.; the corresponding n. substantives are accented on the first syllable, as yáś-as fame (83, 2 a; 182 , p. 256 ). vīrá-vat-tamam: both the suffix vant (p. 264 , cp. 185 a ) and the superlative suffix tama are treated in the Pada text like final members of a cd.; ví̄rávant being here regarded as a unit, it is treated as the first member in the analysis (cp. note on ratna-dhá̄tama in 1 c). In these two adjectives we again have co-ordination without the connecting pcl. ca. Their exact meaning is ‘causing fame’ and ‘produced by many heroic sons’, fame and brave fighters being constantly prayed for in the hymns.

See Page Number 6, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 Ágne, yáṃ yajñám adhvaráṃ

viśvátaḥ paribhú̄r ási,

sá íd devéṣu gachati.

O Agni, the worship and sacrifice that thou encompassest on every side, that same goes to the gods.

yajñám adhvarám: again co-ordination without ca; the former has a wider sense = worship (prayer and offering); the latter = sacrificial act. viśvá-tas: the prn. adj. víśva usually shifts its accent to the second syllable before adv. suffixes and as first member of a cd. (p. 454, 10) . ási is accented as the vb. of a subordinate clause (p. 467, B) . sá íd: all successively unmarked syllables at the beginning of a hemistich have the Udātta (p. 449, 2) . On the particle íd see p. 218. devéṣu: the loc. of the goal reached (p. 325 , 1 b ) ; the acc., which might be used, would rather express the goal to which the motion is directed. gachati: as the vb. of a principal sentence has no Udātta (19 A) ; nor has it any accent mark in the Saṃhitā text because all unaccented syllables following a dependent Svarita remain unmarked; on the other hand, all the syllables of an unaccented word are marked with the Anudātta in the Pada text (cp. note on 2 d) . The first syllable of gachati is long by position (p. 437, a 3) .

See Page Number 7, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 Agnír hótā kavíkratuḥ

satyáś citráśravastamaḥ,

devó devébhir á̄ gamat.

May Agni the invoker, of wise intelligence, the true, of most brilliant fame, the god come with the gods.

Both kaví-kratus and citrá-śravas have the regular Bv. accent (p. 455 c ) ; the latter cd. is not analysed in the Pada text because it forms a unit as first member, from which tama is separated as the second; cp. notes on tama in 1 c and 3 c. devébhis: the inst. often expresses a sociative sense without a prp. (like saha in Skt.): see 199 A 1. devó devébhiḥ: the juxtaposition of forms of the same word, to express a contrast, is common in the RV. gam-a-t: root ao. sb. of gam (p. 171) ; on the accentuation of á̄ gamat see p. 468, 20 A a.

See Page Number 7, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 yád aṅgá dāśúṣe tuám,

Ágne, bhadráṃ kariṣyási,

távét tát satyám, Aṅgiraḥ.

Just what good thou, O Agni, wilt do for the worshipper, that (purpose) of thee (comes) true, O Aṅgiras.

aṅgá: on this pcl. see 180 (p. 213) . dāśúṣe: dat. of dāś-vá̄ṃs, one of the few pf. pt. stems in the RV. formed without red. (140, 5 ; 157 b ), of which only vid-vá̄ṃs survives in Skt. tvám: here, as nearly everywhere in the RV., to be read as tuám on account of the metre. Though the Pādas forming a hemistich constitute a metrical unit, that is, are not divided from each other either in Sandhi or in the marking of the accent, the second Pāda is syntactically separated from the first inasmuch as it is treated as a new sentence, a voc. or a vb. at its beginning being always accented (p. 465, 18 a; 19 b ) . Hence Agne is accented (the Udātta being, as always, on the first syllable, p. 465, 18), while Aṅgíras is not (p. 466, 18 b ) . kariṣyási (ft. of kṛ do ): that is, whatever good thou intendest to do to the worshipper will certainly be realized. táva ít tát: that intention of thee.

See Page Number 8, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 úpa tvāgne divé-dive,

dóṣāvastar, dhiyá̄ vayám,

námo bháranta émasi;

To thee, O Agni, day by day, O illuminer of gloom, we come with thought bringing homage;

tvā as the enc. form of tvá̄m (109 a ) and Agne as a voc. in the middle of a Pāda (p. 466 b ) are unaccented. The acc. tvā is most naturally to be taken as governed by the preposition úpa (p. 209) , though it might otherwise be quite well dependent on the cd. vb. úpa á̄-imasi (a common combination of úpa and á̄ with verbs meaning to go ), as the first prp. is often widely separated from the verb (191 f; p. 468, 20 a ). dóṣā-vastar: Sāyaṇa explains this cd. (which occurs here only) as by night and day, but vastar never occurs as an adv. and the accent of doṣá̄ is shifted (which is not otherwise the case in such cds., as sāyáṃ-prātar evening and morning, from sāyám); the explanation as O illuminer (from 1. vas shine ) of darkness (with voc. accent on the first syllable) is much more probable, being supported by the description of Indra (iii. 49, 4) as kṣapá̄ṃ vastá̄ janitá̄ sú̄ryasya illuminer of nights, generator of the Sun. dhiyá̄ inst. of dhí̄ thought (accent, p. 458, 1 ), used in the sense of mental prayer. námas, lit. bow, implies a gesture of adoration. bhárantas: N. pl. pr. pt. of bhṛ bear. á̄-imasi: the ending masi is five times as common as mas in the RV. (p. 125, f. n. 2) .

See Page Number 8, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 rá̄jantam adhvará̄ṇã̄ṃ,

gopá̄m ṛtásya dí̄divim,

várdhamānaṃ sué dáme.

(to thee) ruling over sacrifices, the shining guardian of order, growing in thine own house.

rá̄jantam: this and the other accusatives in this stanza are in agreement with tvā in the preceding one. adhvará̄ṇã̄m: governed by the preceding word, because verbs of ruling take the gen. (202 A a ); the final syllable ām must be pronounced with a slur equivalent to two syllables (like a vowel sung in music). go-pá̄m: one of the many m. stems in final radical ā (p. 78) , which in Skt. is always shortened to a (as go-pa). ṛtá means the regular order of nature, such as the unvarying course of the sun and moon, and of the seasons; then, on one hand, the regular course of sacrifice (rite); on the other, moral order (right), a sense replaced in Skt. by dharma. Agni is specially the guardian of ṛtá in the ritual sense, because the sacrificial fire is regularly kindled every day; Varuṇa (vii. 86) is specially the guardian of ṛtá in the moral sense. várdhamānam: growing in thine own house, because the sacrificial fire after being kindled flames up in its receptacle on the altar. své: to be read as sué; this prn. meaning own refers to all three persons and numbers in the RV., my own, thy own, his own, c. (cp. p. 112 c ) . dáme: this word (= Lat. domu-s ) is common in the RV., but has disappeared in Skt.

See Page Number 9, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 sá naḥ pitéva sūnáve,

Ágne, sūpāyanó bhava;

sácasvā naḥ suastáye.

So, O Agni, be easy of access to us, as a father to his son; abide with us for our well-being.

sá is here used in its frequent anaphoric sense of as such, thus (p. 294 b ) . nas enc. dat. (109 a ) parallel to sūnáve. pitá̄ iva: the enc. pcl. iva is regularly treated by the Pada text as the second member of a cd.; in the RV. pitṛ́ is usually coupled with sūnú, mātṛ́ with putrá. sūnávé: this word as written in the Saṃhitā text appears with two Udāttas, because the Udātta of the elided á is thrown back on the preceding syllable (p. 465, 3) ; but this á must be restored, as the metre shows, and sūnáve Ágne read. Though a is elided in about 75 per cent. of its occurrences in the written Saṃhitā text, it remains in the rest; it must be pronounced in about 99 per cent. (cp. p. 23, f. n. 4 and 5) . The vowel Sandhi which is invariably applied between the final and initial sounds of the two Pādas of a hemistich, must always be resolved to restore the metre. This is another indication (see note on Ágne in 6 b) that the second and the first Pāda were originally as independent of each other as the second and the third. On the accentuation of sūpāyaná as a Bv. see p. 455, c α. sácasvā: this verb (which is exclusively Vedic) is construed with the acc. (here nas) or the inst.; the vowel of sva, the ending of the 2. s. ipv. Ā., is here (like many other final vowels) lengthened in the Saṃhitā, but is regularly short in the Pada text. svastáye must be read as su-astáye; it has the sense of a final dat. (200 B 2) . It is not analysed in the Pada text because asti does not occur as an independent nominal stem.

SAVITṚ́

This god is celebrated in eleven entire hymns and in many detached stanzas as well. He is pre-eminently a golden deity: the epithets golden-eyed, golden-handed, and golden-tongued are peculiar to him. His car and its pole are golden. It is drawn by two or more brown, white-footed horses. He has mighty golden splendour which he diffuses, illuminating heaven, earth, and air. He raises aloft his strong golden arms, with which he arouses and blesses all beings, and which extend to the ends of the earth. He moves in his golden car, seeing all creatures, on a downward and an upward path. Shining with the rays of the sun, yellow-haired, Savitṛ raises up his light continually from the east. His ancient paths in the air are dustless and easy to traverse, and on them he protects his worshippers; for he conveys the departed spirit to where the righteous dwell. He removes evil dreams, and makes men sinless; he drives away demons and sorcerers. He observes fixed laws; the waters and the wind are subject to him. The other gods follow his lead; and no being can resist his will. In one stanza (iii. 62, 10) he is besought to stimulate the thoughts of worshippers who desire to think of the glory of god Savitṛ. This is the celebrated Sāvitrī stanza which has been a morning prayer in India for more than three thousand years. Savitṛ is often distinguished from Sūrya (vii. 63) , as when he is said to shine with the rays of the sun, to impel the sun, or to declare men sinless to the sun. But in other passages it is hardly possible to keep the two deities apart.

Savitṛ is connected with the evening as well as the morning; for at his command night comes and he brings all beings to rest.

The word Savitṛ is derived from the root sū to stimulate, which is constantly and almost exclusively used with it in such a way as to form a perpetual play on the name of the god. In nearly half its occurrences the name is accompanied by devá god, when it means the ‘Stimulator god’. He was thus originally a solar deity in the capacity of the great stimulator of life and motion in the world.

i. 35. In this hymn Savitṛ appears as the regulator of time, bringing day and especially night.

The metre of this hymn is Triṣṭubh (p. 441) , the commonest in the RV., about two-fifths of which are composed in it. It consists of four verses of eleven syllables identical in construction, and is divided into two hemistichs. The cadence (the last four syllables) is trochaic (–ᴗ– bhalfOoverdash ); the opening, consisting of either four or five syllables followed by a caesura or metrical pause, is predominantly iambic ( bhalfOoverdash – bhalfOoverdash – or bhalfOoverdash – bhalfOoverdash – bhalfOoverdash ), and the break between the caesura and the cadence is regularly ᴗᴗ– or ᴗᴗ. Thus the scheme of the whole normal verse is either bhalfOoverdash – bhalfOoverdash –, ᴗᴗ– | –ᴗ– bhalfOoverdash | or bhalfOoverdash – bhalfOoverdash – bhalfOoverdash , ᴗᴗ | –ᴗ– bhalfOoverdash |. The metre of stanzas 1 and 9 is Jagatī (p. 442) , which consists of four verses of twelve syllables. The Jagatī is identical with the Triṣṭubh verse extended by one syllable, which, however, gives the cadence an iambic character (–ᴗ–ᴗ bhalfOoverdash ). In the first stanza the caesura is always after the fifth syllable, in the second Pāda following the first member of a compound.

See Page Number 11, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 hváyāmi Agníṃ prathamáṃ suastáye;

hváyāmi Mitrá̄váruṇāv ihá̄vase; hváyāmi Rá̄trīṃ jágato nivéśanīṃ;

hváyāmi deváṃ Savitá̄ram ūtáye.

I call on Agni first for welfare; I call on Mitra-Varuṇa here for aid; I call on Night that brings the world to rest; I call on god Savitṛ for help.

hváyámi: pr. ind. from hvā call; note the anaphoric repetition of this word at the beginning of each verse. prathamám is in apposition to Agním. su-astáye: this, ávase, and ūtáye are final datives (p. 314, B 2) ; the last two words are derived from the same root, av help. svastí (cp. note on i. 1, 9 c) evidently means well-being; by Sāyaṇa, following Yāska (Nirukta, iii. 21), it is explained negatively as a-vināśa non-destruction. Mitrá̄-váruṇā: one of the numerous Dvandvas both members of which are dual and accented (p. 269) ; note that Dv. cds. are not analysed in the Pada text. ihá̄vase for ihá ávase: on the accent see p. 464, 17, 1. jágatas: the objective gen. (p. 320, B 1 b ) , dependent on nivéśanīm = that causes the world to ‘turn in’ (cp. x. 127, 4. 5) ; the cs. niveśáyan is applied to Savitṛ in the next stanza.

See Page Number 12, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 á̄ kṛṣṇéna rájasā vártamāno,

niveśáyann amṛ́taṃ mártiaṃ ca,

hiraṇyáyena Savitá̄ ráthena,

á̄ devó yāti bhúvanāni páśyan.

Rolling hither through the dark space, laying to rest the immortal and the mortal, on his golden car god Savitṛ comes seeing (all) creatures.

á̄ vártamānas: the prp. may be separated from a pt. as from a finite vb., p. 462, 13 a; when it immediately precedes, as in niveśáyan, it is usually compounded, ibid. kṛṣṇéna rájasā: = through the darkness; loc. sense of the inst., 119 A 4. amṛ́taṃ mártiaṃ ca s. m. used collectively = gods and men. ráthená̄ must of course be read ráthena|á̄; see note on Ágne, i. 1, 9 b. á̄ devó yāti: cp. note

on á̄ íhá vakṣati, i. 1, 2 c. In this and the two following stanzas Savitṛ is connected with evening.

See Page Number 13, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 yá̄ti deváḥ pravátā, yá̄ti udvátā;

yá̄ti śubhrá̄bhyāṃ yajató háribhyām.

á̄ devó yāti Savitá̄ parāváto,

ápa víśvā duritá̄ bá̄dhamānaḥ.

The god goes by a downward, he goes by an upward path; adorable he goes with his two bright steeds. God Savitṛ comes from the distance, driving away all hardships.

In this stanza a Jagatī verse is combined with a Triṣṭubh in each hemistich. This is quite exceptional in the RV.: see p. 445, β 1 and f. n. 7. pra-vát-ā and ud-vát-ā: local sense of the inst. (199 A 4) ; note that the suffix vat (p. 263) is in the Pada text treated like the second member of a cd. The downward and upward path refer to the sun’s course in the sky. The second yá̄ti is accented as beginning a new sentence. háribhyām: inst. in sociative sense; cp. devébhis in i. 1, 5. On the different treatment of śubhrá̄bhyām and háribhyām in the Pada text see note on pú̄rvebhis in i. 1, 28. parāvátó ५ pa: see note on Ágne in i. 1, 9. parāvátas: abl. with verb of motion (201 A 1) . ápa bá̄dhamānas: cp. note on á̄ in 2 c. víśvā duritá̄: this form of the n. pl. is commoner in the RV. than that in āni; p. 78, f. n. 14.

See Page Number 13, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 abhí̄vṛtaṃ kṛ́śanair, viśvárūpaṃ,

híraṇyaśamyaṃ, yajató bṛhántam,

á̄sthād ráthaṃ Savitá̄ citrábhānuḥ,

kṛṣṇá̄ rájāṃsi, táviṣīṃ dádhānaḥ.

His car adorned with pearls, omniform, with golden pins, lofty, the adorable Savitṛ brightly lustrous, putting on the dark spaces and his might, has mounted.

The final vowel of abhí is lengthened in the Saṃhitā text, as often when a long vowel is favoured by the metre. The prp. is also accented, this being usual when a prp. is compounded with a pp. (p. 462, 13 b ) . kṛ́śanais: stars are probably meant, as is indicated by x. 68, 11: ‘the Fathers adorned the sky with stars, like a dark horse with pearls’. viśvá-rūpam: on the accent cp. note on i. 1, 4 b. -śamyam: inflected like rathí̄, p. 87; the śamī is probably a long pin fixed at each end of the yoke to prevent its slipping off the horse’s neck. á̄ asthāt: root ao. of sthā. kṛṣṇá̄ rájāṃsi: = darkness. dádhānas (pr. pt.; the pf. would be dadhānás) governs both rájāṃsi and táviṣīm = clothing himself in darkness (cp. 2 a) and might, that is, bringing on evening by his might.

See Page Number 14, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 ví jánāñ chyāvá̄ḥ śitipá̄do akhyan, [ ]

ráthaṃ híraṇyapraügaṃ váhantaḥ.

śáśvad víśaḥ Savitúr dáivíasya

upásthe víśvā bhúvanāni tasthuḥ.

His dusky steeds, white-footed, drawing his car with golden pole, have surveyed the peoples. For ever the settlers and all creatures have rested in the lap of divine Savitṛ.

ví: separated from vb.; see note on á̄ vakṣati, i. 1, 2 c. jánāñ chyāvá̄ḥ: for jánān śyāvá̄ḥ (40, 1). śiti-pá̄das: on the accentuation of this Bv. on the final member, see p. 455, c α. Note that the initial a of akhyan remains after o (cp. note on i. 1, 9 b) . akhyan: a ao. of khyā see (p. 168, a 1) , cp. 7 a and 8 a, and páśyan in 2 d; the ao. expresses a single action that has just taken place (p. 345 C) ; the pf. tasthur expresses an action that has constantly (śáśvat) taken place in the past down to the present (113 A a ) . In -praügam (analysed by the Pāda text of x. 130, 3 as pra-uga), doubtless = pra-yugam (as explained in a Prātiśākhya), there is a remarkable hiatus caused by the dropping of y. víśvā bhúvanāni: here the old and the new form of the n. pl. are used side by side, as very often. On the Sandhi of dáivyasyopásthe cp. note on Ágne, i. 1, 9 b. dáivya divine is a variation of the usual devá accompanying the name of Savitṛ. upásthe: the idea that all beings are contained in various deities, or that the latter are the soul (ātmá̄) of the animate and inanimate world, is often expressed in the RV.

See Page Number 15, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 tisró dyá̄vaḥ; Savitúr dvá̄ upásthāṁ̆,

ékā Yamásya bhúvane virāṣá̄ṭ.

āṇíṃ ná ráthyam amṛ́tá̄dhi tasthur:

ihá bravītu yá u tác cíketat.

(There are) three heavens: two (are) the laps of Savitṛ, one overcoming men, (is) in the abode of Yama. All immortal things rest (on him) as on the axle-end of a car: let him who may understand this tell it here.

The interpretation of this stanza is somewhat difficult; for it is meant, as the last Pāda indicates, as an enigma (like several others in the RV.). The first Pāda is evidently intended to explain the last two of the preceding stanza: of the three worlds Savitṛ occupies two (air and earth). The second Pāda adds: the third world (the highest heaven) is the abode of Yama, in which dwell men after death (that is, the Pitṛs). The third Pāda means: on Savitṛ, in these two (lower) worlds, the gods rest. dyá̄vas: N. pl. of dyó, here f. (which is rare); probably an elliptical pl. (193, 3 a ) = heaven, air, and earth. dvá̄: for dváu before u (22); after tisró dyá̄vaḥ the f. form dvé should strictly be used (like ékā in b), but it is attracted in gender by the following upásthā (cp. 194, 3) . upásthāṁ̆: the dual ending ā (which in the RV. is more than seven times as common as au), appears before consonants, in pausā at the end of a Pāda, and in the middle of a Pāda before vowels, with which it coalesces. Here it is nasalized (as often elsewhere) before the initial vowel of the following Pāda to avoid the hiatus; this is another indication (cp. note on Ágne, i. 1, 9 b) that there was in the original text of the RV. no vowel Sandhi between the Pādas of a hemistich. virā-ṣá̄ṭ: N. s. of virā-sáh (81 b ), in which there is cerebralization of s by assimilation to the final cerebral ṭ (for -sá̄ṭ); in the first member the quantity of the vowels (for vīra) is interchanged for metrical convenience; the Pada text does not analyse the cd. because the form virā does not occur as an independent word (cp. note on ṛtvíj, i. 1, 1 b). amṛ́tā: n. pl. = the gods. āṇíṃ ná: on him, as the car rests on the two ends of the axle which pass through the nave of the wheels. ádhi tasthur: the pf. of sthā here takes the acc. by being compounded with ádhi; in 5 d the simple verb takes the loc. The third Pāda is only a modification in sense of 5 c d. bravītu: 3. s. ipv. of brū speak (p. 143, 3 c ) . The pcl. u is always written in the Pada text as a long vowel and nasalized: ūṁ̆ íti. cíketat: pf. sb. of cit observe.

See Page Number 16, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 ví suparṇó antárikṣāṇi akhyad,

gabhīrávepā ásuraḥ sunītháḥ.

kúedá̄nīṃ sú̄riaḥ? káś ciketa?

katamá̄ṃ dyá̄ṃ raśmír asyá̄ tatāna?

The bird has surveyed the atmospheric regions, the divine spirit, of deep inspiration, of good guidance. Where is now the sun? Who has understood (it) ? To what heaven has his ray extended?

7-9 deal with Savitṛ as guiding the sun.

ví . . . akhyat: cp. 5 a and 8 a. suparṇás: Savitṛ is here called a bird, as the sun-god Sūrya (vii. 63) often is. On the accent of this Bv. and of su-nīthás see p. 455, c a. antárikṣāṇi: equivalent to kṛṣṇá̄ rájāṃsi (4 d), the aerial spaces when the sun is absent. ásuras: this word, which is applied to various gods in the RV., but especially to Varuṇa, and in the Avesta, as ahura, is the name of the highest god, means a divine being possessed of occult power; towards the end of the Rigvedic period it gradually lost this sense and came to mean a higher hostile power, celestial demon. sunīthás: guiding well here means that the sun illumines the paths with his light. kvèdá̄nīm: when an independent Svarita is in the Saṃhitā text immediately followed by an Udātta, the Svarita vowel, if long, has added to it the figure 3, which is marked with both Svarita and Anudātta (p. 450 b ) . idá̄nīm: now = at night. ciketa: pf. of cit observe (139, 4) . dyá̄m: acc. of dyó (p. 94, 3) , here again (cp. 6 a) f. asyá̄: = asya á̄. tatāna: pf. of tan stretch (cp. 137, 2 b ) . The question here asked, where the sun goes to at night, is parallel to that asked about the stars in i. 24, 10: ‘those stars which are seen at night placed on high, where have they gone by day?’

See Page Number 17, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 aṣṭáu ví akhyat kakúbhaḥ pṛthivyá̄s,

trí̃̄ dhánva, yójanā, saptá síndhūn.

hiraṇyākṣáḥ Savitá̄ devá á̄gād,

dádhad rátnā dāśúṣe vá̄riāṇi.

He has surveyed the eight peaks of the earth, the three waste lands, the leagues, the seven rivers. Golden-eyed god Savitṛ has come, bestowing desirable gifts on the worshipper.

The general meaning of this stanza is that Savitṛ surveys all space: the mountains, the plains, the rivers, and the regions between heaven and earth. aṣṭáu: 106 b. pṛthivyá̄s: on the accentuation see p. 458, 2. trí̄: n. pl. (105, 3) to be read disyllabically. dhánva: acc. pl. of dhánvan n., 90, 3 (p. 70 ; cp. p. 67 , bottom). The long syllable after the caesura in b and d (–ᴗ– for ᴗᴗ–) is rare in the RV. (p. 440, 4 B) . yójanā: probably the thirty leagues that Dawn traverses in the sky (i. 123, 8) , the number of each of the other features being expressly stated. hiraṇyākṣás: the accent of this cd. as a Bv. is quite exceptional: p. 455 c. á̄-agāt: root ao. of gā go. dádhat: on the accent cp. 127, 2; on the formation of the stem, 156.

See Page Number 18, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 híraṇyapāṇiḥ Savitá̄ vícarṣaṇir

ubhé dyá̄vāpṛthiví̄ antár īyate.

ápá̄mīvāṃ bá̄dhate; vétisú̄riam;

abhí kṛṣṇéna rájasā dyá̄m ṛṇoti.

Golden-handed Savitṛ, the active, goes between both heaven and earth. He drives away disease; he guides the sun; through the dark space he penetrates to heaven.

Dyá̄vā-pṛthiví̄: with the usual double accent of Devatā-dvandvas (p. 457, e β ) and not analysed in the Pada text (cp. note on 1 b) . Its final ī, as well as the e of ubhé, being Pragṛhya (25 a, 26 a ) , is followed by íti in the Pada text (p. 25, f. n. 2) . antár (46) combined with ī go governs the acc.; cp. the two laps of Savitṛ in 6 a. ápa bá̄dhate: he drives away disease, cp. 3 d; contrary to the general rule (p. 466, 19 A) the vb. is here accented; this irregularity not infrequently occurs when in the same Pāda a compound verb is immediately followed by a simple vb. véti: accented because it begins a new sentence; Savitṛ guides the sun: cp. 7 c. kṛṣṇéna rájasā: cp. 2 a and 4 d. abhí . . . dyá̄m ṛṇoti: cp. 7 d. The metre of d is irregular: it is a Triṣṭubh of twelve syllables, the first two syllables (abhí) taking the place of a long one. Cp. p. 441, 4 a and p. 445, B 1.

See Page Number 19, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 híraṇyahasto ásuraḥ sunītháḥ,

sumṛḷīkáḥ suávāṁ̆ yātu arvá̄ṅ.

apasédhan rakṣáso yātudhá̄nān,

ásthād deváḥ pratidoṣáṃ gṛṇānáḥ.

Let the golden-handed divine spirit, of good guidance, most gracious, aiding well, come hither. Chasing away demons and sorcerers, the god being lauded has arisen towards eventide.

ásuras: cp. 7 b. svávān: the analysis of the Pada text, svávān = possessed of property, is followed by Sāyaṇa who renders it by dhanavān wealthy; this would mean that Savitṛ bestows wealth (cp. dádhad rátnā in 8 d, and vi. 71, 4 á̄ dāśúṣe suvati bhú̄ri vāmám he, Savitṛ, brings much wealth to the worshipper ). This nom. occurs several times in the RV., and is always analysed in the same way by the Padapāṭha. On the other hand, three oblique cases of su-ávas giving good help occur (svávasam, svávasā, svávasas). Roth takes svávān to be a nom. of this stem irregularly formed by analogy for su-ávās (cp. 83, 2 a ) . I follow the Pada text as the meaning is sufficiently good. Final ān, which regularly becomes āṁ̆ before vowels (39), sometimes undergoes the same change before y (40, 4) . rakṣásas has the accent of a m. in as (83, 2 a ) ; the n. form is rákṣāṃsi. yātudhá̄nān is added, as is often the case, without a connecting ca: cp. note on rayím, in i. 1, 3 a; note that the Sandhi of ān before vowels (39) does not apply at the end of an internal Pāda. If Savitṛ in this stanza is connected with morning rather than evening, ásthāt would here be equivalent to úd asthāt; cp. RV. vi. 71, 4: úd u ṣyá deváḥ Savitá̄ dámunā híraṇyapāṇiḥ pratidoṣám ásthāt that god Savitṛ, the domestic friend, the golden-handed, has arisen towards eventide; it may, however, be equivalent to á̄ asthāt, that is, he has mounted his car, cp. 4 c. gṛṇānás: pr. pt. Ā., with ps. sense, of 1. gṛ sing, greet.

See Page Number 20, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 yé te pánthāḥ, Savitaḥ, pūrviá̄so,

areṇávaḥ súkṛtā antárikṣe,

tébhir nǒ adyá pathíbhiḥ sugébhī

rákṣā ca no, ádhi ca brūhi, deva.

Thine ancient paths, O Savitṛ, the dustless, the well made, in the air, (going) by those paths easy to traverse protect us to-day, and speak for us, O god.

te: the dat. and gen. of tvám, is always unaccented; while té, N. pl. m. and N. A. du. f. n. of tá, is always té. pánthās: N. pl. of pánthā, m. path, which is the only stem (not pánthān) in the RV. (99, 1 a ) . Savitaḥ: when final Visarjanīya in the Saṃhitā text represents original r, this is always indicated by the word being written with r followed by íti in the Pada text; here Savitar íti. ’reṇávas: the initial a must be restored (see note on Ágne, i. 1, 9 b; but a is not elided after o in c and d); on the accent of a Bv. formed with privative a, see p. 455, c α. sú-kṛtās: Karmadhārayas, in which the first member is an adv. and the last a pp., accent the former; p. 456, 1 α. tébhis: inst. of tá, p. 106; p. 457, 11 b. In c nǒ adyá should be pronounced because e and o are shortened before a (p. 437, α 4) ; this rule does not apply when e and o are separated from a by the caesura; hence in d ō, ádhi should be pronounced. sugébhī: see 47. The final a of rákṣā is lengthened because the second syllable of the Pāda favours a long vowel. ádhi . . . brūhi: be our advocate; the meaning of this expression is illustrated by other passages: in i. 123, 3 Savitṛ is besought to report to Sūrya that his worshippers are sinless; in vii. 60, 2 Sūrya is implored to make a similar report to the Ādityas.

MARÚTAS

This group of deities is prominent in the RV., thirty-three bymns being addressed to them alone, seven to them with Indra, and one each to them with Agni and Pūṣan (vi. 54) . They form a troop (gaṇá, śárdhas), being mentioned in the plural only. Their number is thrice sixty or thrice seven. They are the sons of Rudra (ii. 33) and of Pṛśni, who is a cow (probably representing the mottled storm-cloud). They are further said to have been generated by Vāyu, the god of Wind, in the wombs of heaven, and they are called the sons of heaven; but they are also spoken of as self-born. They are brothers equal in age and of one mind, having the same birthplace and the same abode. They have grown on earth, in air, and in heaven, or dwell in the three heavens. The goddess Rodasí̄ is always mentioned in connexion with them; she stands beside them on their car, and thus seems to have been regarded as their bride.

The brilliance of the Maruts is constantly referred to: they are golden, ruddy, shine like fires, and are self-luminous. They are very often associated with lightning: all the five compounds of vidyút in the RV. are almost exclusively descriptive of them. Their lances represent lightning, as their epithet ṛṣṭí-vidyut lightning-speared shows. They also have golden axes. They are sometimes armed with bows and arrows, but this trait is probably borrowed from their father Rudra. They wear garlands, golden mantles, golden ornaments, and golden helmets. Armlets and anklets (khādí) are peculiar to them. The cars on which they ride gleam with lightning, and are drawn by steeds (generally feminine) that are ruddy or tawny, spotted, swift as thought. They are great and mighty; young and unaging; dustless, fierce, terrible like lions, but also playful like children or calves.

The noise made by them, and often mentioned, is thunder and the roaring of the winds. They cause the mountains to quake and the two worlds to tremble; they rend trees, and, like wild elephants, devour the forests. One of their main activities is to shed rain: they cover the eye of the sun with rain; they create darkness with the cloud when they shed rain; and they cause the heavenly pail and the streams of the mountains to pour. The waters they shed are often clearly connected with the thunderstorm. Their rain is often figuratively called milk, ghee, or honey. They avert heat, but also dispel darkness, produce light, and prepare a path for the sun.

They are several times called singers: they are the singers of heaven; they sing a song; for Indra when he slew the dragon, they sang a song and pressed Soma. Though primarily representing the sound of the winds, their song is also conceived as a hymn of praise. Thus they come to be compared with priests, and are addressed as priests when in the company of Indra.

Owing to their connexion with the thunderstorm, the Maruts are constantly associated with Indra (ii. 12) as his friends and allies, increasing his strength and prowess with their prayers, hymns, and songs, and generally assisting him in the fight with Vṛtra. Indra indeed accomplishes all his celestial exploits in their company. Sometimes, however, the Maruts accomplish these exploits alone. Thus they rent Vṛtra joint from joint, and disclosed the cows.

When not associated with Indra, the Maruts occasionally exhibit the maleficent traits of their father Rudra. Hence they are implored to ward off the lightning from their worshippers and not to let their ill-will reach them, and are besought to avert their arrow and the stone which they hurl, their lightning, and their cow-and man-slaying bolt. But like their father Rudra, they are also supplicated to bring healing remedies. These remedies appear to be the waters, for the Maruts bestow medicine by raining.

The evidence of the RV. indicates that the Maruts are Storm-gods. The name is probably derived from the root mar, to shine, thus meaning ‘the shining ones’.

i. 85. Metre: Jagatī; 5 and 12 Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 22, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 prá yé śúmbhante, jánayo ná, sáptayo

yá̄man, Rudrásya sūnávaḥ sudáṃsasaḥ,

ródasī hí Marútaś cakriré vṛdhé.

mádanti vīrá̄ vidátheṣu ghṛ́ṣvayaḥ.

The wondrous sons of Rudra, the racers, who on their course adorn themselves like women, the Maruts have indeed made the two worlds to increase. The impetuous heroes rejoice in rites of worship.

jánayas: 99, 1 a. yá̄man: loc., 90, 2. sudáṃsasas: accent, p. 455, 10 c α. cakriré: 3. pl. Ā. pf. of kṛ; with dat. inf., p. 334, b. mádanti: with loc., 204, 1 a. vidátheṣu: the etymology and precise meaning of this word have been much discussed. It is most probably derived from vidh worship (cp. p. 41, f. n. 1) , and means divine worship.

See Page Number 23, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 tá ukṣitá̄so mahimá̄nam āśata:

divi Rudrá̄soádhi cakrire sádaḥ.

árcanto arkáṃ, janáyanta indriyám,

ádhi śríyo dadhire Pṛ́śnimātaraḥ.

They having waxed strong have attained greatness: in heaven the Rudras have made their abode. Singing their song and generating the might of Indra, they whose mother is Pṛśni have put on glory.

té: N. pl. m. of tá that, 110. ukṣitá̄sas: pp. of 2. ukṣ (= vakṣ) grow. āśata: 3. pl. Ā. root ao. of aṃś attain. Rudrá̄sas: the Maruts are often called ‘Rudras’ as equivalent to ‘sons of Rudra’. ádhi: prp. with the loc. diví; 176, 2. janáyanta indriyám: that is, by their song. ádhi dadhire: 3. pl. Ā. pf. of ádhi dhā, which is especially often used of putting on ornaments. śríyas: A. pl. of śrí̄ glory; referring to the characteristic brilliance of the Maruts.

See Page Number 23, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 gómātaro yác chubháyantĕ añjíbhis,

tanú̄ṣu śubhrá̄ dadhire virúkmataḥ.

bá̄dhante víśvam abhimātínam ápa.

vártmāni eṣām ánu rīyate ghṛtám.

When they whose mother is a cow deck themselves with ornaments, shining they put on their bodies brilliant weapons. They drive off every adversary. Fatness flows along their tracks.

gómātaras: as the sons of the cow Pṛśni. yác chubháyante: Sandhi, 53. dadhire: pf. with pr. sense, they have put on = they wear. ápa: prp. after the vb. and separated from it by other words. 191 f; p. 468, 20. ánu rīyate: 3. pl. Ā. pr. of ri flow. ghṛtám: ghee = fertilizing rain. The meaning of d is: the course of the Maruts is followed by showers of rain. eṣām: unemphatic G. pl. m. of ayám, p. 452, 8 B c.

See Page Number 24, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

ví yé bhrá̄jante súmakhāsa ṛṣṭíbhiḥ,

pracyāváyanto ácyutā cid ójasā,

manojúvo yán, Maruto, rátheṣu á̄

vṛ́ṣavrātāsaḥ pṛ́ṣatīr áyugdhuam;

Who as great warriors shine forth with their spears, overthrowing even what has never been overthrown with their might: when ye, O Maruts, that are swift as thought, with your strong hosts, have yoked the spotted mares to your cars,

súmakhāsas: a Karmadhāraya cd. according to its accent (cp. p. 455, 10 c α) , but the exact meaning of makhá is still somewhat uncertain. pra-cyāváyantas: pr. pt. of cs. of cyu move; though this cs., which occurs frequently in the RV., always has a long. radical vowel in the Saṃhitā text, it invariably has a short vowel in the Padapāṭha. Marutas: change from the 3. to the 2. prs., in the same sentence, a not infrequent transition in the RV. manojúvas: N. pl. radical ū stem mano-jú̄, 100, II a (p. 88) . rátheṣu á̄: 176, 2. pṛ́ṣatīs: the spotted mares that draw the cars of the Maruts. áyugdhvam: 2. pl. Ā. root ao. of yuj yoke.

See Page Number 25, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 prá yád rátheṣu pṛ́ṣatīr áyugdhvaṃ,

vá̄je ádriṃ, Maruto, raṃháyantaḥ,

utá̄ruṣásya ví ṣianti dhá̄rāś

cármevodábhir ví undanti bhú̄ma.

when ye have yoked the spotted mares before your cars, speeding, O Maruts, the stone in the conflict, they discharge the streams of the ruddy (steed) and moisten the earth like a skin with waters.

áyugdhvam: with loc., cp. 204, 1 b. ádrim: the Maruts hold lightning in their hands and cast a stone. utá: here comes before the first instead of the second of two clauses, as ca sometimes does (p. 228, 1) . áruṣasya: the ruddy steed of heaven; cp. v. 83, 6 where the Maruts are invoked to pour forth the streams of the stallion; and in v. 56, 7 their ruddy steed (vājí̄ áruṣaḥ) is spoken of. ví ṣyanti: 3. pl. pr. of sā bind; Sandhi, 67 a; change back from 2. to 3. prs.; cp. 4 c d. undanti: 3. pl. pr. of ud wet. bhú̄ma: N. of bhú̄man n. earth (but bhūmán m. abundance ).

See Page Number 25, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 á̄ vo vahantu sáptayo raghuṣyádo;

raghupátvānaḥ prá jigāta bāhúbhiḥ.

sí̄datá̄ barhír: urú vaḥ sádas kṛtáṃ.

mādáyadhvaṃ, Maruto, mádhvǒ ándhasaḥ.

Let your swift-gliding racers bring you hither. Swift-flying come forward with your arms. Sit down on the sacrificial grass: a wide seat is made for you. Rejoice, O Maruts, in the sweet juice.

raghu-ṣyádas: Sandhi, 67 b. raghupátvānas: as belonging to this Pāda to be taken with prá jigāta (gā go ). bāhúbhis: with outstretched arms as they drive. sí̄data á̄: 2. pl. ipv. pr. of sad sit with prp. following (p. 468, 20) . sádas: Sandhi, 43, 2 a. kṛtám: as finite vb., 208. mādáyadhvam: cs. of mad rejoice, with gen., 202 A b. mádhvas: gen. n. of mádhu, p. 81, f. n. 12; the sweet juice is Soma.

See Page Number 26, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 tè ’vardhanta svátavaso mahitvaná̄:

á̄ ná̄kaṃ tasthúr; urú cakrire sádaḥ.

Víṣṇur yád dhá̄vad vṛ́ṣaṇaṃ madacyútaṃ,

váyo ná sīdann ádhi barhíṣi priyé.

Self-strong they grew by their greatness: they have mounted to the firmament; they have made for themselves a wide seat. When Viṣṇu helped the bull reeling with intoxication, they sat down upon their beloved sacrificial grass like birds.

tè ’vardhanta: Sandhi accent, p. 465, 17, 3. mahitvaná̄: inst. of mahitvaná, p. 77, f. n. 3. á̄ tasthúr: vb. of a principal sentence accented according to p. 468, β. Víṣṇus: the mention of wide space (a conception intimately connected with Viṣṇu, cp. uru-gāyá, c.) in 6 c and 7 b has here probably suggested the introduction of Viṣṇu (i. 154) , who is in various passages associated with the Maruts (especially in v. 87) and who also forms a dual divinity (Índrā-Víṣṇū) with Indra. dha: Sandhi, 54. á̄vat: 3. s. ipf. of av favour; Viṣṇu helps Indra, aided by the Maruts, in his conflicts. vṛ́ṣan: dec., 90, 1; both this word and madacyút are applied to Soma as well as Indra, but the meaning of the vb. av and the use of the ipf. are in favour of Indra being intended, the sense then being: ‘when Viṣṇu and Indra, associated in conflict, came to the Soma offering, the Maruts, their companions, came also.’ váyas: N. pl. of ví bird. sīdan: unaugmented ipf. of sad sit.

See Page Number 27, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 śú̄rā ivéd yúyudhayo ná jágmayaḥ,

śravasyávo ná pṛ́tanāsu yetire.

bháyante víśvā bhúvanā Marúdbhio:

rá̄jāna iva tveṣásaṃdṛśo náraḥ.

Like heroes, speeding like warriors, like fame-seeking (men) they have arrayed themselves in battles. All creatures fear the Maruts: the men are like kings of terrible aspect.

iva: note how this pcl. interchanges with ná in this stanza. yetire: 3. pl. pf. Ā. of yat: 137, 2 a. bháyante: 3. pl. pr. Ā. of bhī fear; the pr. stem according to the bhū class is much commoner in the RV. than that according to the third class. Marúdbhyas: 201 A b. náras: the Maruts; N. pl. of nṛ man, 101, 1.

See Page Number 27, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 Tváṣṭā yád vájraṃ súkṛtaṃ hiraṇyáyaṃ [ ]

sahásrabhṛṣṭiṃ suápā ávartayat,

dhattá Índro náriá̄pāṃsi kártave:

áhan Vṛtráṃ, nír apá̄m aubjad arṇavám.

When the skilful Tvaṣṣṛ had turned the well-made, golden, thousand-edged bolt, Indra took it to perform manly deeds: he slew Vṛtra, and drove out the flood of waters.

The association of ideas connecting Indra with the Maruts is continued from 7 c d. That Tvaṣṭṛ fashioned Indra’s bolt for him is mentioned, in a similar context, in i. 32, 1 c and 2 b: áhann áhim, ánv apás tatarda; Tváṣṭā asmai vájraṃ svaryàṃ tatakṣa he slew the serpent, he released the waters; Tvaṣṭṛ fashioned for him the whizzing bolt. dhatté: 3. s. pr. Ā. used in the past sense (212 A 2). kártave: dat. inf. of purpose, in order to perform (kṛ), 211. náryápāṃsi is here and in viii. 96, 19 analysed by the Pada text as nári ápāṃsi. The only possible sense of these words would be deeds against the hero (Vṛtra). On the other hand náryāṇi appears once (vii. 21, 4) and náryā twice (iv. 19, 10 ; viii. 96, 21 ) as an attribute of ápāṃsí; the epithet náryāpasam, analysed by the Padapāṭha (viii. 93, 1) as nárya-apasam doing manly deeds is applied to Indra. It thus seems preferable to make the slight emendation náryá̄pāṃsi (to be read náriá̄pāṃsi) in the Saṃhitā text, and náryā|ápāṃsi in the Pada text. nír aubjat: 3. s. ipf. of ubj force (cp. 23 c ) .

See Page Number 27, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 ūrdhváṃ nunudre avatáṃ tá ójasā;

dādṛhāṇáṃ cid bibhidur ví párvatam.

dhámanto vāṇáṃ Marútaḥ sudá̄navo

máde sómasya ráṇiāni cakrire.

They have pushed up the well with might; they have split even the firm mountain. Blowing their pipes the bountiful Maruts have performed glorious deeds in the intoxication of Soma.

ūrdhvám: have pressed (the bottom) upward, that is, overturned, poured out; avatám: the cloud; = they have shed rain. dādṛhāṇám: pf. pt. Ā. of dṛh make firm, with long red. vowel (139, 9) , shortened in the Pada text. bibhidur vi: p. 468, 20. párvatam: cloud mountain; another way of saying the same thing. dhámantas: with reference to the sound made by the Maruts; cp. árcantas, 2 c. máde sómasya: Indra is constantly said to perform his mighty deeds in the intoxication of Soma, so his associates the Maruts are here similarly described.

See Page Number 27, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 jihmáṃ nunudre avatáṃ táyā diśá̄:

ásiñcann útsaṃ Gótamāya tṛṣṇáje.

á̄ gachantīm ávasā citrábhānavaḥ:

ká̄maṃ víprasya tarpayanta dhá̄mabhiḥ.

They have pushed athwart the well in that direction: they poured out the spring for the thirsty Gotama. Of brilliant splendour they approach him with help; may they satisfy the desire of the sage by their powers.

jihmám: so as to be horizontal and pour out the water, much the same as ūrdhvám in 10 a. táyā diśá̄: this expression is obscure; it may mean, in the quarter in which Gotama was; cp. 199 A 4. īm: him, Gotama, p. 220. víprasya: of Gotama. tarpayanta: cs. of tṛp be pleased; the inj. is more natural here, coming after a pr., than an unaugmented ipf. would be.

See Page Number 30, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 yá̄ vaḥ śárma śaśamāná̄ya sánti,

tridhá̄tūni dāśúṣe yachatá̄dhi.

asmábhyaṃ tá̄ni, Maruto, ví yanta.

rayíṃ no dhatta, vṛ̇ṣaṇaḥ, suví̄ram.

The shelters which you have for the zealous man, extend them three-fold to the worshipper. Extend them to us, O Maruts. Bestow on us wealth together with excellent heroes, mighty ones.

śárma: N. pl. n. (90, 2) śaśamāná̄ya: pf. pt. Ā. of śam labour. tridhá̄tūni: used appositionally (198). dāśúṣe: dat. of dāśvá̄ṃs, 157 b. yachata ádhi: prp. after vb., p. 468, 20; ipv. pr. of yam stretch. asmábhyam: p. 104. ví yanta: 2. pl. ipv. root ao. of yam stretch (cp. p. 172, 5) . dhatta: 2. pl. ipv. of dhā put (p. 144 B b ) . su-ví̄ram: that is, accompanied by warrior sons; cp. vīrávattamam, i. 1, 3 c.

VİṢṆU

This deity occupies a subordinate position in the RV., being celebrated in only five or six hymns. The only anthropomorphic traits mentioned about him are the strides he takes, and the description of him as a youth vast in body who is no longer a child. The central feature of his nature consists in his three steps, connected with which are his exclusive epithets ‘wide-going’ (uru-gāyá) and ‘wide-striding’ (uru-kramá). With these steps he traverses the earth or the terrestrial spaces. Two of his steps are visible to men, but the third or highest is beyond the flight of birds or mortal ken. His highest step is like an eye fixed in heaven; it shines brightly down. It is his dear abode, where pious men and the gods rejoice. There can be no doubt that these three steps refer to the course of the sun, and in all probability to its passage through the three divisions of the world: earth, air, and heaven. Viṣṇu sets in motion like a revolving wheel his ninety steeds (= days) with their four names (= seasons), an allusion to the three hundred and sixty days of the solar year. Thus Viṣṇu seems to have been originally a personification of the activity of the sun, the swiftly-moving luminary that with vast strides passes through the whole universe. Viṣṇu takes his steps for man’s existence, to bestow the earth on him as a dwelling. The most prominent secondary characteristic of Viṣṇu is his friendship for Indra, with whom he is often allied in the fight with Vṛtra. In hymns addressed to Viṣṇu alone, Indra is the only other deity incidentally associated with him. One hymn (vi. 69) is dedicated to the two gods conjointly. Through the Vṛtra myth the Maruts, Indra’s companions, are drawn into alliance with Viṣṇu, who throughout one hymn (v. 87) is praised in combination with them.

The name is most probably derived from viṣ be active, thus meaning ‘the active one’.

i. 154. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 31, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 Víṣṇor nú kaṃ vīríāṇi prá vocaṃ,

yáḥ pá̄rthivāni vimamé rájāṃsi;

yó áskabhāyad úttaraṃ sadhásthaṃ, [ ]

vicakramāṇás trẽdhórugāyáḥ.

I will now proclaim the heroic powers of Viṣṇu, who has measured out the terrestrial regions; who established the upper gathering-place, having, wide-paced, strode out triply.

kam: this pcl. as an encl. always follows nú, sú or hí (p. 225, 2) . vīryá̄ṇi: the syllable preceding the so-called independent Svarita (p. 448) is marked with the Anudātta in the same way as that preceding the Udātta; here we have, as usual, in reality the dependent Svarita, the word having to be pronounced vīríà̄ṇi. prá vocam: inj. ao. of vac, 147, 3. pá̄rthivāni rájāṃsi: the earth and the contiguous air. vi-mamé: this refers to the sun traversing the universe; cp. what is said of Varuṇa in v. 85, 5: má̄neneva tasthivá̄ṁ̆ antárikṣe ví yó mamé pṛthiví̄ṃ sú̄ryeṇa who standing in the air has measured out the earth with the sun, as with a measure. áskabhāyat: ipf. of skabh prop; the cosmic action of supporting the sky is also attributed to Savitṛ, Agni, and other deities. úttaraṃ sadhástham: that is, heaven, as opposed to the terrestrial spaces in b, according to the twofold division of the world. vicakramāṇás: pf. pt. Ā. of kram. tre-dhá̄: with his three steps; the first syllable must be pronounced with a slur equivalent to two short syllables (ᴗᴗ); the resolution tredhá̄ urugāyáḥ would produce both an abnormal break and an abnormal cadence (p. 441, top) .

See Page Number 32, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 prá tád Víṣṇuḥ stavate vĩríeṇa,

mṛgó ná bhīmáḥ kucaró giriṣṭhá̄ḥ,

yásyorúṣu triṣú vikrámaṇeṣu

adhikṣiyánti bhúvanāni víśvā.

By reason of his heroic power, like a dread beast that wanders at will, that haunts the mountains, Viṣṇu is praised aloud for that: he in whose three wide strides all beings dwell.

prá stavate: Ā. of stu in the ps. sense, as is often the case when the pr. stem is formed according to the first (and not the second) class. tád: the cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) referring to the heroic powers of Viṣṇu attributed to him in the preceding stanza. vīryèṇa: cp. note on vīryà̄ṇi in 1 a. mṛgás: Sāyaṇa here interprets this word to mean a beast of prey such as a lion; but though bhīmá occurs as an attribute both of siṃhá lion and of vṛṣabhá bull in the RV., giriṣṭhá̄ is found three or four times applied to the latter and never to the former, and in the next stanza Viṣṇu is called a ‘mountain-dwelling bull’; hence the simile appears to allude to a bull rather than a lion. ku-cará: Yāska, followed by Sāyaṇa, has two explanations of this word, doing ill (ku = kutsitaṃ karma blameworthy deed ) or going anywhere (kva ayaṃ na gachati where does he not go? ). Note that the word is not analysed in the Pada text because ku does not occur as an independent word. Sāyaṇa has two explanations of giriṣṭhá̄s: dwelling in a lofty world or always abiding in speech (giri as loc. of gir) consisting of Mantras, c. (!); on the inflexion see 97, 2; note that in the analysis of the Pada text the change caused by internal Sandhi in the second member is, as always, removed. vikrámaneṣu: note that the final vowel of the Pāda must be restored at the junction with the next Pāda. adhi-kṣiyánti: the root 1. kṣi follows the ad class (kṣéti) when it means dwell, but the bhū class (kṣáyati) when it means rule over. With c and d cp. what is said of Savitṛ in i. 35, 5.

See Page Number 33, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 prá Víṣṇave śũ̄ṣám etu mánma,

girikṣíta urugāyá̄ya vṛ́ṣṇe,

yá idáṃ dīrgháṃ práyataṃ sadhástham

éko vimamé tribhír ít padébhiḥ;

Let my inspiring hymn go forth for Viṣṇu, the mountain-dwelling wide-pacing bull, who alone with but three steps has measured out this long far-extended gathering-place;

śūṣám: the ū must be slurred disyllabically (= ᴗᴗ). idáṃ sadhástham: of course the earth as opposed to úttaraṃ sadhástham in 1 c. ékas and tribhís are antithetical. íd emphasizes the latter word: with only three. The second Pāda of this stanza is parallel to the third of the preceding, the epithets in the former being applied direct to Viṣṇu, in the latter to the wild beast to which Viṣṇu is compared: girikṣít = giriṣṭhá̄; urugāyá = kucará; vṛ́ṣan = mṛgó bhīmáḥ. This correspondence of kucará (besides V.’s alternative exclusive epithet urukramá in 5 c and elsewhere) confirms the explanation of urugāyá as wide-pacing from gā go (Yāska, mahāgati having a wide gait ), and not widely sung from gā sing (Sāyaṇa).

See Page Number 34, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 yásya trí̄ pūrṇá̄ mádhunā padá̄ni

ákṣīyamāṇā svadháyā mádanti;

yá u tridhá̄tu pṛthiví̄m utá dyá̄m

éko dādhá̄ra bhúvanāni víśvā.

Whose three steps filled with mead, unfailing, rejoice in bliss; and who in threefold wise alone has supported earth and heaven, and all beings.

trí̄: n. pl. of trí (105, 3) . padá̄ny: the final vowel of the Pāda must be restored; cp. 2 c. pūrṇá̄: cp. p. 308 d. ákṣīyamāṇā: never failing in mead; the privative pcl. a is almost invariably accented in Karmadhārayas, p. 456 a (top); such negative cds. are not analysed in the Pada text. svadháyā: inst. with verbs of rejoicing (p. 308 c ) . mádanti: his footsteps rejoice, that is, those dwelling in them do so. u: = also (p. 221, 2) . tri-dhá̄tu: this n. form is best taken adverbially = tredhá̄ in 1 d, in a threefold way, by taking his three steps. It might, however, mean the threefold world, loosely explained by the following earth and heaven. ékas: alone in antithesis to víśvā, cp. 3 d. dādhá̄ra: pf. of dhṛ, with long red. vowel (139, 9) , which is here not shortened in the Pada text.

See Page Number 35, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 tád asya priyám abhí pá̄tho aśyāṃ,

náro yátra devayávo mádanti:

urukramásya sá hí bándhur itthá̄,

Víṣṇoḥ padé paramé mádhva útsaḥ.

I would attain to that dear domain of his, where men devoted to the gods rejoice: for that, truly akin to the wide-strider, is a well of mead in the highest step of Viṣṇu.

abhí aśyām: op. root ao. of aṃś reach. yátra: in the third step of Viṣṇu = heaven, where the Fathers drink Soma with Yama (cp. i. 35, 6) . náras: that is, pious men who dwell in heaven; N. pl. of nṛ́, 101, 1. sá: referring to pá̄thas is attracted in gender to bándhus, 194, 3. itthá̄: p. 218. mádhvas (gen., p. 81, n. 12) : cp. 4 a, where the three steps are filled with mead; but the third step is its special abode.

See Page Number 35, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 tá̄ vāṃ vá̄stūni uśmasi gámadhyai,

yátra gá̄vo bhú̄riśṛṅgā ayá̄saḥ:

átrá̄ha tád urugāyásya vṛ́ṣṇaḥ

paramáṃ padám áva bhāti bhú̄ri.

We desire to go to those abodes of you two, where are the many-horned nimble kine: there indeed that highest step of the wide-pacing bull shines brightly down.

vām: of you two, that is, of Indra and Viṣṇu. The former, being the only other god with whom Viṣṇu is intimately associated, would easily be thought of incidentally in a hymn addressed to Viṣṇu alone; this dual also anticipates the joint praise of these two gods as a dual divinity (Índrā-Víṣṇū) in the first two stanzas of the next hymn (i. 155) . uśmasi: 1. pl. pr. of vaś desire (134, 2 a ) . gámadhyai: dat. inf., p. 193, 7. gá̄vas: N. pl. of gó cow (102, 2) ; it is somewhat doubtful what is meant by the cows; they are explained by Yāska and Sāyaṇa as rays; this is a probable sense, as the rays of dawn are compared with cattle, and something connected with sunlight is appropriate to the third step of Viṣṇu, the realm of light. Roth explains gá̄vas as stars, but there is little to support this interpretation. bhú̄ri-śṛṅgās: many-horned would allude to the diffusion of the sunbeams in many directions. ayá̄sas: this form is understood as a N. pl. of aya (from i go ) by Yāska, who explains it as ayanās moving, and by Sāyaṇa as gantāras goers = ativistṛtās very widely diffused; but the occurrence of the A. s. ayá̄sam, the G. pl. ayá̄sām, as well as the A. pl. ayá̄sas, indicates that the stem is ayá̄s; while its use as an attribute of siṃhá lion, áśva horse, and often of the Maruts, shows that the meaning must be active, swift, nimble. áha: on the use of this pcl. see p. 216. vṛ́ṣṇas: cp. 3 b.

DYÁ̄VĀ-PṚTHIVÍ̄

Heaven and Earth are the most frequently named pair of deities in the RV. They are so closely associated that, while they are invoked as a pair in six hymns, Dyáus is never addressed alone in any hymn, and Pṛthiv in only one of three stanzas. The dual compound Dyá̄vā-Pṛthiví̄, moreover, occurs much oftener than the name of Dyáus alone. Heaven and Earth are also mentioned as ródasī the two worlds more than 100 times. They are parents, being often called pitárā, mātárā, jánitrī, besides being separately addressed as ‘father’ and ‘mother’. They have made and sustain all creatures; they are also the parents of the gods. At the same time they are in different passages spoken of as themselves created by individual gods. One of them is a prolific bull, the other a variegated cow, being both rich in seed. They never grow old. They are great and wide-extended; they are broad and vast abodes. They grant food and wealth, or bestow great fame and dominion. Sometimes moral qualities are attributed to them. They are wise and promote righteousness. As father and mother they guard beings, and protect from disgrace and misfortune. They are sufficiently personified to be called leaders of the sacrifice and to be conceived as seating themselves around the offering; but they never attained to a living personification or importance in worship. These two deities are quite co-ordinate, while in most of the other pairs one of the two greatly predominates.

i. 160. Metre: Jagatī.

See Page Number 37, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 té hí Dyá̄vā-Pṛthiví̄ viśváśaṃbhuvā,

ṛtá̄varī, rájaso dhārayátkavī:

sujánmanī dhiṣáṇe antár īyate

devó deví̄ dhármaṇā Sú̄riaḥ śúciḥ.

These two, indeed, Heaven and Earth, are beneficial to all, observing order, supporting the sage of the air: between the two divine bowls that produce fair ereations the divine bright Sūrya moves according to fixed law.

The first two Pādas form an independent sentence; otherwise hí (p. 252) would accent īyate in c. Dyá̄vā-Pṛthiví̄: on the accent, and treatment in the Pada text, see note on i. 35, 1 b. viśvá-śaṃbhuvā: dec., p. 89; accent, note on i. 1, 4 b; final a and ā are never contracted with ṛ (19 a and note 5). ṛtá̄-varī: note that, when the final vowel of a cd. is Pragṛhya, this is in the Pada text first indicated by íti, and the cd. is then repeated and analysed; in the present case the suffix varī (f. of van, pp. 67 and 69, f. n. 2) is treated like the final member of a cd., and the final vowel of ṛtā is treated as metrically lengthened. dhārayát-kavī: a governing cd. (189 A 2 a ) ; the gen. rájasas is dependent on -kavi, probably = Agni, who (in x. 2, 7) is said to have been begotten by Dyāvā-pṛthivī. dhiṣáṇe: the exact meaning of this word, here a designation of dyá̄vā-pṛthiví̄, is uncertain. antár īyate goes between with acc.; the same thing is said of Savitṛ in i. 35, 9 b. dhárman n. ordinance (dharmán m. ordainer ) is the only stem in the RV. (dhárma is a later one).

See Page Number 38, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 uruvyácasā mahínī asaścátā,

pitá̄ mātá̄ ca, bhúvanāni rakṣataḥ.

sudhṛ́ṣṭame vapuṣíe ná ródasī,

pitá̄ yát sīm abhí rūpáir ávāsayat.

As Father and Mother, far-extending, great, inexhaustible, the two protect ( all ) beings. Like two most proud fair women are the two worlds, since the Father clothed them with beauty.

uru-vyácasā: on the accent of this Bv. having wide extension, see p. 455 c α. The du. a-saścát-ā is a Bv. (as the accent shows, p. 455 c α) having no second, while á-saścant (also an epithet of Dyāvā-pṛthivī) is a Karmadhāraya (p. 455, f. n. 2) , not a second = unequalled. su-dhṛ́ṣṭame: on the Pada analysis cp. note on i. 1, 1 c. vapuṣyè: cp. note on vīryà̄ṇi, i. 154, 1 a. pitá̄: the god here meant as the father of Dyāvā-pṛthivī may be Viśvakarman, who in RV. x. 81, 1. 2 is called ‘our father’ and is described as creating the earth and heaven. sīm: see p. 249. abhī avāsayat: ipf. cs. of 2. vas wear.

See Page Number 38, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 sá váhniḥ putráḥ pit a róḥ pavítravān

puná̄ti dhí̄ro bhúvanāni māyáyā.

dhenúṃ ca pṛ́śniṃ vṛṣabháṃ surétasaṃ

viśvá̄hā śukráṃ páyǒ asya dukṣata.

That son of the two parents, the driver, the purifier, wisely purifies beings by his mysterious power. He has always milked from the speckled cow and from the bull abounding in seed his shining moisture.

putrás: by the son of the parents (Heaven and Earth) Agni is meant; for he is expressly said to have been begotten by Heaven and Earth (RV. x. 2, 7) , cp. note on 1 b; he is especially called váhni as the one who conveys (vahati) the gods to the sacrifice; he is very frequently called pāvaká purifier (a term seldom applied to any other deity); he purifies beings in his character of priest. Sāyaṇa thinks the Sun is meant, and explains purifies by illumines. dhenúm: the term cow is often used in the RV. in the sense of earth. ca is here used with the first acc. instead of the second (cp. p. 228, 1) . vṛṣabhám: Dyaus is called a bull in other passages also, and is said to have been made by Agni to roar for man (i. 31, 4) . su-rétasam: alludes to the shedding of rain. viśvá̄hā is a cd. adv. resulting from the juxtaposition of víśvā áhā as an acc. of time (cp. p. 300, 5) = for all days equivalent to áhā víśvā which also occurs. dukṣata: unaugmented sa ao. (141 a ) without initial aspiration (which is, however, restored in the Pada text), from duh milk (with two acc., 198, 2). The general meaning of c d is that Agni as the priest of sacrifice causes heaven to fertilize the earth, and the latter to be productive.

See Page Number 38, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 ayáṃ devá̄nām apásām apástamo

yó jajá̄na ródasī viśváśaṃbhuvā.

ví yó mamé rájasī sukratūyáyā

ajárebhiḥ skámbhanebhiḥ, sám ānṛce.

He of the active gods is the most active who has created the two worlds that are beneficial to all. He who with insight has measured out the two spaces (and upheld them) with unaging supports, has been universally praised.

In this stanza (cp. 2) the father of Heaven and Earth is celebrated. apásām: partitive gen. (p. 321, b α) . ví . . . mamé: this expression is also used of Viṣṇu (see i. 154, 1. 3) and other gods. rájasī: the heavenly and the terrestrial spaces. The initial vowel of d must be restored. sám ānṛce: red. pf. of arc sing (139, 6) , the Ā. being used in the ps. sense; Sāyaṇa explains it in an act. sense as pūjitavān has honoured, which he further interprets to mean sthāpitavān has established!

See Page Number 38, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 té no gṛṇāné, mahinī, máhi śrávaḥ,

kṣatráṃ, Dyāvā-Pṛthivī, dhāsatho bṛhát.

yénābhí kṛṣṭí̄s tatánāma viśváhā

paná̄yiam ójǒ asmé sám invatam.

So being lauded, O great ones, bestow on us, O Heaven and Earth, great fame and ample dominion. Bring for us praiseworthy strength by which we may always extend over the peoples.

té: N. du. f., used anaphorically (p. 294, b ) . gṛṇāné: pr. pt. of 1. gṛ sing, Ā. used in ps. sense. mahinī: there are six adjectives meaning great, formed from the root mah be great: by far the commonest is máh (81); mahánt (85 a ) is also common; mahá and mahín are not common, but are inflected in several cases; máhi and mahás (83, 2 a α) are used in the N. A. sing. only, the former very often, the latter rarely. kṣatrám: without ca. dhāsathas: 2. du. sb. s ao. (p. 162, 2) of dhā bestow, to be construed with the dat. nas. abhí . . . tatánāma: pf. sb. of tan stretch (140, 1, p. 156) . viśvá-hā is an adv. formed with the suffix hā = dhā (p. 212 β) meaning literally in every manner = always (cp. viśvá̄hā in 3 d) ; on the accent cp. note on viśvátas in i. 1, 4 b. paná̄yya: see 162, 2. ójǒ: final o is pronounced short before ǎ (p. 437, a 4) , but the rhythm of the break here (–ᴗ–) is abnormal (p. 440, f. n. 6) . asmé: properly loc. of vayám (p. 104) , but also used as a dat., is Pragṛhya; it is dat. here (200 A 1) . invatam: 2. du. ipv. of inv, a secondary root produced by a transfer from the fifth class (i-nu) to the first, ínv-a (133, 3 b ) .

ÍNDRA

Indra is invoked alone in about one-fourth of the hymns of the RV., far more than are addressed to any other deity; for he is the favourite national god of the Vedic people. He is more anthropomorphic on the physical side, and more invested with mythological imagery, than any other member of the pantheon. He is primarily a god of the thunderstorm who vanquishes the demons of drought or darkness, and sets free the waters or wins the light. He is secondarily the god of battle who aids the victorious Āryan in overcoming his aboriginal foes.

His physical features, such as body and head, are often referred to; after he has drunk Soma he agitates his jaws and his beard; and his belly is many times mentioned in connexion with his great powers of drinking Soma. Being tawny (hári) in colour, he is also tawny-haired and tawny-bearded. His arms are especially often referred to because they wield the thunderbolt (vájra). which, mythologically representing the lightning stroke, is his exclusive weapon. This bolt was fashioned for him by Tvaṣṭṛ, being made of iron (āyasá), golden, tawny, sharp, many-pointed, sometimes spoken of as a stone or rock. Several epithets, compounds or derivatives of vájra, such as vájra-bāhu bearing the bolt in his arm and vajrín wielder of the bolt are almost without exception applied to him. Sometimes he is described as armed with bow and arrows; he also carries a hook (aṅkuśá).

Having a golden car, drawn by two tawny steeds (hárī), he is a car-fighter (ratheṣṭhâ̄). Both his car and his steeds were fashioned by the Ṛbhus, the divine artificers.

As Indra is more addicted to Soma than any of the other gods, the common epithet ‘Soma-drinker’ (Somapá̄) is characteristic of him. This beverage stimulates him to carry out his warlike deeds; thus for the slaughter of Vṛtra he is said to have drunk three lakes of Soma. One whole hymn (x. 119) is a monologue in which Indra, intoxicated with Soma, boasts of his greatness and his might.

Indra is often spoken of as having been born, and two whole hymns deal with the subject of his birth. His father, the same as Agni’s, appears to be Dyaus; but the inference from other passages is that he is Tvaṣṭṛ, the artificer among the gods. Agni is called Indra’s twin brother, and Pūṣan (vi. 54) is also his brother. His wife, who is often mentioned, is Indrāṇī. Indra is associated with various other deities. The Maruts (i. 85) are his chief allies, who constantly help him in his conflicts. Hence the epithet Marútvant accompanied by the Maruts is characteristic of him. Agni is the god most often conjoined with him as a dual divinity. Indra is also often coupled with Varuṇa (vii. 86) and Vāyu, god of Wind, less often with Soma (viii. 48) , Bṛhaspati (iv. 50) , Pūṣan, and Viṣṇu.

Indra is of vast size; thus it is said that he would be equal to the earth even if it were ten times as large as it is. His greatness and power are constantly dwelt on: neither gods nor men have attained to the limit of his might; and no one like him is known among the gods. Thus various epithets such as śakrá and śácīvant mighty, śácīpáti lord of might, śatákratu having a hundred powers, are characteristic of him.

The essential myth forming the basis of his nature is described with extreme frequency and much variation. Exhilarated by Soma and generally escorted by the Maruts, he attacks the chief demon of drought, usually called Vṛtra, but often also the serpent (áhi). Heaven and Earth tremble when the mighty combat takes place. With his bolt he shatters Vṛtra who encompasses the waters, hence receiving the exclusive epithet apsu-jít conquering in the waters. The result of the conflict, which is regarded as being constantly renewed, is that he pierces the mountain and sets free the waters pent up like imprisoned cows. The physical elements in the conflict are nearly always the bolt, the mountain, waters or rivers, while lightning, thunder, cloud, rain are seldom directly named. The waters are often terrestrial, but also often aerial and celestial. The clouds are the mountains (párvata, girí), on which the demons lie or dwell, or from which Indra casts them down, or which he cleaves to release the waters. Or the cloud is a rock (ádri) which encompasses the cows (as the waters are sometimes called), and from which he releases them. Clouds, as containing the waters, figure as cows also; they further appear under the names of udder (ú̄dhar), spring (útsa), cask (kávandha), pail (kóśa). The clouds, moreover, appear as the fortresses (púras) of the aerial demons, being described as moving, autumnal, made of iron or stone, and as 90, 99, or 100 in number. Indra shatters them and is characteristically called the ‘fort-destroyer’ (pūrbhíd). But the chief and specific epithet of Indra is ‘Vṛtra-slayer’ (Vṛtra-hán), owing to the essential importance, in the myth, of the fight with the demon. In this fight the Maruts are his regular allies, but Agni, Soma, and Viṣṇu also often assist him. Indra also engages in conflict with numerous minor demons; sometimes he is described as destroying demons in general, the Rakṣases or the Asuras.

With the release of the waters is connected the winning of light, sun, and dawn. Thus Indra is invoked to slay Vṛtra and to win the light. When he had slain Vṛtra, releasing the waters for man, he placed the sun visibly in the heavens. The sun shone forth when Indra blew the serpent from the air. There is here often no reference to the Vṛtra fight. Indra is then simply said to find the light; he gained the sun or found it in the darkness, and made a path for it. He produces the dawn as well as the sun; he opens the darkness with the dawn and the sun. The cows mentioned along with the sun and dawn, or with the sun alone, as found, released, or won by Indra, are here probably the morning beams, which are elsewhere compared with cattle coming out of their dark stalls. Thus when the dawns went to meet Indra, he became the lord of the cows; when he overcame Vṛtra he made visible the cows of the nights. There seems to be a confusion between the restoration of the sun after the darkness of the thunderstorm, and the recovery of the sun from the darkness of night at dawn. The latter feature is probably an extension of the former. Indra’s connexion with the thunderstorm is in a few passages divested of mythological imagery, as when he is said to have created the lightnings of heaven and to have directed the action of the waters downwards. With the Vṛtra-fight, with the winning of the cows and of the sun, is also connected the gaining of Soma. Thus when Indra drove the serpent from the air, there shone forth fires, the sun, and Soma; he won Soma at the same time as the cows.

Great cosmic actions are often attributed to Indra. He settled the quaking mountains and plains. He stretches out heaven and earth like a hide; he holds asunder heaven and earth as two wheels are kept apart by the axle; he made the non-existent into the existent in a moment. Sometimes the separation and support of heaven and earth are described as a result of Indra’s victory over a demon who held them together.

As the destroyer of demons in combat, Indra is constantly invoked by warriors. As the great god of battle he is more frequently called upon than any other deity to help the Aryans in their conflicts with earthly enemies. He protects the Aryan colour and subjects the black skin. He dispersed 50,000 of the black race. He subjected the Dasyus to the Aryan, and gave land to the Aryan.

More generally Indra is praised as the protector, helper, and friend of his worshippers. He is described as bestowing on them wealth, which is considered the result of victories. His liberality is so characteristic that the frequent attribute maghávan bountiful is almost exclusively his.

Besides the central myth of the Vṛtra-fight, several minor stories are connected with Indra. In various passages he is described as shattering the car of Uṣas, goddess of Dawn (iv. 51) ; this trait is probably based on the notion of Indra’s bringing the sun when kept back by the delaying dawn. He is also said to have stopped the steeds of the Sun, apparently by causing the latter to lose a wheel of his car. Indra is further associated with the myth of the winning of Soma; for it is to him that the eagle brings the draught of immortality from the highest heaven. Another myth is the capture by Indra, with the help of Saramā, of the cows confined in a cave by demons called Paṇis.

Various stories which, though mixed with mythological elements, probably have an historical basis, are told of Indra’s having fought in aid of individual protégés, such as king Sudās, against terrestrial foes.

The attributes of Indra are chiefly those of physical superiority and rule over the physical world. He is energetic and violent in action, an irresistible fighter, an inexhaustible lavisher of the highest goods on mankind, but at the same time sensual and immoral in various ways, such as excess in eating and drinking, and cruelty in killing his own father Tvaṣṭṛ. He forms a marked contrast to Varuṇa, the other great universal monarch of the RV., who wields passive and peaceful sway, who uniformly applies the laws of nature, who upholds moral order, and whose character displays lofty ethical features.

The name of Indra is pre-Indian; for it occurs in the Avesta as that of a demon; the term verethraghna (= Vṛtrahán) is also found there as the designation of the God of Victory, though unconnected with Indra. Thus it seems likely that there was already in the Indo-Iranian period a god resembling the Vṛtra-slaying Indra of the RV. The etymology of the word is doubtful, but its radical portion ind may be connected with that in índ-u drop.

ii. 12. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 45, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 yó jātá evá prathamó mánasvān

devó devá̄n krátunā paryábhūṣat;

yásya śúṣmād ródasī ábhyasetāṃ

nṛmṇásya mahná̄: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

The chief wise god who as soon as born surpassed the gods in power; before whose vehemence the two worlds trembled by reason of the greatness of his valour: he, O men, is Indra.

evá: see p. 224, 2. mánas-vān: note that the suffix vān is not separated in the Pada text, as it is in pavítra-vān (i. 160, 3) ; had the Sandhi of the word, however, been máno-vān it would have been analysed as mánaḥ५vān. devó devá̄n: cp. i. 1, 5 c. paryábhūṣat: the exact meaning of the vb. pári bhūṣ is somewhat uncertain here, but as the greatness of Indra is especially emphasized in this hymn, surpass seems the most probable. Sāyaṇa explains it here as encompassed with protection; in the AV. as ruled over; in the TS. as surpassed. ródasī: the Pragṛhya ī of duals is not shortened in pronunciation before vowels (p. 437, f. n. 3) . ábhyasetām: ipf. of bhyas = bhī be afraid of, with abl. (p. 316, b ) . mahná̄: inst. of mahán greatness (cp. p. 458, 2) . The refrain sá, janāsa, Índraḥ ends every stanza (except the last) of this hymn; similarly víśvasmād Índra úttaraḥ ends all the twenty-three stanzas of x. 86.

See Page Number 45, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 yáḥ pṛthiví̄ṃ vyáthamānām ádṛṃhad,

yáḥ párvatān prákupitāṁ̆ áramṇāt,

yố antárikṣaṃ vimamé várīyo,

yó dyá̄m ástabhnāt: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Who made firm the quaking earth, who set at rest the agitated mountains; who measures out the air more widely, who supported heaven: he, O men, is Indra.

yás: note that every Pāda of this stanza, as well as of nearly every other stanza of this hymn, begins with a form of the relative prn. corresponding to the sá of the refrain. The cosmic deeds of Indra in all the three divisions of the universe, earth, air, and heaven, are here described. áramṇāt: ipf. of ram set at rest. vimamé várīyas (cpv. of urú, 103, 2 a ) : here the cpv. is used predicatively, extended so as to be wider; cp. vi. 69, 5, where it is said of Indra and Viṣṇu: ‘ye made the air wider and stretched out the spaces for us to live.’ dyá̄m: acc. of dyó sky. ástabhnāt: ipf. of stabh prop; in this and the preceding stanza the ipf. of narration is used throughout excepting vimamé (a form of constant occurrence, cp. 154, 1. 3; 160, 4): cp. 213 d (p. 343) .

See Page Number 45, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 yó hatvá̄him áriṇāt saptá síndhūn,

yó gá̄ udá̄jad apadhá̄ Valásya,

yó áśmanor antár agníṃ jajá̄na,

saṃvṛ́k samátsu: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Who having slain the serpent released the seven streams, who drove out the cows by the unclosing of Vala, who between two rocks has produced fire, victor in battles: he, O men, is Indra.

The first hemistich refers to the two well-known myths, the release of the waters by the conquest of Vṛtra, and the capture of the cows imprisoned by Vala; cp. ii. 14, 2: yó apó vavṛvá̄ṃsaṃ Vṛtráṃ jaghá̄na who slew Vṛtra who had enclosed the waters, and ibid. 3: yó gá̄ udá̄jad, ápa hí Valáṃ váḥ who drove out the cows, for he unclosed Vala. áriṇāt: ipf. of ri release. saptá síndhūn: the seven rivers of the Panjāb. gá̄s: A. pl. of gó cow. ud-á̄jat: ipf. of aj drive. There is some doubt as to the exact interpretation of apadhá̄, a word that occurs here only. In form it can only be an I. s. of apa-dhá̄ (cp. 97, 2) . The parallel use of ápa-vṛ in ii. 14, 3 (quoted above) indicates that apa-dhá̄ means the unclosing by Indra of the cave of Vala in which the cows are imprisoned; cp. also i. 11, 5: tváṃ Valásya gómató ’pāvar bílam thou hast unclosed the aperture of Vala rich in cows. The form is explained by Durga, the commentator on the Nirukta, by apadhānena as meaning udghāṭanena Valasya by the unclosing of Vala. Sāyaṇa interprets it as an irregularity for the abl. = from the enclosure of Vala. Valásya: the objective gen. (p. 320, B 1 b ) = by opening (the cave of) Vala. áśmanor antár: between two clouds, according to Sāyaṇa; between heaven and earth according to Durga; the allusion is to the lightning form of Agni who in several passages is said to be ‘in the rock’, to be ‘produced from the rock’ and is called ‘son of the rock’ (ádreḥ sūnúḥ).

See Page Number 47, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 yénemá̄ víśvā cyávanā kṛtá̄ni,

yó dá̄saṃ várṇam ádharaṃ gúhá̄kaḥ;

śvaghní̄va yó jigīvá̄ṁ̆ lakṣám á̄dad

aryáḥ puṣṭá̄ni: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

By whom all things here have been made unstable, who has made subject the Dāsa colour and has [ ] made it disappear; who, like a winning gambler the stake, has taken the possessions of the foe: he, O men, is Indra.

imá̄ víśvā: all these things, that is, all things on earth. cyávanā is used predicatively after kṛtá̄ni, just as ádharam is in b after ákar; cp. iv. 30, 22: yás tá̄ víśvāni cicyuṣé who hast shaken the whole world. dá̄saṃ várṇam: the non-Aryan colour (= kṛṣṇáṃ várṇam), the aborigines; note the difference of accent in the substantive dāsá and the adj. dá̄sa. ákar: root ao. of kṛ (148, 1 b ) , to be construed with both ádharam ( make inferior = subject ) and gúhā ( put in hiding = cause to disappear, drive away ). When a final Visarjanīya in the Saṃhitā text represents an etymological r, this is indicated in the Pada text by putting íti after the word and repeating the latter in its pause form: ákar íty ákaḥ. jigīvá̄ṁ̆: pf. pt. of ji win (139, 4) ; on the Sandhi see 40, 3. Since the normal metre requires ᴗᴗ– after the caesura (p. 441, top) , this word was here perhaps metrically pronounced jigivá̄ṁ̆ as it came to be regularly written in B. á̄dat: irr. a ao. (147 a 1) from dā give; though not analysed in the Pada text, it must owing to the sense be = ā-ádat has taken. aryás: gen of arí (99, 3) ; this word appears to be etymologically a Bv. = having no wealth (ri = rai), either for oneself (whence the sense needy, suppliant ) or to bestow on others (whence the sense niggard, foe ). [If a single meaning has to be given, devout is misleading, and suppliant should be substituted for it in the Vedic Grammar, p. 81, f. n. 1; 99, 3; and in the Index, p. 473.]

See Page Number 48, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yáṃ smā pṛchánti kúha séti ghorám,

utém āhur náiṣó astí̄ti enam;

só ’ryáḥ puṣṭí̄r víja ivá̄ mināti.

śrád asmai dhatta: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

The terrible one of whom they ask ‘where is he’, of whom they also say ‘he is not’; he diminishes the possessions of the niggard like the (player’s) stake. Believe in him: he, O men, is Indra.

smā (p. 250) is metrically lengthened, the second syllable of the Pāda favouring a long vowel (p. 441, top) . pṛchánti: pr. of prach. séti for sá íti: the irr. contraction of sá with a following vowel is common (48 a ) . īm anticipates enam: see p. 220. āhur: pf. of ah say, 139, 4; this vb. not being accented, b has the form of a principal clause, though the almost invariable use of relative clauses in this hymn would lead one to expect that the yám of the first clause would accentuate the second also. só aryás: the initial a, though written, should be dropped; otherwise the irr. contraction víjevá̄ is just possible, but ᴗ– for ᴗᴗ following a caesura after the fifth syllable is rare. 5 c is parallel to 4 c: á̄ mināti to á̄dat; aryáḥ puṣṭí̄ḥ to āryáḥ puṣṭá̄ni; víjaḥ to lakṣám. Uṣas (iv. 51) is in i. 92, 10 described as wearing away the life of mortals, śvaghní̄va kṛtnúr víja á̄minānā diminishing it as a skilful gambler the stakes. mināti: pr. of mī damage. śrád dhatta (2. pl. ipv. of dhā) believe, with dat. (200 A. 1 e ). The Pādas a b mention doubts as to the existence of Indra; c implies that he does exist; and d calls for belief in him.

See Page Number 49, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 yó radhrásya coditá̄, yáḥ kṛśásya,

yó brahmáṇo ná̄dhamānasya kīréḥ;

yuktágrāvṇo yó avitá̄ suśipráḥ

sutásomasya: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Who is furtherer of the rich, of the poor, of the suppliant Brahmin singer; who, fair-lipped, is the helper of him that has pressed Soma and has set to work the stones: he, O men, is Indra.

coditá̄ governs the three genitives (the rich, the poor, the priestly poet) of a b, as the three relatives show; while avitá̄ governs that of c. su-śiprás: Bv. cd., p. 455, c a. The exact meaning of śipra is somewhat doubtful, but as it is regularly dual, has the attributive tawny, hári-śipra being parallel to hári-śmaśāru tawny-bearded, and is associated with Indra’s drinking of Soma, it can hardly mean anything but lips or moustaches; it could not well mean jaws which are hánū. yuktá-grāvṇas: of him who has set in motion the stones with which the Soma shoots are pounded.

See Page Number 50, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 yásyá̄śvāsaḥ pradíśi, yásya gá̄vo,

yásya grá̄mā, yásya víśve ráthāsaḥ;

yáḥ sú̄riaṃ, yá uṣásaṃ jajá̄na;

yó̆ apá̄ṃ netá̄: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

In whose control are horses, kine, clans, all chariots; who creates the sun, the dawn; who is the guide of the waters: he, O men, is Indra.

uṣásam: often also uṣá̄sam; du. N. A. uṣásā and uṣá̄sā; N. pl. uṣásas and uṣá̄sas; see 83, 2 a, f. n. 1.

See Page Number 50, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 yáṃ krándasī saṃyatí̄ vihváyete,

párĕ ávara ubháyā amítrāḥ;

samānáṃ cid rátham ātasthivá̄ṃsā

ná̄nā havete: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Whom the two battle-arrays, coming together, call upon divergently, both foes, the farther and the nearer; two having mounted the self-same chariot invoke him separately: he, O men, is Indra.

saṃ-yatí̄: pr. pt. du. n. of sám-i go together. vi-hváyete (from hvā) and ná̄nā havete (from hū, the Samprasāraṇa form of hvā) are synonymous = call on variously; cp. i. 102, 5. 6: ná̄nā hí tvā hávamānā jánā imé these men calling on thee (Indra) variously; and átha jánā ví hvayante siṣāsávaḥ so men call on thee variously, desiring gains. páré ’vara: must be read párĕ ávara, though the succession of five short syllables before the caesura is irregular (p. 440, 4) . The second Pāda explains krándasī: ubháyās (never used in the dual) = both groups of foes, that on the farther and that on the nearer side, from the point of view of the speaker; according to Sāyaṇa, the superior and the inferior. samānám contrasted with ná̄nā: two who are on the same chariot, that is, the fighter and the driver, invoke him separately. havete: not being accented must be taken as the vb. of a principal clause; cp. note on 5 b.

See Page Number 51, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 yásmān nárté vijáyante jánāso,

yáṃ yúdhyamānā ávase hávante;

yó víśvasya pratimá̄naṃ babhú̄va, [ ]

yó acyutacyút: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Without whom men do not conquer, whom they when fighting call on for help; who has been a match for every one, who moves the immovable: he, O men, is Indra.

ná ṛté: must be pronounced nárté (19 a ) . vi-jáyante: pr. of ji conquer. hávante: cp. vihváyete in 8 a. ávase: final dat. (p. 314, B 2) . pratimá̄nam: cp. iv. 18, 4: nahí̄ nú asya pratimá̄nam ásti antár jātéṣu utá yé jánitvāḥ for there is no match for him among those who have been born nor those who will be born. acyuta-cyút: cp. 4 a; also iii. 30, 4: tváṃ cyāváyann ácyutāni . . . cárasi thou continuest shaking unshaken things.

See Page Number 52, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 yáḥ śáśvato máhi éno dádhānān

ámanyamānāñ cháruā jaghá̄na;

yáḥ śárdhate ná̄nudádāti śṛdhyá̄ṃ,

yó dásyor hantá̄: sá, janāso, Índraḥ.

Who slays with his arrow the unexpecting many that commit great sin; who forgives not the arrogant man his arrogance, who slays the Dasyu: he, O men, is Indra.

dádhānān: pr. pt. Ā. of dhā. The Sandhi of ān (39) is not applied between Pādas (cp. i. 35, 10 c) . ámanyamānān: not thinking scil. that he would slay them; on the Sandhi of n + ś, see 40, 1. śárvā: with his arrow (inst., p. 80); with his characteristic weapon, the vájra, he slays his foes in battle. jaghá̄na: has slain (and still slays) may be translated by the present (213 A a ). anudádāti: 3. s. pr. of ánu + dā forgive, with dat. (cp. 200 A f ) . dásyos̱: of the demon, a term applied to various individual demons, such as Sambara (11 a).

See Page Number 52, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 yáḥ Śámbaraṃ párvateṣu kṣiyántaṃ

catvāriṃśyá̄ṃ śarádi anvávindat;

ojāyámānaṃ yố áhiṃ jaghá̄na,

Dá̄nuṃ śáyānaṃ: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Who in the fortieth autumn found out Śambara dwelling in the mountains; who has slain the serpent as he showed his strength, the son of Dānu, as he lay: he, O men, is Indra.

Śambara, next to Vṛtra, Vala, and Śuṣṇa, is the most frequently mentioned demon foe of Indra, who strikes him down from his mountain. He is often spoken of as possessing many forts. kṣiyántam: see note on i. 154, 2 d. catvāriṃśyá̄m: that is, Indra found him after a very long search, as he was hiding himself. anvávindat: ipf. of 2. vid find. The second hemistich refers to Indra’s slaughter of Vṛtra. ojāyámānam: cp. iii. 32, 11: áhann áhiṃ pariśáyānam árṇa ojāyámānam thou slewest the serpent showing his strength as he lay around the flood. Dá̄num: this is strictly the name of Vṛtra’s mother, here used as a metronymic = Dānava; cp. i. 32, 9: Dá̄nuḥ śaye sahávatsā ná dhenúḥ Dānu lay like a cow with her calf (i. e. Vṛtra). śáyānam: pr. pt. Ā. of śī lie (134, 1 c ).

See Page Number 53, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 yáḥ saptáraśmir vṛṣabhás túviṣmān

avá̄sṛjat sártave saptá síndhūn;

yó Rauhiṇám ásphurad vájrabāhur

dyá̄m āróhantaṃ: sá, janāsa, Índráḥ.

The mighty seven-reined bull who let loose the seven streams to flow; who armed with the bolt spurned Rauhiṇa as he scaled heaven: he, O men, is Indra.

The term vṛṣabhá is very often applied to gods, but especially to Indra, as expressing mighty strength and fertility. saptá-raśmis: having seven reins probably means ‘hard to restrain’, ‘irresistible’; Sāyaṇa interprets the cd. to mean ‘having seven kinds of clouds (parjanyās) that shed rain on the earth’. túviṣ-mān: the suffix mant is separated in the Pada text only after vowels, as gó ५ mān; on the Sandhi see 10 a. ava-ásṛjat: ipf. of sṛj emit. sártave: dat. inf. of sṛ flow (p. 192, 4) . saptá síndhūn: cp. 3 a and i. 35, 8 b. Rauhiṇám: a demon mentioned in only one other passage of the RV. dyá̄m ā-róhantam: ascending to heaven in order to attack Indra.

See Page Number 54, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 Dyá̄vā cid asmai Pṛthiví̄ namete;

śúṣmāc cid asya párvatā bhayante;

yáḥ somapá̄ nicitó vájrabāhur,

yó vájrahastaḥ: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Even Heaven and Earth bow down before him; before his vehemence even the mountains are afraid. Who is known as the Somadrinker, holding the bolt in his arm, who holds the bolt in his hand: he, O men, is Indra.

Dyá̄vā . . . Pṛthiví̄: the two members of Devatā-dvandvas are here, as often, separated by other words (186 A 1). asmai: dat. with nam bow (cp. 200 A 1 k, p. 311 ). bháyante: see note on i. 85, 8 c. śúṣmād: cp. 1 c. soma-pá̄s (97, 2) : predicative nom., (196 b ) ni-citás: on the accent see p. 462, f. n. 4.

See Page Number 54, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 yáḥ sunvántam ávati, yáḥ pácantaṃ,

yáḥ śáṃsantaṃ, yáḥ śaśamānám ūtí̄;

yásya bráhma várdhanaṃ, yásya sómo,

yásyedáṃ rá̄dhaḥ: sá, janāsa, Índraḥ.

Who with his aid helps him that presses Soma, him that bakes, him that offers praise, him that has prepared the sacrifice; whom prayer, whom Soma, whom this gift strengthens: he, O men, is Indra.

sunvántam: all the participles in a and b refer to some act of worship: pressing Soma; baking sacrificial cakes, c.; praising the gods; having prepared the sacrifice. śaśamānám: explained by Sāyaṇa as stotraṃ kurvāṇam offering a Stotra; by the Naighaṇṭuka, iii. 14, as arcantam singing; by the Nirukta, vi. 8, as śaṃsamānam praising. ūtí̄: contracted inst. of ūtí (p. 80) to be construed with ávati; cp. i. 185, 4: ávasā ávantī helping with aid. várdhanam: to be taken predicatively with each of the three subjects bráhma, sómas, rá̄dhas, of whom prayer, c. is the strengthening, that is, whom prayer, c. strengthens; yásya being an objective gen. (p. 320, B 1 b ) . idáṃ rá̄dhas this gift = this sacrificial offering.

See Page Number 55, Hymn Number 15 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

15 yáḥ sunvaté pácate dudhrá á̄ cid

vá̄jaṃ dárdarṣi, sá kílāsi satyáḥ.

vayáṃ ta, Indra, viśváha priyá̄saḥ,

suví̄rāso vidátham á̄ vadema.

As he who, most fierce, enforces booty for him that presses and him that bakes, thou indeed art true. We ever dear to thee, O Indra, with strong sons, would utter divine worship.

This concluding stanza is the only one that does not end with the refrain sá, jánāsa, Índraḥ. Instead, the poet, changing from the 3. to the 2. prs., substitutes at the end of b the words sá kíla ᴗ asi satyáḥ as such thou art indeed true = to be depended on (cp. note on satyám in i. 1, 6 c); while c and d are a prayer ending with an adaptation of the favourite refrain of the Gautamas, the poets of the second Maṇḍala: bṛhád vadema vidáthe suví̄rāḥ we would, accompanied by strong sons, speak aloud at divine worship. á̄ cid: perhaps better taken as emphasizing dudhrás (cp. p. 216) than with dárdarṣi (int. of dṝ). te: gen. with priyá̄sas (p. 322, C) . vidátham: the etymology and precise sense of this word have been much discussed. There can now be hardly any doubt that it is derived from the root vidh worship, and that it means divine worship, scarcely distinguishable from yajñá, of which it is given as a synonym in Naighaṇṭuka, iii. 17; cp. note on i. 85, 1.

RUDRÁ

This god occupies a subordinate position in the RV., being celebrated in only three entire hymns, in part of another, and in one conjointly with Soma. His hand, his arms, and his limbs are mentioned. He has beautiful lips and wears braided hair. His colour is brown; his form is dazzling, for he shines like the radiant sun, like gold. He is arrayed with golden ornaments, and wears a glorious necklace (niṣká). He drives in a car. His weapons are often referred to: he holds the thunderbolt in his arm, and discharges his lightning shaft from the sky; but he is usually said to be armed with a bow and arrows, which are strong and swift.

Rudra is very often associated with the Maruts (i. 85) . He is their father, and is said to have generated them from the shining udder of the cow Pṛśni.

He is fierce and destructive like a terrible beast, and is called a bull, as well as the ruddy (aruṣá) boar of heaven. He is exalted, strongest of the strong, swift, unassailable, unsurpassed in might. He is young and unaging, a lord (í̄śāna) and father of the world. By his rule and univeral dominion he is aware of the doings of men and gods. He is bountiful (mīḍhvá̄ṃs), easily invoked and auspicious (śivá). But he is usually regarded as malevolent; for the hymns addressed to him chiefly express fear of his terrible shafts and deprecation of his wrath. He is implored not to slay or injure, in his anger, his worshippers and their belongings, but to avert his great malignity and his cow-slaying, man-slaying bolt from them, and to lay others low. He is, however, not purely maleficent like a demon. He not only preserves from calamity, but bestows blessings. His healing powers are especially often mentioned; he has a thousand remedies, and is the greatest physician of physicians. In this connexion he has two exclusive epithets, jálāṣa, cooling, and jálāṣa-bheṣaja, possessing cooling remedies.

The physical basis represented by Rudra is not clearly apparent. But it seems probable that the phenomenon underlying his nature was the storm, not pure and simple, but in its baleful aspect seen in the destructive agency of lightning. His healing and beneficent powers would then have been founded partly on the fertilizing and purifying action of the thunderstorm, and partly on the negative action of sparing those whom he might slay. Thus the deprecations of his wrath led to the application of the euphemistic epithet śivá, which became the regular name of Rudra’s historical successor in post-Vedic mythology.

The etymological sense of the name is somewhat uncertain, but would be ‘Howler’ according to the usual derivation from rud cry.

ii. 33. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 57, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 á̄ te, pitar Marutāṃ, sumnám etu:

má̄ naḥ sú̄ryasya saṃdṛ́śo yuyothāḥ.

abhí no vīró árvati kṣameta;

prá jāyemahi, Rud a ra, prajá̄bhiḥ.

Let thy good will, O Father of the Maruts, come (to us): sever us not from the sight of the sun. May the hero be merciful to us in regard to our steeds; may we be prolific with offspring.

pitar Marutām: the whole of a compound voc. expression loses its accent unless it begins a sentence of Pāda; in the latter case only the first syllable would be accented (p. 465, 18 a ) . yuyothās: 2. s. inj. Ā. of 2. yu separate, with irregular strong radical vowel (p. 144, α) . saṃdṛ́śas: abl. 201 A 1. vīrás = Rudra, with change from 2. to 3. prs., as is often the case (cp. i. 85, 5 c) . árvati abhí kṣameta = may he not injure us in our steeds, may he spare them. Rudra must be read as a trisyllable (15, 1 d ).

See Page Number 58, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 tvá̄dattebhī, Rud a ra, śáṃtamebhiḥ

śatáṃ hímā aśīya bheṣajébhiḥ.

ví asmád dvéṣo vitaráṃ, ví áṃho,

ví ámīvāś cātayasvā víṣūcīḥ.

By the most salutary medicines given by thee, O Rudra, I would attain a hundred winters. Drive far away from us hatred, away distress, away diseases in all directions.

tvá̄-dattebhī: the first member of this cd. retains the inst. case-form (p. 273) ; Sandhi, 47. śatám: on the concord see p. 291, b; life extending to a hundred winters or autumns (śarádas) is often prayed for. aśīya: root ao. op. Ā. of aṃś (p. 171, 4) . ví: the prp. of a cd. vb. is often repeated with each object, the vb. itself being used only once. vitarám: adv. of the cpv. of ví farther (cp. út-tara) employed only with verbs compounded with ví. cātayasvā: ipv. Ā. cs. of cat, with metrical lengthening of the final vowel. víṣūcīs: A. pl. f. of víṣvañc turned in various directions, is used predicatively like an adv.

See Page Number 58, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 śréṣṭho jātásya, Rud a ra, śriyá̄si,

tavástamas tavásāṃ, vajrabāho.

párṣi ṇaḥ pārám áṃhasaḥ suastí;

víśvā abhì̄tī rápaso yuyodhi.

Thou art the best of what is born, O Rudra, in glory, the mightiest of the mighty, O wielder of the bolt. Transport us to the farther shore of distress in safety. Ward off all attacks of mischief.

jātásya: the pp. used as a n. collective noun = that which has been born, creation. vajra-bāho: it is only here that this specific epithet of Indra is applied to any other deity; the voc. o of u stems is regularly treated as Pragṛhya by the Pada text, but not in the Saṃhitā text (where for instance vá̄yav á̄ and vá̄ya ukthébhiḥ are written). párṣi: from pṛ take across, is one of a number of isolated 2. s. pr. indicatives in form, but ipv. in sense (p. 349, β) . ṇas: initial n cerebralized even in external Sandhi (65 A c ). pārám: acc. of the goal (197 A 1). svastí: this word is not analysed in the Pada text (like sumatí, c.) because asti does not occur as an independent substantive; here it is a shortened form of the contracted inst. svastí̄ (p. 80, n. 2) ; it is several times used in the sense of a final dat. = svastáye. abhì̄tīs: = abhí itīs, hence the Svarita (p. 464, 17, 1 α) ; Sandhi, 47. yuyodhi: 2. s. ipv. of yu separate, with irr. strong radical vowel (p. 144, α) .

See Page Number 59, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 má̄ tvā, Rudra, cukrudhāmā námobhir,

má̄ dúṣṭutī, vṛṣabha, mā sáhūtī.

ún no vīrá̄ṁ̆ arpaya bheṣajébhir:

bhiṣáktamaṃ tvā bhiṣájāṃ śṛṇomi.

May we not anger thee, O Rudra, with our obeisances, nor with ill praise, O bull, nor with joint invocation. Raise up our heroes with remedies: I hear of thee as the best physician of physicians.

cukrudhāma: this form, red. (cs.) ao. (149, p. 174) might in itself be either sb. or inj., because the 1. pl. P. of these moods is identical in a stems; but the use here of the prohibitive pcl. má̄, which is employed with inj. forms only (180), decides the question. námobhis: that is, with ill or inadequate worship; cp. dúṣṭutī in b; the latter form is a contracted inst. (p. 80) ; on the internal Sandhi of this word see 43, 3 a. sáhūtī: contracted inst.; invocation with other deities whom Rudra might consider inferior. úd arpaya: cs. of úd ṛ (p. 197, irr. 1) = raise up, strengthen. bhiṣájām: partitive gen. (see 202 B 2 b, p. 321); cp. 3 b. śṛṇomi: pr. of śru hear; with double acc., 198, 1.

See Page Number 60, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 hávīmabhir hávate yó havírbhir,

áva stómebhī Rud a ráṃ diṣīya:

ṛdūdáraḥ suhávo má̄ no asyáia [ ]

babhrúḥ suśípro rīradhan maná̄yai.

Rudra who is called on with invocations and with oblations, I would appease with songs of praise: may he, the compassionate, easy to invoke, ruddy brown, fair-lipped, not subject us to that jealousy of his.

hávīman: from hū call, but havís from hu sacrifice. áva diṣīya: s ao. op. Ā. of dā give (144, 3) . ṛdūdáras is not analysed in the Pada text, perhaps owing to a doubt whether it is = ṛdu-udára or ṛdū-dára (the former is the view of Yāska who explains it as mṛdu-udara); for ṛdū-pá̄ and ṛdū-vṛ́dh are separated and dara is separated in puraṃ-dará. Both this word (according to the former analysis) and su-háva are Bv. (p. 455, c α). babhrús: this colour is attributed to Rudra in viii. 9, 15 also; otherwise it is applied more often to Soma (viii. 48) as well as once to Agni. su-śípras: see note on ii. 12, 6 c. rīradhat: inj. red. ao. of randh. asyái maná̄yai: that is, Rudra’s well-known wrath is deprecated; cp. 4 a b. There is some doubt as to the exact interpretation of this stanza. The chief objection to the above explanation is the necessity to take hávate in a ps. sense (= hūyate according to Sāyaṇa). The following sense has also been suggested: ‘he who invokes Rudra (thinks), “I would buy off Rudra with songs of praise”: let not Rudra subject us to that suspicion (on his part).’

See Page Number 61, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 ún mā mamanda vṛṣabhó Marútvān

tvákṣīyasā váyasā ná̄dhamānam.

ghṛ́ṇīva chāyá̄m arapá̄ aśīya:

á̄ vivāseyaṃ Rud a rásya sumnám.

The bull accompanied by the Maruts has gladdened me, the suppliant, with his most vigorous force. I would unscathed attain shade in heat as it were: I would desire to win the good will of Rudra.

úd . . . mamanda: pf. of mand (nasalized form of mad) gladden; intransitive, be glad, in Ā. only. ṛṣabhás: Rudra. Marútvān: though this epithet is characteristic of Indra, it is also twice applied to Rudra (as father of the Maruts, see 1 a) as well as very rarely to a few other gods who are associated with Indra; on the Sandhi see 40, 2. ghṛ́ṇīva has been much discussed. The only natural explanation (following the Pada text) is ghṛ́ṇi iva, taking ghṛ́ṇi as a contracted inst. f. (p. 80) expressing either cause = by reason of heat (199 A 3) or time = in heat (199 A 5); Sāyaṇa’s explanation is ghṛ́ṇī iva like one heated by the rays of the sun; but a word ghṛṇín N. ghṛṇí̄ does not occur, and the accent is wrong. For the simile cp. vi. 16, 38: úpa chāyá̄m iva ghṛ́ṇer áganma śárma te vayám we have entered thy shelter like shade (protecting) from heat (p. 317, 2) . aśīya: see 2 b; on the Sandhi of the final vowel of the Pāda, cp. i. 160, 4 c. á̄ vivāseyam: op. ds. of van win.

See Page Number 61, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 kúa syá te, Rud a ra, mṛḷayá̄kur

hásto yṓ ásti bheṣajó jálāṣaḥ?

apabhartá̄ rápaso dáiviasya

abhí̄ nú mā, vṛṣabha, cakṣamīthāḥ.

Where, O Rudra, is that merciful hand of thine which is healing and cooling? As remover of injury coming from the gods, to thou, O Bull, now be compassionate towards me.

kvaí̱ sya: see p. 450, b. bheṣajás is an adj. here and in one other passage; otherwise it is a n. noun meaning medicine. apabhartá̄: on the accent see p. 453, 9 d. dáivyasya: derived from the gods, that is, such as is inflicted by Rudra himself; on the Sandhi of the final vowel, cp. 6 c. abhí̄: final vowel metrically lengthened in the second syllable of the Pāda, but not in 1 c. cakṣamīthās: 2. s. pf. op. of kṣam (p. 156, 3) .

See Page Number 62, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 prá babhráve vṛṣabhá̄ya śvitīcé

mahó mahí̄ṃ suṣṭutím īrayāmi.

namasyá̄ kalmalīkínaṃ námobhir.

gṛṇīmási tveṣáṃ Rudrásya ná̄ma.

For the ruddy-brown and whitish bull I utter forth a mighty eulogy of the mighty one. I will adore the radiant one with obeisances. We invoke the terrible name of Rudra.

prá . . . īrayāmi: an example of the prp. at the beginning, and the vb. to which it belongs at the end of a hemistich. śvitīcé: D. s. of śvityáñc (cp. 93) . mahás: gen. s. m. of máh, beside the acc. s. f. of the same adj. (Sāyaṇa: mahato mahatīm), of the great one (Rudra); cp. i. 1, 5 c. namasyá̄: according to the Pada this form has its final syllable metrically lengthened for namasyá, which is the 2. s. ipv.; otherwise it is the 1. s. sb. (p. 128) , which is the more likely because the third syllable does not favour metrical lengthening, and because the 1. prs. is used both in the preceding and the following Pāda. The metre of c is abnormal because the caesura follows the third syllable, and there is a secondary caesura after the eighth. gṛṇīmási: 1. pl. pr. of gṛ sing (p. 138) .

See Page Number 63, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 sthirébhir áṅgaiḥ pururú̄pa ugró

babhrúḥ śukrébhiḥ pipiśe híraṇyaiḥ.

í̄śānād asyá bhúvanasya bhú̄rer

ná vá̄ u yoṣad Rud a rá̄d asuryàm.

With his firm limbs, having many forms, the mighty one, ruddy-brown, has adorned himself with bright gold ornaments. From the ruler of this great world, from Rudra, let not his divine dominion depart.

sthirébhir áṅgaiḥ: probably to be construed with pipiśe, by means of his firm limbs he has adorned himself with golden ornaments, that is, his limbs are adorned with golden ornaments; Sāyaṇa supplies yuktás furnished with firm limbs. pipiśe: pf. Ā. of piś. í̄śānād: pr. pt. (agreeing with Rudrād) of īś rule over with gen. (202 A a ); the pf. pt. is īśāná. bhú̄res: agreeing with bhúvanasya; cp. vii. 95, 2: cétantī bhúvanasya bhú̄reḥ taking note of the wide world (where bhú̄res could not agree with any other word); Sāyaṇa takes it with Rudrá̄d. yoṣat: s ao. of yu separate (p. 162, 2 ; 201 A 1). asuryàm: an examination of the occurrences of this word indicates that as an adj. it should be pronounced asuría, but as a substantive asuryá.

See Page Number 63, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 árhan bibharṣi sá̄yakāni dhánva

árhan niṣkáṃ yajatáṃ viśvárūpam;

árhann idáṃ dayase víśvam ábhvam:

ná vá̄ ójīyo, Rud a ra, tvád asti.

Worthy thou bearest arrows and bow; worthy thy adorable all-coloured necklace; worthy thou wieldest all this force: there is nothing mightier than thou, O Rudra.

bibharṣi: 2. s. pr. of bhṛ bear; this pr. stem is much less common than that according to the first class, bhára. árhann: 52. ídám: this, viz. that thou possessest. dayase: 2. s. Ā. pr. of 2. dā divide. Sāyaṇa interprets idáṃ dayase ábhvam as thou protectest this very extensive (ábhvam) world. tvád: abl. after cpv. (p. 317, 3) .

See Page Number 64, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 stuhí śrutáṃ gartasádaṃ yúvānaṃ,

mṛgáṃ ná bhīmám upahatnúm, ugrám.

mṛḷá̄ jaritré Rud a ra stávāno:

anyáṃ tě asmán ní vapantu sénāḥ.

Praise him, the famous, that sits on the car-seat, the young, the mighty, that slays like a dread beast. O Rudra, being praised be gracious to the singer: let thy missiles lay low another than us.

yúvānam: other gods also, such as Agni, Indra, the Maruts, are spoken of as young. mṛgáṃ ná bhīmám: cp. note on i. 154, 2 b; either a bull (vṛṣabhó ná bhīmáḥ vi. 22, 1) or a lion (siṃhó ná bhīmáḥ, iv. 16, 14) may be meant. mṛḷá: ipv. of mṛḍ; with dat., p. 311, f. stávānas: here, as nearly always, in a ps. sense. asmád: abl. with anyá, p. 317, 3. sénās: that this word here means missiles is rendered probable by the parallel passage VS. 16, 52: yá̄s te sahásraṃ hetáyo ’nyám asmán ní vapantu tá̄ḥ may those thousand missiles of thine lay low another than us.

See Page Number 65, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 kumāráś cit pitáraṃ vándamānaṃ

práti nānāma Rud a ropayántam.

bhú̄rer dātá̄raṃ sátpatiṃ gṛṇīṣe:

stutás tuáṃ bheṣajá̄ rāsi asmé.

A son bows towards his father who approving approaches him, O Rudra. I sing to the true lord, the giver of much: praised thou givest remedies to us.

The interpretation of a b is doubtful. It seems to mean: Rudra, as a father, approaches with approval the singer, as a son; Rudra, being addressed in the voc., is told this in an indirect manner. I cannot follow Sāyaṇa (pratinato ’smi I have bowed down to ) and several translators in treating nanāma as 1. s. pf., which in the RV. could only be nanama (p. 149, n. 1) . nānāma: = pr.; the lengthening of the first syllable is not metrical, see 139, 9. The meaning of c d appears to correspond to that of a b: Rudra, being praised, shows his favour by bestowing his remedies; the singer therefore extols him as the giver of riches. gṛṇīṣe: an irr. form of the 1. s. Ā. of gṛ sing. asmé: dat., p. 104; 200 A 1.

See Page Number 65, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 yá̄ vo bheṣajá̄, Marutaḥ, śúcīni,

yá̄ śáṃtamā, vṛṣaṇo, yá̄ mayobhú,

yá̄ni Mánur ávṛṇītā, pitá̄ nas:

tá̄ śáṃ ca yóś ca Rud a rásya vaśmi.

Your remedies, O Maruts, that are pure, that are most wholesome, O mighty ones, that are beneficent, that Manu, our father, chose: these and the healing and blessing of Rudra I desire.

Marutas: the Maruts, as the sons of Rudra (cp. 1 a) are here incidentally invoked, and their remedies associated with Rudra’s. mayobhú: the short form of the N. pl. n. ( p. 82 , n. 7, and p. 83 , d ). Mánus: the ancestor of mankind, often spoken of as a father or ‘our father’, and the institutor of sacrifice. ávṛṇītā: 3. s. ipf. Ā. (with metrically lengthened final vowel) of 2. vṛ choose. śám, yós: these words are frequently used in combination, either as adverbs or substantives.

See Page Number 66, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 pári ṇo hetí̄ Rud a rásya vṛjyāḥ,

pári tveṣásya durmatír mahí̄ gāt.

áva sthirá̄ maghávadbhyas tanuṣva;

mí̄ḍhvas, toká̄ya tánayāya mṛḷa.

May the dart of Rudra pass us by, may the great ill will of the terrible one go by us: slacken thy firm (weapons) for (our) liberal patrons; O bounteous one, be merciful to our children and descendants.

vṛjyās: 3. s. root ao. prc. (p. 172 a ) of vṛj twist. gāt: root ao. inj. of gā go. maghávadbhyas: the I. D. Ab. pl. of maghávan are formed from the supplementary stem maghávant (91, 5). áva tanuṣva sthirá̄: relax the taut, with reference to the bow, the special weapon of Rudra; used with the dat. because equivalent to mṛḷa be merciful to (p. 311 f ) . mí̄ḍhvas: voc. of the old unreduplicated pf. pt. mīḍhvá̄ṃs, cp. p. 66; 157 b (p. 182) . mṛḷa: = mṝḷa, p. 437, a 9.

See Page Number 66, Hymn Number 15 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

15 evá̄, babhro vṛṣabha cekitāna,

yáthā, deva, ná hṛṇīṣé ná háṃsi,

havanaśrún no Rud a rehá bodhi.

bṛhád vadema vidáthe suví̄rāḥ.

So, O ruddy brown, far-famed bull, be listening here, O Rudra, to our invocation, inasmuch as thou art not wroth and slayest not, O god. We would, with strong sons, speak aloud at divine worship.

éva: to be taken with c, since in the normal syntactical order it should follow yáthā in the sense which it here has (p. 241, 1) ; when yathā meaning so that follows, it is normally construed with the sb. (241, 2) , not with the ind., as here. cekitāna: voc. int. pr. pt. of cit note; Sāyaṇa explains it as knowing all, but the act. only has this sense (e. g. cikitvá̄ṃs knowing ); this and the two preceding vocatives are unaccented because not beginning the Pāda (p. 466, 18 b ) . hṛṇīṣé: 2. s. Ā. pr. of 2. hṛ be angry. háṃsi: 2. s. pr. of han; Sandhi, 66 A 2. bodhi: 2. s. root ao. ipv. of bhū (p. 172, n. 1) . nas: dat. to be taken with bodhi, lit. be invocation-hearing for us (not gen. dependent on havana, lit. hearing the invocation of us ). vadema: see note on ii. 12, 15 d.

APÁ̄Ṃ NÁPĀT

This deity is celebrated in one entire hymn (ii. 35) , is invoked in two stanzas of a hymn to the Waters, and is often mentioned incidentally elsewhere. Brilliant and youthful, he shines without fuel in the waters which surround and nourish him. Clothed in lightning, he is golden in form, appearance, and colour. Standing in the highest place, he always shines with undimmed splendour. Steeds, swift as thought, carry the Son of Waters. In the last stanza of his hymn he is invoked as Agni and must be identified with him; Agni, moreover, in some hymns addressed to him, is spoken of as Apāṃ napāt. But the two are also distinguished; for example, ‘Agni, accordant with the Son of Waters, confers victory over Vṛtra’. The epithet āśu-héman swiftly-speeding, applied three times to Apāṃ napāt, in its only other occurrence refers to Agni. Hence Apāṃ napāt appears to represent the lightning form of Agni which lurks in the cloud. For Agni, besides being directly called Apāṃ napāt, is also termed the embryo (gárbha) of the waters; and the third form of Agni is described as kindled in the waters.

This deity is not a creation of Indian mythology, but goes back to the Indo-Iranian period. For in the Avesta Apãm napāṭ is a spirit of the [ ] waters, who lives in their depths, who is surrounded by females, who is often invoked with them, who drives with swift steeds, and is said to have seized the brightness in the depth of the ocean.

ii. 35. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 68, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 úpem asṛkṣi vājayúr vacasyá̄ṃ:

cáno dadhīta nādió gíro me.

Apá̄ṃ nápād āśuhémā kuvít sá

supéśasas karati? jóṣiṣad dhí.

Desirous of gain I have sent forth this eloquence (to him): may the son of streams gladly accept my songs. Will he, the Son of Waters, of swift impulse, perchance make (them) well-adorned? For he will enjoy (them).

asṛkṣí: 1. s Ā. s ao. of sṛj, which with úpa may take two acc., so that nādyám might be supplied. On īm see 180 (p. 220) . dadhīta: 3. s. pr. op. Ā. of dhā, which with cánas takes the acc. or loc. nādyá, which occurs only here, is evidently synonymous with apá̄ṃ nápāt in c. āśuhémā, though a Bv., is accented on the second member: see p. 455 c α. karati: 3. s. sb. root ao. of kṛ: unaccented because kuvit necessarily accents the verb only if it is in the same Pāda. supéśasas well-adorned = well-rewarded; cp. ii. 34, 6: dhíyaṃ vá̄japeśasam a prayer adorned with gain; on the accent see p. 455 c α; on the Sandhi (-s k-) see 43, 2 a. jóṣiṣat: 3. s. sb. iṣ ao. of juṣ. hí explains why he is likely to accept them; it accents jóṣiṣat, which, however, as beginning a new sentence (p. 466, 19 a ) , would be accented without it.

See Page Number 68, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 imáṃ sú asmai hṛdá á̄ sútaṣṭáṃ [ ]

mántraṃ vocema: kuvíd asya védat?

Apá̄ṃ nápād, asuríasya mahná̄,

víśvāni aryó bhúvanā jajāna.

We would verily utter from our heart this well-fashioned hymn for him. Perchance he will take note of it. The Son of Waters, the lord, by the greatness of divine dominion, has created all beings.

hṛdá á̄: this expression occurs several times, e. g. iii. 39, 1: matír hṛdá á̄ vacyámānā a prayer welling from the heart. sútaṣṭam well-fashioned, like a car, to which the seers frequently compare their hymns; on the accent see p. 456, 1 a; cp. p. 462, 13 b. asmai and asya: unaccented, p. 452, 8 B c; dat. of prs. with vac: cp. 200, 1 c. védat: 3. s. pr. sb. of vid know, with gen., cp. 202 A c. asuryàsya: see p. 451, 6.

See Page Number 69, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 sám anyá̄ yánti, úpa yanti anyá̄ḥ:

samānám ūrváṃ nadíaḥ pṛṇanti.

tám ū śúciṃ śúcayo dīdivá̄ṃsam

Apá̄ṃ nápātaṃ pári tásthur á̄paḥ.

While some flow together, others flow to (the sea): the streams fill the common receptacle; him the pure, the shining Son of Waters, the pure waters stand around.

yánti: accented because of the antithesis expressed by anyá̄ḥ—anyá̄ḥ, the first vb. then being treated as subordinate (see p. 468 β). ūrvám: = ocean. samānám: common, because all streams flow into it. nadyàs: cp. asuryàsya in 2 c. pṛṇanti: from pṝ fill. ū: u is often lengthened in the second syllable of a Pāda before a single consonant (see p. 220) . dīdivá̄ṃsam: pf. pt. of dī shine, with lengthened red. vowel (139, 9) and shortened radical vowel; the sense is illustrated by 4 d. pári tasthur: = they tend him.

See Page Number 70, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 tám ásmerā yuvatáyo yúvānaṃ

marmṛjyámānāḥ pári yanti á̄paḥ:

sá śukrébhiḥ śíkvabhī revád asmé

dīdá̄yānidhmó ghṛtánirṇig apsú.

Him, the youth, the young maidens, the waters, not smiling, making him bright surround: he with clear flames shines bountifully on us, without fuel in the waters, having a garment of ghee.

ásmerās: it is somewhat uncertain what is the exact sense here implied; but judging by iv. 58, 8, where the drops of ghee are described as hastening ‘to Agni like beauteous maidens, smiling, to meeting-places’, it may mean that the waters attend seriously on this form of Agni, not as lovers. yúvānam: a term applied to Agni in several passages. marmṛjyámānās: the vb. mṛj is often used of making Agni bright, with ghee, c. śíkvabhis: the precise sense is somewhat doubtful, but it must mean ‘flames’ or the like. Note that though in this word the ending bhis is separated in the Pada text, it is not so in śukrébhis because śúkre is not a stem. asmé: dat. Pragṛhya, 26 c. dīdá̄ya: 3. s. pf. of dī shine, with long red. vowel (139, 9) . an-idhmás: accent, p. 455 c α; cp. x. 30, 4: yó anidhmó dīdayad apsú antár who shone without fuel in the waters. ghṛtánirṇik: an epithet otherwise applied only to Agni and (once) to the sacrifice (yajñá): note that the second member appears in the Pada text as nirnik, in accordance with the analysis niḥ-nik when the word occurs uncompounded.

See Page Number 71, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 asmái tisró avyathiá̄ya ná̄rīr

devá̄ya deví̄r didhiṣanti ánnam:

kṛ́tā ivópa hí prasarsré apsú;

sá pīyú̄ṣaṃ dhayati pūrvasú̄nām.

On him, the immovable god, three divine women desire to bestow food: for he has stretched forth as it were to the breasts (?) in the waters: he sucks the milk of them that first bring forth.

tisró deví̄ḥ: the waters in the three worlds are probably meant; in iii. 56, 5 Agni is spoken of as having three mothers (trimātá̄), and three maidens of the waters (yoṣánās tisró ápyāḥ) are there mentioned: they wish to feed him, while he desires to drink their milk. didhiṣanti: ds. of 1. dhā bestow: this is the usual form, while dhítsa is rare. kṛ́tās: the meaning of this word, which occurs here only, is quite uncertain. pra-sarsré: 3. s. pr. int. of sṛ. dhayati: 3. s. pr. of 2. dhā suck. pūṛvasú̄nām: i. e. Apāṃ napāt is their first offspring; cp. x. 121, 7: á̄po janáyantīr Agním the waters producing Agni.

See Page Number 71, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 áśvasya átra jánimāsyá ca svàr.

druhó riṣáḥ saṃpṛ́caḥ pāhi sūrí̄n.

āmá̄su pūrṣú parố apramṛṣyáṃ

ná̄rātayo ví naśan ná̄nṛtāni.

The birth of this steed is here and in heaven. Do thou protect the patrons from falling in with malice and injury. Him that is not to be forgotten, far away in unbaked citadels, hostilities shall not reach nor falsehoods.

Though every word is clear in this stanza the meaning of the whole is somewhat uncertain. It seems to be this: Apāṃ napāt is produced from both the terrestrial and the heavenly waters. He is invoked to protect sacrificers from injury. He himself dwells beyond the reach of foes. áśvasya: Agni is often spoken of as a steed. átra: here, i. e. in the waters of earth. svàr: this is the only passage in the RV. in which the word is not to be read as súar; it is here a loc. without the ending i (see 82 c ). pāhi: the change from the 3. to the 2. prs. in the same stanza is common in the RV. with reference to deities. On this form depends the abl. inf. saṃpṛ́cas as well as the two preceding ablatives: lit. protect the patrons from malice and from injury, from falling in with them (cp. p. 337 a ) . āmá̄su: in the unbaked, i. e. natural (cloud) citadels. pūrṣú: loc. pl. of púr, 82. parás: note the difference of accent between this adv. and the N. s. adj. páras yonder, other. naśat: inj. pr. of 3. naś reach.

See Page Number 72, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 svá á̄ dáme sudúghā yásya dhenúḥ,

svadhá̄ṃ pīpāya, subhú ánnam atti;

sò ’pá̄ṃ nápād ūrjáyann apsú antár,

vasudéyāya vidhaté ví bhāti.

He, in whose own house is a cow yielding good milk, nourishes his vital force, he eats the excellent food; he, the Son of Waters, gathering strength within the waters, shines forth for the granting of wealth to the advantage of the worshipper.

svá á̄ dáme: that is, within the waters; in i. 1, 8 své dáme refers to the sacrificial altar on which Agni grows, that is, flames up. The first three Pādas merely vary the sense of 5. The food that he eats is the milk that he receives, and that strengthens him. svadhá̄m: this word is not analysed in the Padapāṭha of the RV. and AV. (as if derived from a root svadh), but it is separated in that of the TS. as sva-dhá̄. pīpāya: 3. s. pf. of pi swell, with lengthened red. vowel (139, 9) . só apá̄m must be read as sò ’pá̄m since a must here be metrically elided (21 a; p. 465, 17, 3). On apsv àntár see p. 450, 2 b [where a̱psvi̱antaḥ should be corrected to a̱psvai̱ntaḥ]. vidhaté: dat. of advantage (p. 314, B 1) ; on the accent see p. 458, 11, 3. vasudhéyāya: dat. of purpose, ibid., B 2. ví bhāti: here Apāṃ napāt is thought of as the terrestrial Agni appearing on the sacrificial altar.

See Page Number 73, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 yố apsú á̄ śúcinā dáiviena

ṛtá̄vá̄jasra urviyá̄ vibhá̄ti:

vayá̄ íd anyá̄ bhúvanāni asya

prá jāyante vīrúdhaś ca prajá̄bhiḥ.

Who in the waters, with bright divinity, holy, eternal, widely shines forth: as offshoots of him other beings and plants propagate themselves with progeny.

śúcinā dáivyena: = divine brightness. ṛtá̄vā: note that in the Padapāṭha the original short a is restored (cp. i. 160, 1) . vayá̄s: other beings are his offshoots because he produced them; cp. 2 d: víśvāni bhúvanā jajāna. prajá̄bhis: cp. ii. 33, 1, prá jāyemahi prajá̄bhiḥ.

See Page Number 73, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 Apá̄ṃ nápād á̄ hí ásthād upásthaṃ

jihmá̄nām, ūrdhvó vidyútaṃ vásānaḥ.

tásya jyéṣṭhaṃ mahimá̄naṃ váhantīr,

híraṇyavarṇāḥ pári yanti yahví̄ḥ.

The Son of Waters has occupied the lap of the prone (waters), (himself) upright, clothing himself in lightning. Bearing his highest greatness, golden-hued, the swift streams flow around (him).

The lightning Agni is again described in this stanza. jihmá̄nām ūrdhváḥ: these words are in contrast; cp. i. 95, 5 of Agni: vardhate . . . āsu jihmá̄nām ūrdhváḥ . . . upásthe he grows in them, upright in the lap of the prone. tásya mahimá̄nam his greatness = him the great one. híraṇyavarṇās: because he is clothed in lightning. pári yanti: cp. 3 a and 4 b. yahví̄s: the meaning of the word yahvá, though it occurs often, is somewhat uncertain: it may be great (Naighaṇṭuka, Sāyaṇa), or swift (Roth), or young (Geldner).

See Page Number 74, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 híraṇyarūpaḥ, sá híraṇyasaṃdṛg;

Apá̄ṃ nápāt séd u híraṇyavarṇaḥ;

hiraṇyáyāt pári yóner niṣádyā,

hiraṇyadá̄ dadati ánnam asmai.

He is of golden form, of golden aspect; this Son of Waters is of golden hue; to him (coming) from a golden womb, after he has sat down, the givers of gold give food.

In this stanza the terrestrial Agni is described. He is spoken of as ‘golden’ because of the colour of his flames. séd: 48 a. pári as a prp. here governs the abl. (176, 1 a ). The golden source of Agni may be the sun, as Durga thinks; thus the solar deity Savitṛ is spoken of as distinctively golden (cp. i. 35) ; but hiraṇyáya yóni may = hiraṇyagarbhá (x. 121, 1) at the creation, when Agni was produced from the waters (x. 121, 7) . Sāyaṇa wishes to supply rājate after niṣádya = having sat down shines. This is quite unnecessary; it is more natural to take c and d as one sentence, niṣádya referring to asmai: to him, after he has sat down, they give (cp. 210) . Note that the Pada text shortens the final vowel of niṣádyā (cp. 164, 1) . hiraṇyadá̄s: that is, those who give gold as a sacrificial fee, the patrons of the sacrifice. In a hymn in praise of the dakṣiṇá̄ the sacrificial fee (x. 107, 2) it is said hiraṇyadá̄ amṛtatváṃ bhajante the givers of gold partake of immortality. dadati: 3. pl. pr. act. of dā give (p. 125, f. n. 4) . ánnam: the oblation (cp. 11 d) .

See Page Number 75, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 tád asyá̄nīkam utá cá̄ru ná̄ma

apīcíaṃ vardhate náptur apá̄m.

yám indháte yuvatáyaḥ sám itthá̄

híraṇyavarṇaṃ: ghṛtám ánnam asya.

That face of his and the dear secret name of the Son of Waters grow. Of him, whom, golden-coloured, the maidens kindle thus, ghee is the food.

ánīkam: the flaming aspect of Agni seen at the sacrifice. apīcyàm: secret; cp. gúhyaṃ cá̄ru ná̄ma the dear secret name of Soma (ix. 96, 16) ; the secret name of the Son of Waters grows means that the sacrificial Agni, under his secret name of Son of Waters, grows in the waters, cherished by them; another way of expressing what is said in 4 and 7. The cadence of b is irregular, the last syllable but one being short instead of long (cp. p. 440) . yuvatáyas: the waters (cp. 4 a) . sám: the prp. after the vb. (p. 468, 20) . ghṛtám ánnam asya: cp. ghṛtánirṇik in 4 d and subhv ánnam atti in 7 b. The general meaning of the stanza is: Agni, who in the hidden form of Apāṃ Napāt is nourished in the waters, is at the sacrifice fed with ghee.

See Page Number 76, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 asmái bahūná̄m avamá̄ya sákhye

yajñáir vidhema námasā havírbhiḥ:

sáṃ sá̄nu má̄rjmi; dídhiṣāmi bílmair;

dádhāmi ánnaiḥ; pári vanda ṛgbhíḥ.

To him the nearest friend of many we offer worship with sacrifices, homage, oblations: I rub bright (his) back; I support (him) with shavings; I supply (him) with food; I extol (him) with stanzas.

avamá̄ya: lit. the lowest, that is, the nearest; bahūná̄m (accent, p. 458, 2 α): of many (gods). In iv. 1, 5 Agni is invoked as avamá and nédiṣṭha nearest; and in AB. i. 1, 1 Agni is called the lowest (avamá) of the gods (while Viṣṇu is the highest paramá), because he is always with men as the terrestrial fire. sáṃ má̄rjmi: cp. marmṛjyámānās in 4 b; on the accent cp. i. 35, 9 c. The prp. sám may be supplied with the other two following verbs. dídhiṣāmi: pr. ds. of dhā put; accented as first word of a new sentence. bílmais: with shavings, to make the newly kindled fire flame up. ánnais: with oblations. dádhāmi: pr. of dhā put.

See Page Number 76, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 sá īṃ vṛ́ṣājanayat tá̄su gárbhaṃ;

sá īṃ śíśur dhayati; táṃ rihanti;

sò ’pá̄ṃ nápād ánabhimlātavarṇo

anyásyevehá tanúā viveṣa.

He, the bull, generated in them that germ; he, as a child, sucks them; they kiss him; he, the Son of Waters, of unfaded colour, works here with the body of another.

In a and b Apāṃ napāt reproduces himself in the waters; in c and d he appears as the sacrificial fire on earth. īm anticipates gárbham; him, that is, a son. tá̄su: in the waters, as his wives. īm in b = them, the waters, who here are both the wives and mothers of Apāṃ napāt. dhayati: cp. 5 d. rihanti: lit. lick, as a cow the calf. só apá̄m: here the a, though written must be dropped after o, as in 7 c. ánabhimlāta-varṇas: he is as bright here as in the waters; cp. híraṇyavarṇas in 10 b; on the Sandhi, cp. note on i. 1, 9 b. anyásya iva: of one who seems to be another, but is essentially the same. ihá: on earth, in the form of the sacrificial Agni.

See Page Number 77, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 asmín padé paramé tasthivá̄ṃsam,

adhvasmábhir viśváhā dīdivá̄ṃsam,

á̄po, náptre ghṛtám ánnaṃ váhantīḥ,

svayám átkaiḥ pári dīyanti yahví̄ḥ.

Him stationed in this highest place, shining for ever with undimmed (rays), the Waters, bringing ghee as food to (their) son, swift, themselves fly around with their robes.

padé paramé: in the abode of the aerial waters. adhvasmábhis: a substantive has to be supplied: flames or rays; cp. 4 c, śukrébhiḥ śíkvabhir dīdá̄ya. náptre: apá̄m is omitted because á̄pas immediately precedes. átkais: the meaning of this word is not quite certain, but it most probably means garment; the commentators give several senses. The expression perhaps implies that the waters cover him up for protection or concealment. pári dīyanti (dī fly ); cp. pári yanti in 4 b and 9 d, and pári tasthur in 3 d.

See Page Number 78, Hymn Number 15 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

15 áyāṃsam, Agne, sukṣitíṃ jánāya;

áyāṃsam u maghávadbhyaḥ suvṛktím:

víśvaṃ tád bhadráṃ yád ávanti devá̄ḥ.

bṛhád vadema vidáthe suví̄rāḥ.

I have bestowed, O Agni, safe dwelling on the people; I have also bestowed a song of praise on the patrons: auspicious is all that the gods favour. We would, with strong sons, speak aloud at divine worship.

áyāṃsam: 1. s. s ao. of yam. Agne: the sacrificial Agni is here addressed. jánāya: on (our) people, by means of this hymn. suvṛktím: a hymn that will produce the fulfilment of their wishes. bhadrám: if a hymn finds favour with the gods, it will produce blessings. vadema: the poet desires this also as a reward for his hymn. The final hemistich also occurs at the end of ii. 23; and the last Pāda is the refrain of twenty-three of the forty-three hymns of the second Maṇḍala.

MITRÁ

The association of Mitra with Varuṇa is so intimate that he is addressed alone in one hymn only (iii. 59). Owing to the scantiness of the information supplied in that hymn his separate character appears somewhat indefinite. Uttering his voice, he marshals men and watches the tillers with unwinking eye. He is the great Āditya who marshals, yātayati, the people, and the epithet yātayáj-jana arraying men together appears to be peculiarly his. Savitṛ (i. 35) is identified with Mitra because of his laws, and Viṣṇu (i. 154) takes his three steps by the laws of Mitra: statements indicating that Mitra regulates the course of the sun. Agni, who goes at the head of the dawns (that is to say, is kindled before dawn), produces Mitra, and when kindled is Mitra. In the Atharvaveda, Mitra at sunrise is contrasted with Varuṇa in the evening, and in the Brāhmaṇas Mitra is connected with day, Varuṇa with night.

The conclusion from the Vedic evidence that Mitra was a solar deity, is corroborated by the Avesta and by Persian religion in general, where Mithra is undoubtedly a sun-god or a god of light specially connected with the sun.

The etymology of the name is uncertain, but it must originally have meant ‘ally’ or ‘friend’, for the word often means ‘friend’ in the RV., and the Avestic Mithra is the guardian of faithfulness. As the kindly nature of the god is often referred to in the Veda, the term must in the beginning have been applied to the sun-god in his aspect of a benevolent power of nature.

iii. 59. Metre: Triṣṭubh, 1-5; Gāyatrī, 6-9.

See Page Number 79, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 Mitró jánān yātayati bruvāṇó;

Mitró dādhāra pṛthiví̄m utá dyá̄m;

Mitráḥ kṛṣṭí̄r ánimiṣābhí caṣṭe:

Mitrá̄ya havyáṃ ghṛtávaj juhota.

Mitra speaking stirs men; Mitra supports earth and heaven; Mitra regards the people with unwinking eye: to Mitra offer the oblation with ghee.

yātayati: stirs to activity. bruvāṇás: by calling, that is, arousing them; cp. what is said of Savitṛ: ‘who makes all beings hear him by his call’ (v. 82, 9) and ‘he stretches out his arms that all may hear him’ (ii. 38, 2). Sāyaṇa interprets the word as being praised or making a noise. Some scholars take the pt. with Mitrás in the sense of he who calls himself Mitra, but this in my opinion is in itself highly improbable, while this construction cannot be shown to exist in the RV., and even later seems only to occur when the name immediately precedes, i. e. Mitró bruvāṇáḥ. This Pāda occurs slightly modified in vii. 36, 2 as jánaṃ ca Mitró yatati bruvāṇáḥ. dādhāra: pf. = pr.; p. 342 a (cp. 139, 9); note that the red. syllable of this pf. is never shortened in the Pada text (cp. i. 154, 4). dyá̄m: acc. of dyó (102, 3). ánimiṣā: inst. of á-nimiṣ; it is characteristic of Mitra and Varuṇa to regard men with unwinking eye. caṣṭe: 3. s. of cakṣ; on the Sandhi see 66 B 2 a. juhota: 2. pl. ipv. irr. strong form occurring beside the regular juhutá (p. 144, B 3 α).

See Page Number 80, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 prá sá, Mitra, mártǒ astu práyasvān,

yás ta, Āditya, śíkṣati vraténa.

ná hanyate, ná jīyate tuóto:

náinam áṃho ’śnoty ántito ná dūrá̄t.

Let that mortal offering oblations, O Mitra, be pre-eminent who pays obeisance to thee, O Āditya, according to (thy) ordinance. He who is aided by thee is not slain nor vanquished: trouble reaches him neither from near nor from far.

tvótas: tva must often be read as tua; tuótas is therefore more natural than the prosodical shortening (p. 437 a 4) of tvă-ú̄tas. The fourth Pāda has one syllable too many as written in the Saṃhitā text. By dropping the a after o the correct number of syllables is obtained, but the break (––ᴗ) remains quite irregular (p. 440, 4 B).

See Page Number 81, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 anamīvá̄sa íḷayā mádanto,

mitájñavo várimann á̄ pṛthivyá̄ḥ,

Ādityásya vratám upakṣiyánto,

vayáṃ Mitrásya sumatáu siāma.

Free from disease, delighting in the sacred food, firm-kneed on the expanse of earth, abiding by the ordinance of the Āditya, may we remain in the good will of Mitra.

váriman: loc. (90, 2) with á̄; note that váriman is n., varimán, m. (p. 453, 9 c ). Ādityásya: that is, of Mitra.

See Page Number 81, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 ayáṃ Mitró namasíaḥ suśévo,

rá̄jā sukṣatró ajaniṣṭa vedhá̄ḥ:

tásya vayáṃ sumatáu yajñíyasya,

ápi bhadré saumanasé siāma.

This Mitra, adorable, most propitious, a king wielding fair sway, has been born as a disposer: may we remain in the goodwill of him the holy, in his auspicious good graces.

ajaniṣṭa: 3. s. Ā. iṣ ao. of jan. vedhá̄s: that is, as a wise moral ruler; on the dec. see 83, 2 a. ápi: to be taken as a verbal prp. with as be.

See Page Number 81, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 mahá̄ṁ̆ Ādityó námasopasádyo

yātayájjano gṛṇaté suśévaḥ:

tásmā etát pányatamāya júṣṭam

agnáu Mitrá̄ya havír á̄ juhota.

The great Āditya, to be approached with homage, stirring men, to the singer most propitious: to him most highly to be praised, to Mitra, offer in fire this acceptable oblation.

mahá̄ṁ̆: 39. yātayájjanas: on the accent of governing cds. see p. 455 b. gṛṇaté: dat. of pr. pt. of gṛ sing; accent, p. 458, 3. júṣṭam: a pp. of juṣ enjoy, with shift of accent when used as an adj. meaning welcome (cp. p. 384). juhota: cp. note on 1 d.

See Page Number 82, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 Mitrásya carṣaṇīdhṛ́to,

ávo devásya sānasí,

dyumnáṃ citráśravastamam.

Of Mitra, the god who supports the folk, the favour brings gain, (his) wealth brings most brilliant fame.

carṣaṇīdhṛ́tas: the Pada text restores the metrically lengthened short vowel of carṣaṇi. -dhṛ́tó ’vo: p. 465, 17, 3; cp. note on i. 1, 9 b. citráśravastamam: see note on i. 1, 5 b.

See Page Number 82, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 abhí yó mahiná̄ dívaṃ

Mitró babhú̄va sapráthāḥ,

abhí śrávobhiḥ pṛthiví̄m:

Mitra the renowned, who is superior to heaven by his greatness, superior to earth by his glories:

abhí bhū surpass takes the acc. mahiná̄ for mahimná̄: 90, 2. dívam: acc. of dyú, 99, 5: cp. dyó, 102, 3. babhú̄va: the pf. here is equivalent to a pr.; p. 342 a. In c babhú̄va must be supplied with the repeated prp.; cp. note on ii. 33, 2. The cadence of c is irregular: –ᴗᴗ– instead of ᴗ–ᴗ–; cp. p. 438, 3 a.

See Page Number 83, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 Mitrá̄ya páñca yemire

jánā abhíṣṭiśavase:

sá devá̄n víśvān bibharti.

To Mitra, strong to help, the five peoples submit: he supports all the gods.

páñca jánāḥ: the five peoples, here = all mankind. yemire: 3. pl. pf. Ā. of yam (see p. 150, f. n. 1). bibharti: 3. s. pr. P. of bhṛ. víśvān: this is the regular word for all in the RV.: its place begins to be taken by sárva in late hymns. The general meaning of the stanza is that gods and men are dependent on Mitra. The cadence of c is trochaic instead of iambic (see p. 439 a ).

See Page Number 83, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 Mitró, devéṣu āyúṣu,

jánāya vṛktábarhiṣe

íṣa iṣṭávratā akaḥ.

Mitra, among gods and mortals, has provided food, according to the ordinances he desires, for the man whose sacrificial grass is spread.

iṣṭá-vratās: a Bv. agreeing with íṣas, food regulated by the ordinances which Mitra desires, i. e. to be eaten according to fixed rules.

BṚ́HASPÁTI

This god is addressed in eleven entire hymns, and in two others conjointly with Indra. He is also, but less frequently, called Bráhmaṇas páti, ‘Lord of prayer’, the doublets alternating in the same hymn. His physical features are few: he is sharp-horned and blue-backed; golden-coloured and ruddy. He is armed with bow and arrows, and wields a golden hatchet or an iron axe. He has a car, drawn by ruddy steeds, which slays the goblins, bursts open the cow-stalls, and wins the light. Called the father of the gods, he is also said to have blown forth their births like a blacksmith. Like Agni, he is both a domestic and a brahmán priest. He is the generator of all prayers, and without him sacrifice does not succeed. His song goes to heaven, and he is associated with singers. In several passages he is identified with Agni, from whom, however, he is much oftener distinguished. He is often invoked with Indra, some of whose epithets, such as maghávan bountiful and vajrín wielder of the bolt he shares. He has thus been drawn into the Indra myth of the release of the cows. Accompanied by his singing host he rends Vala with a roar, and drives out the cows. In so doing he dispels the darkness and finds the light. As regards his relation to his worshippers, he is said to help and protect the pious man, to prolong life, and to remove disease.

Bṛ́haspáti is a purely Indian deity. The double accent and the parallel name Bráhmaṇas páti indicate that the first member is the genitive of a noun bṛ́h, from the same root as bráhman, and that the name thus means ‘Lord of prayer’.

He seems originally to have represented an aspect of Agni, as a divine priest, presiding over devotion, an aspect which had already attained an independent character by the beginning of the Rigvedic period. As the divine brahmán priest he seems to have been the prototype of Brahmā, the chief of the later Hindu triad.

iv. 50. Indra is invoked with Bṛhaspati in 10 and 11.

Metre: Triṣṭubh; 10 Jagatī.

See Page Number 84, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 yás tastámbha sáhasā ví jmố ántān

Bṛ́haspátis triṣadhasthó ráveṇa,

táṃ pratná̄sa ṛ́ṣayo dí̄dhiānāḥ

puró víprā dadhire mandrájihvam.

Bṛhaspati who occupying three seats with roar has propped asunder with might the ends of the earth, him, the charming-tongued, the ancient scers, the wise, pondering, placed at their head.

ví tastámbha: the prp. here follows the vb. and is separated from it by an intervening word: p. 468, 20. jmás: gen. of jmá̄ (97, 2). Pronounce jmṓ antá̄n (p. 437 α 4). Cosmic actions like that expressed in a are ascribed to various deities. Bṛ́haspátis: note that this cd. is not analysed in the Pada text, while its doublet Bráhmaṇas páti is treated as two separate words. triṣadhasthás: refers to the three sacrificial fires and is a term predominantly applied to Agni, cp. v. 11, 2: puróhitam Agníṃ náras triṣadhasthé sám īdhire men have kindled Agni as their domestic priest in his triple seat; on the accent see p. 455, 10 c α. ráveṇa: referring to the loud sound of the spells uttered; the word is especially used in connexion with the release of the cows from Vala; cp. 4 c and 5 b. puró dadhire: appointed their Purohita, a term frequently applied to Agni, who is also continually said to have been chosen priest by men.

See Page Number 85, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 dhunétayaḥ supraketáṃ mádanto

Bṛ́haspate, abhí yé nas tatasré

pṛ́ṣantaṃ sṛprám ádabdham ūrváṃ;

Bṛ́haspate, rákṣatād asya yónim.

Who with resounding gait, rejoicing, O Bṛhaspati, for us have attacked the conspicuous, variegated, extensive, uninjured herd: O Bṛhaspati, protect its dwelling.

This is a very obscure stanza, the allusions in which can only be conjectured. The subject of a-c is not improbably the ancient priests, mentioned in 1 c, who with the aid of Bṛhaspati recaptured the cows confined in the stronghold of Vala. mádantas: being exhilarated with Soma. tatasré: 3. pl. pf. Ā. of taṃs shake. pṛ́ṣantam: perhaps in allusion to the dappled cows contained in it. supraketám: easy to recognize, i.e. by their lowing, cp. i. 62, 3, Bṛhaspati found the cows; the heroes roared (vāvaśanta) with the ruddy kine. The fourth Pāda is a prayer to Bṛhaspati to protect the recovered kine. Pāda c is a Dvipadā hemistich: see p. 443 a. rákṣatāt: 2. s. ipv. of rakṣ: on the accent see p. 467 A c.

See Page Number 86, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 Bṛ́haspate, yá̄ paramá̄ parāvád,

áta á̄ ta ṛtaspṛ́śo ní ṣeduḥ.

túbhyaṃ khātá̄ avatá̄ ádridugdhā

mádhvaḥ ścotanti abhíto virapśám.

O Bṛhaspati, that which is the farthest distance, from thence (coming) those that cherish the rite have seated themselves for thee. For thee springs that have been dug, pressed out with stones, drip superabundance of mead on all sides.

áta á̄ ní ṣedur: cp. ii. 35, 10 c. ṛtaspṛ́śas: perhaps the gods; or the ancient seers mentioned in 1 c and perhaps in 2: they have come from the farthest distance and have seated themselves at the Soma libation offered to thee. khātá̄s . . . ádridugdhās: two figures alluding to the streams of Soma, which flows in channels and is pounded with stones. mádhvas: on this form of the gen. see p. 81, f. n. 12.

See Page Number 86, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 Bṛ́haspátiḥ prathamáṃ já̄yamāno

mahó jyótiṣaḥ, paramé víoman,

saptáāsyas tuvijātó ráveṇa

ví saptáraśmir adhamat támāṃsi.

Bṛhaspati when first being born from the great light in the highest heaven, seven-mouthed, high-born, with his roar, seven-rayed, blew asunder the darkness.

mahás: abl. of máh, agreeing with jyótiṣas (cp. 201 A 1). The Sun is probably meant; cp. ii. 35, 10 c. saptá̄syas in iv. 51, 4 is an epithet of Áṅgira (in iv. 40, 1 Bṛhaspati is Āṅgirasá); it is parallel to saptáraśmi, an epithet applied also once to Agni and once to Indra. ráveṇa: cp. 1 b and 5 b. ví adhamat: ipf. of dham. Agni and Sūrya are also said to dispel the darkness.

See Page Number 87, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 sá suṣṭúbhā, sá ṛ́kvatā gaṇéna

valáṃ ruroja phaligáṃ ráveṇa:

Bṛ́haspátir usríyā havyasú̄daḥ

kánikradad vá̄vaśatīr úd ājat.

He with the well-praising, jubilant throng burst open with roar the enclosing cave: Bṛhaspati bellowing drove out the lowing ruddy kine that sweeten the oblation.

gaṇéna: the Aṅgirases, who in i. 62, 3 are associated with Indra and Bṛhaspati in the finding of the cows: Bṛ́haspátir bhinád ádriṃ, vidád gá̄ḥ: sám usríyābhir vāvaśanta náraḥ Bṛhaspati cleft the mountain, he found the cows; the heroes (= the Aṅgirases) roared with the ruddy kine. phaligám: the exact meaning of this word does not clearly appear from its four occurrences; but it must have a sense closely allied to receptacle: e. g. viii. 32, 25, yá udnáḥ phaligáṃ bhinán, nyàk síndhūṁ̆r avá̄sṛjat who (Indra) cleft the receptacle of water (and) discharged the streams downwards; in three passages it is spoken of as being rent or pierced, and twice is associated with Vala; and in the Naighaṇṭuka it is given as a synonym of megha cloud. ráveṇa: with reference both to Bṛhaspati and the kine (cp. 5 d). havya-sú̄das: that is, with milk. kánikradat: intv. pr. pt. of krand; cp. 173, 3; 174 b. vá̄vaśatīs: intv. pr. pt. of vāś (cp. 174).

See Page Number 88, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 evá̄ pitré viśvádevāya vṛ́ṣṇe

yajñáir vidhema, námasā, havírbhiḥ.

Bṛ́haspate, suprajá̄ vīrávanto

vayáṃ siāma pátayo rayīṇá̄m.

Then to the father that belongs to all the gods, the bull, we would offer worship with sacrifices, obeisance, and oblations. O Bṛhaspati, with good offspring and heroes we would be lords of wealth.

evá̄: with final vowel metrically lengthened. The sense of the pcl. here is: such being the case (cp. 180). pitré: Bṛhaspati. The term is applied to Agni, Indra, and other gods. vīrávantas: that is, possessing warrior sons, cp. i. 1, 3 c. vayám: this line occurs several times as the final Pāda of a hymn; cp. viii. 48, 13.

See Page Number 88, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 sá íd rá̄jā prátijanyāni víśvā

śúṣmeṇa tasthāv abhí vīríeṇa,

Bṛ́haspátiṃ yáḥ súbhṛtaṃ bibhárti,

valgūyáti, vándate pūrvabhá̄jam.

That king with his impulse and his heroism overcomes all hostile forces, who keeps Bṛhaspati well-nourished, honours him, and praises him as receiving the first (portion of the offering).

abhí: the prp., as often, here follows the vb. súbhṛtaṃ bibhárti: lit. cherishes him as well-cherished (predicative). All three verbs depend on yás, though the last two, as beginning a Pāda and a sentence, would even otherwise be accented. valgūyáti: note that this denominative is treated as a cd. in the Pada text (cp. 175 A 1). pūrvabhá̄jam: predicative.

See Page Number 89, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 sá ít kṣeti súdhita ókasi své,

tásmā íḷā pinvate viśvadá̄nīm;

tásmai víśaḥ svayám evá̄ namante,

yásmin brahmá̄ rá̄jani pú̄rva éti.

That king dwells well-established in his own abode, to him the consecrated food always yields abundance; to him his subjects bow down of their own accord, with whom the priest has precedence.

kṣeti: from 1. kṣi possess or dwell. sú-dhita: this form of the pp. of dhā is still preserved as the last member of cds. (otherwise hitá); the word is explained as su-hita in the AB. ókasi své: cp. své dáme in i. 1, 8 c. íḷā: explained as food (annam) in AB. viii. 26, 7, and as earth (bhūmi) by Sāyaṇa. yásmin rá̄jani: the loc. here = in the presence of whom, in whose case; the antecedent is here put in the relative clause, while in 7 a it accompanies the corr. (sá id rá̄jā). pú̄rva éti: with reference to this line the AB. viii. 26, 9 remarks, purohitam evaitad āha thus one calls him a Purohita; cp. also AB. viii. 1, 5: brahma khalu vai kṣatrāt pūrvam the Brāhmaṇa certainly precedes the Kṣatriya.

See Page Number 89, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 ápratí̄to jayati sáṃ dhánāni

prátijanyāni utá yá̄ sájanyā.

avasyáve yó várivaḥ kṛṇóti

brahmáṇe rá̄jā, tám avanti devá̄ḥ.

Unresisted he wins wealth both belonging to his adversaries and to his own people. The king who for the priest desiring (his) help procures prosperity, him the gods help.

After the statement in 7 that the king who honours Bṛhaspati prospers, it is added in 8 and 9 that the king who honours the Brahman, the counterpart among men of Bṛhaspati, also prospers.

jayati sám: prp. after the vb. (p. 285 f ). dhánāni: he wins wealth both abroad and at home. avasyáve—avanti: both words from the same root av: the gods help the king who helps the Brahman.

See Page Number 90, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 Índraś ca sómaṃ pibataṃ, Bṛhaspate,

asmín yajñé mandasāná̄, vṛṣaṇvasū:

á̄ vāṃ viśantu índavaḥ suābhúvo;

asmé rayíṃ sárvavīraṃ ní yachatam.

O Indra and Bṛhaspati, drink the Soma, rejoicing at this sacrifice, O ye of mighty wealth; let the invigorating drops enter you two; bestow on us riches accompanied altogether with sons.

Índraś ca: nom. for voc. (196 c α; cp. ca, p. 228, 1 and 1 a ). pibatam: 2. du. ipv. of pā drink. mandasāná̄: ao. pt. of mand = mad. vṛ́ṣaṇ-vasū: here vṛṣan = mighty, great; Sāyaṇa explains the word as if it were a governing cd. (189 A), the normal form of which would, however, be varṣáṇ-vasu (189 A 2; cp. p. 455 b ). Note that in the Pada text the cd. is first marked as Pragṛhya with íti and then analysed; also that in the analysis the first member here appears not in its pause form vṛṣan (65) but in its Sandhi form with ṇ as not final. rayíṃ sárvavīram: that is, wealth with offspring consisting of sons only: a frequent prayer (cp. i. 1, 3 c). yachatam: 2. ipv. pr. of yam. Here we have the intrusion of a Jagatī stanza in a Triṣṭubh hymn (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7). In this and the following stanza Indra is associated with Bṛhaspati, as in the whole of the preceding hymn, iv. 49.

See Page Number 91, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 Bṛ́haspata, Ind a ra, várdhataṃ naḥ;

sácā sá̄ vāṃ sumatír bhūtu asmé.

aviṣṭáṃ dhíyo; jigṛtáṃ púraṃdhīr;

jajastám aryó vanúṣām árātīḥ.

O Bṛhaspati and Indra, cause us to prosper; let that benevolence of yours be with us. Favour (our) prayers; arouse rewards; weaken the hostilities of foe and rivals.

Bṛ́haspata Indra: contrary to the general rule the second voc. is here unaccented (p. 465, 18 a ); this is doubtless because the two are here treated as a dual divinity, as in the preceding hymn (iv. 49), in every stanza of which they are invoked as Indrā-Bṛhaspatī. Indra must be pronounced trisyllabically (cp. p. 15 d ). vām: gen. (109 a ). bhūtu: 3. s. ipv. root ao. of bhū. asmé: loc. with sácā (177, 5) and (as in 10 d) Pragṛhya (26 c ). aviṣṭám: 2. s. du. ipv. of the iṣ ao. of av favour (145, 5). jigṛtám: 2. du. red. ao. of gṛ waken; accented because beginning a new sentence (p. 467 b ). dhíyas . . . púraṃdhīs: these words often appear side by side and in contrast: the former then meaning prayers for gifts, the latter the bestowal (dhi from dhā bestow ) of plenty (púram an acc.; cp. the Padapāṭha). púraṃdhīs here is also opposed to árātīs (lit. lack of liberality ) in d. jajastám: 2. du. ipv. pf. of jas. aryás: gen. of arí (99, 3); cp. note on ii. 12, 4. The genitives aryás and vanúṣām are co-ordinate and dependent on árātīs; this appears from various parallel passages, as aryó árātīḥ hostitities of the foe (vi. 16, 27); aghá̄ny aryó, vanúṣām árātayaḥ evil deeds of the foe, hostilities of rivals (vii. 83, 5); abhì̄tim aryó, vanúṣāṃ śávāṃsi the onset of the foe, the might of rivals (vii. 21, 9 d). 11 a = vii. 97, 9 d.

UṢÁS

The goddess of Dawn is addressed in about twenty hymns. The personification is but slight, the physical phenomenon always being present to the mind of the poet. Decked in gay attire like a dancer, clothed in light, she appears in the east and unveils her charms. Rising resplendent as from a bath she comes with light, driving away the darkness and removing the black robe of night. She is young, being born again and again, though ancient. Shining with a uniform hue, she wastes away the life of mortals. She illumines the ends of the sky when she awakes; she opens the gates of heaven; her radiant beams appear like herds of cattle. She drives away evil dreams, evil spirits, and the hated darkness. She discloses the treasures concealed by darkness, and distributes them bountifully. She awakens every living being to motion. When Uṣas shines forth, the birds fly up from their nests and men seek nourishment. Day by day appearing at the appointed place, she never infringes the ordinance of nature and of the gods. She renders good service to the gods by awakening all worshippers and causing the sacrificial fires to be kindled. She brings the gods to drink the Soma draught. She is borne on a shining car, drawn by ruddy steeds or kine, which probably represent the red rays of morning.

Uṣas is closely associated with the Sun. She has opened paths for Sūrya to travel; she brings the eye of the gods, and leads on the beautiful white horse. She shines with the light of the Sun, with the light of her lover. Sūrya follows her as a young man a maiden; she meets the god who desires her. She thus comes to be spoken of as the wife of Sūrya. But as preceding the Sun, she is occasionally regarded as his mother; thus she is said to arrive with a bright child. She is also called the sister, or the elder sister, of Night (x. 127), and their names are often conjoined as a dual compound (uṣá̄sā-náktā and náktoṣá̄sā). She is born in the sky, and is therefore constantly called the ‘daughter of Heaven’. As the sacrificial fire is kindled at dawn, Uṣas is often associated with Agni, who is sometimes called her lover. Uṣas causes Agni to be kindled, and Agni goes to meet the shining Dawn as she approaches. She is also often connected with the twin gods of early morning, the Aśvins (vii. 71). When the Aśvins’ car is yoked, the daughter of the sky is born. They are awakened by her, accompany her, and are her friends.

Uṣas brings the worshipper wealth and children, bestowing protection and long life. She confers renown and glory on all liberal benefactors of the poet. She is characteristically bountiful (maghónī).

The name of Uṣas is derived from the root vas, to shine, forms of which are often used with reference to her in the hymns in which she is invoked.

iv. 51. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 93, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 idám u tyát purutámaṃ purástāj

jyótis támaso vayúnāvad asthāt.

nūnáṃ divó duhitáro vibhātí̄r

gātúṃ kṛṇavann Uṣáso jánāya.

This familiar, most frequent light in the east, with clearness has stood (forth) from the darkness. Now may the Dawns, the daughters of the sky, shining afar, make a path for man.

tyád: see p. 297, 5. purutámam: because appearing every morning; hence Uṣásas the Dawns in d. támasas: abl. dependent on asthāt = úd asthāt. The word vayúna, though very frequently used, is still somewhat uncertain in meaning. The commentators explain it variously as mārga road, prajñāna cognition, and kānti beauty. Pischel favours the first of these. Sāyaṇa here explains vayúnāvat as ‘very beautiful or possessed of knowledge = showing everything’. It probably here means ‘making the way clear’, cp. gātúm in d. nūnám: note that in the RV. this word always means now. divó duhitáras: from the point of view of the daily recurrence of the phenomenon, Dawn is pl. throughout this hymn. gātúm: cp. vi. 64, 1: ‘she makes all fair paths easy to traverse’. kṛṇavan: 3. pl. sb.; explained by Sāyaṇa as 3. pl. ipf. ind., akurvan.

See Page Number 94, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 ásthur u citrá̄ Uṣásaḥ purástān,

mitá̄ iva sváravŏ adhvaréṣu.

ví ū vrajásya támaso duá̄rā

uchántīr avrañ chúcayaḥ pavāká̄ḥ.

The brilliant Dawns have stood in the east, like posts set up at sacrifices. Shining they have unclosed the two doors of the pen of darkness, bright and purifying.

Uṣásas: that is, each of the preceding Dawns and the present one. mitá̄s: pp. of mi fix. sváravas: that is, shining with ointment; cp. i. 92, 5: sváruṃ ná péśo vidátheṣu áñjañ, citráṃ divó duhitá̄ bhānúm aśret the daughter of heaven has spread her brilliant beam, like one who at divine worship anoints the post, the ornament (of the sacrifice). Note that u in c is lengthened though followed by two consonants (p. 437 a 3). vrajásya: a simile with iva omitted; cp. i. 92, 4; gá̄vo ná vrajáṃ ví Uṣá̄ āvar támaḥ Dawn has unclosed the darkness as the cows their stall. dvá̄rā: the two folds of the door, the dual of dvá̄r often being used thus. ví: to be taken with avran, 3. pl. root ao. of vṛ cover. uchántīs: pr. pt. of 1. vas shine. śucáyaḥ pāvaká̄ḥ: these two adjectives very often appear in juxtaposition. On the pronunciation of pāvaká see p. 437 a.

See Page Number 94, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 uchántīr adyá citayanta bhojá̄n

rādhodéyāya Uṣáso maghónīḥ.

acitré̆ antáḥ paṇáyaḥ sasantu,

ábudhyamānās támaso vímadhye.

Shining to-day may the bounteous Dawns stimulate the liberal to the giving of wealth. In obscurity let the niggards sleep, unwakening in the midst of darkness.

citayanta: 3. pl. Ā. inj.; explained by Sāyaṇa as an indicative: prajñāpayanti they instruct.

See Page Number 95, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 kuvít sá, devīḥ, sanáyo návo vā

yá̄mo babhūyá̄d, Uṣaso, vŏ adyá:

yénā Návagve, Áṅgire, Dáśagve

sáptáāsye, revatī, revád ūṣá?

Should this be an old course or a new for you to-day, O divine Dawns: (is it that) by which ye have shone wealth, ye wealthy ones, upon Navagva, Aṅgira, and Daśagva the seven-mouthed?

babhūyá̄t: op. pf. of bhū, accented on account of kuvít (cp. notes on ii. 35, 1. 2). The general meaning is the hope that Dawn will bring wealth to-day as of old. Navagva, Aṅgiras, and Daśagva are the names of ancients associated with Indra in the release of the cows enclosed by the Paṇis and by Vala. The allusion in saptá̄sye is uncertain; in iv. 50, 4 it is an epithet of Bṛhaspati, who is also associated with the capture of the cows and may therefore be meant here. The meaning would then be: bring us wealth to-day as ye did to Navagva, Aṅgiras, Daśagva and Bṛhaspati. revatī revát: these words are found connected in other passages also. ūṣá: 2. pl. pf. act. of 1. vas shine.

See Page Number 95, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yūyáṃ hí, devīr, ṛtayúgbhir áśvaiḥ

pariprayāthá bhúvanāni sadyáḥ,

prabodháyantīr, Uṣasaḥ, sasántaṃ,

dvipá̄c cátuṣpāc caráthāya jīvám.

For you, O goddesses, with your steeds yoked in due time, proceed around the worlds in one day, awakening, O Dawns, him who sleeps, the two-footed and the four-footed living world, to motion.

pariprayāthá: accented owing to hí; on the accentuation of verbal prepositions see p. 469 B a. prabodháyantīs: cp. i. 92, 9, víśvaṃ jīváṃ caráse bodháyantī wakening every living soul to move. cátuṣpād: note that catúr when accented as first member of a cd. shifts its accent to the first syllable. This word, dvipá̄d and jīvám are all neuter.

See Page Number 96, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 kúa svíd āsāṃ katamá̄ purāṇí̄

yáyā vidhá̄nā vidadhúr ṛbhūṇá̄m?

śúbhaṃ yác chubhrá̄ Uṣásaś cáranti,

ná ví jñāyante sadṛ́śīr ajuryá̄ḥ.

Where, pray, and which ancient one of them (was it) at which they (the gods) imposed the tasks of the Ṛbhus? When the beaming dawns proceed on their shining course, they are not distinguished, alike, unaging.

āsām: of the dawns. yáyā: in a temporal sense = at whose time. vidadhúr: they, the gods, enjoined: this probably refers to the most distinctive feat of the Ṛbhus, that of making one bowl into four; cp. i. 161, 2: ékaṃ camasáṃ catúraḥ kṛṇotana, tád vo devá̄ abruvan ‘ make the one bowl four ’, that the gods said to you; that was one of their vidhá̄nā tasks. śúbham: cognate acc. ná ví jñāyante: they are always the same; cp. i. 92, 10, púnaḥ-punar já̄yamānā purāṇí̄ samānáṃ várṇam abhí śúmbhamānā being born again and again, ancient of days, adorning herself with the same colour, where dawn is, as usually, spoken of as a single goddess reappearing day after day, whereas in this hymn many individual dawns that appear successively are referred to.

See Page Number 97, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 tá̄ ghā tá̄ bhadrá̄ Uṣásaḥ purá̄sur,

abhiṣṭídyumnā ṛtájātasatyāḥ;

yá̄su ījānáḥ śaśamāná uktháiḥ

stuváñ, cháṃsan, dráviṇaṃ sadyá á̄pa.

Those indeed, those Dawns have formerly been auspicious, splendid in help, punctually true; at which the strenuous sacrificer with recitations praising, chanting, has at once obtained wealth.

On purá̄ with pf. see 213 A. ījānás: pf. pt. Ā. of yaj sacrifice. śaśamāná: pf. pt. Ā. of śam labour. stuváñ cháṃsan = stuván + śáṃsan (40, 1). The general meaning of the stanza is: former dawns have brought blessings to the sacrificer; may they do so now.

See Page Number 97, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 tá̄ á̄ caranti samaná̄ purástāt,

samānátaḥ samaná̄ paprathāná̄ḥ.

ṛtásya deví̄ḥ sádaso budhāná̄,

gávāṃ ná sárgā, Uṣáso jarante.

They approach equally in the east, spreading themselves equally from the same place. The goddesses waking from the seat of order, like herds of kine let loose, the Dawns are active.

samaná̄: always in the same way. samānatás; cp. i. 124, 3: prajānatí̄ iva, ná díśo mināti as one who knows (the way), she loses not her direction. ṛtásya sádasaḥ: abl. dependent on budhāná̄ḥ (cp. 10); cp. i. 124, 3; ṛtásya pánthām ánv eti sādhú she follows straight the path of order. budhāná̄s: ao. pt., awaking (intr.), not = bodhayantyas wakening (trans.) according to Sāyaṇa; when Ā. and without an object, budh is intr.; cp. ábodhi has awoke, said of Uṣas (i. 92, 11; iii. 61, 6; vii. 80, 2). gavá̄ṃ ná sárgāḥ: cp. iv. 52, 5, práti bhadrá̄ adṛkṣata gávāṃ sárgā ná raśmáyaḥ the auspicious rays (of dawn) have appeared like kine let loose. jarante: are awake = are active, are on the move (cp. á̄ caranti in a and 9 a, b); are praised (stūyante) according to Sāyaṇa.

See Page Number 98, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 tá̄ ín nú evá samaná̄ samāní̄r,

ámītavarṇā Uṣásaś caranti.

gú̄hantīr ábhvam ásitaṃ, rúśadbhiḥ

śukrá̄s tanú̄bhiḥ, śúcayo, rucāná̄ḥ.

Those Dawns even now equally the same, of unchanged colour, move on; concealing the black monster, bright with gleaming forms, brilliant, beaming.

On the accentuation of nv èvá see p. 450, 2 b. ábhvam: cp. i. 92, 5, bá̄dhate kṛṣṇám ábhvam she drives away the black monster (of night). rúśadbhis: m. form irregularly agreeing with the f. tanú̄bhis. Note that the Pada text does not separate the endings bhyām, bhis, bhyas, su from f. stems in long vowels, nor of m. stems in a because the pure stem in these cases appears in an altered form, e. g. priyébhis, but pitṛ́५bhis.

See Page Number 98, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 rayíṃ, divo duhitaro, vibhātí̄ḥ

prajá̄vantaṃ yachatāsmá̄su, devīḥ.

sioná̄d á̄ vaḥ pratibúdhyamānāḥ,

suví̄riasya pátayaḥ siāma.

O daughters of Heaven, do ye shining forth bestow on us, goddesses, wealth accompanied by offspring. Awaking from our soft couch towards you, we would be lords of a host of strong sons.

yachata: pr. ipv. of yam, here construed with the loc.; the usual case is the dat. (200 A 1). pratibúdhyamānās: with á̄ and abl., cp. budhāná̄ with abl. in 8 c.

See Page Number 98, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 tád vo, divo duhitaro, vibhātí̄r

úpa bruva, Uṣaso, yajñáketuḥ:

vayáṃ siāma yaśáso jáneṣu;

tád Dyáuś ca dhattá̄ṃ Pṛthiví̄ ca deví̄.

For that I whose banner is the sacrifice, O daughters of Heaven, implore you that shine forth, O Dawns: we would be famous among men; let Heaven and the goddess Earth grant that.

vibhātí̄r: to be taken with vas. úpa bruve: with two acc. (p. 304, 2). yajñáketus: the singer thus describes himself; in i. 113, 19 the Dawn is called yajñásya ketúḥ the signal of the sacrifice. yaśáso (accent, p. 453, 9 A a ) jáneṣu: this phrase frequently occurs in prayers. vayám: the poet having in b spoken in the sing. on his own behalf, now changes, as often, to the pl., so as to include the others who are present. dhattá̄m: 3. du. of dhā, accented, though not beginning a sentence, because of ca . . . ca (see p. 468 β).

AGNÍ

See Introduction to i. 1 on the nature of Agni.

v. 11. Metre: Jagatī.

See Page Number 100, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 Jánasya gopá̄ ajaniṣṭa já̄gṛvir

Agníḥ sudákṣaḥ suvitá̄ya návyase.

ghṛtápratīko bṛhatá̄ divispṛ́śā

dyumád ví bhāti bharatébhiaḥ śúciḥ.

Guardian of the people, watchful, most skilful, Agni has been born for renewed welfare. Butter-faced, bright, he shines forth brilliantly for the Bharatas with lofty, heaven-touching (flame).

gopá̄s: 97, 2. ajaniṣṭa: iṣ ao. of jan generate. su-dákṣas: a Bv. (p. 455 c α). suvitá̄ya: final dat. (p. 314, B 2). návyase: dat. of cpv. of náva new. ghṛtá-pratīkas: cp. yásya prátīkam á̄hutaṃ ghṛténa whose face is sprinkled with butter (vii. 8, 1) as an analysis of the cd. bṛhatá̄: supply téjasā. bharatébhyas: for the benefit of (p. 314, 1) the Bharatas, the tribe to which the seer belongs.

See Page Number 100, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 yajñásya ketúṃ, prathamáṃ puróhitam,

Agníṃ náras, triṣadhasthé sám īdhire.

Índreṇa deváiḥ saráthaṃ sá barhíṣi

sí̄dan ní hótā yajáthāya sukrátuḥ.

As banner of sacrifice, as first domestic priest, men have kindled Agni in the threefold abode. (Coming) on the same car with Indra and the gods may that most wise Invoker sit down on the sacrificial grass for sacrifice.

ketúm: in apposition to Agním, in allusion to the smoke of sacrifice; cp. viii. 44, 10, hótāram . . . dhūmáketum . . . yajñá̄nām ketúm the Invoker, the smoke-bannered banner of sacrifices; cp. 3 d. prathamám: first-appointed in order of time. puróhitam: see i. 1, 1. náras: N. pl. of nṛ́ (p. 91). tri-ṣadhasthé: on the three sacrificial altars; Sandhi 67 b. sám īdhire: pf. of idh kindle; have kindled and still kindle (cp. p. 342 a ). sarátham: adv. governing Índreṇa and deváis (cp. p. 309, 2). sí̄dan ní: the ipf. expresses that he sat down in the past when he became Purohita; the prp. as often follows the verb (p. 468, 20). yajáthāya: final dat. (p. 314, B 2).

See Page Number 101, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 ásaṃmṛṣṭo jāyase māt a róḥ śúcir.

mandráḥ kavír úd atíṣṭho Vivásvataḥ.

ghṛténa tvāvardhayann, Agna āhuta,

dhūmás te ketúr abhavad diví śritáḥ.

Uncleansed thou art born bright from thy two parents. Thou didst arise as the gladdening sage of Vivasvant. With butter they strengthened thee, O Agni, in whom the offering is poured. Smoke became thy banner that reached to the sky.

ásaṃ-mṛṣṭas: pp. of mṛj wipe, opposed to śúcis, though uncleansed, yet bright. mātrós: abl. du.: the two fire-sticks, from which Agni is produced by friction. úd atiṣṭhas: 3. s. ipf. of sthā stand. Vivásvatas: gen. dependent on kavís; the sage (a common designation of Agni) of Vivasvant, the first sacrificer. tvā: the caesura, which should follow this word (p. 442, 6), is here only apparently neglected because the following augment may be treated as dropped. avardhayan: that is, made the fire burn up with the ghee poured into it; explained by ā-huta. dhūmás, c.: affords an analysis of Agni’s epithet dhūmáketu (cp. note on 2 a). diví: loc. of the goal (p. 325 b ). Note the use of the imperfects as referring to past events (p. 345, B).

See Page Number 102, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 Agnír no yajñám úpa vetu sādhuyá̄.

Agníṃ náro ví bharante gṛhégṛhe.

Agnír dūtó abhavad dhavyavá̄hano.

Agníṃ vṛṇāná̄ vṛṇate kavíkratum.

Let Agni come straightway to our sacrifice. Men carry Agni hither and thither in every house. Agni became the messenger, the carrier of oblations. In choosing Agni they choose one who has the wisdom of a seer.

vetu: 3. s. ipv. of vī. bharante: see note on bhṛ, ii. 33, 10 a. gṛhé-gṛhe: 189 C a. dūtás: Agni is characteristically a messenger as an intermediary between heaven and earth. dhavyavá̄hanas: Sandhi, 54. vṛṇāná̄s: pr. pt. A. of 2. vṛ, choosing Agni as their priest. vṛṇate: 3. pl. pr. Ā of 2 vṛ.

See Page Number 102, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 túbhyedám, Agne, mádhumattamaṃ vácas,

túbhyaṃ manīṣá̄ iyám astu śáṃ hṛdé.

tuá̄ṃ gíraḥ, síndhum ivāvánīr mahí̄r,

á̄ pṛṇantiśávasā, vardháyanti ca.

For thee, O Agni, let this most honied speech, for thee this prayer be a comfort to thy heart. The songs fill thee, as the great rivers the Indus, with power, and strengthen thee.

túbhya: this form of the dat. of tvám occurs about a dozen times in the Saṃhitā text beside the much commoner túbhyam (as in b); it occurs only before vowels with which it is always contracted, having only once (v. 30, 6) to be read with hiatus. manīṣá̄ iyám: in this and two other passages of the RV. the ā of manīṣá̄ is not contracted in the Saṃhitā text, because it precedes the caesura. śám: in apposition, as a delight or comfort. síndhum iva: this simile occurs elsewhere also; thus Índram ukthá̄ni vāvṛdhuḥ, samudrám iva síndhavaḥ the hymns strengthen Indra as the rivers the sea. á̄ pṛṇanti: from pṝ fill. śávasā: because hymns, like oblations, are thought to give the gods strength. vardháyanti: cs. of vṛdh grow; accent, p. 466, 19 a.

See Page Number 103, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 tuá̄m, Agne, Áṅgiraso gúhā hitám

ánv avinda n̄ chiśriyāṇáṃ vánevane.

sá jāyase mathyámānaḥ sáho mahát:

tuá̄m āhuḥ sáhasas putrám, Aṅgiraḥ.

Thee, O Agni, the Aṅgirases discovered hidden, abiding in every wood. Thus thou art born, when rubbed with mighty strength: they call thee the son of strength, O Aṅgiras.

Áṅgirasas: an ancient priestly family (cp. x. 14, 3-6), Agni being regarded as their chief (cp. d and i. 1, 6). They are said to have designed the first ordinances of sacrifice (x. 67, 2). gúhā hitám placed (pp. of dhā) in hiding, concealed, explained by śiśriyāṇáṃ váne; having betaken himself (pf. pt. of śri) to, resting in, all wood. ánv avindan: they found him out as a means of sacrifice; Sandhi, 40. váne-vane: 189 C a. sá: as such = as found in wood (cp. p. 294 b ). mathyámānas: pr. pt. ps. of math stir, being produced by the friction of the kindling sticks. sáho mahát: cognate acc. = with mighty strength (cp. sáhasā yó mathitó jāyate nṛ́bhiḥ he who when rubbed by men with strength is born, vi. 48, 5); this being an explanation of why he is called sáhasas putrám son of strength: this, or sáhasaḥ sūnúḥ, is a frequent epithet of Agni; Sandhi, 43, 2 a. Aṅgiras: see note on a.

PARJÁNYA

This deity occupies quite a subordinate position, being celebrated in only three hymns. His name often means ‘rain-cloud’ in the literal sense; but in most passages it represents the personification, the cloud then becoming an udder, a pail, or a water-skin. Parjanya is frequently described as a bull that quickens the plants and the earth. The shedding of rain is his most prominent characteristic. He flies around with a watery car, and loosens the water-skin; he sheds rain-water as our divine (ásura) father. In this activity he is associated with thunder and lightning. He is in a special degree the producer and nourisher of vegetation. He also produces fertility in cows, mares, and women. He is several times referred to as a father. By implication his wife is the Earth, and he is once called the son of Dyaus.

v. 83. Metre: 1. 5-8. 10. Triṣṭubh; 2-4. Jagatī; 9. Anuṣṭubh.

See Page Number 104, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 áchā vada tavásaṃ gīrbhír ābhíḥ;

stuhí Parjányaṃ; námasá̄ vivāsa.

kánikradad vṛṣabhó jīrádānū

réto dadhāti óṣadhīṣu gárbham.

Invoke the mighty one with these songs; praise Parjanya; seek to win him with obeisance. Bellowing, the bull of quickening gifts places seed in the plants as a germ.

áchā: with final vowel metrically lengthened in the second syllable of the Pāda. vada: the poet addresses himself. vivāsa: ds. of van win. kánikradat: see iv. 50, 5 d. vṛṣabhás: Parjanya. jīrádānū: Sandhi, 47; his quickening gift is rain = rétas in d. gárbham: as apposition to rétas, Parjanya quickens the growth of plants with rain.

See Page Number 105, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 ví vṛkṣá̄n hanti utá hanti rakṣáso:

víśvaṃ bibhāya bhúvanaṃ mahá̄vadhāt.

utá̄nāgā īṣate vṛ́ṣṇiāvato,

yát Parjányaḥ stanáyan hánti duṣkṛ́taḥ.

He shatters the trees and he smites the demons: the whole world fears him of the mighty weapon. Even the sinless man flees before the mighty one, when Parjanya thundering smites the evil-doers.

bibhāya: pf. of bhī = pr. (p. 342 a ). mahá̄vadhāt: a Bv. owing to its accent (p. 455 c ). vṛ́ṣṇyāvatas: Parjanya; abl. with verbs of fearing (p. 316 b ). ánāgās: with irr. accentuation of the privative an- in a Bv. (p. 455 c α and f. n. 2). This word is here contrasted with duṣkṛ́tas; hence the utá before it has the force of even. On the internal Sandhi of duṣkṛ́t see 43, 2 a.

See Page Number 105, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 rathí̄ iva káśayá̄śvāṁ̆ abhikṣipánn,

āvír dūtá̄n kṛṇute varṣíāṁ̆ áha.

dūrá̄t siṃhásya stanáthā úd īrate,

yát Parjányaḥ kṛṇuté varṣíaṃ nábhaḥ.

Like a charioteer lashing his horses with a whip he makes manifest his messengers of rain. From afar arise the thunders of the lion, when Parjanya makes rainy the sky.

rathí̄: N. of rathín, much less common than rathí̄, N. rathí̄s. The contraction rathí̄va also occurs in x. 51, 6; rathí̄r iva is much commoner and would have been metrically better here. dūtá̄n: the clouds. siṃhásya stanáthāḥ: condensed for ‘the thunders of Parjanya like the roars of a lion. varṣyàm: predicative acc.; on the accent of this form and of varṣyà̄n in b, see p. 450, 2 b. kṛṇuté: note that kṛ follows the fifth class in the RV., kṛṇóti, c.; karóti does not appear till the AV., cp. p. 145, 4.

See Page Number 105, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 prá vá̄tā vá̄nti; patáyanti vidyúta;

úd óṣadhīr jíhate; pínvate súaḥ.

írā víśvasmai bhúvanāya jāyate,

yát Parjányaḥ pṛthiví̄ṃ rétasá̄vati.

The winds blow forth, the lightnings fall; the plants shoot up; heaven overflows. Nurture is born for the whole world when Parjanya quickens the earth with seed.

vá̄nti, jíhate (2. hā go ) are both accented as antithetical (p. 468, 19 β) to the two following verbs patáyanti (itv., 168), pínvate, which are accented as beginning new sentences (p. 466, 19 A a ); cp. also note on bá̄dhate, i. 35, 9 c. On the secondary root pinv see 134, 4 β. írā: the rain shed by Parjanya makes the earth productive (cp. 1 c, d). Note that the preceding Jagatī triplet (2-4) is bound together by a refrain beginning with yát Parjányaḥ and varying the idea ‘when Parjanya rains’.

See Page Number 107, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yásya vraté pṛthiví̄ nánnamīti;

yásya vraté śaphávaj járbhurīti,

yásya vratá óṣadhīr viśvárūpāḥ:

sá naḥ, Parjanya, máhi śárma yacha.

In whose ordinance the earth bends low; in whose ordinance hoofed animals leap about; in whose ordinance plants are omniform, as such, O Parjanya, bestow mighty shelter on us.

yásya vraté: that is, in obedience to whose law. nánnamīti: int. of nam (see 173, 2 b; 172 a ). śaphávat: that which has hoofs, used as a n. collective. járbhurīti: int. of bhur quiver (174 a ). óṣadhīs: the following adj. viśvárūpāḥ is most naturally to be taken predicatively, like the verbs in a and b. sá: as nom. corr. followed by the voc.: as such, O Parjanya. yacha: ipv. of yam.

See Page Number 107, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 divó no vṛṣṭíṃ, Maruto, rarīdhvaṃ;

prá pinvata vṛ́ṣṇo áśvasya dhá̄rāḥ.

arvá̄ṅ eténa stanayitnúnéhi,

apó niṣiñcánn ásuraḥ pitá̄ naḥ.

Give us, O Maruts, the rain of heaven; pour forth the streams of your stallion. Hither with this thunder come, pouring down the waters as the divine spirit our father.

divás: this might be abl., from heaven, as it is taken to be by Sāyaṇa; but it is more probably gen., being parallel to áśvasya dhá̄rāḥ in b; cp. ix. 57, 1, prá te dhá̄rā, divó ná, yanti vṛṣṭáyaḥ thy streams go forth like the rains of heaven. rarīdhvam: 2. pl. pr. ipv. of rā give (cp. p. 144, B 1 a ). Marutas: the storm gods, as associated with rain, are in a b invoked to bestow rain, which is described as water shed by their steed (as also in i. 64, 6 and ii. 34, 13). vṛ́ṣṇo áśvasya: = stallion. In c d Parjanya is again addressed. stanayitnúnéhi: the accent alone (apart from the Pada text) shows that this is a contraction not of -nā ihi (which would be -nehi), but of -nā éhi, which would normally be -náihi; -néhi is based on the artificial contraction -ná̄ (= -nā á̄) + ihi. The same Sandhi occurs in Índréhi (i. 9, 1) for Índra á̄ ihi. With stanayitnúnā cp. stanáyan in 2 d and stanáthās in 3 c. apás = vṛṣṭím in a and dhá̄rās in b. ásuraḥ pitá̄ naḥ: as appositional subject of the sentence, with the 2. ipv. íhi; cp. sá in 5 d with the voc. Parjanya and the 2. ipv. yacha. The two epithets are applied to other gods also, such as Dyaus, whom in his relation to Earth Parjanya most resembles.

See Page Number 108, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 abhí kranda; stanáya; gárbham á̄ dhā;

udanvátā pári dīyā ráthena.

dṛ́tiṃ sú karṣa víṣitaṃ níañcaṃ:

samá̄ bhavantu udváto nipādá̄ḥ.

Bellow towards us; thunder; deposit the germ; fly around with thy water-bearing car. Draw well thy water-skin unfastened downward: let the heights and valleys be level.

stanáya: accented as forming a new sentence. gárbham: cp. 1 d, réto dadhāti óṣadhīṣu gárbham. dhās: 2. s. root ao. sb. of 1. dhā. dīyā: with final vowel metrically lengthened. dṛ́tim: the rain-cloud, here compared with a water-skin, doubtless like the leather bag made of a goat-skin still used in India by water-carriers. víṣitam (from si tie ): untied so as to let the water run out. nyàñcam: predicative: = so that the untied orifice turns downward. samá̄s: that is, may the high and the low ground be made level by the surface of the water covering both.

See Page Number 109, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 mahá̄ntaṃ kóśam úd acā, ní ṣiñca;

syándantāṃ kulyá̄ víṣitāḥ purástāt.

ghṛténa dyá̄vāpṛthiví̄ ví undhi;

suprapāṇáṃ bhavatu aghniá̄bhyaḥ.

Draw up the great bucket, pour it down; let the streams released flow forward. Drench heaven and earth with ghee; let there be a good drinking place for the cows.

The process of shedding rain is here compared with the drawing up of a pail from a well and pouring out its contents. acā: metrical lengthening of the final a. ní ṣiñca: Sandhi, 67 c. purástāt: according to Sāyaṇa eastward, because ‘rivers generally flow eastwards’; but though this is true of the Deccan, where he lived, it is not so of the north-west of India, where the RV. was composed. ghṛténa: figuratively of rain, because it produces fatness or abundance. dyá̄vāpṛthiví̄: Pragṛhya, but not analysed in the Pada text (cp. i. 35, 1 b). undhi: 2. s. ipv. of ud wet = unddhi. This Pāda is equivalent in sense to 7 d. suprapāṇám: note that in the Pada text this compound is written with a dental n, indicating that this was regarded by the compilers of that text as the normal internal Sandhi (see 65 b ).

See Page Number 110, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 yát, Parjanya, kánikradat,

stanáyan háṃsi duṣkṛ́taḥ,

prátīdáṃ víśvaṃ modate,

yát kíṃ ca pṛthivyá̄m ádhi.

When, O Parjanya, bellowing aloud, thundering, thou smitest the evil-doers, this whole world exults, whatever is upon the earth.

yát Parjanya: cp. 2 d. háṃsi: 2. s. pr. of han (66 A 2). yát kiṃ ca: indefinite prn., whatever (19 b ), explains idáṃ víśvam this world; if a verb were expressed it would be bhávati.

See Page Number 110, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 ávarṣīr varṣám: úd u ṣú̄ gṛbhāya;

ákar dhánvāni átietavá̄ u.

ájījana óṣadhīr bhójanāya kám;

utá prajá̄bhyo avido manīṣá̄m.

Thou hast shed rain: now wholly cease; thou hast made the deserts passable again. Thou hast made the plants to grow for the sake of food; and thou hast found a hymn of praise from (thy) creatures.

This concluding stanza, implying that Parjanya has shed abundant rain, describes its results.

ávarṣīs: 2. s. s ao. of vṛs. u ṣú̄: on the Sandhi see 67 c; on the meaning of the combination, see under u and sú, 180. gṛbhāya: this pr. stem is sometimes used beside gṛbhṇá̄ti. ákar: 2. s. root ao. of kṛ. áti-etavái: cp. p. 463, 14 b α. ájījanas: cp. I d and 4 b. kám: see 180. Here we have the exceptional intrusion of a Jagatī Pāda in a Triṣṭubh stanza (p. 445, f. n. 7). avidas: a ao. of vid find, thou hast found = received. prajá̄bhyas: abl., from creatures in gratitude for the bestowal of rain.

PŪṢÁN

This god is celebrated in eight hymns, five of which occur in the sixth Maṇḍala. His individuality is vague, and his anthropomorphic traits are scanty. His foot and his right hand are mentioned; he wears braided hair and a beard. He carries a golden spear, an awl, and a goad. His car is drawn by goats instead of horses. His characteristic food is gruel (karambhá).

He sees all creatures clearly and at once. He is the wooer of his mother and the lover of his sister (Dawn), and was given by the gods to the Sunmaiden Sūryā as a husband. He is connected with the marriage ceremonial in the wedding hymn (x. 85). With his golden aerial ships Pūṣan acts as the messenger of Sūrya. He moves onward observing the universe, and makes his abode in heaven. He is a guardian who knows and beholds all creatures. As best of charioteers he drove downward the golden wheel of the sun. He traverses the distant path of heaven and earth; he goes to and returns from both the beloved abodes. He conducts the dead on the far-off path of the Fathers. He is a guardian of roads, removing dangers out of the way; and is called ‘son of deliverance’ (vimúco nápāt). He follows and protects cattle, bringing them home unhurt and driving back the lost. His bounty is often mentioned. ‘Glowing’ (á̄ghṛṇi) is one of his exclusive epithets. The name means ‘prosperer’, as derived from puṣ, cause to thrive. The evidence, though not clear, indicates that Pūṣan was originally a solar deity, representing the beneficent power of the sun manifested chiefly in its pastoral aspect.

vi. 54. Metre: Gāyatrī.

See Page Number 111, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 sáṃ, Pūṣan, vidúṣā naya,

yố áñjasānuśá̄sati,

yá evédám íti brávat.

Conjoin us, O Pūṣan, with one that knows, who shall straightway instruct us, and who shall say (it is) ‘ just here ’.

vidúṣā: inst. governed by the sense of association produced by the combination of naya (nī lead ) with sám: cp. p. 308, 1 a. The meaning is: ‘provide us with a guide’. anu-śá̄sati (3. s. pr. sb.): who shall instruct us where to find what we have lost. idám: not infrequently, as here, used adverbially when it does not refer to a particular substantive. brávat: 3. s. pr. sb. of brū.

See Page Number 112, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 sám u Pūṣṇá̄ gamemahi,

yó gṛhá̄ṃ̇̆ abhiśá̄sati,

imá evéti ca brávat.

We would also go with Pūṣan, who shall guide us to the houses, and shall say (it is) ‘ just these ’.

u: see p. 221, 2; on its treatment in the Pada text, p. 25, f. n. 2. Pūṣṇá̄: see note on vidúṣā, 1 a. gamemahi (a ao. op. of gam): we would preferably go with Pūṣan as our guide. gṛhá̄n: that is, the sheds in which our lost cattle are.

See Page Number 112, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 Pūṣṇáś cakráṃ ná riṣyatí,

ná kóśǒ áva padyate;

nố asya vyathate pavíḥ.

Pūṣan’s wheel is not injured, the well (of his car) falls not down; nor does his felly waver.

nó: = ná u, also not; on the Sandhi cp. 24. kóśó va: on the Sandhi accent, see p. 465, 17, 3. asya: unaccented, p. 452, B c. Sāyaṇa explains cakrám as Pūṣan’s weapon, and pavís as the edge of that weapon. But this is in the highest degree improbable because the weapon of Pūṣan is a spear, an awl, or a goad; while his car is elsewhere mentioned, as well as the goats that draw it, and he is called a charioteer.

See Page Number 113, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 yố asmai havíṣá̄vidhan,

ná táṃ Pūṣá̄pi mṛṣyate:

prathamó vindate vásu.

Him who has worshipped him with oblation Pūṣan forgets not: he is the first that acquires wealth.

asmai: Pūṣan; on the syntax, see 200, A 1 f; on loss of accent, see p. 452 B c. ápi: verbal prp. to be taken with mṛṣ. prathamás: the man who worships Pūṣan.

See Page Number 113, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 Pūṣá̄ gá̄ ánu etu naḥ;

Pūṣá̄ rakṣatu árvataḥ;

Pūṣá̄ vá̄jaṃ sanotu naḥ.

Let Pūṣan go after our cows; let Pūṣan protect our steeds; let Pūṣan gain booty for us.

ánu etu: to be with them and prevent injury or loss. rakṣatu: to prevent their being lost.

See Page Number 113, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 Pú̄ṣann, ánu prá gá̄ ihi

yájamānasya sunvatáḥ,

asmá̄kaṃ stuvatá̄m utá.

O Pūṣan, go forth after the cows of the sacrificer who presses Soma, and of us who praise thee.

ánu prá ihi: cp. p. 468, 20 a. yájamānasya: of the institutor of the sacrifice. stuvatá̄m: of the priests as a body.

See Page Number 114, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 má̄kir neśan; má̄kīṃ riṣan;

má̄kīṃ sáṃ śāri kévaṭe:

áthá̄riṣṭābhir á̄ gahi.

Let not any one be lost; let it not be injured; let it not suffer fracture in a pit: so come back with them uninjured.

neśat: inj. ao. of naś be lost (see 149 a 2). riṣat: a ao. inj. of riṣ. śāri: ps. ao. inj. of śṝ crush. áriṣṭābhis: supply góbhis.

See Page Number 114, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 śṛṇvántaṃ Pūṣáṇaṃ vayám,

iryam ánaṣṭavedasam,

í̄śānaṃ rāyá īmahe.

Pūṣan, who hears, the watchful, whose property is never lost, who disposes of riches, we approach.

ánaṣṭa-vedasam: who always recovers property that has been lost; he is also called ánaṣṭa-paśu: whose cattle are never lost; cp. 1, 2, 5, 6, 7. rāyás: gen. dependent on í̄śānam (see 202 A a ). īmahe: 1. pl. pr. Ā. of ī go governing the acc. Pūṣáṇam: cp. 197 A 1.

See Page Number 114, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 Pú̄ṣan, táva vraté vayáṃ

ná riṣyema kádā caná:

stotá̄ras ta ihá smasi.

O Pūṣan, in thy service may we never suffer injury: we are thy praisers here.

Pú̄ṣan táva: note the Sandhi (40, 2). vraté: that is, while abiding in thy ordinance. smasi: 1. pl. of as be; c gives the reason for the hope expressed in a b.

See Page Number 115, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 pári Pūṣá̄ parástã̄d

dhástaṃ dadhātu dákṣiṇam:

púnar no naṣṭám á̄jatu.

Let Pūṣan put his right hand around us from afar: let him drive up for us again what has been lost.

parástād: the ā to be pronounced dissyllabically (cp. p. 437, a 8). pári dadhātu: for protection. dhástam = hástam: 54. naṣṭám: from naś be lost; cp. ánaṣṭavedasam in 8 b. á̄jatu: the meaning of the vb. shows that by the n. naṣṭám what is lost cows are intended.

Á̄PAS

The Waters are addressed in four hymns, as well as in a few scattered verses. The personification is only incipient, hardly extending beyond the notion of their being mothers, young wives, and goddesses who bestow boons and come to the sacrifice. They follow the path of the gods. Indra, armed with the bolt, dug out a channel for them, and they never infringe his ordinances. They are celestial as well as terrestrial, and the sea is their goal. They abide where the gods dwell, in the seat of Mitra-Varuṇa, beside the sun. King Varuṇa moves in their midst, looking down on the truth and the falsehood of men. They are mothers and as such produce Agni. They give their auspicious fluid like loving mothers. They are most motherly, the producers of all that is fixed and that moves. They purify, carrying away defilement. They even cleanse from moral guilt, the sins of violence, cursing, and lying. They also bestow remedies, health, wealth, strength, long life, and immortality. Their blessing and aid are often implored, and they are invited to seat themselves on the sacrificial grass to receive the offering of the Soma priest.

The Waters are several times associated with honey. They mix their milk with honey. Their wave, rich in honey, became the drink of Indra, whom it exhilarated and to whom it gave heroic strength. They are invoked to pour the wave which is rich in honey, gladdens the gods, is the draught of Indra, and is produced in the sky. Here the celestial Waters seem to be identified with the heavenly Soma, the beverage of Indra. Elsewhere the Waters used in preparing the terrestrial Soma seem to be meant. When they appear bearing ghee, milk, and honey, they are accordant with the priests that bring well-pressed Soma for Indra. Soma (viii. 48) delights in them like a young man in lovely maidens; he approaches them as a lover; they are maidens who bow down before the youth.

The deification of the Waters is pre-Vedic, for they are invoked as āpo in the Avesta also.

vii. 49. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 116, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 samudrájyeṣṭhāḥ salilásya mádhyāt

punāná̄ yanti ániviśamānāḥ:

Índro yá̄ vajrí̄ vṛṣabhó rará̄da,

tá̄ á̄po deví̄r ihá má̄m avantu.

Having the ocean as their chief, from the midst of the sea, purifying, they flow unresting: let those Waters, the goddesses, for whom Indra, the bearer of the bolt, the mighty one, opened a path, help me here.

samudrá-jyeṣṭhās: that is, of which the ocean is the largest. salilásya: the aerial waters, referred to as divyá̄s in 2 a, are meant. punāná̄s: cp. pāvaká̄s in c. ániviśamānās: cp. i. 32, 10, where the waters are alluded to as átiṣṭhantīs and ániveśanās standing not still and resting not. rará̄da: of Indra, it is said elsewhere (ii. 15, 3), vájreṇa khá̄ny atṛṇan nadí̄nām with his bolt he pierced channels for the rivers. tá̄ á̄po, c. is the refrain of all the four stanzas of this hymn.

See Page Number 116, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 yá̄ Á̄po divyá̄ utá vā srávanti

khanítrimā utá vā yá̄ḥ svayaṃjá̄ḥ;

samudrá̄rthā yá̄ḥ śúcayaḥ pavāká̄s:

tá̄ Á̄po deví̄r ihá má̄m avantu.

The Waters that come from heaven or that flow in channels or that arise spontaneously, that clear and purifying have the ocean as their goal: let those Waters, the goddesses, help me here.

divyá̄s: that fall from the sky as rain: cp. salilásya mádhyāt in 1 a. khanítrimās: that flow in artificial channels: cp. Índro yá̄ rará̄da in 1 c. svayaṃjá̄s: that come from springs. samudrá̄rthās: that flow to the sea; cp. samudrájyeṣṭhāḥ punāná̄ yanti in 1 a, b. pāvaká̄s: this word here and elsewhere in the RV. must be pronounced pavāká (p. 437 a 9).

See Page Number 117, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 yá̄sāṃ rá̄jā Váruṇo yá̄ti mádhye,

satyānṛté avapáśyañ jánānām,

madhuścútaḥ śúcayo yá̄ḥ pavāká̄s:

tá̄ Á̄po deví̄r ihá má̄m avantu.

In the midst of whom King Varuṇa goes looking down upon the truth and untruth of men, who distil sweetness, clear and purifying: let those Waters, the goddesses, help me here.

Váruṇas: this god (vii. 86) is closely connected with the waters, for the most part those of heaven. avapáśyan: this shows that the celestial waters are here meant; on the Sandhi see 40, 1. satyānṛté: Pragṛhya (26; cp. p. 437, note 3); accent: p. 457, 10 e. Note that Dvandvas are not analysed in the Pada text. madhuścútas: that is, inherently sweet.

See Page Number 117, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 yá̄su rá̄jā Váruṇo, yá̄su Sómo, [ ]

Víśve devá̄ yá̄su ú̄rjaṃ mádanti;

vaiśvānaró yá̄su Agníḥ práviṣṭas:

tá̄ Á̄po deví̄r ihá má̄m avantu.

In whom King Varuṇa, in whom Soma, in whom the All-gods drink exhilarating strength, into whom Agni Vaiśvānara has entered: let those Waters, the goddesses, help me here.

ú̄rjam: cognate acc. with mádanti (cp. 197 A 4) = obtain vigour in exhilaration, that is, by drinking Soma which is associated with the Waters. vaiśvānarás: belonging to all men, a frequent epithet of Agni. práviṣṭas: Agni’s abode in the Waters is very often referred to; cp. also his aspect as Apá̄ṃ nápāt ‘Son of Waters’ (ii. 35).

MITRÁ̄-VÁRUṆĀ

This is the pair most frequently mentioned next to Heaven and Earth. The hymns in which they are conjointly invoked are much more numerous than those in which they are separately addressed. As Mitra (iii. 59) is distinguished by hardly any individual traits, the two together have practically the same attributes and functions as Varuṇa alone. They are conceived as young. Their eye is the sun. Reaching out they drive with the rays of the sun as with arms. They wear glistening garments. They mount their car in the highest heaven. Their abode is golden and is located in heaven; it is great, very lofty, firm, with a thousand columns and a thousand doors. They have spies that are wise and cannot be deceived. They are kings and universal monarchs. They are also called Asuras, who wield dominion by means of māyá̄ occult power, a term mainly connected with them. By that power they send the dawns, make the sun traverse the sky, and obscure it with cloud and rain. They are rulers and guardians of the whole world. They support heaven, and earth, and air.

They are lords of rivers, and they are the gods most frequently thought of and prayed to as bestowers of rain. They have kine yielding refreshment, and streams flowing with honey. They control the rainy skies and the streaming waters. They bedew the pastures with ghee (= rain) and the spaces with honey. They send rain and refreshment from the sky. Rain abounding in heavenly water comes from them. One entire hymn dwells on their powers of bestowing rain.

Their ordinances are fixed and cannot be obstructed even by the immortal gods. They are upholders and cherishers of order. They are barriers against falsehood, which they dispel, hate, and punish. They afflict with disease those who neglect their worship.

The dual invocation of these gods goes back to the Indo-Īranian period, for Ahura and Mithra are thus coupled in the Avesta.

vii. 61. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 119, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 úd vāṃ cákṣur, Varuṇā, suprátīkaṃ

deváyor eti Sú̄rias tatanvá̄n.

abhí yó víśvā bhúvanāni cáṣṭe,

sá manyúṃ mártieṣu á̄ ciketa.

Up the lovely eye of you two gods, O (Mitra and) Varuṇa, rises, the Sun, having spread (his light); he who regards all beings observes their intention among mortals.

cákṣus: cp. vii. 63, 1, úd u eti . . . Sú̄ryaḥ . . . cákṣur Mitrásya Váruṇasya up rises the Sun, the eye of Mitra and Varuṇa. Varuṇa: has the form of the voc. s., which could be used elliptically; but the Padapāṭha takes it as the shortened form of the elliptical dual Varuṇā (cp. 193, 2 a ); cp. deva in 7 a. It is, however, difficult to see why the ā should have been shortened, because it conforms to the normal break (ᴗᴗ–) of the Triṣṭubh line (see p. 441). abhí . . . cáṣṭe: the Sun is elsewhere also said to behold all beings and the good and bad deeds of mortals. manyúm: that is, their good or evil intentions. ciketa: pf. of cit perceive (cp. 139, 4). In d the caesura irregularly follows the third syllable.

See Page Number 119, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 prá vāṃ sā, Mitrā-Varuṇāv, ṛtá̄vā

vípro mánmāni dīrghaśrúd iyarti,

yásya bráhmāṇi, sukratū, ávātha,

á̄ yát krátvā ná śarádaḥ pṛṇáithe.

Forth for you two, O Mitra-Varuṇa, this pious priest, heard afar, sends his hymns, that ye may favour his prayers, ye wise ones, that ye may fill his autumns as it were with wisdom.

iyarti: 3. s. pr. of ṛ go. yásya . . . ávāthas = yát tásya ávāthas: on the sb. with relatives see p. 356, 2. sukratū: see note on ṛtá̄varī, i. 160, 1 b. The repeated unaccented word in the Pada text here is not marked with Anudāttas because all unaccented syllables following a Svarita are unmarked. á̄ pṛṇáithe: 2. du. sb. pr. of pṛṇ fill. The meaning of d is not quite certain, but is probably ‘that ye who are wise may make him full of wisdom all his life’. śarádas: autumns, not varṣá̄ṇi rains (which only occurs in the AV.), regularly used in the RV. to express years of life, because that was the distinctive season where the RV. was composed.

See Page Number 119, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 prá urór, Mitrā-Varuṇā, pṛthivyá̄ḥ,

prá divá ṛṣvá̄d bṛhatáḥ, sudānū,

spáśo dadhāthe óṣadhīṣu vikṣú

ṛ́dhag yató, ’nimiṣaṃ rákṣamāṇā.

From the wide earth, O Mitra-Varuṇa, from the high lofty sky, O bounteous ones, ye have placed your spies that go separately, in plants and abodes, ye that protect with unwinking eye.

urós: here used as f. (as adjectives in u may be: 98), though the f. of this particular adj. is otherwise formed with ī: urv-í̄. sudānū: see note on sukratū in 2 c. spáśas: the spies of Varuṇa (and Mitra) are mentioned in several passages. dadhāthe: Pragṛhya (26 b ). óṣadhīṣu: the use of this word seems to have no special force here beyond expressing that the spies lurk not only in the houses of men, but also outside. yatás: pr. pt. A. pl. of i go. ánimiṣam: acc. of á-nimiṣ f. non-winking, used adverbially, to be distinguished from the adj. a-nimiṣá also used adverbially in the acc. The initial a must be elided for the sake of the metre.

See Page Number 121, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 śáṃsā Mitrásya Váruṇasya dhá̄ma:

śúṣmo ródasī badbadhe mahitvá̄.

áyan má̄sā áyajvanām aví̄rāḥ;

prá yajñámanmā vṛjánaṃ tirāte.

I will praise the ordinance of Mitra and Varuṇa: their force presses apart the two worlds with might. May the months of nonsacrificers pass without sons; may he whose heart is set on sacrifice extend his circle.

śáṃsā: this form may be the 2. s. P. ipv. with metrically lengthened final vowel, as the Pada text interprets it; or the 1. s. sb. P. (p. 125). The latter seems more likely because the poet speaks of himself in the 1. prs. (twice) in 6 a, b also. badbadhe: int. of bādh (174 a ); cp. vii. 23, 3, ví bādhiṣṭa syá ródasī mahitvá̄ he has pressed asunder the two worlds with his might. mahitvá̄: inst. (p. 77). áyan: 3. pl. pr. sb. of i go (p. 130). aví̄rās: predicative = as sonless; on the accent see p. 455, 10 c α. yajñámanmā: contrasted with áyajvanām (accent p. 455, f. n. 2). prá tirāte: 3. s. sb. pr. of tṝ cross; this cd. vb. is often used in the sense of prolonging life (Ā. one’s own, P. that of others), here of increasing the number of one’s sons (as opposed to aví̄ras in c); cp. prá yé bándhuṃ tiránte, gávyā pṛñcánto áśvyā maghá̄ni who further their kin, giving abundantly gifts of cows and horses (vii. 67, 9).

See Page Number 122, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 ámūrā, víśvā, vṛṣaṇāv, imá̄ vāṃ,

ná yá̄su citráṃ dádṛśe, ná yakṣám.

drúhaḥ sacante ánṛtā jánānāṃ:

ná vāṃ niṇyá̄ni acíte abhūvan.

O wise mighty ones, all these (praises) are for you two, in which no marvel is seen nor mystery. Avengers follow the falsehoods of men: there have been no secrets for you not to know.

The interpretation of this stanza is uncertain. Following the Padapāṭha I take ámūrā to be a du. m. agreeing with vṛṣaṇau, but víśvā for víśvās (contrary to the Pada) f. pl. N. agreeing with imá̄s these (sc. stutáyas). ná citrám: that is, no deceit or falsehood. dádṛśe: 3. s. pf. Ā. with ps. sense, as often (cp. p. 342 a ). drúhas: the spies of Varuṇa (cp. 3 c). ná niṇyá̄ni: explains c: there is nothing hidden from you. a-cíte: dat. inf. (cp. 167, 1 a ).

See Page Number 122, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 sám u vāṃ yajñáṃ mahayaṃ námobhir;

huvé vāṃ, Mitrā-Varuṇā, sabá̄dhaḥ.

prá vāṃ mánmāni ṛcáse návāni;

kṛtá̄ni bráhma jujuṣann imá̄ni.

With reverence I will consecrate for you the sacrifice; I call on you two, Mitra-Varuṇa, with zeal. (These) new thoughts are to praise you; may these prayers that have been offered be pleasing.

sám mahayam: 1. s. inj. cs. of mah. huvé: 1. s. pr. Ā. of hū call. sabá̄dhas: note that the pcl. sa is separated in the Pada text, though the privative pcl. a is not. prá . . . ṛcáse: dat. inf. from arc praise (see p. 192, b 1; cp. p. 463, notes 2 and 8). návāni: the seers often emphasize the importance of new prayers. bráhma: n. pl.; see 90, p. 67 (bottom) and note 4. jujuṣan: 3. pl. sb. pf. of juṣ (140, 1).

See Page Number 123, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 iyáṃ, devā, puróhitir yuvábhyāṃ

yajñéṣu, Mitrā-Varuṇāv, akāri;

viśvāni durgá̄ pipṛtaṃ tiró no.

yūyáṃ pāta suastíbhiḥ sádā naḥ.

This priestly service, O gods, has been rendered to you two at sacrifices, O Mitra-Varuṇa. Take us across all hardships. Do ye protect us evermore with blessings.

This final stanza is a repetition of the final stanza of the preceding hymn (vii. 60); d is the refrain characteristic of the hymns of the Vasiṣṭha family, concluding three-fourths of the hymns of the seventh Maṇḍala.

deva: voc. du., shortened for devā (cp. Varuṇa in 1 a) as restored in the Pada text. yuvábhyām: note the difference between this form and yúvabhyām, dat. du. of yúvan youth. Mitrā-Varuṇau: note that in the older parts of the RV. the du. ending au occurs only within a Pāda before vowels, in the Sandhi form of āv. akāri: ps. ao. of kṛ do. pipṛtam: 2. du. ipv. pr. of pṛ put across. yūyám: pl., scil. devās, because the line is a general refrain addressed to the gods, not to Mitra-Varuṇa.

SÚ̄RYA

Some ten hymns are addressed to Sūrya. Since the name designates the orb of the sun as well as the god, Sūrya is the most concrete of the solar deities, his connexion with the luminary always being present to the mind of the seers. The eye of Sūrya is several times mentioned; but Sūrya himself is also often called the eye of Mitra and Varuṇa, as well as of Agni and of the gods. He is far-seeing, all-seeing, the spy of the whole world; he beholds all beings, and the good and bad deeds of mortals. He arouses men to perform their activities. He is the soul or guardian of all that moves or is stationary. His car is drawn by one steed called etaśá, or by seven swift mares called hárit bays.

The Dawn or Dawns reveal or produce Sūrya; he shines from the lap of the Dawns; but Dawn is also sometimes Sūrya’s wife. He also bears the metronymic Āditya or Āditeya, son of the goddess Aditi. His father is Dyaus or Heaven. The gods raised him who had been hidden in the ocean, and they placed him in the sky; various individual gods, too, are said to have produced Sūrya or raised him to heaven.

Sūrya is in various passages conceived as a bird traversing space; he is a ruddy bird that flies; or he is a flying eagle. He is also called a mottled bull, or a white and brilliant steed brought by Dawn. Occasionally he is described as an inanimate object: he is a gem of the sky, or a variegated stone set in the midst of heaven. He is a brilliant weapon (á̄yudha) which Mitra-Varuṇa conceal with cloud and rain, or their felly (paví), or a brilliant car placed by them in heaven. Sūrya is also sometimes spoken of as a wheel (cakrá), though otherwise the wheel of Sūrya is mentioned. Sūrya shines for all the world, for men and gods. He dispels the darkness, which he rolls up like a skin, or which his rays throw off like a skin into the waters. He measures the days and prolongs life. He drives away sickness, disease, and evil dreams. All creatures depend on him, and the epithet ‘all-creating’ (víśvá-karman) is once applied to him. By his greatness he is the divine priest (asuryà puróhita) of the gods. At his rising he is besought to declare men sinless to Mitra-Varuṇa and to other gods.

The name Sú̄rya is a derivative of svàr light, and cognate with the Avestic hvare sun, which has swift horses and is the eye of Ahura Mazda.

vii. 63. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 125, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 úd u eti subhágo viśvácakṣāḥ [ ]

sá̄dhāraṇaḥ Sú̄rio má̄nuṣāṇām,

cákṣur Mitrásya Váruṇasya deváś,

cármeva yáḥ samávivyak támāṃsi.

Up rises the genial all-seeing Sun, common to all men, the eye of Mitra and Varuṇa, the god who rolled up the darkness like a skin.

víśvácakṣās: cp. urucákṣās in 4 a; on the accentuation of these two words cp. p. 454, 10 and p. 455, 10 c α. cákṣus: cp. vii. 61, 1. sam-ávivyak: 3. s. ipf. of vyac extend. cárma iva: cp. iv. 13, 4. raśmáyaḥ Sú̄riasya cármevá̄vādhus támo apsú antáḥ the rays of the sun have deposited the darkness like a skin within the waters.

See Page Number 125, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 úd u eti prasavītá̄ jánānāṃ

mahá̄n ketúr arṇaváḥ Sú̄riasya,

samānáṃ cakráṃ pariāvívṛtsan,

yád Etaśó váhati dhūrṣú yuktáḥ.

Up rises the rouser of the people, the great waving banner of the Sun, desiring to revolve hither the uniform wheel, which Etaśa, yoked to the pole, draws.

prasavītā: with metrically lengthened i (cp. p. 440, 4) for prasavitá̄ as restored by the Padapāṭha; cp. 4 c, jánāḥ Sú̄ryeṇa prásūtāḥ. samānám: uniform, with reference to the regularity of the sun’s course. cakrám: a single wheel of the sun, doubtless with reference to the shape of the luminary, is regularly spoken of. paryāvívṛtsan: ds. of vṛt turn; cp. p. 462, 13 a. Etaśás: as the name of the sun’s steed, is several times mentioned; but Sūrya is also often said to be drawn by seven steeds; cp. i. 164, 2, saptá yuñjanti rátham ékacakram, ékǒ áśvo vahati saptánāmā seven yoke the one-wheeled car, one steed with seven names draws it. dhūrṣú: the loc. pl. as well as the s. of this word is used in this way.

See Page Number 126, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 vibhrá̄jamāna uṣásām upásthād

rebháir úd eti anumadyámānaḥ.

eṣá me deváḥ Savitá̄ cachanda,

yáḥ samānáṃ ná praminá̄ti dhá̄ma.

Shining forth he rises from the lap of the dawns, greeted with gladness by singers. He has seemed to me god Savitṛ who infringes not the uniform law.

cachanda: here the more concrete god Sūrya is approximated to Savitṛ (i. 35), who is in several passages spoken of as observing fixed laws. In this hymn Sūrya is also referred to with terms (prasavitá̄, prásūtās) specially applicable to Savitṛ. ná praminá̄ti: cp. what is said of Dawn in i. 123, 9, ṛtásya ná mināti dhá̄ma she infringes not the law of Order.

See Page Number 126, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 divó rukmá urucákṣā úd eti,

dūré̆arthas taráṇir bhrá̄jamānaḥ.

nūnáṃ jánāḥ Sú̄rieṇa prásūtā

áyann árthāni, kṛṇávann ápāṃsi.

The golden gem of the sky, farseeing rises, whose goal is distant, speeding onward, shining. Now may men, aroused by the Sun, attain their goals and perform their labours.

divó rukmáḥ: cp. vi. 51, 1, rukmó ná divá úditā vy àdyaut like a golden gem of the sky he has shone forth at sunrise; and v. 47, 3, mádhye divó níhitaḥ pṛ́śnir áśmā the variegated stone set in the middle of the sky. dūréarthas: Sūrya has far to travel before he reaches sunset. áyan: 3. pl. pr. sb. of i go. árthāni: note that this word is always n. in the RV. except in two hymns of the tenth book, in which it is m. kṛṇávan: 3. pl. pr. sb. of kṛ do; accented because beginning a new sentence (p. 465, 18 a ).

See Page Number 127, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yátrā cakrúr amṛ́tā gātúm asmai,

śyenó ná dí̄yann ánu eti pá̄thaḥ.

práti vāṃ, sú̄ra údite, vidhema

námobhir Mitrā-Varuṇotá havyáiḥ.

Where the immortals have made a way for him, like a flying eagle he follows his path. To you two, when the sun has risen, we would pay worship with adorations, O Mitra-Varuṇa, and with offerings.

yátrā: the final vowel metrically lengthened. amṛ́tās: various gods, as Varuṇa, Mitra, and Aryaman (vii. 60, 4), are said to have made paths for the sun. práti to be taken with vidhema. sú̄ra údite: loc. abs. (205 b ).

See Page Number 127, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 nũ̄ Mitró Váruṇǒ Aryamá̄ nas [ ]

tmáne toká̄ya várivo dadhantu:

sugá̄ no víśvā supáthāni santu.

yūyáṃ pāta suastíbhiḥ sádā naḥ.

Now may Mitra, Varuṇa, and Aryaman grant wide space to us ourselves and to our offspring. Let all our paths be fair and easy to traverse. Do ye protect us evermore with blessings.

nú̄: to be pronounced with a slur as equivalent to two syllables (ᴗ–, cp. p. 437 a 8); only nú̄ occurs as the first word of a sentence, never nú (p. 238); the Pada text always has nú. tmáne: this word (cp. 90, 2, p. 69) is often used in the sense of self, while ātmán is only just beginning to be thus used in the RV. (115 b α) and later supplants tanú̄ body altogether. dadhantu: 3. pl. pr. according to the a conj. (p. 144, B 3 β) instead of dadhatu. sugá̄: lit. may all (paths) be easy to travel and easy to traverse. This final stanza is a repetition of the final stanza of the preceding hymn (vii. 62). On d see note on vii. 61, 6.

AŚVÍNĀ

These two deities are the most prominent gods after Indra, Agni, and Soma, being invoked in more than fifty entire hymns and in parts of several others. Though their name (aśv-in horseman ) is purely Indian, and though they undoubtedly belong to the group of the deities of light, the phenomenon which they represent is uncertain, because in all probability their origin is to be sought in a very early pre-Vedic age.

They are twins and inseparable, though two or three passages suggest that they may at one time have been regarded as distinct. They are young and yet ancient. They are bright, lords of lustre, of golden brilliancy, beautiful, and adorned with lotus-garlands. They are the only gods called golden-pathed (híraṇya-vartani). They are strong and agile, fleet as thought or as an eagle. They possess profound wisdom and occult power. Their two most distinctive and frequent epithets are dasrá wondrous and ná̄satya true.

They are more closely associated with honey (mádhu) than any of the other gods. They desire honey and are drinkers of it. They have a skin filled with honey; they poured out a hundred jars of honey. They have a honey-goad; and their car is honey-hued and honey-bearing. They give honey to the bee and are compared with bees. They are, however, also fond of Soma, being invited to drink it with Uṣas and Sūrya. Their car is sunlike and, together with all its parts, golden. It is threefold and has three wheels. It is swifter than thought, than the twinkling of an eye. It was fashioned by the three divine artificers, the Ṛbhus. It is drawn by horses, more commonly by birds or winged steeds; sometimes by one or more buffaloes, or by a single ass (rá̄sabha). It passes over the five countries; it moves around the sky; it traverses heaven and earth in one day; it goes round the sun in the distance. Their revolving course (vartís), a term almost exclusively applicable to them, is often mentioned. They come from heaven, air, and earth, or from the ocean; they abide in the sea of heaven, but sometimes their locality is referred to as unknown. The time of their appearance is between dawn and sunrise: when darkness stands among the ruddy cows; Uṣas awakens them; they follow after her in their car; at its yoking Uṣas is born. They yoke their car to descend to earth and receive the offerings of worshippers. They come not only in the morning, but also at noon and sunset. They dispel darkness and chase away evil spirits.

The Aśvins are children of Heaven; but they are also once said to be the twin sons of Vivasvant and Tvaṣṭṛ’s daughter Saraṇyú̄ (probably the rising Sun and Dawn). Pūṣan is once said to be their son; and Dawn seems to be meant by their sister. They are often associated with the Sun conceived as a female called either Sūryā or more commonly the daughter of Sūrya. They are Sūryā’s two husbands whom she chose and whose car she mounts. Sūryā’s companionship on their car is indeed characteristic. Hence in the wedding hymn (x. 85) the Aśvins are invoked to conduct the bride home on their car, and they (with other gods) are besought to bestow fertility on her.

The Aśvins are typically succouring divinities. They are the speediest deliverers from distress in general. The various rescues they effect are of a peaceful kind, not deliverance from the dangers of battle. They are characteristically divine physicians, healing diseases with their remedies, restoring sight, curing the sick and the maimed. Several legends are mentioned about those whom they restored to youth, cured of various physical defects, or befriended in other ways. The name oftenest mentioned is that of Bhujyu, whom they saved from the ocean in a ship.

The physical basis of the Aśvins has been a puzzle from the time of the earliest interpreters before Yāska, who offered various explanations, while modern scholars also have suggested several theories. The two most probable are that the Aśvins represented either the morning twilight, as half light and half dark, or the morning and the evening star. It is probable that the Aśvins date from the Indo-European period. The two horsemen, sons of Dyaus, who drive across the heaven with their steeds, and who have a sister, are parallel to the two famous horsemen of Greek mythology, sons of Zeus, brothers of Helena; and to the two Lettic God’s sons who come riding on their steeds to woo the daughter of the Sun. In the Lettic myth the morning star comes to look at the daughter of the Sun. As the two Aśvins wed the one Sūryā, so the two Lettic God’s sons wed the one daughter of the Sun; the latter also (like the Dioskouroi and the Aśvins) are rescuers from the ocean, delivering the daughter of the Sun or the Sun himself.

vii. 71. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 130, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 ápa svásur Uṣáso Nág jihīte:

riṇákti kṛṣṇí̄r aruṣá̄ya pánthām.

áśvāmaghā, gómaghā, vāṃ huvema:

dívā náktaṃ śárum asmád yuyotam.

Night departs from her sister Dawn. The black one yields a path to the ruddy (sun). O ye that are rich in horses, rich in cows, on you two we would call: by day and night ward off the arrow from us.

Nák (N. of náś): this word occurs here only. ápa jihīte: 3. s. Ā. from 2. hā. Uṣásas: abl., with which svásur agrees. Night and Dawn are often called sisters, e. g. svásā svásre jyá̄yasyai yónim āraik the (one) sister has yielded her place to her greater sister (i. 124, 8); and their names are often joined as a dual divinity, náktoṣá̄sā. The hymn opens thus because the Aśvins are deities of the early dawn. kṛṣṇí̄s (dec., p. 87): night; cp. i. 113, 2, śvetyá̄ á̄gād á̄raig u kṛṣṇá̄ sádanāni asyāḥ the bright one has come; the black one has yielded her abodes to her. riṇákti: 3. s. pr. of ric leave. aruṣá̄ya: to the sun; cp. i. 113, 16, á̄raik pánthāṃ yá̄tave sú̄ryāya she has yielded a path for the sun to go. pánthām: on the dec. see 97, 2 a. gómaghā: on the accentuation of this second voc., see p. 465, 18 a. śárum: the arrow of death and disease; for the Aśvins are characteristically healers and rescuers. asmád: p. 104. yuyotam: 2. du. of yu separate, for yuyutam; cp. 2 c and note on ii. 33, 1 b.

See Page Number 131, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 upá̄yātaṃ dāśúṣe mártiāya

ráthena vāmám, Aśvinā, váhantā.

yuyutám asmád ánirām ámīvāṃ:

dívā naktáṃ, mādhvī, trá̄sīthāṃ naḥ.

Come hither to the aid of the pious mortal, bringing wealth on your car, O Aśvins. Ward off from us languor and disease: day and night, O lovers of honey, may you protect us.

upa-á̄-yātam: 2. du. ipv. of yā go; on the accent see p. 469, 20 A a α. mādhvī: an epithet peculiar to the Aśvins. trá̄sīthām: 2. du. Ā. s ao. op. of trā protect (143, 4); irregularly accented as if beginning a new sentence.

See Page Number 131, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 á̄ vāṃ rátham avamásyāṃ víuṣṭau

sumnāyávo vṛ́ṣaṇo vartayantu.

syú̄magabhastim ṛtayúgbhir áśvair,

á̄, Aśvinā, vásumantaṃ vahethām.

Let your kindly stallions whirl hither your car at (this) latest daybreak. Do ye, O Aśvins, bring it that is drawn with thongs with your horses yoked in due time, hither, laden with wealth.

avamásyām: prn. adj. (120 c 1). sumnāyávas: the vowel is metrically lengthened in the second syllable, but, when this word occupies another position in the Pāda, the short vowel remains.

See Page Number 132, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 yó vāṃ rátho, nṛpatī, ásti voḷhá̄,

trivandhuró vásumāṁ̆ usráyāmā,

á̄ na ená̄, Nāsatyā, úpa yātam,

abhí yád vāṃ viśvápsnio jígāti.

The car, O lords of men, that is your vehicle, three-seated, filled with riches, faring at daybreak, with that come hither to us, Nāsatyas, in order that, laden with all food, for you it may approach us.

trivandhurás: accent, p. 455 c α. vásumān: Sandhi, 39. á̄ úpa yātam: p. 468, 20 a; cp. note on upá̄yātam in 2 a. ená̄: p. 108. yád: p. 357. vām: ethical dat. viśvápsnyas: the meaning of this word being doubtful, the sense of the whole Pāda remains uncertain. jígāti 3. s. sb. of gā go, indistinguishable from the ind.

See Page Number 132, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yuváṃ Cyávānaṃ jaráso ’mumuktaṃ,

ní Pedáva ūhathur āśúm áśvam;

nír áṃhasas támasaḥ spartam Átriṃ,

ní Jāhuṣáṃ śithiré dhātam antáḥ.

Ye two released Cyavāna from old age, ye brought a swift horse to Pedu; ye rescued Atri from distress and darkness; ye placed Jāhuṣa in freedom.

yuvám: note that this is the nom., yuvá̄m being the acc.: p. 105. Cyávāna is several times mentioned as having been rejuvenated by the Aśvins. jarásas: abl. (p. 316 b ). amumuktam: ppf. of muc (140, 6, p. 158). ní ūhathur: 2. du. pf. of vah. Pedáve: Pedu is several times mentioned as having received a swift, white, serpent-killing steed from the Aśvins. níḥ spartam: 2. du. root ao. of spṛ (cp. 148, 1 a ). The ao. in c and d is irregularly used in a narrative sense. ní dhātam: 2. du. root ao. of dhā. In i. 116, 20 it is said of the Aśvins: ‘ye carried away at night Jāhuṣa who was encompassed on all sides’.

See Page Number 133, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 iyáṃ manīṣá̄, iyám, Aśvinā, gí̄r.

imá̄ṃ suvṛktíṃ, vṛṣaṇā, juṣethām.

imá̄ bráhmāṇi yuvayú̄ni agman.

yūyáṃ pāta suastíbhiḥ sádā naḥ.

This is my thought, this, O Aśvins, my song. Accept gladly this song of praise, ye mighty ones. These prayers have gone addressed to you. Do ye protect us evermore with blessings.

manīṣá̄: this is one of the four passages in which the nom. of the der. ā dec. does not contract with a following vowel in the Saṃhitā text, here owing to its preceding the caesura (cp. note on v. 11, 5 b). gí̄r: 82. agman: 3. pl. root ao. of gam (148, 1 e ). This stanza is a repetition of the last stanza of the preceding hymn (vii. 70), which also is addressed to the Aśvins. On d see note on vii. 61, 6.

VÁRUṆA

Beside Indra (ii. 12) Varuṇa is the greatest of the gods of the RV., though the number of the hymns in which he is celebrated alone (apart from Mitra) is small, numbering hardly a dozen.

His face, eye, arms, hands, and feet are mentioned. He moves his arms, walks, drives, sits, eats, and drinks. His eye with which he observes mankind is the sun. He is far-sighted and thousand-eyed. He treads down wiles with shining foot. He sits on the strewn grass at the sacrifice. He wears a golden mantle and puts on a shining robe. His car, which is often mentioned, shines like the sun, and is drawn by well-yoked steeds. Varuṇa sits in his mansions looking on all deeds. The Fathers behold him in the highest heaven. The spies of Varuṇa are sometimes referred to: they sit down around him; they observe the two worlds; they stimulate prayer. By the golden-winged messenger of Varuṇa the sun is meant. Varuṇa is often called a king, but especially a universal monarch (samrá̄j). The attribute of sovereignty (kṣatrá) and the term ásura are predominantly applicable to him. His divine dominion is often alluded to by the word māyá̄ occult power; the epithet māyín crafty is accordingly used chiefly of him.

Varuṇa is mainly lauded as upholder of physical and moral order. He is a great lord of the laws of nature. He established heaven and earth, and by his law heaven and earth are held apart. He made the golden swing (the sun) to shine in heaven; he has made a wide path for the sun; he placed fire in the waters, the sun in the sky, Soma on the rock. The wind which resounds through the air is Varuṇa’s breath. By his ordinances the moon shining brightly moves at night, and the stars placed up on high are seen at night, but disappear by day. Thus Varuṇa is lord of light both by day and by night. He is also a regulator of the waters. He caused the rivers to flow; by his occult power they pour swiftly into the ocean without filling it. It is, however, with the aerial waters that he is usually connected. Thus he makes the inverted cask (the cloud) to pour its waters on heaven, earth, and air, and to moisten the ground.

Varuṇa’s ordinances being constantly said to be fixed, he is pre-eminently called dhṛtávrata whose laws are established. The gods themselves follow his ordinances. His power is so great that neither the birds as they fly nor the rivers as they flow can reach the limits of his dominion. He embraces the universe, and the abodes of all beings. He is all-knowing, and his omniscience is typical. He knows the flight of the birds in the sky, the path of the ships in the ocean, the course of the far-travelling wind, beholding all the secret things that have been or shall be done, he witnesses men’s truth and falsehood. No creature can even wink without his knowledge.

As a moral governor Varuṇa stands far above any other deity. His wrath is aroused by sin, the infringement of his ordinances, which he severely punishes. The fetters (pá̄śās) with which he binds sinners are often mentioned, and are characteristic of him. On the other hand, Varuṇa is gracious to the penitent. He removes sin as if untying a rope. He releases even from the sin committed by men’s fathers. He spares him who daily transgresses his laws when a suppliant, and is gracious to those who have broken his laws by thoughtlessness. There is in fact no hymn to Varuṇa in which the prayer for forgiveness of guilt does not occur. Varuṇa is on a footing of friendship with his worshipper, who communes with him in his celestial abode, and sometimes sees him with the mental eye. The righteous hope to behold in the next world Varuṇa and Yama, the two kings who reign in bliss.

The original conception of Varuṇa seems to have been the encompassing sky. It has, however, become obscured, because it dates from an earlier age. For it goes back to the Indo-Iranian period at least, since the Ahura Mazda (the wise spirit) of the Avesta agrees with the Asura Varuṇa in character, though not in name. It may even be older still; for the name Varuṇa is perhaps identical with the Greek οὐρανός sky. In any case, the word appears to be derived from the root vṛ cover or encompass.

vii. 86. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 135, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 dhí̄rā tú asya mahiná̄ janú̄ṃṣi,

ví yás tastámbha ródasī cid urví̄.

prá ná̄kam ṛṣváṃ nunude bṛhántaṃ,

dvitá̄ nákṣatraṃ; papráthac ca bhú̄ma.

Intelligent indeed are the generations by the might of him who has propped asunder even the two wide worlds. He has pushed away the high, lofty firmament and the day-star as well; and he spread out the earth.

dhí̄rā: cp. 7 c, ácetayad acítaḥ; and vii. 60, 6, acetásaṃ cic citayanti dákṣaiḥ they with their skill make even the unthinking think. asya = Váruṇasya. mahiná̄ = mahimná̄ (see 90, 2, p. 69) . Varuṇa (as well as other gods) is several times said to hold apart heaven and earth (e. g. vi. 70, 1) , which were supposed to have originally been united. prá nunude: pushed away from the earth; cp. vii. 99, 2 of Viṣṇu: úd astabhnā ná̄kam ṛṣváṃ bṛhántam thou didst prop up the high lofty firmament. ná̄kam: means the vault of heaven; there is nothing te show that it ever has the sense of sun which Sāyaṇa gives it here. Sāyaṇa also makes the verb nunude, though unaccented, depend on the relative in b; c is, however, equivalent to a relative clause (cp. ii. 12, 5 b. 8 d) . nákṣatram: in the sing. this word regularly refers to the sun, in the pl. to the stars. Varuṇa and other gods are often said to have raised the sun to, or to have placed it in, heaven. dvitá̄: doubly to be taken with nunude; that is, he raised up from the earth both the vault of heaven and the sun. papráthat: ppf. of prath (140, 6) ; accented because it begins a new sentence. bhú̄ma: note the difference between bhú̄man n. earth and bhūmán m. multitude (p. 259) .

See Page Number 136, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 utá sváyā tanúā sáṃ vade tát:

kadá̄ nú antár Váruṇe bhuvāni?

kíṃ me havyám áhṛṇāno juṣeta?

kadá̄ mṛḷīkáṃ sumánā abhí khyam?

And I converse thus with myself: ‘ when, pray, shall I be in communion with Varuṇa? What oblation of mine would he, free from wrath, enjoy? When shall I, of good cheer, perceive his mercy? ’

sváyā tanvà̄: with my own body = with myself (cp. p. 450, 2 b ) . nv àntár; loc. cit. Note that when a final original r appears in the Saṃhitā text, it is represented by Visarjanīya only in the Pada text; on the other hand, antáḥ in vii. 71, 5 appears as antár íti; within Varuṇa = united with Varuṇa. bhuvāni: 1. s. sb. root ao. of bhū be. khyam: 1. s. inj. a ao. of khyā.

See Page Number 137, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 pṛché tád éno, Varuṇa, didṛ́kṣu;

úpo emi cikitúṣo vipṛ́cham;

samānám ín me kaváyaś cid āhur:

ayáṃ ha túbhyaṃ Váruṇo hṛṇīte.

I ask about that sin, O Varuṇa, with a desire to find out; I approach the wise in order to ask; the sages say one and the same thing to me: ‘this Varuṇa is wroth with thee.’

pṛché: 1. s. pr. ind. Ā. of prach ask. didṛ́kṣu is a difficulty: it has been explained as L. pl. of a supposed word didṛ́ś, a very improbable formation = among those who see; also as N. s. of a ds. adj. didṛ́kṣu, with wrong accent (p. 461 f ) and wrong Sandhi, for didṛ́kṣur (úpo) = desirous of seeing (i. e. finding out ). It is probably best, following the Padapāṭha, to take the word as n. of the ds. adj. used adverbially (with adv. shift of accent) = with a desire to see, i. e. find out. úpo = úpa u (24). cikitúṣas: A. pl. of the pf. pt. of cit perceive. vi-pṛ́cham acc. inf. (167, 2 a ) . hṛṇīte: 3. s. pr. Ā. of hṛ be angry; w. dat. (200 l ).

See Page Number 137, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 kím á̄ga āsa, Varuṇa, jyḗṣṭhaṃ

yát stotá̄raṃ jíghāṃsasi sákhāyam?

prá tán me voco, dūḷabha svadhāvo:

áva tvānená̄ námasā turá ᴗ iyām.

What has been that chief sin, O Varuṇa, that thou desirest to slay thy praiser, a friend? Proclaim that to me, thou that art hard to deceive, self-dependent one: thee would I, free from sin, eagerly appease with adoration.

jyéṣṭham = jyǎiṣṭham, to be pronounced as a trisyllable (15, 1 f ) . yát: that as a cj. (p. 242) . jíghāṃsasi: ds. of han slay. prá vocas: inj. ao. of vac say. dūḷabha: 49 c. turá ᴗ iyām = turáḥ iyām (op. of i go ), to be pronounced, with irr. secondary contraction (cp. 22 a; 48 a ) , as turéyām. áva to be taken with iyām (cp. 5 a-c) .

See Page Number 137, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 áva drugdhá̄ni pítriā sṛjā no,

áva yá̄ vayáṃ cakṛmá̄ tanú̄bhiḥ.

áva, rājan, paśutṛ́paṃ ná tāyúṃ,

sṛjá̄, vatsáṃ ná dá̄m a no, Vásiṣṭham.

Set us free from the misdeeds of our fathers, from those that we have committed by ourselves. Release Vasiṣṣha, O King, like a cattle-stealing thief, like a calf from a rope.

áva sṛjā (metrically lengthened final, also in d): note the different construction in a: acc. of object and dat. of prs.; and in c d: acc. of prs. and abl. of that from which V. is set free. drugdhá̄ni: pp. of druh. cakṛmá̄: metrical lengthening of final vowel. tanú̄bhis: in the sense of a ref. prn. avá sṛjā: i. e. from sin. tāyúm: as one releases (after he has expiated his crime) a thief who has been bound; cp. viii. 67, 14: té ná, Á̄dityāso, mumócata stenáṃ baddhám iva as such set us free, O Ādityas, like a thief who is bound. dá̄mnas: distinguish dá̄man n. bond and dá̄man n. act of giving from dāmán m. giver and gift.

See Page Number 139, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 ná sá svó dákṣo, Varuṇa, dhrútiḥ sá̄:

súrā manyúr vibhí̄dako ácittiḥ; [ ]

ásti jyá̄yān kánīyasa upāré;

svápnaś canéd ánṛtasya prayotá̄.

It was not my own intent, O Varuṇa, it was seduction: liquor, anger, dice, thoughtlessness; the elder is in the offence of the younger; not even sleep is the warder off of wrong.

The general meaning of this stanza is clear: the sin with which Varuṇa is angry has not been due to Vasiṣṭha’s intention, but to seduction of one kind or another. The exact sense of three important words is, however, somewhat doubtful, because none of them occurs in any other passage. It can therefore be made out from the etymology and the context only. dhrútis: from the root dhru = dhvṛ (cp. 167 b, 9; 171, 2) , which occurs at the end of one or two cds., as Varuṇa-dhrú-t deceiving Varuṇa; cp. also v. 12, 5: ádhūrṣata svayám eté vácobhir ṛjūyaté vṛjiná̄ni bruvántaḥ these have deceived themselves with their own words, uttering crooked things to the straightforward man. Thus the meaning of dhrúti appears to be deception, seduction. The meaning of c depends on the interpretation of upāré. This word is naturally to be derived (in accordance with the analysis of the Pada text) from upa + ara (ṛ go ). The cd. vb. úpa ṛ occurs two or three times, e. g. AV. vii. 106, 1: yád ásmṛti cakṛmá kíṃ cid, upārimá cáraṇe if through forgetfulness we have done anything, have offended in our conduct. The sense of the noun would therefore be offence, the whole Pāda meaning: the elder is (involved) in the (= is the cause of the ) offence of the younger, that is, an elder has led me, the younger, astray. The use of the loc. here is illustrated by vi. 71, 2: yáḥ . . . prasavé . . . ási bhú̄manaḥ who (Savitṛ) art in the stimulation of the world, i. e. art the cause of the stimulation of the world. prayotá̄: this word might be derived from pra+yu join or pra+yu separate; the latter occurs in the RV. in the sense of drive away, while the former does not occur in the RV., and later means stir, mingle. The probability is therefore in favour of the sense warder off. caná then would have the original sense of not even (pp. 229-30) . svápnas: i. e. by producing evil dreams.

See Page Number 140, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 áraṃ, dāsó ná, mīḷhúṣe karāṇi

aháṃ devá̄ya bhú̄rṇaye ánāgāḥ.

ácetayad acíto devố aryó;

gṛ́tsaṃ rāyé kavítaro junāti.

I will, like a slave, do service sinless to the bounteous angry god. The noble god made the thoughtless think; he, the wiser, speeds the experienced man to wealth.

mīḷhúṣe: dat. s. of mīḍhvá̄ṃs. karāṇi: 1. s. sb. root ao. of kṛ do; to be taken with the adv. áram (p. 313, 4) . ácetayat: see cit. gṛ́tsam: even the thoughtful man Varuṇa with his greater wisdom urges on. rāyé: final dat. (of rái), p. 314, 2. junāti: 3. s. pr. of jū speed.

See Page Number 140, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 ayáṃ sú túbhyaṃ, Varuṇa svadhāvo,

hṛdí stóma úpaśritaś cid astu.

śáṃ naḥ kṣéme, śám u yóge nǒ astu.

yūyáṃ pāta suastíbhiḥ sádā naḥ.

Let this praise be well impressed on thy heart, O self-dependent Varuṇa. Let us have prosperity in possession, prosperity also in acquisition. Do ye protect us evermore with blessings.

túbhyam: dat. of advantage (p. 314, B 1) . astu naḥ: p. 320 f. On d see note on vii. 61, 6.

MAṆḌŪKĀS

The following hymn, intended as a spell to produce rain, is a panegyric of frogs, who are compared during the drought to heated kettles, and are described as raising their voices together at the commencement of the rains like Brahmin pupils repeating the lessons of their teacher.

vii. 103. Metre: Triṣṭubh; 1. Anuṣṭubh.

See Page Number 141, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 saṃvatsaráṃ śaśayāná̄

brāhmaṇá̄ vratacāriṇaḥ,

vá̄caṃ Parjányajinvitāṃ

prá maṇḍú̄kā avādiṣuḥ.

The frogs having lain for a year, like Brāhmans practising a vow, have uttered forth their voice roused by Parjanya.

saṃvatsarám: acc. of duration of time (197, 2) . śaśayāná̄s: pf. pt. Ā. of śī lie (p. 155, f. n. 1) . brāhmaṇá̄s: i. e. like Brahmins. vratacāríṇas: i. e. practising a vow of silence. Parjánya-jinvitām: because the frogs begin to croak at the commencement of the rainy season; on the accent see p. 456, 2 α. avādiṣur: iṣ ao. of vad (145, 1) .

See Page Number 142, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 divyá̄ á̄po abhí yád enam á̄yan,

dṛ́tiṃ ná śúṣkaṃ, sarasí̄ śáyānam,

gávām áha ná māyúr vatsínīnāṃ,

maṇḍú̄kānāṃ vagnúr átrā sám eti.

When the heavenly waters came upon him lying like a dry leatherbag in a lake, then the sound of the frogs unites like the lowing of cows accompanied by calves.

divyá̄ á̄paḥ: the rains. enam: collective = the frogs; cp. the sing. maṇḍú̄kaḥ in 4 c used collectively. á̄yan: ipf. of i (p. 130) . sarasí̄: loc. of sarasí̄ according to the primary ī dec. (cp. p. 87) . A dried-up lake is doubtless meant. gávām: 102, 2; p. 458, c. 1. átrā (metrically lengthened): here as corr. to yád (cp. p. 214) .

See Page Number 142, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 yád īm enāṁ̆ uśató abhy ávarṣīt

tṛṣyá̄vataḥ, prāvṛ́ṣi á̄gatāyām,

akhkhalīkṛ́tyā, pitáraṃ ná putró,

anyó anyám úpa vádantam eti.

When he has rained upon them the eager, the thirsty, the rainy season having come, one with a croak of joy approaches the other while he speaks, as a son (approaches) his father. [ ]

īm: see p. 220, 2. uśatás (pr. pt. A. pl. of vaś desire ): longing for rain. ávarṣīt: iṣ ao. of vṛṣ: if the subject were expressed it would be Parjanya. prāvṛ́ṣi: loc. abs. (see 205, 1 b ). akhkhalīkṛ́tyā: see 184 d; the final of this gd. may be regarded as retaining the original long vowel rather than metrically lengthening a short vowel, though it always appears with ǎ in the Pada text. anyás: i. e. maṇḍú̄kas.

See Page Number 143, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 anyó anyám ánu gṛbhṇāti enor,

apá̄ṃ prasargé yád ámandiṣātām.

maṇḍú̄ko yád abhívṛṣṭaḥ kániṣkan,

pṛ́śniḥ saṃpṛṅkté háritena vá̄cam.

One of the two greets the other when they have revelled in the discharge of the waters. When the frog, rained upon, leaps about, the speckled one mingles his voice with (that of) the yellow one.

enos: gen. du., of them two (112 a ) . gṛbhṇāti: 3. s. pr. of grabh. ámandiṣātām: 3. du. Ā. iṣ ao. of mand exhilarate. maṇḍú̄kas: in a collective sense. kániṣkan: 3. s. inj. int. of skand leap (= kániṣkandt), see 174 b. Note that this form in the Pada text is kániskan, because in the later Sandhi s is not cerebralized before k (cp. 67) . The use of the inj. with yád is rare. saṃ-pṛṅkté: 3. s. Ā. pr. of pṛc mix.

See Page Number 143, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yád eṣām anyó aniásya vá̄caṃ,

śāktásyeva vádati śikṣamāṇaḥ,

sárvaṃ tád eṣāṃ samṛ́dheva párva

yát suvá̄co vádathaná̄dhi apsú.

When one of them repeats the speech of the other, as the learner [ ] that of his teacher, all that of them is in unison like a lesson that eloquent ye repeat upon the waters.

eṣām: cp. enos in 4 a. samṛ́dhā: the interpretation of c is uncertain because of the doubt as to the form and meaning of this word, and because of the many senses of párva. It has accordingly been very variously explained. The above rendering is perhaps the most probable. samṛ́dhā: inst. of samṛ́dh, lit. growing together, then unison, harmony. párvan, joint, then a section in Vedic recitation. Thus c would be an explanation of b, the voices of the frogs sounding together like those of pupils reciting a lesson after their teacher. vádathana: see p. 125, f. n. 3; change, as often, from 3. prs. to 2. ádhi: 176, 2 a (p. 209) .

See Page Number 144, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 gómāyur éko, ajámāyur ékaḥ;

pṛ́śnir éko; hárita éka eṣām.

samānáṃ ná̄ma bíbhrato vírūpāḥ.

purutrá̄ vá̄caṃ pipiśur vádantaḥ.

One lows like a cow, one bleats like a goat; one is speckled, one of them is yellow. Bearing a common name, they have different colours. In many ways they adorn their voice in speaking.

gómāyus: cp. 2 c. pṛ́śnis, háritas: cp. 4 d. samānám: they are all called frogs, though they have different voices and colours. bíbhratas: N. pl. pr. pt. of bhṛ (p. 132) . purutrá̄: note that the suffix in words in which the vowel is always long in the Saṃhitā text (as in devatrá̄, asmatrá̄, c.) is long in the Pada text also; while in others like átra, in which it is only occasionally lengthened metrically, the vowel is always short in that text. pipiśur: they modulate the sound of their voices (cp. a).

See Page Number 145, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 brāhmaṇá̄so atirātré ná sóme,

sáro ná pūrṇám abhíto, vádantaḥ,

saṃvatsarásya tád áhaḥ pári ṣṭha,

yán, maṇḍūkāḥ, prāvṛṣí̄ṇaṃ babhú̄va.

Like Brahmins at the over-night Soma sacrifice speaking around as it were a full lake, ye celebrate that day of the year which, O Frogs, has begun the rains.

atirātré: this is the name of a part of the Soma sacrifice in the ritual of the Yajurveda. Its performance lasted a day and the following night. Its mention in the RV. shows that it is ancient. sáro ná: as it were a lake, a hyperbolic expression for a large vessel filled with Soma. abhítas: 177, 1. pári ṣṭha: lit. be around, then celebrate; cp. pári car go round, then attend upon, honour; on the Sandhi, cp. 67 c. prāvṛṣí̄ṇaṃ babhú̄va: has become one that belongs to the rainy season.

See Page Number 145, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 brāhmaṇá̄saḥ somíno vá̄cam akrata,

bráhma kṛṇvántaḥ parivatsarí̄ṇam.

adhvaryávo gharmíṇaḥ siṣvidāná̄,

āvír bhavanti; gúhiā ná ké cit.

Soma-pressing Brahmins, they have raised their voice, offering their yearly prayer. Adhvaryu priests, heated, sweating, they appear; none of them are hidden.

brāhmaṇá̄sas: ná need not be supplied (as in 1 b), the frogs being identified with priests. somínas: celebrating a Soma sacrifice, which expresses much the same as sáro ná pūrṇám abhítaḥ in 7 b. vá̄cam akrata: cp. vádantas in 7 b. akrata: 3. pl. Ā. root ao. of kṛ (148, 1 b) . bráhma: with b cp. 7 c, d. gharmíṇas is meant to be ambiguous: oppressed with the heat of the sun (frogs), busied with hot milk (priests). Here we already have a reference to the Pravargya ceremony in which milk was heated in a pot, and which was familiar in the ritual of the Brāhmaṇas. siṣvidāná̄s: pf. pt. Ā. of svid; note that the cerebralized initial of the root is restored in the Pada text; cp. kániṣkan in 4 c. āvís: see p. 266, b.

See Page Number 146, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 deváhitiṃ jugupur dvādaśásya:

ṛtúṃ náro ná prá minanti eté.

saṃvatsaré, prāvṛ́ṣi á̄gatāyāṃ,

taptá̄ gharmá̄ aśnuvate visargám.

They have guarded the divine order of the twelvemonth: these men infringe not the season. In a year, the rain time having come, the heated milk-offerings obtain release.

deváhitim: on the accent see p. 456, 2 a. jugupur: pf. of gup protect. dvādaśásya: note the difference of accent and inflexion between dvá̄daśa twelve (104) and dvādaśá consisting of twelve, twelfth (107); supply saṃvatsarásya from c. In the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa the year, saṃvatsara, is called dvādaśa consisting of twelve months and caturviṃśa consisting of twenty-four half-months. The gen. naturally depends on deváhitim, as being in the same Pāda. Prof. Jacobi understands dvādaśásya as the ordinal twelfth supplying má̄sasya month, and making it depend on ṛtúm in the next Pāda. This interpretation is then used as evidence to show that the beginning of the year was held in the period of the RV. to commence with the rainy season at the time of the summer solstice, and taken in conjunction with another reference in the RV. to the rainy season at the period to furnish an argument for the very early date of the RV. But there is no trace here of any reference to the end of the year: saṃvatsaré in c denotes ‘in the course of the year at the rainy season’. náras: here again no particle of comparison. minanti: from mī damage; cp. 7 c, d. saṃvatsaré: cp. 203, 3 a. prāvṛ́ṣi á̄gatāyām: loc. abs. as in 3 b. taptá̄ gharmá̄ḥ is meant to be ambiguous: heated milk-pots with reference to the priests (cp. adhvaryávo gharmíṇaḥ in 8 c) and dried up cavities with reference to the frogs (cp. tṛṣyá̄vatas in 3 b). aśnuvate (3. pl. Ā. pr. of aṃś obtain ) visargám obtain release or discharge, i. e. the milk-pots are emptied (and become cool), and the cavities in which the frogs are hidden let them out (and are cooled by the rain), cp. āvír bhavanti in 8 d.

See Page Number 147, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 gómāyur adād, ajámāyur adāt,

pṛ́śnir adād, dhárito no vásūni.

gávāṃ maṇḍú̄kā dádataḥ śatá̄ni,

sahasrasāvé prá tiranta á̄yuḥ.

He that lows like a cow has given us riches, he that bleats like a goat has given them, the speckled one has given them, and the yellow one. The frogs giving us hundreds of cows prolong our life in a thousandfold Soma pressing.

gómāyus c. (cp. 6 a) : the various kinds of frogs are here represented as taking the place of liberal institutors of sacrifice in giving bountiful gifts. dádatas: N. pl. of pr. pt. of dā give (cp. 156) . sahasrasāvé: loc. of time like saṃvatsaré in 9 c; the term probably refers to a Soma sacrifice lasting a year with three pressings a day (amounting roughly to a thousand). d is identical with iii. 53, 7 d.

VÍŚVE DEVÁ̄Ḥ

The comprehensive group called Víśve devá̄ḥ or All-Gods occupies an important position, for at least forty entire hymns are addressed to them. It is an artificial sacrificial group intended to include all the gods in order that none should be left out in laudations meant for the whole pantheon. The following hymn though traditionally regarded as meant for the Viśve devāḥ is a collection of riddles, in which each stanza describes a deity by his characteristic marks, leaving his name to be guessed. The deities meant in the successive stanzas are: 1. Soma, 2. Agni, 3. Tvaṣṭṛ, 4. Indra, 5. Rudra, 6. Pūṣan, 7. Viṣṇu, 8. Aśvins, 9. Mitra-Varuṇa, 10. Aṅgirases.

viii. 29. Metre: Distichs of a Jagatī + Gāyatrī (p. 445, α.) .

See Page Number 148, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 babhrúr éko víṣuṇaḥ sūnáro yúvā.

añjí aṅkte hiraṇyáyam.

One is brown, varied in form, bountiful, young. He adorns himself with golden ornament.

babhrús: this epithet is distinctive of Soma, to whom it is applied eight times, while it otherwise refers to Agni only once, and to Rudra in one hymn only (ii. 33) . It alludes to the colour of the juice, otherwise described as aruṇá ruddy, but most often as hári tawny. víṣuṇas: probably referring to the difference between the plant and the juice, and the mixtures of the latter with milk and honey. yúvā: here and in a few other passages Soma, like Agni, is called a youth, as produced anew every day. añjí: cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) . aṅkte: 3. s. Ā. of añj anoint, with middle sense anoints himself. hiraṇyáyam: cp. ix. 86, 43, mádhunā abhí añjate . . hiraṇyapāvá̄ āsu gṛbhṇate they anoint him (Soma) with mead; purifying with gold, they seize him in them (the waters), in allusion to fingers with golden rings.

See Page Number 148, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 yónim éka á̄ sasāda dyótano,

antár devéṣu médhiraḥ.

One has, shining, occupied his receptacle, the wise among the gods.

yónim: the sacrificial fireplace; cp. iii. 29, 10, ayáṃ te yónir ṛtvíyo, yáto jātó árocathāḥ: táṃ jānánn, Agna, á̄ sīda this is thy regular receptacle, born from which thou didst shine: knowing it, Agni, occupy it. dyótanas: the brightness of Agni is constantly dwelt on. médhiras: the wisdom of Agni is very frequently mentioned; in i. 142, 11 he is called devó devéṣu médhiraḥ the wise god among the gods.

See Page Number 149, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 vá̄śīm éko bibharti hásta āyasí̄m,

antár devéṣu nídhruviḥ.

One bears in his hand an iron axe, strenuous among the gods.

vá̄śīm: this weapon is connected elsewhere only with Agni, the Ṛbhus, and the Maruts. But Agni cannot be meant because he has already been described in 2; while the Ṛbhus and the Maruts would only be referred to in the plural (cp. 10) . But x. 53, 9 indicates sufficiently what god is here meant: Tváṣṭā . . apásām apástamaḥ . . śíśīte nūnáṃ paraśúṃ suāyasám Tvaṣṭṛ, most active of workers, now sharpens his axe made of good iron. nídhruvis: strenuous as the artificer of the gods, a sense supported by apástamas in the above quotation.

See Page Number 149, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 vájram éko bibharti hásta á̄hitaṃ:

téna vṛtrá̄ṇi jighnate.

One bears a bolt placed in his hand: with it he slays his foes.

á̄-hitam: pp. of dhā place; accent, p. 462, 13 b. jighnate: 3. s. pr. Ā. of han slay, see p. 432. vájram: this, as his distinctive weapon, shows that Indra is meant.

See Page Number 149, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 tigmám éko bibharti hásta á̄yudhaṃ,

śúcir ugró jálāṣabheṣajaḥ.

One, bright, fierce, with cooling remedies, bears in his hand a sharp weapon.

á̄yudham: bow and arrows are usually the weapons of Rudra; in vii. 46, 1 he is described by the epithets sthirádhanvan having a strong bow, kṣipréṣu swift-arrowed, tigmá̄yudha having a sharp weapon, and in vii. 46, 3 his lightning shaft, didyút, is mentioned. ugrás: this epithet is several times applied to Rudra (cp. ii. 33) . jálāṣabheṣajas: this epithet is applied to Rudra in i. 43, 4; Rudra is also called jálāṣa, and his hand is described as jálāṣa (as well as bheṣajá) in ii. 33, 7; these terms are applied to no other deity. b has the irregularity of two redundant syllables (p. 438, 2 α) .

See Page Number 150, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 pathá ékaḥ pīpāya; táskaro yathā

eṣá veda nidhīná̃̄m.

One makes the paths prosperous; like a thief he knows of treasures.

pathás: it is characteristic of Pūṣan (vi. 54) to be a knower and guardian of paths. pīpāya: pf., with lengthened red. vowel, from pi (= pyā) make full or abundant; cp. vi. 53, 4: ví pathó vá̄jasātaye cinuhí clear the paths for the gain of wealth (addressed to Pūṣan); and x. 59, 7: dadātu púnaḥ Pūṣá̄ pathíāṃ yá̄ suastíḥ let Pūṣan give us back the path that is propitious. táskaras: to be taken with b; like a thief he knows where hidden treasure is to be found; cp. vi. 48, 15 (addressed to Pūṣan): āvír gūḷhá̄ vásū karat, suvédā no vásū karat may he make hidden wealth manifest, may he make wealth easy for us to find; he also finds lost cattle; cp. vi. 54, 5-10. yathāṁ̆: unaccented (p. 453, 8 B d ) ; nasalized to avoid hiatus (p. 23, f. n. 1) . veda: with gen. (202 A c ) . nidhīná̃̄m: accent (p. 458, 2 a ) ; the final syllable to be pronounced dissyllabically.

See Page Number 150, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 trí̄ṇi éka urugāyó ví cakrame,

yátra devá̄so mádanti.

One, wide-pacing, makes three strides to where the gods are exhilarated.

trí̄ṇi: cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) supply vikrámaṇāni (cp. yásya urúṣu triṣú vikrámaṇeṣu, i. 154, 2). The three strides are characteristic of Viṣṇu (see i. 154) . urugāyá: an epithet distinctive of Viṣṇu (cp. i. 154, 1. 3. 5) . yátra: to the place (the highest step) where (p. 240) the gods drink Soma (cp. i. 154, 5) . b has the trochaic variety of the Gāyatrī cadence (see p. 439, 3 a, α) .

See Page Number 151, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 víbhir duá̄ carata, ékayā sahá:

prá pravāséva vasataḥ.

With birds two fare, together with one woman: like two travellers they go on journeys.

víbhis: cp. i. 118, 5, pári vām áśvāḥ pataṃgá̄, váyo vahantu aruṣá̄ḥ let the flying steeds, the ruddy birds, drive you (Aśvins) round. dvá̄ . . ékayā sahá: the two Aśvins with their one companion, Sūryā; cp. l. c.; á̄ vāṃ ráthaṃ yuvatís tiṣṭhad . ., duhitá̄ Sú̄ryasya the maiden, the daughter of the Sun, mounted your car; also v. 73, 5: á̄ yád vāṃ Sūryá̄ ráthaṃ tíṣṭhat when Sūryā mounted your car. prá vasatas: they go on a journey in traversing the sky in their car. pravāsá̄: this word occurs here only, apparently in the sense of one who is abroad on travels (like the post-Vedic pravāsin); in the Sūtras and in classical Sanskrit it means sojourn abroad. Some scholars regard pravāséva as irr. contraction for pravāsám iva: they travel as it were on a journey.

See Page Number 151, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 sádo duá̄ cakrāte upamá̄ diví:

samrá̄jā sarpírāsutĩ.

Two, as highest, have made for themselves a seat in heaven: two sovereign kings who receive melted butter as their draught.

samrá̄jā, as N. du., is applied to Mitra-Varuṇa exclusively. cakrāte: 3. du. pf. Ā. of kṛ with middle sense, make for oneself. upamá̄: N. du. in apposition to dvá̄, further explained by samrá̄jā.

See Page Number 152, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 árcanta éke máhi sá̄ma manvata:

téna sú̄ryam arocayan.

Singing, some thought of a great chant: by it they caused the sun to shine.

árcantas: singing is characteristic of the Aṅgirases; e. g. i. 62, 2, sá̄ma yénā . . árcanta Áṅgiraso gá̄ ávindan the chant by which the Aṅgirases, singing, found the cows; the Maruts are described in x. 78, 5 as viśvárūpā Áṅgiraso ná sá̄mabhiḥ manifold with chants like the Aṅgirases. The Aṅgirases again are those yá ṛténa sú̄ryam á̄rohayan diví who by their rite caused the sun to mount to heaven (x. 62, 3) . Sāyaṇa and some other interpreters think that the Atris are meant. But nothing is ever said of the singing or the chants of the Atris. Again, though in one hymn (v. 40) it is said in the last stanza that the Atris found the sun: yáṃ vái sú̄ryaṃ Svàrbhānus támasā á̄vidhyad, Átrayas tám ánv avindan the Atris found the sun which Svarbhānu had assailed with darkness (9), this is only a repetition of what is attributed to Atri in the sing.: gūḷháṃ sú̄ryaṃ támasā . . bráhmaṇā avindad Átriḥ Atri by prayer found the sun hidden by darkness (6) and Átriḥ sú̄ryasya diví cákṣur á̄dhāt Atris placed the eye of the sun in heaven (8); and in the AV. and the ŚB., it is Atri (not the Atris) who performed a similar act. Thus even this deed is not characteristic of the Atris (plural), but at most of Atri (singular). The Aṅgirases must therefore undoubtedly be meant here, éke: the pl. is here used to express an indefinite group beside ékas and dvá̄ in the rest of the hymn (cp. 105) . manvata: 3. pl. ipf. Ā. (without augment) of man think. arocayan: ipf. cs. of ruc shine.

SÓMA

As the Soma sacrifice formed the centre of the ritual of the RV., the god Soma is one of the most prominent deities. With rather more than 120 hymns (all those in Maṇḍala ix, and about half a dozen in others) addressed to him, he comes next to Ágni (i. 1) in importance. The anthropomorphism of his character is less developed than that of Indra or Varuṇa because the plant and its juice are constantly present to the mind of the poet. Soma has terrible and sharp weapons, which he grasps in his hand; he wields a bow and a thousand-pointed shaft. He has a car which is heavenly, drawn by a team like Vāyu’s. He is also said to ride on the same car as Indra. He is the best of charioteers. In about half a dozen hymns he is associated with Indra, Agni, Pūṣan, and Rudra respectively as a dual divinity. He is sometimes attended by the Maruts, the close allies of Indra. He comes to the sacrifice and receives offerings on the sacred grass.

The Soma juice, which is intoxicating, is frequently termed mádhu or sweet draught, but oftenest called índu the bright drop. The colour of Soma is brown (babhrú), ruddy (aruṇá), or more usually tawny (hári). The whole of the ninth book consists of incantations chanted over the tangible Soma, while the stalks are being pounded by stones, the juice passes through a woollen strainer, and flows into wooden vats, in which it is offered to the gods on the litter of sacred grass (barhís). These processes are overlaid with confused and mystical imagery in endless variation. The pressing stones with which the shoot (aṃśú) is crushed are called ádri or grá̄van. The pressed juice as it passes through the filter of sheep’s wool is usually called pávamāna or punāná flowing clear. This purified (unmixed) Soma is sometimes called śuddhá pure, but much oftener śukrá or śúci bright; it is offered almost exclusively to Vāyu or Indra. The filtered Soma flows into jars (kaláśa) or vats (dróṇa), where it is mixed with water and also with milk, by which it is sweetened. The verb mṛj cleanse is used with reference to this addition of water and milk. Soma is spoken of as having three kinds of admixture (āśír): milk (gó), sour milk (dádhi), and barley (yáva). The admixture being alluded to as a garment or bright robe, Soma is described as ‘decked with beauty’. Soma is pressed three times a day: the Ṛbhus are invited to the evening pressing, Indra to the midday one, which is his exclusively, while the morning libation is his first drink. The three abodes (sadhástha) of Soma which are mentioned probably refer to three tubs used in the ritual.

Soma’s connexion with the waters, resulting from the admixture, is expressed in the most various ways. He is the drop that grows in the waters; he is the embryo of the waters or their child; they are his mothers or his sisters; he is lord and king of streams; he produces waters and causes heaven and earth to rain. The sound made by the trickling Soma is often alluded to, generally in hyperbolical language, with verbs meaning to roar or bellow, or even thunder. He is thus commonly called a bull among the waters, which figure as cows. Soma is moreover swift, being often compared with a steed, sometimes with a bird flying to the wood. Owing to his yellow colour Soma’s brilliance is the physical aspect most dwelt upon by the poets. He is then often likened to or associated with the sun.

The exhilarating power of Soma led to its being regarded as a divine drink bestowing immortal life. Hene it is called amṛ́ta draught of immortality. All the gods drink Soma; they drank it to gain immortality; it confers immortality not only on gods, but on men. It has, moreover, medicinal powers: Soma heals whatever is sick, making the blind to see and the lame to walk. Soma also stimulates the voice, and is called ‘lord of speech’. He awakens eager thought: he is a generator of hymns, a leader of poets, a seer among priests. Hence his wisdom is much dwelt upon; thus he is a wise seer, and he knows the races of the gods.

The intoxicating effect of Soma most emphasized by the poets is the stimulus it imparts to Indra in his conflict with hostile powers. That Soma invigorates Indra for the fight with Vṛtra is mentioned in innumerable passages. Through this association Indra’s warlike exploits and cosmic actions come to be attributed to Soma independently. He is a victor unconquered in fight, born for battle. As a warrior he wins all kinds of wealth for his worshippers.

Though Soma is several times regarded as dwelling or growing on the mountains (like Haoma in the Avesta), his true origin and abode are regarded as in heaven. Soma is the child of heaven, is the milk of heaven, and is purified in heaven. He is the lord of heaven; he occupies heaven, and his place is the highest heaven. Thence he was brought to earth. The myth embodying this belief is that of the eagle that brings Soma to Indra, and is most fully dealt with in the two hymns iv. 26 and 27. Being the most important of herbs, Soma is said to have been born as the lord (páti) of plants, which also have him as their king; he is a lord of the wood (vánaspáti), and has generated all plants. But quite apart from his connexion with herbs, Soma is, like other leading gods, called a king: he is a king of rivers; a king of the whole earth; a king or father of the gods; a king of gods and mortals. In a few of the latest hymns of the RV. Soma begins to be mystically identified with the moon; in the AV. Soma several times means the moon; and in the Brāhmaṇas this identification has already become a commonplace.

We know that the preparation and the offering of Soma (the Avestan Haoma) was already an important feature of Indo-Iranian worship. In both the RV. and the Avesta it is stated that the stalks were pressed, that the juice was yellow, and was mixed with milk; in both it grows on mountains, and its mythical home is in heaven, whence it comes down to earth; in both the Soma draught has become a mighty god and is called a king; in both there are many other identical mythological traits relating to Soma.

It is possible that the belief in an intoxicating divine beverage, the home of which was in heaven, goes back to the Indo-European period. It must then have been regarded as a kind of honey mead (Skt. mádhu, Gk. μέθυ, Anglo-Saxon medu ).

The name of Soma (= Haoma) means pressed juice, being derived from the root su (= Av. hu) press.

viii. 48. Metre: Triṣṭubh; 5. Jagatī.

See Page Number 155, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 svādór abhakṣi váyasaḥ sumedhá̄ḥ

suādhío varivovíttarasya,

víśve yáṃ devá̄ utá mártiāso,

mádhu bruvánto, abhí saṃcáranti.

Wisely I have partaken of the sweet food that stirs good thoughts, best banisher of care, to which all gods and mortals, calling it honey, come together.

ábhakṣi: 1. s. Ā. s ao. of bhaj share; with partitive gen. (202 A e). sumedhá̄s: appositionally, as a wise man; svādhyàs: gen. of svādhí̄ (declined like rathí̄, p. 85, f. n. 4). yám: m. referring to the n. váyas, as if to sóma. abhí saṃcáranti: p. 469, B a.

See Page Number 155, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 antáś ca prá̄gā, Áditir bhavāsi,

avayātá̄ háraso dáiviasya.

Índav, Índrasya sakhiáṃ juṣāṇáḥ,

śráuṣṭīva dhúram, ánu rāyá ṛdhyāḥ.

If thou hast entered within, thou shalt be Aditi, appeaser of divine wrath. Mayest thou, O Indu, enjoying the friendship of Indra, like an obedient mare the pole, advance us to wealth.

antáś: cp. note on vii. 86, 2 b. Soma is here addressed. prá̄gās: the Padapāṭha analysis of this as prá ágāḥ is evidently wrong, because in a principal sentence it must be prá agāḥ (p. 468, 20) or in a subordinate one pra-ágāḥ (p. 469, 20 B) ; here it is the latter, because of ca = if (p. 229, 3) . Áditis: because Aditi releases from sin (e. g. anāgāstváṃ no Áditiḥ kṛṇotu may Aditi produce sinlessness for us, i. 162, 22); that is, may Soma purify us within. Índav: vocatives in o are always given as Pragṛhya in the Pada text (o íti) even though their Sandhi before vowels may be av or a in the Saṃhitā text; cp. note on ii. 33, 3 b. śráuṣṭī: this word occurs only here, and its meaning is uncertain; the most probable sense is obedient mare. rāyé: this analysis of the Padapāṭha makes the construction doubtful because an acc. is wanted as parallel to dhúram; nas may be supplied; then the sense would be: ‘as a willing mare advances the yoke (of a car), so mayst thou advance (us or the yoke of the sacrifice) for the attainment of wealth.’ ṛdhyās: root ao. op. of ṛdh thrive.

See Page Number 156, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 ápāma sómam; amṛ́tā abhūma;

áganma jyótir; ávidāma devá̄n.

kíṃ nūnám asmá̄n kṛṇavad árātiḥ?

kím u dhūrtír, amṛta, mártiasya?

We have drunk Soma; we have become immortal; we have gone to the light; we have found the gods. What can hostility now do to us, and what the malice of mortal man, O immortal one?

This stanza describes the mental exaltation produced by drinking Soma. Note the use of the aorist four times and its characteristic sense (p. 345, C.) . ápāma: root ao. of pā drink. abhūma: root ao. of bhū become. áganma: root ao. of gám go. jyótis: acc. of the goal (197 A 1) . ávidāma: a ao. of 2. vid find. kṛṇavat: 3. s. pr. sb. of kṛ do (p. 134) . amṛta: Soma.

See Page Number 157, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 śáṃ no bhava hṛdá á̄ pītá, Indo;

pitéva, Soma, sūnáve suśévaḥ,

sákheva sákhya, uruśaṃsa, dhí̄raḥ,

prá ṇa á̄yur jīváse, Soma, tārīḥ.

Do good to our heart when drunk, O Indu; kindly like a father, O Soma, to his son, thoughtful like a friend to his friend, O far-famed one, prolong our years that we may live, O Soma.

śáṃ hṛdé refreshing to the heart occurs several times; the emphasizing pcl. á̄ is here added to the dat. prá ṇaḥ: Sandhi, 65 c. jīváse: dat. inf. of jīv live. tārīs: iṣ ao. inj. from tṝ cross.

See Page Number 157, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 imé mā pītá̄ yaśása uruṣyávo,

ráthaṃ ná gá̄vaḥ, sám anāha párvasu;

té mā rakṣantu visrásaś carítrād,

utá mā srá̄mād yavayantu índavaḥ.

These glorious, freedom-giving (drops), ye have knit me together in my joints like straps a car; let those drops protect me from breaking a leg and save me from disease.

imé: supply índavas from d. yaśásas: p. 59. uruṣyávas: cp. varivovíttarasya in 1 b. anāha: this seems to be an irregular pf. form from nah bind for nanāha; cp. góbhiḥ sáṃnaddho asi thou art bound together with straps (said of a car); another irregularity is the 2. pl. strong radical vowel (cp. 137, 2) . visrásas: abl. inf. (of vi-sraṃs) with attracted object in the abl. carítrād: p. 337, 3 a. Note that Pāda c is a Triṣṭubh. yavayantu: cs. ipv. of yu separate. Change in c and d, as often, from 2. to 3. prs.

See Page Number 158, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 agníṃ ná mā mathitáṃ sáṃ didīpaḥ;

prá cakṣaya; kṛṇuhí vásyaso naḥ.

áthā hí te máda á̄, Soma, mánye

revá̄ṁ̆ iva. prá carā puṣṭím ácha.

Like fire kindled by friction inflame me; illumine us; make us wealthier. For then, in thy intoxication, O Soma, I regard myself as rich. Enter (into us) for prosperity.

didīpas: red. ao. inj. of dīp shine. prá cakṣaya: cs. of cakṣ see (cp. 3 b) . kṛṇuhí: cp. p. 134; accented as beginning a sentence. vásyasas: A. pl. of vásyāṃs (cpv. of vásu, 103, 2 a ). áthā (metrically lengthened): then, when inflamed by Soma. revá̄n: predicatively with mánye (196 a ), iva being sometimes added. prá carā (metrically lengthened): cp. 2 a, antáś ca prá̄gāḥ. puṣṭím ácha: give us actual prosperity also.

See Page Number 158, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 iṣiréṇa te mánasā sutásya

bhakṣīmáhi, pítriasyeva rāyáḥ.

Sóma rājan, prá ṇa á̄yūṃṣi tārīr,

áhānīva sú̄rio vāsará̄ṇi.

Of thee pressed with devoted mind we would partake as of paternal wealth. King Soma, prolong our years as the sun the days of spring.

bhakṣīmáhi: s ao. op. of bhaj share. pítryasya iva: because Soma is regarded as a father, cp. 4 b. Sóma rājan: being a single voc. (rājan is in apposition), Sóma alone is accented (p. 465, 18) . prá ṇas: cp. 4 d. tārīs: cp. 4 d. áhāni: 91, 2.

See Page Number 158, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 Sóma rājan, mṛḷáyā naḥ suastí;

táva smasi vratíās: tásya viddhi.

álarti dákṣa utá manyúr, Indo;

má̄ nŏ aryó anukāmáṃ párā dāḥ.

King Soma, be gracious to us for welfare; we are thy devotees: know that. There arise might and wrath, O Indu: abandon us not according to the desire of our foe.

mṛḷáyā: accented as beginning a sentence after an initial voc. (p. 467, 19 A c ) ; final vowel metrically lengthened. svastí: shortened inst. s. (p. 80, f. n. 2) used adverbially like a dat.; this word though obviously = su + asti is not analysed in the Padapāṭha (cp. note on i. 1, 9) . smasi: 1. pl. pr. of as be. tásya: with vid know about, 202 A c. viddhi: 2. s. ipv. of vid know. álarti: 3. s. pr. int. of ṛ go (174 a ). aryás: gen. of arí foe (cp. p. 81, f. n. 1; 99, 3) , dependent on anukāmám; cp. árātis in 3 c. dāḥ: 2. s. root ao. inj. of dā give.

See Page Number 160, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 tuáṃ hí nas tanúas, Soma, gopá̄,

gá̄tre-gātre niṣasátthā nṛcákṣāḥ.

yát te vayáṃ praminá̄ma vratá̄ni,

sá no mṛḷa suṣakhá̄, deva, vásyaḥ.

Since thou art the protector of our body, O Soma, thou as surveyor of men hast settled in every limb. If we infringe thine ordinances, then be gracious to us as our good friend, O god, for higher welfare.

tanúas: gon. of tanú̄ body. gopá̄s: 97 A 2 (p. 79) . gá̄tre-gātre: 189 C. ni-ṣasatthā: 2. s. pf. of sad; cerebralization of s (67 a ); metrical lengthening of final a (p. 441, a ) . yád: p. 242, 3. praminá̄ma: sb. pr. of pra-mī. sá: p. 294, b. su-ṣakhá̄; on the cerebralization of s see 67 b; the accent is that of a Bv. (p. 455, c α) ; that of a Karmadhāraya (p. 455, d 1) is su-ṣákhā; the former is irregularly used in the latter sense. vásyas: the cpv. adj. is here used as an acc. adverb (p. 301, b ) .

See Page Number 160, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 ṛdūdáreṇa sákhiā saceya,

yó mā ná ríṣyed, dhariaśva, pītáḥ.

ayáṃ yá sómo niádhāyi asmé,

tásmā Índraṃ pratiram emi á̄yuḥ.

I would associate with the wholesome friend who having been drunk would not injure me, O lord of the bays. For (the enjoyment of) that Soma which has been deposited in us, I approach Indra to prolong our years.

ṛdūdáreṇa: not analysed in the Padapāṭha (cp. note on ii. 33, 5 c) ; cp. tváṃ nas tanvò gopá̄ḥ in 9 a. sákhyā: 99, 2. yó ná ríṣyet: cp. 4 a. haryaśva: a characteristic epithet of Indra, who as the great Soma drinker is here addressed. nyádhāyi: 3. s. ao. ps. of dhā put; this (like prá̄gās in 2 a) is irregularly analysed in the Padapāṭha as ní ádhāyi ínstead of ni-ádhāyi (p. 469, B) . asmé: loc. (p. 104) ; Pragṛhya (26 c ). emi: 1. s. pr. of i go to with acc. (197, A 1) . pratíram: acc. inf. of tṝ cross (p. 336, 2 a ) governing the acc. á̄yus (cp. 11 d) . tásmai: for the sake of that = to obtain or enjoy that, final dat. (p. 314, B 2) .

See Page Number 161, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 ápa tyá̄ asthur ánirā, ámīvā

nír atrasan, támiṣīcīr ábhaiṣuḥ.

á̄ sómǒ asmá̄ṁ̆ aruhad víhāyā:

áganma yátra pratíránta á̄yuḥ.

Those ailments have started off, diseases have sped away, the powers of darkness have been affrighted. Soma has mounted in us with might: we have gone to where men prolong their years.

asthur: 3. pl. root ao. of sthā. atrasan: the ipf. is here irregularly used beside the two aorists; cp. the uniform use of the ao. in 3. támiṣīcīs: this word, as occurring here only, is somewhat doubtful in sense; but it is probably a f. adj. formed from a stem in añc added to támis (in támis-rā darkness ): cp. 93 a and 95. The meaning is that a draught of Soma drives away disease and the powers of darkness (cp. 3 b) . ábhaiṣur: s ao. of bhī fear. á̄ aruhat: a ao. of ruh: cp. the English phrase, ‘go to the head’. áganma yátra: = ‘we have arrived at the point when’. d is identical with i. 113, 16 d; it refers to the renewal of life at dawn.

See Page Number 162, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 yó na índuḥ, pitaro, hṛtsú pītó,

ámartio mártiāṁ̆ āvivéśa,

tásmai Sómāya havíṣā vidhema:

mṛḷīké̆ asya sumatáu siāma.

The drop drunk in our hearts, O Fathers, that immortal has entered us mortals, to that Soma we would pay worship with oblation; we would abide in his mercy and good graces.

pitaras: the Fathers, often spoken of as Soma-loving (somyá), are called to witness (cp. 13 a) . hṛtsú pītáḥ: cp. 2 a antáś ca prá̄gāḥ and 10 c yáḥ sómo niádhāyi asmé.

See Page Number 162, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 tuáṃ, Soma, pitṛ́bhiḥ saṃvidānó,

ánu dyá̄vāpṛthiví̄ á̄ tatantha.

tásmai ta, Indo, havíṣā vidhema:

vayáṃ siāma pátayo rayīṇá̄m.

Thou, O Soma, uniting with the Fathers, hast extended thyself over Heaven and Earth. To thee as such, O Indu, we would pay worship with oblation: we would be lords of riches.

saṃ-vidānás: see x. 14, 4 b. ánu á̄ tatantha: = hast become famous in. d is identical with iv. 50, 6 d.

See Page Number 163, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 trá̄tāro devā, ádhi vocatā no.

má̄ no nidrá̄ īśata, mótá jálpiḥ.

vayáṃ Sómasya viśváha priyá̄saḥ,

suví̄rāso vidátham á̄ vadema.

Ye protecting gods, speak for us. Let not sleep overpower us, nor idle talk. We always dear to Soma, rich in strong sons, would utter divine worship.

trá̄tāro devāḥ: accent, see note on 7 c. ádhi vocatā: 2. pl. ao. ipv. of vac speak; final vowel metrically lengthened; = take our part, defend us (nas, dat.). nidrá̄: probably for nidrá̄ḥ: see note on svadhā, x. 129, 5 d. īśata: 3. s. sb. Ā. (not inj., which correct, p. 372); with gen. nas (202, A a). nidrá̄ and jálpiḥ probably refer to the vows of waking and silence in the rite of initiation (dīkṣā) to the Soma sacrifice. c d are identical with ii. 12, 15 c d excepting that there ta Indra takes the place of Sómasya. priyá̄sas: with gen. (p. 322 C) .

See Page Number 163, Hymn Number 15 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

15 tuáṃ naḥ, Soma, viśváto vayodhá̄s.

tuáṃ suarvíd. á̄ viśā nṛcákṣāḥ.

tuáṃ na, Inda, ūtíbhiḥ sajóṣāḥ

pāhí paścá̄tād utá vā purástāt.

Thou art, O Soma, a giver of strength to us on all sides. Thou art a finder of light. Do thou, as surveyor of men, enter us. Do thou, O Indu, protect us behind and before with thine aids accordant.

ā viśā: final vowel metrically lengthened. Inda: for Indav (21 b ); on the Padapāṭha, cp. note on 2 c. ūtíbhis to be taken with sajóṣās. utá vā: or = and.

FUNERAL HYMN

The RV. contains a group of five hymns (x. 14-18) concerned with death and the future life. From them we learn that, though burial was also practised, cremation was the usual method of disposing of the dead, and was the main source of the mythology relating to the future life. Agni conveys the corpse to the other world, the Fathers, and the gods. He is besought to preserve the body intact and to burn the goat which is sacrificed as his portion. During the process of cremation Agni and Soma are besought to heal any injury that bird, beast, ant, or serpent may have inflicted on the body. The way to the heavenly world is a distant path on which Savitṛ (i. 35) conducts and Pūṣan (vi. 54) protects the dead. Before the pyre is lighted, the wife of the dead man, having lain beside him, arises, and his bow is taken from his hand. This indicates that in earlier times his widow and his weapons were burnt with the body of the husband. Passing along by the path trodden by the Fathers, the spirit of the dead man goes to the realm of light, and meets with the Fathers who revel with Yama in the highest heaven. Here, uniting with a glorious body, he enters upon a life of bliss which is free from imperfections and bodily frailties, in which all desires are fulfilled, and which is passed among the gods, especially in the presence of the two kings Yama and Varuṇa.

x. 14. Metre: Triṣṭubh; 13. 14. 16. Anuṣṭubh; 15. Bṛhatī.

See Page Number 164, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 pareyivá̄ṃsaṃ praváto mahí̄r ánu,

bahúbhyaḥ pánthām anupaspaśānám,

Vaivasvatáṃ saṃgámanaṃ jánānāṃ,

Yamáṃ rá̄jānaṃ havíṣā duvasya.

Him who has passed away along the mighty steeps and has spied out the path for many, him the son of Vivasvant, the assembler of people, Yama the king, do thou present with oblation.

a is a Jagatī (see p. 445, f. n. 7) . pareyivá̄ṃsam: pf. pt. act. īyivá̄ṃsam (89 a ) of i go, with párā away. pravátas: the steep paths leading to the highest heaven where Yama dwells; cp. ix. 113, 8, yátra rá̄jā Vaivasvató, yátrāvaródhanaṃ diváḥ . . tátra má̄m amṛ́taṃ kṛdhi where the king, the son of Vivasvant, and where the secret place of heaven is, there do thou (Soma) make me immortal. mahí̄s: A. pl. f. of máh great. pánthām: 97, 2 a. Vaivasvatám: Yama is in several passages called by this patronymic; cf. also 5 c, and x. 17, 1: Yamásya mātá̄, paryuhyámānā mahó jāyá̄ Vívasvataḥ the mother of Yama being married as the wife of the great Vivasvant. bahúbhyas: for the many that die and go to the other world. anu-paspaśānám: pf. pt. Ā. of spaś see. saṃgámanam: as gathering the dead together in his abode. rá̄jānam: Yama is several times called a king, but never expressly a god. duvasya: addressed to the sacrificer.

See Page Number 165, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 Yamó no gātúṃ prathamó viveda:

náiṣá̄ gávyūtir ápabhartavá̄ u.

yátrā naḥ pú̄rve pitáraḥ pareyúr,

ená̄ jajñāná̄ḥ pathíā ánu svá̄ḥ.

Yama has first found out the way for us: this pasture is not to be taken away. Whither our former fathers have passed away, thither those that have been born since (pass away) along their several paths.

Yamás: a explains what is said of Yama in the preceding stanza. viveda: pf. of 2. vid find. gávyūtis: used figuratively to express the abode which Yama has found for those who die. ápa-bhartavái: dat. inf. with double accent (p. 452, 7) ; here it has a passive force (p. 335, α) . b is most naturally to be taken as forming a hemistich with a, not as beginning a new sentence antecedent to yátra. The exact sense of cd is uncertain owing to the doubtful interpretation of ená̄ and jajñāná̄s. The former word is probably corr. to yátra, and the latter the frequent pf. pt. Ā. of jan generate. It might be from jñā know (from which, however, this pt. does not seem to occur elsewhere): the meaning would then be, ‘knowing the way thereby (ená̄),’ because Yama found it for them. svá̄s: by their own paths, each by his own, each going by himself.

See Page Number 166, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 Má̄talī Kavyáir, Yamố Áṅgirobhir,

Bṛ́haspátir Ṛ́kvabhir vāvṛdhānáḥ,

yá̄ṃś ca devá̄ vāvṛdhúr, yé ca devá̄n,

svá̄hā anyé, svadháyānyé madanti.

Mātalī having grown strong with the Kavyas, Yama with the Aṅgirases, Bṛhaspati with the Ṛkvans, whom the gods have made strong and who (have made strong) the gods, some rejoice in the call Svāhā, others in the offering to the dead.

Má̄talī: mentioned only here; one of seven m. stems in ī (100, 1 b). Sāyaṇa thinks this means Indra because that god’s charioteer (in later times) is mātali and therefore má̄talī (N. of má̄talin) is ‘he who is accompanied by mātali’; but the accent of words in in is invariably on that syllable (p. 454 B a ) . Kavyáis: name of a group of ancestors; the inst. used in the sociative sense (199 A 1) . Áṅgirobhis: another group of ancestors, otherwise associated with Bṛhaspati (who exclusively is called Āṅgirasá). Ṛ́kvabhis: another group of ancestors; cp. sá ṛ́kvatā gaṇéna he (Bṛhaspati) with the singing host (iv. 50, 5) . vāvṛdhānás: by means of oblations. yá̄ṃś ca: the ancestors whom the gods strengthened by their aid, and who strengthened the gods with their offerings. svá̄hā anyé: some, by their association with the gods, rejoice in the call svá̄hā, which is addressed to the gods, others in the funeral oblations offered to them as ancestors. madanti: with inst. (p. 308, 1 c ) .

See Page Number 167, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 imáṃ, Yama, prastarám á̄ hí sí̄da,

Áṅgirobhiḥ pitṛ́bhiḥ saṃvidānáḥ.

á̄ tvā mántrāḥ kaviśastá̄ vahantu.

ená̄, rājan, havíṣā mādayasva.

Upon this strewn grass, O Yama, pray seat thyself, uniting thyself with the Aṅgirases, the fathers. Let the spells recited by the secrs bring thee hither. Do thou, O king, rejoice in this oblation.

á̄ sí̄da: 2. s. ipv. of sad sit w. acc. hí: p. 252, 2; cp. p. 467, B. pitṛ́bhis: apposition to Áṅgirobhis (cp. 3 a) . saṃvidānás: pr. pt. Ā. of 2. vid find according to the root class (158 a α). kavi-śastá̄s: on the accent cp. p. 456, 2 a and p. 462, f. n. 4. ená̄: here (cp. 2 d) inst. of ena (112 a ) agreeing with havíṣā; accented because beginning the Pāda (and always as an adv., cp. 2 d). mādayasva: with inst., cp. madanti in 3 d.

See Page Number 167, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 Áṅgirobhir á̄ gahi yajñíyebhir;

Yáma, Vairūpáir ihá mādayasva.

Vívasvantaṃ huve, yáḥ pitá̄ te,

asmín yajñé barhíṣi á̄ niṣádya.

Come hither with the adorable Aṅgirases; O Yama, with the sons of Virūpa do thou here rejoice. I call Vivasvant who is thy father, (let him rejoice), having sat himself down on the strew at this sacrifice.

Áṅgirobhis: sociative inst. (199 A 1). á̄ gahi: root ao. ipv. of gam (148, 5). Vairūpáis: sociative inst.; this patronymic form occurs only here; Virūpa occurs once in the sing. as the name of one who praised Agni (viii. 64, 6) , and three times in the pl. as of seers closely connected with the Aṅgirases, as sons of heaven or of Aṅgiras. huve: 1. s. pr. Ā. of hū call. yás: supply ásti. c is defective by one syllable (p. 441, 4 B a ) . barhíṣi á̄: to be taken together (cp. 176, 1, 2) . níṣádya: gd. of sad sit; agreeing with Vívasvantam (cp. 210) : it is not the priest who sits down on the strew, but the god; d occurs in iii. 35, 6 as applied to Indra.

See Page Number 167, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 Áṅgiraso, naḥ pitáro, Návagvā,

Átharvāṇo, Bhṛ́gavaḥ, somiá̄saḥ:

téṣāṃ vayáṃ sumatáu yajñíyānām

ápi bhadré saumanasé siāma.

The Aṅgirases, our fathers, the Navagvas, the Atharvans, the Bhṛgus, the Soma-loving: we would abide in the favour, the good graces of them the adorable ones.

naḥ pitáraḥ: in apposition to the names; cp. 4 b. Návagvās c., names of ancient priestly families. ápi syāma to be taken together; ápi as = to take part in.

See Page Number 169, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 préhi, préhi pathíbhiḥ pūrviébhir,

yátrā naḥ pú̄rve pitáraḥ pareyúḥ.

ubhá̄ rá̄jānā svadháyā mádantā,

Yamáṃ paśyāsi Váruṇaṃ ca devám.

Go forth, go forth by those ancient paths on which our fathers of old have passed away. Thou shalt see both kings rejoicing in the offering to the dead, Yama and Varuṇa the god.

préhi préhi: addressed to the dead man; note that this repeated cd. vb. is not treated as an Āmreḍita; in fact only one repeated verbal form is so treated in the RV., viz. píba-piba (p. 282, g ) . Note the remarkable alliteration in a b; cp. the repetition of -ā in c and of -am in d; of a- in 9 c d, and of -au in 10-12. pú̄rve: prn. adj. (p. 116) . rá̄jānā: note that both Yama and Varuṇa are called kings, but Varuṇa alone a god (cp. note on 1 d) . svadháyā: cp. 3 d. paśyāsi: 2. s. pr. sb. of paś see (cp. p. 353) .

See Page Number 169, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 sáṃ gachasva pitṛ́bhiḥ, sáṃ Yaména,

iṣṭāpūrténa paramé víoman.

hitvá̄yāvadyáṃ púnar ástam éhi:

sáṃ gachasua tanúā suvárcāḥ.

Unite with the Fathers, unite with Yama, with the reward of thy sacrifices and good works in the highest heaven. Leaving blemish behind go back to thy home; unite with thy body, full of vigour.

iṣṭā-pūrténa: note that this old Dvandva cd. (see vocab.) is not analysed in the Pada text. paramé: the abode of Yama and the Fathers is in the highest heaven; mádhye diváḥ in x. 15, 14. víoman: loc. without i (p. 69) . hitvá̄ya: gd., 163, 3. ástam: the home of the Fathers; cp. 9 b-d. tanvá̄ suvárcāḥ: being free from disease and frailties, the dead man unites with a body which is complete and without imperfections. The AV. often speaks of such being the state of things in the next life. In d the rare resolution of v in -sva is required.

See Page Number 170, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 ápeta, vì̄ta, ví ca sarpatá̄to:

asmá̄ etáṃ pitáro lokám akran.

áhobhir adbhír aktúbhir víaktaṃ

Yamó dadāti avasá̄nam asmai.

Begone, disperse, slink off from here: for him the Fathers have prepared this place. Yama gives him a resting-place distinguished by days and waters and nights.

This stanza is addressed to the demons to leave the dead man alone. vì̄ta: for ví ita (see p. 464, 17, 1 a ). asmái: accented because emphatic at the beginning of a Pāda, but unaccented at the end of d (cp. p. 452, A c ) . akran: 3. pl. act. root ao. of kṛ make. áhobhir adbhíḥ: cp. ix. 113, where the joys of the next world are described, yátra jyótir ájasraṃ, tásmin má̄ṃ dhehi amṛ́te lóke where there is eternal light, in that immortal world place me (7), and yátra amú̄r yahvátīr á̄pas, tátra má̄m amṛ́taṃ kṛdhi where are those swift waters, there make me immortal (8). aktúbhis: nights as alternating with days. vyàktam: pp. of ví + añj adorn, distinguish.

See Page Number 171, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 áti drava sārameyáu śuá̄nau,

caturakṣáu śabálau sādhúnā pathá̄;

áthā pitṛ́̄n suvidátrāṁ̆ úpehi,

Yaména yé sadhamá̄daṃ mádanti.

Run by a good path past the two sons of Saramā, the four-eyed, brindled dogs; then approach the bountiful Fathers who rejoice at the same feast as Yama.

sārameyáu: in this and the following duals (including 11 a b) the ending au is irregularly used; in the old parts of the RV. ā is employed before consonants and at the end of a Pāda. śvá̄nau: to be read as a trisyllable (cp. 91, 3) . caturakṣáu: doubtless meant to imply keen sight; thus this epithet is also applied to Agni. In the Avesta a four-eyed dog watches at the head of the bridge by which the souls of the dead pass to the other world, and scares away the fiend from the holy ones. b is a Jagatī (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7) . áthā: the second syllable metrically lengthened. Yaména: sociative inst. (p. 306, 1) . sadhamá̄dam: cognate acc. with mádanti (p. 300, 4) .

See Page Number 171, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 yáu te śuá̄nau, Yama, rakṣitá̄rau,

caturakṣáu pathirákṣī nṛcákṣasau,

tá̄bhiām enaṃ pári dehi, rājan:

svastí cāsmā anamīváṃ ca dhehi.

Give him over to those two, O King, that are thy dogs, O Yama, the guardians, four-eyed, watchers of the path, observers of men; bestow on him welfare and health.

yáu: au in this and the following duals for ā, as in 10. nṛcákṣasau: as Yama’s messengers (cp. 12 b) . b is a Jagatī (cp. 10 b) . enam: the dead man. dehi (2. s. ipv. of dā give ): that they may guide him to Yama’s abode. dhehi: 2. s. ipv. of dhā put.

See Page Number 171, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 urūṇasá̄v, asutṛ́pā, udumbaláu,

Yamásya dūtáu carato jánāṁ̆ ánu;

tá̄v asmábhyaṃ dṛśáye sú̄riāya

púnar dātām ásum adyéhá bhadrám.

Broad-nosed, life-stealing, . . the two as messengers of Yama wander among men; may these two give us back here to-day auspicious life that we may see the sun.

urū-ṇasáu: the second syllable is metrically lengthened; on the cerebralization of the dental n see 65 b; here we have the normal use of au as āv before a vowel within a Pāda; broad-nosed, that is, keen-scented. asutṛ́pā u-: on the Sandhi see 22; the literal meaning delighting in lives implies delighting in taking them, while they wander among men as Yama’s messengers. udumbaláu: this word occurs here only, and there is no means of throwing any light on its sense; the au of this dual, as of dūtáu, for ā, shows the same irregularity as in the preceding stanzas. caratas: in order to seek out the lives of those about to go to the abode of Yama. asmábhyam: dat. pl. of ahám. dṛśáye: dat. inf., with attracted acc. (200 B 4). dātām: 3. du. ipv. root ao. of dā give; as having already marked us for their victims, let them give back our life to-day.

See Page Number 173, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 Yamá̄ya sómaṃ sunuta,

Yamá̄ya juhutā havíḥ;

Yamáṃ ha yajñó gachati,

Agnidūto áraṃkṛtaḥ.

For Yama press the Soma, to Yama offer the oblation; to Yama goes the sacrifice well prepared, with Agni as its messenger.

juhutā: with metrically lengthened final vowel; 2. pl. ipv. of hu sacrifice addressed to those officiating at the sacrifice. Yamám: acc. of the goal (197, 1; cf. 204, 1 b ). Agnídūtas: the idea underlying this figurative expression is that the smoke of the sacrificial fire goes up to heaven where Yama dwells.

See Page Number 173, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 Yamá̄ya ghṛtávad dhavír

juhóta, prá ca tiṣṭhata;

sá no devéṣu á̄ yamad,

dīrghám á̄yuḥ prá jīváse.

To Yama offer the oblation abounding in ghee, and step forth; may he guide us to the gods that we may live a long life.

juhóta: the irr. strong form (p. 144, B. 3 α) with a long vowel in the second syllable is here utilized for metrical purposes, as the regular form juhuta has its final vowel lengthened in 13 b. prá tiṣṭhata: step forward, in order to offer the oblation; cp. the use of prá bhṛ bring forward an oblation. á̄ yamat: inj. of root ao. of yam extend; this form constitutes a play on the name of Yama. nas: acc. governed by á̄ yamad; cp. ix. 44, 5, sá naḥ Sómo devéṣu á̄ yamat may he, Soma, guide us to the gods; on the loc., cp. 204 B 1 b. á̄yus: cognate acc. (197 A 4). prá jīváse: cp. p. 463, f. n. 8. The meaning of cd is: ‘may he keep us (the survivors) to the worship of the gods (and not lead us to the Fathers), so that we may enjoy long life on earth’ (cp. 12 c, d) .

See Page Number 174, Hymn Number 15 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

15 Yamá̄ya mádhumattamaṃ

rá̄jñe havyáṃ juhotana.

idáṃ náma ṛ́ṣibhyaḥ pūrvajébhiaḥ,

pú̄rvebhyaḥ pathikṛ́dbhiaḥ.

To Yama the king offer the most honied oblation. This obeisance is for the seers born of old, the ancient makers of the path.

juhotana: again the strong form to suit the metre (cp. 14 b) . pathikṛ́dbhyas: because they were the first, after Yama had shown the way, to tread the path leading to Yama’s abode (the pitṛyá̄ṇa the road of the Fathers ). This stanza is a Bṛhatī in the middle of Anuṣṭubhs, differing from them only by the addition of four syllables in the third Pāda (see p. 444, 9 b ).

See Page Number 174, Hymn Number 16 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

16 tríkadrukebhiḥ patati.

ṣáḷ urví̄r, ékam íd bṛhát,

triṣṭúb, gāyatrí̄, chándāṃsi,

sárvā tá̄ Yamá á̄hitā.

It flies through the three Soma vats. The six earths, the one great (world), triṣṣubh, gāyatrī and (the other) metres, all these are placed in Yama.

The meaning of a b in this final stanza is obscure, partly because the subject is not expressed in a, and partly because it is uncertain whether b is syntactically connected with a or not. The probability is that here we have two sentences, one consisting of a, the other of b-d. The first then probably means that the Soma draught is ready for Yama; the second expresses the greatness of Yama by stating that all things are contained in him. tríkadrukebhis: this word, occurring six times in the RV., always appears in the pl., and always except here in the locative. It is four times directly connected with Soma, and once alludes to it; e. g. tríkadrukeṣu apibat sutásya he (Indra) drank of the pressed Soma in the three vessels (i. 32, 3) . The term tríkadruka in the ritual of the Brāhmaṇas is the name of three days in a Soma ceremony. The metaphor of flying is applied to the flowing Soma compared with a bird, as ‘ the god flies like a bird to settle in the vats ’ (ix. 3, 1) . The allusion therefore seems to be to the Soma which the priests are called upon to press in 13 a. ṣáḍ urví̄ḥ: this expression is probably equivalent to the three heavens and three earths: cp. tisró dyá̄vaḥ níhitā antár asmin, tisró bhú̄mīr úparāḥ, ṣáḍvidhānāḥ the three heavens are placed within him (Varuṇa) and the three earths below, forming a sixfold order (vii. 87, 5) . ékam íd bṛhát: by this expression is probably meant the universe, otherwise spoken of as víśvam ékam, idám ékam c., the one being contrasted with the six; cp. i. 164, 6, ví yás tastámbha ṣáḷ imá̄ rájāṃsi . . kím ápi svid ékam? who propped asunder these six spaces; what pray is the one? triṣṭúbh, gāyatrí̄: these two names of metres are only mentioned in this and one other hymn of the tenth Maṇḍala. This and the following four hymns (x. 15-18) are among the latest in the RV. The concluding stanza here, as in some hymns addressed to other deities, sums up the greatness of the god by saying that he embraces all things; cp. i. 32, 15 (Indra); v. 13, 6 (Agni).

PITÁRAS

Two hymns (x. 15 and 54) are addressed to the Pitaras or Fathers, the blessed dead who dwell in the third heaven, the third or highest step of Viṣṇu. The term as a rule applies to the early or first ancestors, who followed the ancient paths, seers who made the paths by which the recent dead go to join them. Various groups of ancestors are mentioned, such as the Aṅgirases and Atharvans, the Bhṛgus and Vasiṣṭhas, who are identical in name with the priestly families associated by tradition with the composition of the Atharvaveda and of the second and seventh Maṇḍalas of the Rigveda. The Pitaras are classed as higher, lower, and middle, as earlier and later, who though not always known to their descendants, are known to Agni. They revel with Yama and feast with the gods. They are fond of Soma, and thirst for the libations prepared for them on earth, and eat the offerings along with him. They come on the same car as Indra and the gods. Arriving in their thousands they range themselves on the sacrificial grass to the south, and drink the pressed draught. They receive oblations as their food. They are entreated to hear, intercede for, and protect their worshippers, and besought not to injure their descendants for any sin humanly committed against them. They are invoked to give riches, children, and long life to their sons, who desire to be in their good graces. The Vasiṣṭhas are once collectively implored to help their descendants. Cosmical actions, like those of the gods, are sometimes attributed to the Fathers. Thus they are said to have adorned the sky with stars, to have placed darkness in the night and light in the day; they found the light and generated the dawn. The path trodden by the Fathers (pitṛyá̄ṇa) is different from that trodden by the gods (devayá̄na).

x. 15. Metre: Triṣṭubh; 11 Jagatī.

See Page Number 176, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 úd īratām ávara, út párāsa,

ún madhyamá̄ḥ pitáraḥ somiá̄saḥ;

ásuṃ yá īyúr avṛká̄ ṛtajñá̄s,

té nǒ avantu pitáro háveṣu.

Let the lower, let the higher, let the middlemost Soma-loving Fathers arise; let those Fathers who, friendly, knowing right, have gone to life eternal, favour us in our invocations.

úd īratām: note that cd. verbs are often repeated by means of the prp. (here úd twice) alone. ávare (on the dec., see 120 c 1) c.: these three words refer to the Pitṛs dwelling in the three divisions of the world, earth, air, heaven (cp. yé pá̄rthive rájasi in 2 c; and the division of heaven into three, the lowest, the middlemost, and the third in which the Fathers sit: AV. xviii. 2, 49). Sāyaṇa thinks that here the degrees of their holiness is meant, but in this same stanza, when it appears in the AV. (xviii. 1, 44) , he thinks that degrees of merit or of age are intended; but degrees of age are expressly mentioned in 2 b by pú̄rvāsas and úparāsas. ásum: life in the heavenly world, immortal life (the Pitaras are called immortal in AV. vi. 41, 3) as opposed to terrestrial life. īyur: 3. pl. pf. act. of i go.

See Page Number 177, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 idáṃ pitṛ́bhyo námǒ astu adyá,

yé pú̄rvāso, yá úparāsa īyúḥ;

yé pá̄rthive rájasi á̄ níṣattā,

yé vā nūnáṃ suvṛjánāsu vikṣú.

Let this obeisance be made to-day to the Fathers who have departed earlier and later, who have seated themselves in the terrestrial air or who are now in settlements with fair abodes.

pú̄rvāsas: in x. 14, 2. 7 the prn. form pú̄rve is used (see 120, 2) . īyúr: in x. 14, 2. 7 the more distinctive cd. pareyúr appears. á̄ níṣattās (pp. of sad sit, cp. 67 a, b; cp. á̄ niṣádya in x. 14, 5). pá̄rthive rájasi: in the atmospheric region above the earth; here the Pitaras in the air intermediate between heaven and earth are meant, while in b and d those in heaven and on earth respectively are intended. suvṛjánāsu vikṣú: cp. the frequent má̄nuṣīṣu vikṣú human settlements, with reference to the Fathers present at the funeral offerings on earth.

See Page Number 178, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 á̄háṃ pitṛ́̄n suvidátrāṁ̆ avitsi,

nápātaṃ ca vikrámaṇaṃ ca Víṣṇoḥ:

barhiṣádo yé svadháyā sutásya

bhájanta pitvás, tá ihá̄gamiṣṭhāḥ.

I have won hither the bountiful Fathers and the grandson and the wide stride of Viṣṇu: they who, sitting on the strew, shall partake of the pressed drink with the offering to the dead, come most gladly here.

á̄-avitsi (1. s. Ā. s ao. of 2. vid find ); = I have induced to come to this offering. nápātam: it is somewhat uncertain who is meant by this; according to Prof. Geldner’s ingenious explanation Yama (with whom the Pitaras are associated) is intended, because in the VS. (xxix. 60) Viṣṇu (here coupled with nápātam) is called the husband of Aditi, whose son (TS. vi. 5, 6, 2) was Vivasvant, the father of Yama (see note on x. 14, 1); but it is doubtful whether this later statement was part of the mythological belief of the RV., where Yama is the grandson of Tvaṣṭṛ (x. 17, 1) . On the other hand, the word may be used elliptically to designate Agni = sáhaso nápātam (Agni is called náptre sáhasvate in viii. 102, 7) = sáhasaḥ sūnúm son of strength, a frequent epithet of Agni, for which once (vi. 4, 4) sūno son alone is used in an Agni hymn; and below (9 c) Agni is invoked to come with the Fathers: á̄gne yāhi suvidátrebhiḥ pitṛ́bhiḥ. There is here also a good example of the fanciful interpretations of Sāyaṇa: Víṣṇor (= yajñasya) nápātam (= vināśābhāvam) the non-destruction of the sacrifice. vikrámaṇam: Viṣṇu’s third step (= the highest heaven), where the Fathers dwell (cp. i. 154, 5) . bhájanta: 3. pl. inj. Ā. of bhaj share, with partitive gen. (202 A e ) . pitvás: gen. of pitú (p. 81) . á̄-gamiṣṭhās: accent, p. 453, 9 A b.

See Page Number 179, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 bárhiṣadaḥ pitara, ūtí̄ arvá̄g;

imá̄ vo havyá̄ cakṛmā: juṣádhvam;

tá á̄ gata ávasā śáṃtamena;

áthā naḥ śáṃ yór arapó dadhāta.

Ye Fathers that sit on the strew, come hither with aid; these offerings we have made to you: enjoy them; so come with most beneficent aid; then bestow on us health and blessing free from hurt.

bárhiṣadaḥ pitaraḥ: see note on viii. 48, 7 c. ūtí̄: inst. of ūtí (p. 81, f. n. 4) . arvá̄k: hither; the vb. á̄ gata come is easily to be supplied from c. cakṛmā: with metrical lengthening of the final syllable. juṣádhvam: accented because it forms a new sentence (p. 466, 19 b ) . té: as such, as enjoying our offerings. gata: 2. pl. [ ] ipv. root ao. of gam go. áthā: metrically lengthened. dadhāta: 2. pl. pr. ipv. of dhā place, with irr. strong form of the pr. stem instead of the normal dhatta (p. 144 B 1 b ) .

See Page Number 179, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 úpahūtāḥ pitáraḥ somiá̄so

barhiṣíeṣu nidhíṣu priyéṣu;

tá á̄ gamantu; tá ihá śruvantu;

ádhi bruvantu; té avantu asmá̄n.

Invited are the Soma-loving Fathers to the dear deposits placed on the strew; let them come; let them listen here; let them speak for us; let them aid us.

úpa-hūtās: pp. of hū call. nidhíṣu: the offerings deposited on the sacrificial grass. gamantu: 3. pl. ipv. root ao. of gam go. śruvantu: 3. pl. ipv. root ao. of śru hear.

See Page Number 180, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 á̄cyā já̄nu, dakṣiṇató niṣádya,

imáṃ yajñám abhí gṛṇīta víśve;

má̄ hiṃsiṣṭa, pitaraḥ, kéna cin no,

yád va á̄gaḥ puruṣátā kárāma.

Bending the knee, sitting down to the south do ye all greet favourably this sacrifice; injure us not, O Fathers, by reason of any sin that we may have committed against you through human frailty.

á̄-acyā (gd. of ac bend ): note that the suffix -yā is much oftener long than short (164), but in the Pada text it is always short. já̄nu: probably the left knee; cp. the ŚB. ii. 4, 2, 2, where the gods bend the right knee, the Fathers the left knee. In rites connected with the dead, the auspicious direction is reversed, left being substituted for right. dakṣiṇatás: to the right (of the védi altar ), that is, to the south, because the south is the region of Yama and the Pitaras. gṛṇīta: 2. pl. ipv. of 1. gṛ sing. hiṃsiṣṭa: 2. pl. inj. iṣ ao. of hiṃs injure. kéna cid yád á̄gaḥ for kéna cid á̄gasā yád, the substantive being put into the rel. instead of the principal clause. vas: dat. of disadvantage (p. 314 B 1) . puruṣátā: inst. s. identical in form with the stem (97, 1, p. 77). kárāma: 1. pl. root ao. sb. (p. 171) ; in the sense of an indefinite past.

See Page Number 180, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 á̄sīnāso aruṇí̄nām upásthe

rayíṃ dhatta dāśúṣe mártiāya.

putrébhiaḥ, pitaras, tásya vásvaḥ

prá yachata; tá ihórjaṃ dadhāta.

Sitting in the lap of the ruddy (dawns) bestow wealth on the worshipping mortal. To your sons, O Fathers, present a share of those riches; so do ye here bestow strength.

á̄sīnāsas: irr. pr. pt. Ā. of ās sit: 158 α. aruṇí̄nām: aruṇá ruddy is the colour of dawn, and the f. of this adj. sometimes appears as an epithet of the dawns; that these are here meant is also indicated by vii. 9, 1; 63, 3, where Agni and Sūrya are said to awake or arise uṣásām upásthāt from the lap of the dawns. dhatta and dadhāta: here both the regular and the irr. ipv. of dhā are used (cp. note on 4 d) . tásya vásvaḥ: referring to rayím in b; on the form of the gen. see p. 81. té: anaphoric use (cp. p. 294 b ) .

See Page Number 181, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 yé naḥ pú̄rve pitáraḥ somiá̄so,

anūhiré somapītháṃ Vásiṣṭhāḥ,

tébhir Yamáḥ saṃrarāṇó haví̄ṃṣi,

uśánn uśádbhiḥ, pratikāmám attu.

Those forefathers of ours, the Soma-loving, the Vasiṣṣhas, who fare after him to the Somadraught, with them let Yama, sharing their gifts, eat the oblations at pleasure, he the eager with them the eager.

anu-ūhiré: the derivation and meaning are somewhat doubtful; most probably pf. of vah drive, in this case meaning who have driven after Yama to the Soma-draught; it may possibly come from ūh consider, then meaning who have been considered worthy of the Somadraught. Vásiṣṭhās: as one of the groups of ancient seers. saṃrarāṇás (pf. pt. Ā. of rā give ): sharing with them their gifts to their descendants (cp. 7 b c) .

See Page Number 181, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 yé tātṛṣúr devatrá̄ jéhamānā,

hotrāvídaḥ stómataṣṭāsǒ arkáiḥ:

á̄gne yāhi suvidátrebhir arvá̄ṅ

satyáiḥ kavyáiḥ pitṛ́bhir gharmasádbhiḥ.

Who, gasping, have thirsted among the gods, knowing oblations, having praise fashioned for them with songs: with them the bountiful Fathers, the true, the wise that sit at the heating vessel, come hither, O Agni.

tātṛṣúr: pf. of tṛṣ, with long red. vowel (139, 9) ; such vowels regularly appear in their short form in the Pada text (cp. note on iii. 59, 1 b) . devatrá̄: in heaven; trā is one of the suffixes which in the Pada text is separated, being treated as the second member of a cd. stomá-taṣṭāsas: this Tp., fashioned with praise, otherwise used with matí = hymn, is here applied to persons and thus comes to have the sense of a Karmadhāraya Bv. (189, 1) = taṣṭá-stomāsas; the latter kind of cd., with a pp. as first member, does not exist in the RV. arkáis: to be taken with the preceding word = by means of songs. arvá̄ṅ: 93 b. kavyáis: this word occurs in only two other passages, the original meaning apparently being = kaví wise (cp. kavyá-tā wisdom ); here it may be intended to denote a particular group of Fathers (cp. x. 14, 3) . gharmasádbhis: probably in heaven; cp. x. 16, 10, sá gharmám invāt paramé sadhásthe: may he (Agni) further the gharma in the highest abode; this word as well as jéhamānās may be intended to contrast with tātṛṣúr; cp. vii. 103, 9.

See Page Number 181, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 yé satyá̄so havirádo haviṣpá̄

Índreṇa deváiḥ saráthaṃ dádhānāḥ,

á̄gne yāhi sahásraṃ devavandáiḥ

páraiḥ pú̄rvaiḥ pitṛ́bhir gharmasádbhiḥ.

They who are true, eating the oblation, drinking the oblation, having the same car with Indra and the gods, with those thousand god-praising remote forefathers that sit at the heating vessel, come, O Agni.

sa-rátham: this word, primarily a Bv., having the same car, is then often used as a cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) with yā = go (on a journey) with the same car (here with dhā in place of yā); then adverbially (p. 301, 5 b ) . dádhānās: pr. pt. Ā. of dhā put (cp. p. 460, f. n. 3) ; the pf. pt. Ā. would be dadhāná̄s (159). sahásram: agreeing with pitṛ́bhis: more usual would be sahásreṇa pitṛ́bhis: cp. 194 B 1 b (p. 291) ; párais: the primary meaning of this word is farther (opposed to nearer ávara, less often úpara, ántara), more remote, then also higher; there is no opposition here to pú̄rvais (opposed to which are ávara and úpara), which in any case would be in the reverse order, pú̄rvaiḥ paráiḥ; the meaning is the remote, the early Fathers; cp. vi. 21, 6, párāṇi pratná̄ remote, ancient deeds opposed to ávarāsas later men.

See Page Number 183, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 Ágniṣvāttāḥ pitara, éhá gachata;

sádaḥ-sadaḥ sadata, supraṇītayaḥ;

attá̄ haví̄ṃṣi práyatāni barhíṣi;

áthā rayíṃ sárvavīraṃ dadhātana.

Ye Fathers that have been devoured by fire come hither; sit you down each on his seat, ye that have good guidance; eat the oblations proffered on the strew; then bestow wealth accompanied entirely by strong sons.

Ágni-ṣvāttās: with the voc. accent on the first syllable; the ordinary accent would be Agni-ṣvāttá̄s like other Tps. formed with Agni, but such cds. with a pp. as second member usually accent the first (cp. p. 456, 2 α) . svāttá̄s: pp. of svād sweeten (cp. 67 b ) . sádaḥsadaḥ: itv. cd. (p. 282 a; p. 454, 10 a ) , governed by sadata. sadata: 2. pl. ipv. a ao. of sad sit (147, 5) . supraṇītayas: having good guidance, well led, coming in good order; the Pada text does not recognize the cerebralization of the n (65 a, b ). attá̄, áthā: final a metrically lengthened. prá-yatāni: pp. of yam. dadhātana: irr. strong form (cp. note on 7 d) and suffix tana (p. 925) .

See Page Number 184, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 tuám, Agna, īḷitó, jātavedo,

ávāḍ ḍhavyá̄ni surabhí̄ṇi kṛtví̄.

prá̄dāḥ pitṛ́bhyaḥ; svadháyā tĕ akṣann; [ ]

addhí tváṃ, deva, práyatā haví̄ṃṣi.

Thou, O Agni, having been implored, O Jātavedas, hast conveyed the oblations, having made them fragrant. Thou hast presented them to the Fathers; with the funeral offering they have eaten them; do thou, O god, eat the oblations proffered.

īḷitás: by us. jāta-vedas: a very frequent and exclusive epithet of Agni; it is a Bv. as its accent shows, meaning having knowledge of created things as explained by the RV. itself: víśvā veda jánimā jātávedāḥ Jātavedas knows all creations (vi. 15, 13) ; this is also the explanation of Sāyaṇa here: jātaṃ, sarvaṃ jagad, vetti, iti jātavedāḥ. ávāṭ: 2. s. s ao. of vah carry (144, 5) . ḍhavyá̄ni: for havyá̄ni (54). kṛtví̄: gd. of kṛ (163, 1) . adās: 2. s. root ao. of dā (148, 1 a ) . akṣan: 3. pl. root ao. of ghas eat (p. 170, e ) . addhí: 2. s. ipv. of ad eat.

See Page Number 185, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 yé ca ihá pitáro yé ca néhá,

yá̄ṃś ca vidmá yá̄ṁ̆ u ca ná pravidmá,

tuáṃ vettha yáti té, jātavedaḥ;

svadhá̄bhir yajñáṃ súkṛtaṃ juṣasva.

Both the Fathers who are here and who are not here, both those whom we know and whom we know not, thou knowest how many they are, O Jātavedas; enjoy the sacrifice well prepared with funeral offerings.

yé ca: supply sánti. vidmá 1. pl. pf. of vid know (p. 154, 3) ; the 1. pl. pr. is vidmás. yá̄ṃś ca: Sandhi, 40 a. yāṁ̆ u: 39, and p. 25, f. n. 2. pra-vidmá: know exactly. vettha: 2. s. pf. of vid know (p. 154, 3) . yáti: cp. 118 a. té: supply sánti.

See Page Number 185, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 yé̆ Agnidagdhá̄ yé̆ ánagnidagdhā,

mádhye diváḥ svadháyā mādáyante,

tébhiḥ suará̄ḷ ásunītim etá̄ṃ

yathāvaśáṃ tanúaṃ kalpayasva.

Those who, burnt with fire and not burnt with fire, are exhilarated by the funeral offering in the midst of heaven, as sovereign ruler do thou with them fit his body according to thy power for this spirit-guidance.

yé̆ ánagnidagdhāḥ: that is, buried. mádhye diváḥ: note that the Fathers enjoy in heaven the funeral offering conveyed to them by Agni, as well as eating the oblations offered them on the sacrificial grass (11 c) . tébhis: in association with them (199 A 1) , as they know the path of the dead. svará̄ṭ: as sovereign lord who acts according to his will (yathāvaśám); the subject is Agni who is addressed in 9 c and 10 c (Agne), and in 12 a and 13 c (jātavedas) or mentioned in 11 a (Ágniṣvāttās), and in this stanza itself (Agnidagdhá̄s). tanvàṃ kalpayasva: the body of the deceased; the words svayáṃ tanvàṃ kalpayasva (VS. xxiii. 15) are explained in ŚB. xiii. 2, 7, 11: svayáṃ rūpáṃ kuruṣva yādṛ́śam ichási assume thyself the form that thou desirest; cp. also iii. 48, 4 b and vii. 101, 3 b yathāvaśáṃ tanvàṃ cakra (= cakre) eṣáḥ he has taken a body according to his will; the corresponding Pāda in the AV. (xviii. 3, 59) reads yathāvaśáṃ tanvàḥ kalpayāti may he fashion our bodies according to his will; cp. also in the following funeral hymn (x. 16, 4) the hemistich: yá̄s te śivá̄s tanvò, jātavedas, tá̄bhir vahainaṃ sukṛ́tām u lokám with those which are thy auspicious bodies, O Jātavedas, conduct him to the world of the righteous. ásunītim etá̄m: dependent, like tanvàṃ, on kalpayasva: prepare his body and this spirit-leading = prepare it for this spirit-leading; Agni conducts the spirit (ásu| of the dead man, who is cremated, to the next world (cp. x. 16, 4, just quoted) where it unites with a new body (tanú̄); cp. x. 14. 8 cd: ástam ehi; sáṃ gachasva tanvà̄ go home; unite with thy (new) body; and x. 16, 5 sáṃ gachatá̄ṃ tanvà̄, jātavedaḥ let him (the deceased) unite with a (new) body, O Jātavedas.

HYMN OF THE GAMBLER

This is one, among the secular hymns, of a group of four which have a didactic character. It is the lament of a gambler who, unable to resist the fascination of the dice, deplores the ruin he has brought on himself and his family. The dice (akṣá̄s) consisted of the nuts of a large tree called vibhí̄daka ( Terminalia bellerica ), which is still utilized for this purpose in India.

x. 34. Metre: Triṣṭubh; 7. Jagatī.

See Page Number 186, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 prāvepá̄ mā bṛható mādayanti

pravātejá̄ íriṇe várvṛtānāḥ.

sómasyeva Maujavatásya bhakṣó,

vibhí̄dako já̄gṛvir máhyam achān.

The dangling ones, born in a windy place, of the lofty (tree) gladden me as they roll on the dice-board. Like the draught of the Soma from Mūjavant, the enlivening Vibhīdaka has pleased me.

várvṛtānās: int. pt. of vṛt turn. Maujavatásya: coming from Mount Mūjavant as the best. achān: 3. s. s ao. of chand (p. 164, 5). Verbs meaning to please take the dat. (p. 311 h ) .

See Page Number 186, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 ná mā mimetha, ná jihīḷa eṣá̄:

śivá̄ sákhibhya utá máhyam āsīt.

akṣásyāhám ekaparásya hetór

ánuvratām ápa jāyá̄m arodham.

She does not scold me, she is not angry: she was kind to friends and to me. For the sake of a die too high by one I have driven away a devoted wife.

mimetha: pf. of mith dispute. jihīḷa: pf. of hīḍ be angry (cp. p. 3, f. n. 2) . sákhibhyas: dat. (p. 313, 3) . ekaparásya: according to the accent this is a Tp. adj., exceeding by one, alluding to an unlucky throw (called kali) in which when the number of dice thrown is divided by four one remains over (while in the best throw, the kṛta, nothing remains over). ápa arodham: root ao. of rudh obstruct. The meaning of the stanza is: ‘rejecting the kindly advice of my wife, I gambled and lost’.

See Page Number 188, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 dvéṣṭi śvaśrú̄r; ápa jāyá̄ ruṇaddhi;

ná nāthitó vindate marḍitá̄ram:

áśvasyeva járato vásniasya

ná̄háṃ vindāmi kitavásya bhógam.

My mother-in-law hates me; my wife drives me away: the man in distress finds none to pity him: ‘ I find no more use in a gambler than in an aged horse that is for sale. ’

ápa ruṇaddhi (3. s. pr. of rudh) : turns him away when he asks for money to gamble with. nāthitás: the gambler speaks of himself in the 3. prs. áśvasya ᴗ iva: agreeing with kitavásya. járatas: pr. pt. of jṝ waste away. kitavásya bhógam: objective gen. (p. 320, B b ) .

See Page Number 188, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 anyé jāyá̄ṃ pári mṛśanti asya,

yásyá̄gṛdhad védane vājí̆ akṣáḥ.

pitá̄ mātá̄ bhrá̄tara enam āhur:

‘ná jānīmo, náyatā baddhám etám’.

Others embrace the wife of him for whose possessions the victorious die has been eager. Father, mother, brothers say of him, ‘ we know him not, lead him away bound ’.

ágṛdhat: a ao. of gṛdh be greedy, governing védane, loc. of the object (p. 325, 1 c ) . vājí̄: to be read with a short final (p. 437, a 4, cp. p. 441, 4 a) ; accent, p. 450, b. āhur: pf. of ah say. jānīmas: 1. pl. pr. of jñā know. náyatā: accented as beginning a new sentence (p. 466, 19 a ) ; final vowel metrically lengthened (cp. p. 441, line 2) . baddhám: as a debtor.

See Page Number 189, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 yád ādí̄dhye: ‘ná daviṣāṇi ebhiḥ;

parāyádbhyo áva hīye sákhibhyaḥ’,

níuptāś ca babhrávo vá̄cam ákrataṁ̆,

émí̄d eṣāṃ niṣkṛtáṃ jāríṇīva.

When I think to myself, ‘ I will not go with them; I shall be left behind by my friends as they depart (to play)’, and the brown ones, thrown down, have raised their voices, I go straight, like a courtesan, to their place of assignation.

ā-dí̄dhye: 1. s. pr. Ā. of dhī think. daviṣāṇi: iṣ ao. sb. of du go (of which other forms occur in the AA. and the YV.); some scholars think the sense of play to be so necessary that this must be an irr. form (iṣ ao. sb.) from div play (like a-ṣṭhaviṣam, in a Sūtra, from ṣṭhiv spit ). ebhis: with the friends. áva hīye: ps. of 1. hā leave; I am left behind with abl. (cp. 201 A 1). uptās: pp. of vap strew. ákrata: 3. pl. Ā. root ao. of kṛ, accented because still dependent on yád. Here we have a Jagatī Pāda interposed in a Triṣṭubh stanza (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7) ; the same expression, vá̄cam akrata, by ending a Pāda in vii. 103, 8 produces a Jagatī Pāda in a Triṣṭubh stanza. The final vowel of the vb. is here nasalized to avoid the hiatus at the end of the Pāda (cp. i. 35, 6 a) ; viii. 29, 6 a; see p. 23, f. n. 1). émi íd: I go at once (p. 218) . eṣām: of the dice.

See Page Number 189, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 sabhá̄m eti kitaváḥ pṛchámāno,

jeṣyá̄mí̄ti, tanúā śú̄śujānaḥ.

akṣá̄sǒ asya ví tiranti ká̄maṃ,

pratidí̄vne dádhata á̄ kṛtá̄ni.

The gambler goes to the assembly hall, asking himself, ‘ shall I conquer ’, trembling with his body. The dice run counter to his desire, bestowing on his adversary at play the lucky throws.

tanvà̄: accent, p. 450, 2 b. śú̄śujānas: as this pt. is the only form of the vb. occurring, and is itself only found in one other passage (also with tanvà̄), its exact meaning is doubtful; but it must express either fear or confidence. tiranti: 3. pl. pr. of tṝ cross. pratidí̄van: dec., 90, 3; dat. with verbs of giving (200 A 1) . á̄ dadhatas: N. pl. pr. pt. of dhā (156, p. 181, top) agreeing with akṣá̄sas; with prp. following (p. 462, 13 a α) . kṛtá̄ni: probably in the specific sense of the highest throws, pl. of n. kṛtám.

See Page Number 190, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 akṣá̄sa íd aṅkuśíno nitodíno,

nikṛ́tvānas tápanās tāpayiṣṇávaḥ;

kumārádeṣṇā, jáyataḥ punarháṇo,

mádhvā sáṃpṛktāḥ kitavásya barháṇā.

The dice are hooked, piercing, deceitful, burning and causing to burn; presenting gifts like boys, striking back the victors, sweetened with honey by magic power over the gambler.

tāpayiṣṇávas: causing the gambler to pain others by his losses. kumārá-deṣṇās: giving gifts and then taking them back like children. punarháṇas: winning back from the winner, equivalent in sense to the preceding word; Sandhi, 65 b. sáṃ-pṛktās: pp. of pṛc mix. barháṇā: inst. s. (p. 77) ; with objective gen. (p. 320) .

See Page Number 191, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 tripañcāśáḥ krīḷati vrá̄ta eṣāṃ,

devá iva Savitá̄ satyádharmā:

ugrásya cin manyáve ná̄ namante;

rá̄jā cid ebhyo náma ít kṛṇoti.

Their host of three fifties plays like god Savitṛ whose laws are true: they bow not before the wrath of even the mighty; even a king pays them obeisance.

tripañcāśás: the evidence is in favour of interpreting this word as meaning consisting of three fifties, not consisting of fifty-three, as the number of dice normally used. devá iva Savitá̄: the point of the comparison is that the action of the dice is as independent of the will of others as the action of Savitṛ, who observes fixed laws of his own (iv. 53, 4; x. 139, 3) , and whose will and independent dominion no being, not even Indra, Varuṇa, Mitra, Aryaman, Rudra can resist (ii. 38, 7. 9; v. 82, 2) . ná̄: the only example in the RV. of the metrical lengthening of ná. namante, námas: with dat. (p. 311, k and 312, 2 a ) .

See Page Number 191, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 nīcá̄ vartanta, upári sphuranti.

ahastá̄so hástavantaṃ sahante.

divyá̄ áṅgārā íriṇe níuptāḥ,

śītá̄ḥ sánto, hṛ́dayaṃ nír dahanti.

They roll down, they spring upward. Though without hands, they overcome him that has hands. Divine coals thrown down upon the gaming-board, being cold, they burn up the heart.

Every Pāda in this stanza contains an antithesis: nīcá̄—upári; ahastá̄saḥ — hástavantam; divyá̄ḥ — íriṇe; śītá̄ḥ — nír dahanti. divyá̄s: alluding to their magic power over the gambler; cp. barháṇā in 7 d. áṅgārās: the dice are compared with bits of charcoal lying in a hollow; cp. ŚB. v. 3, 1, 10: adhidévanaṃ vá̄ agnís, tásya eté ’ṅgārā yád akṣá̄ḥ the gaming-board is fire, the dice are its coals.

See Page Number 192, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 jāyá̄ tapyate kitavásya hīná̄,

mātá̄ putrásya cárataḥ kúa svit.

ṛṇāvá̄ bíbhyad dhánam ichámāno,

anyéṣām ástam úpa náktam eti.

Forsaken the wife of the gambler is grieved, the mother (too) of the son that wanders who knows where. Indebted, fearing, desiring money he approaches at night the house of others.

hīná̄: pp. of hā leave. putrásya: the gambler. tapyate must be supplied with mātá̄. ṛṇā-vá̄: lengthening of final a before v (15, 1 c ) . bíbhyat: pr. pt. of bhī fear. úpa eti: probably for the purpose of stealing, to explain c. náktam: see 178, 2; 195 A 5 a.

See Page Number 192, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 stríyaṃ dṛṣṭvá̄ya kitaváṃ tatāpa,

anyéṣāṃ jāyá̄ṃ, súkṛtaṃ ca yónim.

pūrvāhṇé̆ áśvān yuyujé hí babhrú̄n,

sṓ agnér ánte vṛṣaláḥ papāda.

It pains the gambler when he sees a woman, the wife of others, and their well-ordered home. Since he yokes the brown horses in the morning, he falls down (in the evening) near the fire, a beggar.

tatāpa: used impersonally with the acc.; this and the following two perfects may be translated as presents, because they express habitual actions continued into and included in the pr. (213 A a ) . dṛṣṭvá̄ya: gd. of dṛś see, agreeing with kitavám as the virtual subject (210). stríyam (p. 88, β) : jāyá̄m as apposition, a woman who is the wife of others; that is, when he sees the wives of others and their comfortable homes, he is reminded of the unhappiness of his own wife and the bareness of his own home. áśvān: the brown dice are here figuratively called horses, which he yokes; that is, he begins a long spell of gambling with them. papāda: he consequently falls down, exhausted and overcome, on the ground beside the fire in the evening, having lost everything.

See Page Number 193, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 yó vaḥ senāní̄r maható gaṇásya,

rá̄jā vrá̄tasya prathamó babhú̄va,

tásmai kṛṇomi, ‘ná dhaná̄ ruadhmi’;

dáśāháṃ prá̄cīs, ‘tád ṛtáṃ vadāmi’.

To him who as the general of your great throng, as king has become the first of your host, I stretch forth my ten fingers—‘I withhold no money—this is truth I say’.

yó vaḥ: no specific die is meant, the expression only implying a chief, in the abstract, of the total number of dice played with. dáśa kṛṇomi prá̄cīḥ: I put the ten (sc. fingers) forward, that is, I stretch out my two hands. prá̄cīs: A. pl. f. of prá̄ñc, used predicatively (198, 1) . tásmai: dat. of advantage (200 B 1) . ná dhaná̄ ruṇadhmi: that is, ‘I have no money left for you;’ these words in sense come after prá̄cīs, expressing what is implied by that gesture. ṛtám: predicative, I say this as true (198, 1) .

See Page Number 194, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 akṣáir má̄ dīvyaḥ; kṛṣím ít kṛṣasva;

vitté ramasva, bahú mányamānaḥ;

tátra gá̄vaḥ, kitava, tátra jāyá̄:

tán me ví caṣṭe Savitá̄yám aryáḥ.

‘ Play not with dice; ply thy tillage; rejoice in thy property, thinking much of it; there are thy cattle, O gambler, there thy wife ’: this Savitṛ here, the noble, reveals to me.

This stanza is spoken by the gambler, who in a-c quotes the advice of Savitṛ. dīvyas: 2. s. inj. of div play with má̄ (p. 240) . ramasva: with loc. (204, 1 a ) . tátra: cattle and wife can be regained by acquiring wealth. caṣṭe: 3. s. pr. of cakṣ. me: dat. (200 A c ) . ayám: as actually present. aryás: noble, as upholder of moral law.

See Page Number 194, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 mitráṃ kṛṇudhvaṃ khálu, mṛḷátā no.

má̄ no ghoréṇa caratābhí dhṛṣṇú.

ní vo nú manyúr viśatām, árātir.

anyó babhrūṇá̄ṃ prásitau nú astu.

Pray make friendship, be gracious to us. Do not forcibly bewitch us with magic power. Let your wrath, your enmity now come to rest. Let another now be in the toils of the brown ones.

mṛḷátā (2. pl. ipv. of mṛḍ, p. 3, n. 2) : accented as beginning a new sentence; with final vowel metrically lengthened. nas: dat. (p. 311, f ) . carata ᴗ abhí: with prp. following the vb. (p. 468, 20 A) . dhṛṣṇú: acc. adv. (p. 301, b ) . In this final stanza the gambler adjures the dice to release him from their magical power.

PÚRUṢA

There are six or seven hymns dealing with the creation of the world as produced from some original material. In the following one, the well-known Puruṣa-sūkta or Hymn of Man, the gods are the agents of creation, while the material out of which the world is made is the body of a primaeval giant named Puruṣa. The act of creation is here treated as a sacrifice in which Puruṣa is the victim, the parts when cut up becoming portions of the universe. Both its language and its matter indicate that it is one of the very latest hymns of the Rigveda. It not only presupposes a knowledge of the three oldest Vedas, to which it refers by name, but also, for the first and only time in the Rigveda, mentions the four castes. The religious view is moreover different from that of the old hymns, for it is pantheistic: ‘Puruṣa is all this world, what has been and shall be’. It is, in fact, the starting-point of the pantheistic philosophy of India.

x. 90. Metre: Anuṣṭubh; 16 Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 195, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 sahásraśīrṣā Púruṣaḥ,

sahasrākṣáḥ, sahásrapāt.

sá bhú̄miṃ viśváto vṛtvá̄,

áty atiṣṭhad daśāṅgulám.

Thousand-headed was Puruṣa, thousand-eyed, thousand-footed. He having covered the earth on all sides, extended beyond it the length of ten fingers.

sahásraśīrṣā c.: that is, having innumerable heads, eyes, and feet, as representing all created beings (cp. 2) . sahasrākṣás: of the very numerous Bv. cds. formed with sahásra this and sahasraarghá are the only ones with irr. accent (cp. p. 455, 10 c ) . daśāṅgulám: probably only another way of expressing that his size was greater even than that of the earth. atiṣṭhat: ipf. of sthā stand.

See Page Number 196, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 Púruṣa evédáṃ sárvaṃ

yád bhūtáṃ yác ca bháviam.

utá̄mṛtatvásyéśāno,

yád ánnenātiróhati.

Puruṣa is this all, that has been and that will be. And he is the lord of immortality, which he grows beyond through food.

Puruṣa is coextensive with the whole world including the gods. bhávyam: a late and irregular cadence. amṛtatvásya: of the immortals, the gods. yád: there is some doubt as to the construction of d; the parallelism of áty atiṣṭhat in 1 d and of áty aricyata in 5 c indicates that Puruṣa is the subject and yád (the gods) the object, and that the former exceeds the latter ánnena, that is, by means of sacrificial food. The words have also been interpreted to mean: who (the gods) grow up by (sacrificial) food; or, and of that which grows by food, that is, creatures other than the gods. In these interpretations the meaning of áti does not seem to be sufficiently brought out.

See Page Number 196, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 etá̄vān asya mahimá̄,

áto jyá̄yāṃś ca Pú̄ruṣaḥ.

pá̄do ’sya víśvā bhūtá̄ni;

tripá̄d asyāmṛ́taṃ diví.

Such is his greatness, and more than that is Puruṣa. A fourth of him is all beings, three-fourths of him are what is immortal in heaven.

etá̄vān asya: irr. Sandhi for etá̄vāṁ̆ asya (occurring also in x. 85, 45: putrá̄n á̄), is a sign of lateness, this being the regular post Vedic Sandhi (39). átas: equivalent to an ab. after the cpv. (201, 3) . jyá̄yāṃś ca: on the Sandhi, see 40 a. Pú̄ruṣas: a metrical lengthening for Púruṣas (cp. the Pada text) to avoid a sequence of four short syllables, cp. 5 b. amṛ́tam: equivalent to amṛtatvá.

See Page Number 197, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 tripá̄d ūrdhvá úd ait Púruṣaḥ;

pá̄do ’syehá̄bhavat púnaḥ.

táto víṣvaṅ ví akrāmat

sāśanānaśané abhí.

With three quarters Puruṣa rose upward; one quarter of him here came into being again. Thence he spread asunder in all directions to what eats and does not eat.

úd ait (3. s. ipf. of i go, p. 130) : to the world of immortals. ihá: in this world. púnar: that is, from his original form. tátas: from the earthly quarter. ví akrāmat abhí: distributed himself to, developed into. sāśana-anaśané: animate creatures and inanimate things; this cd. represents the latest stage of Dvandvas in the RV. (186 A 1, end) .

See Page Number 197, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 tásmād Virá̄ḷ ajāyata,

Virá̄jŏ ádhi Pú̄ruṣaḥ.

sá jātố áty aricyata

paścá̄d bhú̄mim átho puráḥ.

From him Virāj was born, from Virāj Puruṣa. When born he reached beyond the earth behind and also before.

tásmād: from the undeveloped quarter of Puruṣa. Virá̄ḷ: as intermediate between the primaeval Puruṣa and the evolved Puruṣa; cp. x. 72, 4: Áditer Dákṣo ajāyata, Dákṣād u Áditiḥ pári from Aditi Dakṣa was born, and from Dakṣa Aditi. On the Sandhi, see p. 3, n. 2. With c d cp. 1 c d. átho: 24.

See Page Number 198, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 yát Púruṣeṇa havíṣā

devá̄ yajñám átanvata,

vasantố asyāsīd á̄jyaṃ,

grīṣmá idhmáḥ, śarád dhavíḥ.

When the gods performed a sacrifice with Puruṣa as an oblation, the spring was its melted butter, the summer its fuel, the autumn its oblation.

Here the gods are represented as offering with the evolved Puruṣa an ideal human sacrifice to the primaeval Puruṣa. átanvata: 3. pl. ipf. Ā. of tan stretch; this vb. is often used figuratively in the sense of to extend the web of sacrifice = to carry out, perform. dhavís: 54.

See Page Number 198, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 táṃ yajñáṃ barhíṣi práukṣan

Púruṣaṃ jātám agratáḥ:

téna devá̄ ayajanta,

sādhyá̄ ṛ́ṣayaś ca yé.

That Puruṣa, born in the beginning, they besprinkled as a sacrifice on the strew: with him the gods, the Sādhyas, and the seers sacrificed.

jātám agratás: the evolved Puruṣa, born from Virāj (5 b), the same as in 6 a. prá-aukṣan: 3. pl. ipf. of 1. ukṣ sprinkle. ayajanta: = yajñám átanvata in 6 b. Sādhyá̄s: an old class of divine beings (here probably in apposition to devá̄s), cp. 16 d. ṛ́ṣayaś ca yé: and those who were seers, a frequent periphrastic use of the rel. = simply ṛ́ṣayas.

See Page Number 199, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 tásmād yajñá̄t sarvahútaḥ

sáṃbhṛtaṃ pṛṣadājiám:

paśú̄n tá̄ṃś cakre vāyavyà̄n,

āraṇyá̄n, grāmiá̄ś ca yé.

From that sacrifice completely offered was collected the clotted butter: he made that the beasts of the air, of the forest, and those of the village.

tásmād: ab. of the source (201 A 1) . sáṃbhṛtam: as finite vb. pṛṣad-ājyám: accent, p. 455, 10 d 1. paśú̄n: Sandhi, 40, 2. tá̄ṃś: attracted to paśú̄n for tát (pṛṣadājyám); Sandhi, 40, 1 a. vāyavyà̄n: one of the rare cases where the independent Svarita remains in pronunciation (p. 448, 1) ; à̄n here remains unaffected by Sandhi because it is at the end of a Pāda (p. 31, f. n. 3) ; this is one of several indications that the internal Pādas (those within a hemistich) as well as the external Pādas were originally independent (cp. p. 465, f. n. 4) . āraṇyá̄n: that is, wild. grāmyá̄ś ca yé = grāmyá̄n, that is, tame; cp. ṛ́ṣayaś ca yé in 7 d.

See Page Number 199, Hymn Number 9 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

9 tásmād yajñá̄t sarvahúta

ṛ́caḥ sá̄māni jajñire;

chándāṃsi jajñire tásmād;

yájus tásmād ajāyata.

From that sacrifice completely offered were born the hymns and the chants; the metres were born from it; the sacrificial formula was born from it.

ṛ́cas: the Rigveda. sá̄māni: the Sāmaveda. jajñire: 3. pl. pf. Ā. of jan beget. yájus: the Yajurveda. This is the first (implicit) mention of the three Vedas. The AV. was not recognized as the fourth Veda till much later.

See Page Number 200, Hymn Number 10 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

10 tásmād áśvā ajāyanta

yé ké ca ubhayá̄dataḥ.

gá̄vo ha jajñire tásmāt;

tásmāj jātá̄ ajāváyaḥ.

From that arose horses and all such as have two rows of teeth. Cattle were born from that; from that were born goats and sheep.

yé ké ca: whatever animals besides the horse, such as asses and mules, have incisors above and below. ajāváyas: a pl. Dv. (186 A 2) ; Dvandvas are not analysed in the Pada text.

See Page Number 200, Hymn Number 11 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

11 yát Púruṣaṃ viádadhuḥ,

katidhá̄ ví akalpayan?

múkhaṃ kím asya? káu bāhú̄?

ká̄ ūrú̄ pá̄dā ucyete?

When they divided Puruṣa, into how many parts did they dispose him? What (did) his mouth (become) ? What are his two arms, his two thighs, his two feet called?

vi-ádadhur: when the gods cut up Puruṣa as the victim; here the Padapāṭha again (see note on viii. 48, 2 a, 10 c) accents the prp. in a subordinate clause (p. 469, 20 B) . káu: the dual ending au for the normal ā before consonants (cp. note on x. 14, 10 a) ; ká̄ and pá̄dā before ū̆: 22. ucyete: 3. du. pr. ps. of vac speak: Pragṛhya, 26 b.

See Page Number 201, Hymn Number 12 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

12 brāhmaṇò ’sya múkham āsīd,

bāhú̄ rājaníaḥ kṛtáḥ;

ūrú̄ tád asya yád váiśyaḥ;

padbhyá̄ṃ śūdrṓ ajāyata.

His mouth was the Brāhman, his two arms were made the warrior, his two thighs the Vaiśya; from his two feet the Śūdra was born.

In this stanza occurs the only mention of the four castes in the RV. brāhmaṇò ’sya: Sandhi accent, p. 465, 17, 3. rājanyàs: predicative nom. after a ps. (196 b ) . kṛtás attracted in number to rājanyàḥ, for kṛtáu (cp. 194, 3) . yád váiśyas: the periphrastic use of the rel. (cp. 7 d and 8 d) , lit. his two thighs became that which was the Vaiśya. padbhyá̄m: abl. of source (77, 3 a, p. 458, 1) .

See Page Number 201, Hymn Number 13 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

13 candrámā mánaso jātáś;

cákṣoḥ sú̄ryŏ ajāyata;

múkhād Índraś ca Agníś ca,

prāṇá̄d Vāyúr ajāyata.

The moon was born from his mind; from his eye the sun was born; from his mouth Indra and Agni, from his breath Vāyu was born.

Note that candrá-mās is not analysed in the Pada text. cákṣos: ab. of cákṣu used only in this passage = the usual cákṣus; in the Funeral Hymn (x. 16, 3) sú̄ryas and cákṣus, vá̄tas and ātmá̄ are also referred to as cognate in nature.

See Page Number 202, Hymn Number 14 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

14 ná̄bhyā āsīd antárikṣaṃ;

śīrṣṇó dyáuḥ sám avartata;

padbhyá̄ṃ bhú̄mir, díśaḥ śrótrāt:

táthā loká̄ṁ̆ akalpayan.

From his navel was produced the air; from his head the sky was evolved; from his two feet the earth, from his ear the quarters: thus they fashioned the worlds.

ná̄bhyās: ab. of ná̄bhi inflected according to the ī dec. (p. 82 a ) . śīrṣṇás: ab. of śīrṣán (90, 1 a; p. 458, 2) . sám avartata: this vb. is to be supplied in c; cp. ádhi sám avartata in x. 129, 4. akalpayan: ipf. cs. of kḷp; they (the gods) fashioned.

See Page Number 202, Hymn Number 15 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

15 saptá̄syāsan paridháyas;

tríḥ saptá samídhaḥ kṛtá̄ḥ;

devá̄ yád, yajñáṃ tanvāná̄,

ábadhnan Púruṣaṃ paśúm.

Seven were his enclosing sticks; thrice seven were the faggots made, when the gods performing the sacrifice bound Puruṣa as the victim.

paridháyas: the green sticks put round the sacrificial fire to fence it in, generally three in number. saptá: as a sacred number. tanvāná̄s: cp. 8 h. ábadhnan: 3. pl. ipf. of bandh; cp. púruṣeṇa havíṣā in 6 a and táṃ yajñáṃ Púruṣam in 7 a b. paśúm: as appositional acc. (198).

See Page Number 203, Hymn Number 16 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

16 yajñéna yajñám ayajanta devá̄s:

tá̄ni dhármāṇi prathamá̄ni āsan.

té ha ná̄kaṃ mahimá̄naḥ sacanta,

yátra pú̄rve Sādhiá̄ḥ sánti, devá̄ḥ.

With the sacrifice the gods sacrificed to the sacrifice: these were the first ordinances. These powers reached the firmament where are the ancient Sādhyas, the gods.

ayajanta: this vb. ordinarily takes the acc. of the person worshipped and the inst. of that with which he is worshipped (308, 1 f ) ; the meaning here is: they sacrificed to Puruṣa (here appearing as a sacrifice, like Viṣṇu in the Brāhmaṇas) with the sacrifice in which he was the victim. té mahimá̄naḥ: probably the powers residing in the sacrifice. This stanza is identical with i. 164, 50.

RÁ̄TRĪ

The goddess of night, under the name of Rá̄trī is invoked in only one hymn (x. 127) . She is the sister of Uṣas, and like her is called a daughter of heaven. She is not conceived as the dark, but as the bright starlit night. Decked with all splendour she drives away the darkness. At her approach men, beasts, and birds go to rest. She protects her worshippers from the wolf and the thief, guiding them to safety. Under the name of nákta n., combined with uṣás, Night appears as a dual divinity with Dawn in the form of Uṣá̄sā-náktā and Náktoṣá̄sā, occurring in some twenty scattered stanzas of the Rigveda.

x. 127. Metre: Gāyatrī.

See Page Number 203, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 Rá̄trī ví akhyad āyatí̄

purutrá̄ deví̆ akṣábhiḥ:

viśvā ádhi śríyo ’dhita.

Night approaching has looked forth in many places with her eyes: she has put on all glories.

ví akhyat: a ao. of khyā see (147 a 1) . ā-yatí̄: pr. pt. f. of ā + i go (95 a ) . deví̄: accent, p. 450, b; metre, p. 437, a 4. akṣábhis: 99, 4; the eyes are stars. ádhi adhita: root ao. Ā. of dhā put (148, 1 a ) . śríyas (A. pl. of śrí̄; 100 b, p. 87) ; the glories of starlight.

See Page Number 204, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 á̄ urv àprā ámartiā

niváto deví̆ udvátaḥ:

jyótiṣā bādhate támaḥ.

The immortal goddess has pervaded the wide space, the depths, and the heights: with light she drives away the darkness.

á̄ aprās: 3. s. s ao. of prā fill (144, 5) . deví̄: cp. 1 b. jyótiṣā: with starlight.

See Page Number 204, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 nír u svásāram askṛta

Uṣásaṃ deví̆ āyatí̄:

ápéd u hāsate támaḥ.

The goddess approaching has turned out her sister Dawn; away too will go the darkness.

nír askṛta: 3. s. root ao. of kṛ do; the s is here not original (Padapāṭha akṛta), but is probably due to the analogy of forms such as niṣ-kuru (AV.); it spread to forms in which kṛ is compounded with the prps. pári and sám (pariṣkṛṇvánti, páriṣkṛta, sáṃskṛta). Uṣásam: Dawn here used in the sense of daylight (dec., 83, 2 a ) . nír u — ápa íd u: in the second clause the pcl. is used anaphorically (p. 221, 2) , with special emphasis (íd) on the second prp., = and the darkness will also be dispelled by the starlight (cp. 2 c) . hāsate: 3. s. sb. Ā. of the s ao. of 2. hā go forth (p. 162, 2) .

See Page Number 205, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 sá̄ nŏ adyá, yásyā vayáṃ

ní te yá̄mann ávikṣmahi,

vṛkṣé ná vasatíṃ váyaḥ.

So to us to-day thou (hast approached), at whose approach we have come home, as birds to their nest upon the tree.

sá̄: p. 294, b; a vb. has here to be supplied, the most natural one being hast come, from āyatí̄ in 3 b. yásyās . . te for tváṃ yásyās, a prs. prn. often being put in the rel. clause. yá̄man: loc. (90). ní . . ávikṣmahi: s ao. Ā., we have turned in (intr.). vasatím: governed by a cognate vb. to be supplied, such as return to. váyas: N. pl. of ví bird (99, 3 a ).

See Page Number 205, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 ní grá̄māsŏ avikṣata,

ní padvánto, ní pakṣíṇaḥ,

ní śyená̄saś cid arthínaḥ.

Home have gone the villages, home creatures with feet, home those with wings, home even the greedy hawks.

ní avikṣata: 3. pl. Ā. s ao. of viś enter. grá̄māsas: = villagers. ní: note the repetition of the prp. throughout, in place of the cd. vb.: a common usage.

See Page Number 205, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 yāváyā vṛkíaṃ vṛ́kaṃ,

yaváya stenám, ūrmie;

áthā naḥ sutárā bhava.

Ward off the she-wolf and the wolf, ward off the thief, O Night; so be easy for us to pass.

yāváyā: cs. of yu separate; this and other roots ending in ú, as well as in i, ṛ, may take Guṇa or Vṛddhi in the cs. (168, 1 c ) , but the Padapāṭha invariably gives yavaya; the final vowel is metrically lengthened (in b it is long by position before st). vṛkyàm: accent, p. 450, 2 b. áthā: final metrically lengthened (cp. p. 214) .

See Page Number 206, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 úpa mā pépiśat támaḥ,

kṛṣṇáṃ, víaktam asthita:

Úṣa ṛṇéva yātaya.

The darkness, thickly painting, black, palpable, has approached me: O Dawn, clear it off like debts.

úpa asthita: 3. s. Ā. of root ao. of sthā stand. pépiśat: int. pr. pt. of piś paint, as if it were material. úṣas: Dawn, as a counterpart of Night, is invoked to exact = remove the darkness from Rātrī, as one exacts money owing. In hymns addressed to a particular deity, another who is cognate or in some way associated, is not infrequently introduced incidentally. yātaya: cs. of yat.

See Page Number 206, Hymn Number 8 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

8 úpa te gá̄ ivá̄karaṃ,

vṛṇīṣvá, duhitar divaḥ,

Rá̄tri, stómaṃ ná jigyúṣe.

Like kine I have delivered up to thee a hymn— choose it O daughter of heaven, O Night—like a song of praise to a victor.

úpa á̄ akaram (1. s. root ao. of kṛ): I have driven up for thee my song of praise, as a herdsman delivers up in the evening the cows which he has herded since the morning; cp. i. 114, 9, úpa te stómān paśupá̄ iva ᴗ á̄karam I have driven up songs of praise for thee like a herdsman. vṛṇīṣvá: 2. s. ipv. Ā. from vṛ choose. b is parenthetical. stómam is to be supplied with á̄karam. jigyúṣe: dat. of pf. pt. of ji conquer (157 b α) .

HYMN OF CREATION

In the following cosmogonic poem the origin of the world is explained as the evolution of the existent (sát) from the non-existent (ásat). Water thus came into being first; from it was evolved intelligence by heat. It is the starting-point of the natural philosophy which developed into the Sāṅkhya system.

x. 129. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 207, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 ná̄sad āsīn, nó sád āsīt tadá̄nīṃ;

ná̄sīd rájo nó víomā paró yát.

kím á̄varīvaḥ? kúha? kásya śármann?

ámbhaḥ kím āsīd, gáhanaṃ gabhīrám?

There was not the non-existent nor the existent then; there was not the air nor the heaven which is beyond. What did it contain? Where? In whose protection? Was there water, unfathomable, profound?

Cf. ŚB. x. 5, 3, 1: ná ᴗ iva vá̄ idám ágré५sad āsīd ná ᴗ iva sạ́d āsīt verily this (universe) was in the beginning neither non-existent nor existent as it were. tadá̄nīm: before the creation. āsīt: the usual form of the 3. s. ipf. of as be; the rarer form occurs in 3 b. nó: for ná u (24). víomā: the final vowel metrically lengthened (cp. p. 440, 4 B) . parás: adv.; on the accent cp. note on ii. 35, 6 c. á̄ avarīvar: 3. s. ipf. int. of vṛ cover (cp. 173, 3) ; what did it cover up = conceal or contain? kúha: where was it? kásya śárman: who guarded it? kím: here as an inter. pcl. (p. 225) . ámbhas: cp. 3 b, and TS., á̄po vá̄ idám ágre salilám āsīt this (universe) in the beginning was the waters, the ocean.

See Page Number 208, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 ná mṛtyúr āsīd, amṛ́taṃ ná tárhi.

ná rá̄triā áhna āsīt praketáḥ.

á̄nīd avātáṃ svadháyā tád ékaṃ.

tásmād dhānyán ná paráḥ kíṃ caná̄sa.

There was not death nor immortality then. There was not the beacon of night, nor of day. That one breathed, windless, by its own power. Other than that there was not anything beyond.

rá̄tryās: gen. of rá̄trī (p. 87) . áhnas: gen. of áhan (91, 2) . á̄nīt: 3. s. ipf. of an breathe (p. 143, 3 a ) . tásmād: governed by anyád (p. 317, 3) . dha for ha: 54. anyán ná: 33. parás: cp. note on 1 b. āsa: pf. of as be (135, 2) .

See Page Number 208, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 táma āsīt támasā gūḷhám ágre;

apraketáṃ saliláṃ sárvam ā idám.

tuchyénābhú ápihitam yád á̄sīt,

tápasas tán mahiná̄jāyatáikam.

Darkness was in the beginning hidden by darkness; indistinguishable, this all was water. That which, coming into being, was covered with the void, that One arose through the power of heat.

gūḷhám: pp. of guh hide (69 c, cp. 3 b γ, p. 3 and 13) . ās: 3. s. ipf. of as be (p. 142, 2 b ) ; this form is also found twice (i. 85, 1. 7) alternating with āsīt. b is a Jagatī intruding in a Triṣṭubh stanza (cp. p. 445, f. n. 7) . ābhú: the meaning of this word is illustrated by ā-babhú̄va in 6 d and 7 a. mahiná̄ = mahimná̄ (90, 2, p. 69) .

See Page Number 209, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 ká̄mas tád ágre sám avartatá̄dhi,

mánaso rétaḥ prathamáṃ yád á̄sīt.

sató bándhum ásati nír avindan

hṛdí pratí̄ṣyā kaváyo manīṣá̄.

Desire in the beginning came upon that, (desire) that was the first seed of mind. Sages seeking in their hearts with wisdom found out the bond of the existent in the non-existent.

ádhi sám avartata: 3. s. ipf. Ā. of vṛt turn, with sám come into being; ádhi upon makes the verb transitive = come upon, take possession of. tád that = tád ékam in 2 c, the unevolved universe. One of the two prps. here is placed after the vb. (cp. 191 f, and p. 468, 20 A a ) . yád: referring to ká̄mas is attracted in gender to the predicate n. rétas. satás: they found the origin of the evolved world in the unevolved. prati-íṣyā: the gd. in ya has often a long final vowel (164, 1) which is always short in the Padapāṭha. manīṣá̄: inst. of f. in ā (p. 77) .

See Page Number 210, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 tiraścí̄no vítato raśmír eṣām:

adháḥ svid āsí̄3d, upári svid āsī3t?

retodhá̄ āsan, mahimá̄na āsan;

svadhá̄ avástāt, práyatiḥ parástāt.

Their cord was extended across: was there below or was there above? There were impregnators, there were powers; there was energy below, there was impulse above.

raśmís: the meaning of this word here is uncertain, but it may be an explanation of bándhu in 4 c: the cord with which the sages (referred to by eṣām) in thought measured out the distance between the existent and non-existent, or between what was above and below; cp. viii. 25, 18, pári yó raśmínā divó ántān mamé pṛthivyá̄ḥ who with a cord has measured out the ends of heaven and earth; cp. also the expression sú̄traṃ vítatam (in AV. x. 8, 37) the extended string with reference to the earth. āsīt: accented because in an antithetical sentence (p. 468, 19 B β) . The ī is prolated, and that syllable (and not ā) has the Udātta, as in the final syllable of a sentence in questions (Pāṇini viii. 2, 97) ; the second question upári svid āsī3t is quoted by Pāṇini (viii. 2, 102) as coming under this rule, but without accent. retodhá̄s and mahimá̄nas are contrasted as male and female cosmogonic principles, to which correspond respectively práyatis and svadhá̄. In TS. iv. 3, 11, 1, mention is made of tráyo mahimá̄naḥ connected with fertility. svadhá̄: this is one of the five examples of a N. f. in ā left uncontracted with a following vowel: it is probable that the editors of the Saṃhitā text treated these forms as ending in āḥ, while the Padapāṭha gives them without Visarjanīya, doubtless owing to the greatly increasing prevalence of the nominatives in ā.

See Page Number 211, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 kố addhá̄ veda? ká ihá prá vocat,

kúta á̄jātā, kúta iyáṃ vísṛṣṭiḥ?

arvá̄g devá̄ asyá visárjanena:

áthā kó veda yáta ābabhú̄va?

Who knows truly? Who shall here declare, whence it has been produced, whence is this creation? By the creation of this (universe) the gods (come) afterwards: who then knows whence it has arisen?

vocat: a ao. inj. of vac. kutás: b has one syllable too many (p. 441, 4 a ). arvá̄k: the sense is that the gods, being part of the creation, are later than the period preceding the creation, and therefore can know nothing of the origin of the universe. áthā: with metrically lengthened final vowel (p. 440, 4; cp. 179, 1) .

See Page Number 211, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 iyáṃ vísṛṣṭir yáta ābabhú̄va;

yádi vā dadhé yádi vā ná:

yố asyá̄dhyakṣaḥ paramé víoman

số aṅgá veda, yádi vā ná véda.

Whence this creation has arisen; whether he founded it or did not: he who in the highest heaven is its surveyor, he only knows, or else he knows not.

a and b are dependent on veda in d. asya: of this universe. b is defective by two syllables (p. 440, 4 a ) : possibly a metrical pause expressive of doubt may have been intended. vyòman: loc. (90, 2) . véda: the accent is due to the formal influence of yádi (p. 246, 3 a ) .

YAMÁ

Three hymns are addressed to Yama, the chief of the blessed dead. There is also another (x. 10) , which consists of a dialogue between him and his sister Yamī. He is associated with Varuṇa, Bṛhaspati, and especially Agni, the conductor of the dead, who is called his friend and his priest. He is not expressly designated a god, but only a being who rules the dead. He is associated with the departed Fathers, especially the Aṅgirases, with whom he comes to the sacrifice to drink Soma.

Yama dwells in the remote recess of the sky. In his abode, which is the home of the gods, he is surrounded by songs and the sound of the flute. Soma is pressed for Yama, ghee is offered to him, and he comes to seat himself at the sacrifice. He is invoked to lead his worshippers to the gods, and to prolong life.

His father is Vivasvant and his mother Saraṇyū. In her dialogue with him Yamī speaks of Yama as the ‘only mortal’, and elsewhere he is said to have chosen death and abandoned his body. He departed to the other world, having found out the path for many, to where the ancient Fathers passed away. Death is the path of Yama. His foot-fetter (páḍbīśa) is spoken of as parallel to the bond of Varuṇa. The owl (úlūka) and the pigeon (kapóta) are mentioned as his messengers, but the two four-eyed, broad-nosed, brindled dogs, sons of Saramā (sārameyáu) are his regular emissaries. They guard the path along which the dead man hastens to join the Fathers who rejoice with Yama. They watch men and wander about among the peoples as Yama’s messengers. They are besought to grant continued enjoyment of the light of the sun.

As the first father of mankind and the first of those that died, Yama appears to have originally been regarded as a mortal who became the chief of the souls of the departed. He goes back to the Indo-Iranian period, for the primaeval twins, from whom the human race is descended, Yama and Yamī, are identical with the Yima and Yimeh of the Avesta. Yama himself may in that period have been regarded as a king of a golden age, for in the Avesta he is the ruler of an earthly, and in the RV. that of a heavenly paradise.

x. 135. Metre: Anuṣṭubh.

See Page Number 212, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 yásmin vṛkṣé supalāśé

deváiḥ saṃpíbate Yamáḥ,

átrā no viśpátiḥ pitá̄

purāṇá̄ṁ̆ ánu venati.

Beside the fair-leaved tree under which Yama drinks together with the gods, there our father, master of the house, seeks the friendship of the men of old.

yásmin: the loc. is often used in the sense of beside, near (cp. 203, 2) . saṃpíbate: drinks Soma with. átrā: with metrically long final vowel (cp. 433, 2 A) . nas: our i. e. of me and the other members of the family. pitá̄: my deceased father. purāṇá̄n: ancient ancestors; Sandhi, 39. ánu venati: that is, associates with them.

See Page Number 213, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 purāṇá̄ṁ̆ anuvénantaṃ,

cárantaṃ pāpáyāmuyá̄,

asūyánn abhy àcākaśaṃ:

tásmā aspṛhayaṃ púnaḥ.

Him seeking the friendship of the men of old, faring in this evil way, I looked upon displeased: for him I longed again.

In this and the preceding stanza a son speaks of his father who has gone to the world of Yama. amuyá̄: inst. s. f. of the prn. ayám used adverbially with shift of accent (p. 109) ; with this is combined the inst. s. f. of the adj. pāpá similarly used, the two together meaning in this evil way, that is, going to the abode of the dead. asūyán: being displeased, that is, with him, opposed to aspṛhayam, I longed for him, that is, to see him again. acākaśam: ipf. int. of kāś, with shortening of the radical vowel (174) .

See Page Number 213, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 yáṃ, kumāra, návaṃ rátham

acakráṃ mánasá̄kṛṇoḥ,

ékeṣaṃ viśvátaḥ prá̄ñcam,

ápaśyann ádhi tiṣṭhasi.

The new car, O boy, the wheelless, which thou didst make in mind, which has one pole, but faces in all directions, thou ascendest seeing it not.

In this stanza (and the next) the dead boy is addressed; he mounts the car which he imagines is to take him to the other world. acakrám: perhaps because the dead are wafted to Yama by Agni. éka and viśvátas are opposed: though it has but one pole, it has a front on every side. ápaśyan: because dead.

See Page Number 214, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 yáṃ, kumāra, prá̄vartayo

ráthaṃ víprebhias pári,

táṃ sá̄má̄nu prá̄vartata,

sám itó nāví á̄hitam.

The car, O boy, that thou didst set rolling forth away from the priests, after that there rolled forth a chant placed from here upon a ship.

The departure of the dead is followed by a funeral chant. praávartayas: 2. s. ipf. cs. of vṛt turn; accent, p. 464, 17, 1; p. 469, β; analysed by the Padapāṭha, as prá ávartayas; cp. note on viii. 48, 2 a. ánu prá avartata: 3. s. ipf. Ā. of vṛt: accent, p. 464, 17, 1; p. 466, 19; p. 468, 20 a. víprebhyas: the priests officiating at the funeral; abl. governed by pári (176, 1 a ) ; Sandhi, 43, 2 a. sám á̄-hitam: accent, p. 462, 13 b. nāví: the funeral chant is placed on a boat as a vehicle to convey it from here (itás) to the other world.

See Page Number 214, Hymn Number 5 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

5 káḥ kumārám ajanayad?

ráthaṃ kó nír avartayat?

káḥ svit tád adyá no brūyād,

anudéyī yáthá̄bhavat?

Who generated the boy? Who rolled out his car? Who pray could tell us this to-day, how his equipment (?) was?

These questions seem to be asked by Yama on the deceased boy’s arrival: Who was his father? Who performed his funeral? With what equipment was he provided for the journey? nír avartayat: cp. yáṃ prá̄vartayo rátham in 4 a b. anudéyī: this word occurs only in this and the following verse; it is a f. of anu-déya, which occurs in the sense of to be handed over; the exact sense is nevertheless uncertain. It not improbably means that with which the deceased was supplied for the journey to Yama’s abode.

See Page Number 215, Hymn Number 6 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

6 yáthá̄bhavad anudéyī,

tátŏ ágram ajāyata;

purástād budhná á̄tataḥ;

paścá̄n niráyaṇaṃ kṛtám.

As the equipment was, so the top arose; in front the bottom extended; behind the exit was made.

The sense of this stanza is obscure, chiefly because the object of which the details are here given is uncertain. The car on which the deceased is supposed to be conveyed may be meant. There is evidently correspondence between yáthā and tátas, ágram and budhnás, purástād and paścá̄d. There is no doubt about the grammatical forms or the meaning of the individual words (except anudéyī). If the reference is to the car, the general sense of the stanza is: in proportion to the equipment is the height of the top, the space on the floor in front, and the size of the exit at the back.

See Page Number 215, Hymn Number 7 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

7 idáṃ Yamásya sá̄danaṃ

devamānáṃ yád ucyáte.

iyám asya dhamyate nāḷí̄r.

ayáṃ gīrbhíḥ páriṣkṛtaḥ.

This is the seat of Yama that is called the abode of the gods. This is his flute that is blown. He it is that is adorned with songs.

The boy here arrives at the abode of Yama. sá̄danam: note that the vowel of this word is always short in the Pada text, the compilers of which seem to have regarded it as a metrical lengthening; sá̄danam occurs about a dozen times in the RV., beside the much commoner sádanam. nāḷí̄s: with s in the nom. (100, I a ) . There is one syllable too many in c (cp. p. 428, 2 a ) . ayám: Yama. páriṣkṛtas: note that the Pada text removes the unoriginal s (p. 145, f. n. 1; cp. note on x 127, 3 a ) . gīrbhís: dec. 82; accent, p. 458, c 1.

VÁ̄TA

This god, as Vá̄ta, the ordinary name of wind, is addressed in two short hymns. He is invoked in a more concrete way than his doublet Vāyú, who is celebrated in one whole hymn and in parts of others. Vāta’s name is frequently connected with forms of the root vā, blow, from which it is derived. He is once associated with the god of the rain-storm in the dual form of Vātā-Parjanyá̄, while Vāyu is often similarly linked with Indra as Índra-Vāyú̄. Vāta is the breath of the gods. Like Rudra he wafts healing and prolongs life; for he has the treasure of immortality in his house. His activity is chiefly mentioned in connexion with the thunderstorm. He produces ruddy lights and makes the dawns to shine. His swiftness often supplies a comparison for the speed of the gods or of mythical steeds. His noise is also often mentioned.

x. 168. Metre: Triṣṭubh.

See Page Number 215, Hymn Number 1 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

1 Vá̄tasya nú mahimá̄naṃ ráthasya:

rujánn eti, stanáyann asya ghóṣaḥ.

divispṛ́g yāti aruṇá̄ni kṛṇvánn;

utó eti pṛthivyá̄ reṇúm ásyan.

(I will) now (proclaim) the greatness of Vāta’s car: its sound goes shattering, thundering. Touching the sky it goes producing ruddy hues; and it also goes along the earth scattering dust.

mahimá̄nam: the vb. can easily be supplied, the most obvious one being prá vocam according to the first verse of i. 32, Índrasya nú vīryà̄ṇi prá vocam, and of i. 154 Víṣṇor nú kaṃ vīryà̄ṇi prá vocam. ruján: similarly the Maruts are said to split the mountain with the felly of their cars (v. 52, 9), and their sound is thunder (i. 23, 11) . stanáyan: used predicatively like a finite vb. (207) or eti may be supplied. aruṇá̄ni: alluding to the ruddy hue of lightning, with which the Maruts are particularly associated. asya: accent, p. 452. utó: 24. pṛthivyá̄: inst. expressing motion over (199, 4) .

See Page Number 217, Hymn Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

2 sáṃ prérate ánu Vá̄tasya viṣṭhá̄:

áinaṃ gachanti sámanaṃ ná yóṣāḥ.

tá̄bhiḥ sayúk saráthaṃ devá īyate,

asyá víśvasya bhúvanasya rá̄jā.

The hosts of Vāta speed on together after him: they go to him as women to a festival. The god, the king of all this world, united with them, goes on the same car.

sáṃ prá īrate: 3. pl. pr. Ā. of īr; p. 468, 20 a. viṣṭhá̄s: though the derivation is vi-stha (not analysed in the Pada text), the meaning is uncertain. It is probably the subject with which yóṣās are compared, the sense being: the rains follow the storm wind (apá̄ṃ sákhā in 3 c), and accompany him on his course. sarátham: an adv. based on the cognate acc. (197, 4). īyate: from ī go according to the fourth class, from which the pr. forms īyase, īyate, īyante, and the pt. í̄yamāna occur; c is a Jagatī Pāda.

See Page Number 218, Hymn Number 3 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

3 antárikṣe pathíbhir í̄yamāno,

ná ní viśate katamác caná̄haḥ.

apá̄ṃ sákhā prathamajá̄ ṛtá̄vā,

kúa svij jātáḥ, kúta á̄ babhūva?

Going along his paths in the air he rests not any day. The friend of waters, the first-born, the holy, where pray being born, whence has he arisen?

pathíbhis: inst. in local sense (199, 4) . í̄yamānas: see note on 2 c. áhas: acc. of duration of time (197, 2) ; cp. also 4 b and the Padapāṭha. apá̄ṃ sákhā: as accompanied by rain (cp. note on 2 a) . prathama-já̄s: 97, 2. ṛtá̄vā: 15 c. kvà: = kúa (p. 448) . jātás: as a finite verb (208); cp. x. 129, 6 b. kúta á̄ babhūva = what is his origin (cp. x. 129, 6 d) ; on the use of the pf. cp. 213 A a.

See Page Number 218, Hymn Number 4 in PDF for Sanskrit Version

4 ātmá̄ devá̄nāṃ, bhúvanasya gárbho,

yathāvaśáṃ carati devá eṣáḥ.

ghóṣā íd asya śṛṇvire, ná rūpáṃ.

tásmai Vá̄tāya havíṣā vidhema.

Breath of the gods, germ of the world, this god fares according to his will. His sounds are heard, (but) his form is not (seen). To that Vāta we would pay worship with oblation.

ātmá̄: cp. x. 90, 13, where Vāyu is said to have been produced from the breath of Puruṣa; and x. 16, 3, where breath is allied to wind. gárbhas: Vāta is here called germ of the world as Agni is in x. 45, 6. asya: accent, p. 452. ghóṣās: cp. 1 b. śṛṇvire: 3. pl. Ā. pr. of śru with ps. sense (p. 145, γ). ná rūpám: the vb. dṛśyate is here easily supplied. vidhema: with dat. (200 A f ) .

VOCABULARY

Finite verbal forms are here given under the root from which they are derived, as also the prepositions with which they are compounded, even when separated from them. Nominal verbal forms (participles, gerunds, gerundives, infinitives), on the other hand, appear in their alphabetical order.

ABBREVIATIONS

a. = adjective. A. = accusative. Ā = Ātmanepada, middle voice. AA. = Aitareya Āraṇyaka. ab. = ablative. acc. = accusative. act. = active. adv. = adverb, adverbial. ao. = aorist. Arm. = Armenian. Av. = Avesta, Avestic. Bv. = Bahuvrīhi compound. cd. = compound. cj. = conjunction. cog. = cognate. corr. = correlative. cpv. = comparative. cs. = causative. D. = dative. dat. = dative. dec. = declension. dem. = demonstrative. den. = denominative. der. = derivative. Dv. = Dvandva compound. ds. = desiderative. du. = dual. emph. = emphatic, emphasizing. enc. = enclitic. Eng. = English. f. = feminine. ft. = future. G. = genitive. gd. = gerund. gdv. = gerundive. gen. = genitive. Gk. = Greek. Go. = Gothic. gov. = governing compound. I. = instrumental. ij. = interjection. ind. = indicative. indec. = indeclinable. inf. = infinitive. inj. = injunctive. inst. = instrumental. int. = intensive. inter. = interrogative. ipf. = imperfect. ipv. = imperative. irr. = irregular. itv. = iterative. K. = Karmadhāraya compound. m. = masculine. mid. = middle. L. = locative. Lat. = Latin. lc. = locative. Lith. = Lithuanian. N. = nominative. n. = neuter. neg. = negative. nm. = numeral. nom. = nominative. OG. = Old German. OI. = Old Irish. OP. = Old Persian. op. = optative. ord. = ordinal. OS. = Old Saxon. OSl. = Old Slavonic. P. = Parasmaipada, active voice. pcl. = particle. pf. = perfect. pl. = plural. poss. = possessive. pp. = past passive participle. ppf. = pluperfect. pr. = present. prn. = pronoun. proh. = prohibitive. prp. = preposition. prs. = person, personal. ps. = passive. pt. = participle. red. = reduplicated. ref. = reflexive. rel. = relative. rt. = root. s. = singular. sb. = subjunctive. sec. = secondary. sf. = suffix. Slav. = Slavonic. spv. = superlative. syn. = syntactical. Tp. = Tatpuruṣa compound. V. = vocative. vb. = verb, verbal. voc. = vocative. YV. = Yajurveda.

a, prn. root that in á-tas, á-tra, á-tha, a-smái, a-syá.

aṃś attain, v. aśnóti, aśnuté: see aś.

áṃh-as, n. distress, trouble, ii. 33, 2 3; iii. 59, 2; vii. 71, 5.

ak-tú, m. ointment; beam of light; (clear night, x. 14, 9 [añj anoint ].

akṣ-á, m. die for playing, pl. dice, x. 34, 2. 4. 6. 7. 13 [perhaps eye = spot ].

akṣ-án, n. eye (weak stem of ákṣi), x. 127, 1.

á-kṣīya-māṇa, pr. pt. ps. unfailing, i. 154, 4 [2. kṣi destroy ].

akhkhalī-kṛ́tyā, gd. having made a croak, vii. 103, 3.

Ag-ní, m. fire, ii. 12, 3; iii. 59, 5; viii. 48, 6; x. 34, 11; god of fire, Agni, i. 1-7, 9; 35, 1; ii. 35, 15; v. 11, 1-6; vii. 49, 4; x. 15, 9. 12; 90, 13 [Lat. ig-ni-s, Slav. og-nĭ ].

agni-dagdhá, Tp. cd. burnt with fire, x. 15, 14 [pp. of dah burn ].

agní-dūta, a. (Bv.) having Agni as a messenger, x. 14, 13.

agni-ṣvāttá, cd. Tp. consumed by fire, x. 15, 11 [pp. of svād taste well ].

ág-ra, n. front; beginning; top, x. 135, 6; lc. ágre in the beginning, x. 129. 3. 4.

agra-tás, adv. in the beginning, x. 90, 7.

a-ghn-yá̄, f. cow, v. 83, 8 [gdv. not to be slain, from han slay ].

aṅkuś-ín, a. having a hook, hooked, attractive, x. 34, 7 [aṅkuśá hook ].

1. áṅg-a, n. limb, ii. 33, 9.

2. aṅgá, emphatic pcl. just, only, i. 1, 6; x. 129, 7 [180].

áṅgāra, m. coal, x. 34, 9.

Áṅgira, m. name of an ancient seer, iv. 51, 4.

Áṅgiras, m. pl. name of a group of ancestors, v. 11, 6; x. 14, 3. 4. 5. 6; s., as an epithet of Agni, i. 1, 6; v. 11, 6 [Gk. ἄγγελο-ς ‘messenger’].

ac bend, I. P. ácati. úd-, draw up, v. 83, 8.

a-cakrá, a. (Bv.) wheelless, x. 135, 3.

á-cit, a. (K.) unthinking, thoughtless, vii. 86, 7.

a-cít-e, dat. inf. not to know, vii. 61, 5.

á-citti, f. (K.) thoughtlessness, vii. 86, 6.

a-citrá, n. darkness, obscurity, iv. 51, 3.

á-cyuta, pp. (K.) not overthrown, unshakable, i. 85, 4.

acyuta-cyút, a. (Tp.) moving the immovable, ii. 12, 9.

ácha, prp. with acc., unto, viii. 48, 6.

aj drive, I. P. ájati [Lat. ago ‘lead’, ‘drive’, Gk. ἄγω, ‘lead’].

á̄- drive up, vi. 54, 10.

úd- drive out, ii. 12, 3; iv. 50, 5.

ajá-māyu, a. (Bv.) bleating like a goat, vii. 103, 6. 10 [māyú, m. bleat ].

a-jára, a. (K.) unaging, i. 160, 4 [jṝ waste away ].

á-jasra, a. (K.) eternal, ii. 35, 8 [ unfailing: jas be exhausted ].

ajāví, m. pl. Dv. cd. goats and sheep, x. 90, 10 [ajá + ávi].

a-jur-yá, a. unaging, iv. 51, 6 [jur waste away ].

añj, VII. P. anákti anoint; Ā. aṅkté anoint oneself, viii. 29, 1.

áñjas-ā, adv. straightway, vi. 54, 1 [inst. of áñjas ointment: = with gliding motion].

añj-í, n. ornament, i. 85, 3; viii. 29, 1 [añj anoint ].

á-tas, adv. hence, x. 14, 9; = ab. from that, iv. 50, 3; than that, x. 90, 3.

ati-rātrá, a. (celebrated) overnight, vii. 103, 7 [rá̄trī night ].

átka, m. robe, ii. 35, 14.

áty-etavái, dat. inf. to pass over, v. 83, 10 [áti + i go beyond ].

á-tra, adv. here, i. 154, 6; ii. 35, 6.

á-trā, adv. then, vii. 103, 2; there, x. 135, 1.

Átri, m. an ancient sage, vii. 71, 5.

á-tha, adv. then; so, vi. 54, 7.

Áthar-van, m. pl. name of a group of ancient priests, x. 14, 6.

á-thā, adv. then, viii. 48, 6; x. 14, 10; 15, 4. 11; 129, 6; so, x. 127, 6.

átho, adv. and also, x. 90, 5 [átha + u].

ad, eat, II. P. átti, ii. 35, 7; x. 15, 8. 11. 12 [Lat. edo, Gk. ἔδω, Eng. eat ].

á-dabdha, pp. (K.) uninjured, iv. 50, 2 [dabh harm ].

Á-diti, f. name of a goddess, viii. 48, 2 [ unbinding, freedom, from 3. dā bind ].

ad-dhá̄, adv. truly, x. 129, 6 [ in this manner: a-d this + dhā].

a-dyá, adv. to-day, i. 35, 11; iv. 51, 3-4; x. 14, 12; 127, 4; 135, 5; now, x. 15, 2 [perhaps = a-dyavi on this day ].

á-dri, m. rock, i. 85, 5 [ not splitting: dṛ pierce ].

ádri-dugdha, Tp. cd. pressed out with stones, iv. 50, 3 [pp. of duh milk ].

ádha-ra, a. lower, ii. 12, 4.

adhás, adv. below, x. 129, 5.

ádhi, prp. with lc., upon, i. 85, 7; v. 83, 9; vii. 103, 5; with ab. from, x. 90, 5.

ádhy-akṣa, m. eye-witness; surveyor, x. 129, 7 [ having one’s eye upon ].

adhvará, m. sacrifice, i. 1, 4. 8; iv. 51, 2.

adhvar-yú, m. officiating priest, vii. 103, 8.

a-dhvasmán, a. (Bv.) undimmed, ii. 35, 14 [ having no darkening ].

an breathe, II. P. ániti, x. 129, 2 [Go. an-an ‘breathe’].

án-agni-dagdha, pp. (K.) not burned with fire, x. 15, 14.

án-abhi-mlāta-varṇa, a. (Bv.) having an unfaded colour, ii. 35, 13.

á-naṣṭa-vedas, a. (Bv.) whose property is never lost, vi. 54, 8.

an-amīvá, a. (Bv.) diseaseless, iii. 59, 3; n. health, x. 14, 11 [ámīvā disease ].

án-āgas, a. (Bv.) sinless, v. 83, 2; vii. 86, 7 [á̄gas sin; Gk. ἀν-αγής ‘innocent’].

an-idhmá, a. (Bv.) having no fuel, ii. 35, 4.

á-nimiṣ-am, (acc.) adv. unwinkingly, vii. 61, 3 [ni-míṣ, f. wink ].

á-nimiṣ-ā, (inst.) adv. with unwinking eye, iii. 59, 1 [ni-mís, f wink ].

á-niviśamāna, pr. pt. A. unresting, vii. 49, 1 [ni + viś go to rest ].

án-irā, f. (K.) languor, ailment, vii. 71, 2; viii. 48, 4 [írā, f. refreshment ].

án-īka, n. face, ii. 35, 11 [an breathe ].

ánu, prp. with acc., along, x. 14, 1. 8; among, x. 14, 12.

anu-kāmám, (acc.) adv. according to desire, viii. 48, 8.

anu-déyī, f. equipment (?), x. 135, 5. 6 [f. gdv. of anu-dā to be handed over ].

anu-paspaśāná, pf. pt. Ā. having spied out, x. 14, 1 [spaś spy ].

anu-madyá-māna, pr. pt. ps. being greeted with gladness, vii. 63, 3.

anu-vénant, pr. pt. seeking the friendship of (acc.), x. 135, 2.

ánu-vrata, a. devoted, x. 34, 2 [ acting according to the will (vratá) of another ].

án-ṛta, n. (K.) falsehood, ii. 35, 6; vii. 61, 5; misdeed, wrong, 86, 6 [ṛtá right ].

an-enás, a. (Bv.) guiltless, vii. 86, 4 [énas guilt ].

ánta, m. end, iv. 50, 1; edge, proximity: lc. ánte near, x. 34, 16.

antár, prp. with lc., within, i. 35, 9; ii. 12, 3; 35, 7; iv. 51, 3; vii. 71, 5; 86, 2 (= in communion with ); viii. 48, 2; among, viii. 29, 2. 3 [Lat. inter ].

antári-kṣa, n. air, atmosphere, i. 35, 7. 11; ii. 12, 2; x. 90, 14; 168, 3 [ situated between heaven and earth: kṣa = 1. kṣi dwell ].

ánti-tas, adv. from near, iii. 59, 2 [ánti in front, near ].

ándh-as, n. Soma plant; juice, i. 85, 6 [Gk. ἄνθ-ος ‘blossom’].

án-na, n. food, ii. 35, 5. 7. 10. 11. 14; pl. 12; x. 90, 2 [pp. of ad eat ].

anyá, prn. a. other, ii. 35, 3. 8. 13; x. 34, 4. 10. 11. 14; 129, 2; with ab. = than, ii. 33, 11; anyó-anyá one-another, vii. 103, 3. 4. 5; anyé-anyé, anyá̄ḥ-anyá̄ḥ some-others, x. 14, 3; ii. 35, 3 [cp. Lat. aliu-s, Gk. ἄλλο-ς ‘other’].

áp, f. water, pl. N. á̄pas, ii. 35, 3. 4; vii. 49, 1. 2 2 . 3. 4; 103, 2; A. apás, v. 83, 6; inst. adbhís, x. 14, 9; G. apá̄m, i. 85, 9; ii. 12, 7; 35, 1. 2. 3. 7. 9. 11. 13. 14; vii. 103, 4; x. 168, 3; L. apsú, ii. 35, 4. 5. 7. 8; vii. 103, 5 [Av. ap ‘water’].

apa-dhá̄, f. unclosing, ii. 12, 3.

ápa-bhartavái, dat. inf. to take away, x. 14, 2 [bhṛ bear ].

apa-bhartṛ́, m. remover, ii. 33, 7 [bhṛ bear ].

á-paśyant, pr. pt. (K.) not seeing, x. 135, 3.

ápas, n. work, i. 85, 9 [Lat. opus ‘work’].

apás, a. active, i. 160, 4.

apás-tama, spv. a. most active, i. 160, 4.

Apá̄ṃ nápāt, m. son of waters, name of a god, ii. 33, 13; 35, 1. 3. 7. 9.

ápi-hita, pp. covered, x. 129, 3 [dhā put ].

apīc-yà, a. secret, ii. 35, 11 [apīc contraction of a presupposed api-añc].

a-praketá, a. (Bv.) indistinguishable, x. 129, 3 [praketá perception ].

á-pratīta, pp. (K.) irresistible, iv. 50, 9 [prati + pp. of i go ].

a-pramṛśyá, gdv. not to be forgotten, ii. 35, 6 [mṛś touch ].

á-budhya-māna, pr. pt. unawakening, iv. 51, 3 [budh wake ].

abhi-kṣipánt, pr. pt. lashing, v. 83, 3.

abhí-tas, adv. on all sides, iv. 50, 3; with acc., around, vii. 103, 7.

abhimāt-ín, m. adversary, i. 85, 3 [abhímāti, f. hostility ].

abhí-vṛṣṭa, pp. rained upon, vii. 103, 4.

abhiṣṭí-dyumna, a. (Bv.) splendid in help, iv. 51, 7 [dyumná, n. splendour ].

abhíṣṭi-śavas, a. (Bv.) strong to help, iii. 59, 8 [śávas, n. might ].

abhīti, f. attack, ii. 33, 5 [abhí + ití]. [ ]

abhí̄-vṛta, pp. adorned, i. 35, 4 [1. vṛ cover ].

á-bhv-a, a. monstrous; n. force, ii. 33, 10; monster, iv. 51, 9 [ non-existent, monstrous: -bhū be ].

á-manya-māna, pr. pt. Ā. not thinking = unexpecting, ii. 12, 10 [man think ].

á-martya, a. (K.) immortal, viii. 48, 12; f. ā, x. 127, 2.

a-mítra, m. (K.) enemy, ii. 12, 8 [mitrá friend ].

ámīta-varṇa, a. (Bv.) of unchanged colour, iv. 51, 9.

ámī-vā, f. disease, i. 35, 9; ii. 33, 2; vii. 71, 2; viii. 48, 11 [am harm, 3. s. ámī-ti].

amu-y-á̄, inst. adv. in this way, so, x. 135, 2 [inst. f. of amú this used in the inflexion of ayám].

á-mūra, a. (K.) wise, vii. 61, 5 [ not foolish: mūrá].

a-mṛ́ta, a. immortal; m. immortal being, i. 35, 2; vii. 63, 5; viii. 48, 3 2 ; n. what is immortal, i. 35, 6; x. 90, 3; immortality, x. 129, 2 [ not dead, mṛtá, pp. of mṛ die; cp. Gk. ἄμβροτος ‘immortal’].

amṛta-tvá, n. immortality, x. 90, 2.

ámbh-as, n. water, x. 129, 1.

á-yajvan, m. (K.) non-sacrificer, vii. 61, 4.

a-y-ám, dem. prn. N. s. m. this, iii. 59, 4; vii. 86, 3. 8; viii. 48, 10; x. 34, 13 (= here ); he, i. 160, 4; x. 135, 7.

a-yá̄s, a. nimble, i. 154, 6 [ not exerting oneself: yās = yas heat oneself ].

a-rapás, a. (Bv.) unscathed, ii. 33, 6; x. 15, 4 [rápas, n. infirmity, injury ].

áraṃ-kṛta, pp. well-prepared, x. 14, 13 [ made ready ].

ár-am, adv. in readiness; with kṛ do service to (dat.), vii. 86, 7.

á-rāti, f. hostility, ii. 35, 6; iv. 50, 11; viii. 48, 3; x. 34, 14 [ non-giving, niggardliness, enmity ].

a-rí, m. niggard, enemy, gen. aryás, ii. 12, 4. 5; iv. 50, 11; viii. 48, 8 [ having no wealth: ri = rai; 1. indigent; 2. niggardly ].

á-riṣṭa, pp. (K.) uninjured, vi. 54, 7 [riṣ injure ].

ar-uṇá, a. f. í̄, ruddy, x. 15, 7; n. ruddy hue, x. 168, 1.

ar-uṣá, a. ruddy, i. 85, 5; vii. 71, 1.

a-reṇú, a. (Bv.) dustless, i. 35, 11 [reṇú m. dust ].

ark-á, m. song, i. 85, 2; x. 15, 9 [arc sing ].

arc sing, praise, I. árcati. sám-, praise universally. pf. ānṛcé, i. 160, 4.

árc-ant, pr. pt., singing, i. 85, 2; viii. 29, 10.

arṇa-vá, a. waving, viii. 63, 2; m. flood, i. 85, 9.

ár-tha, n. goal, vii. 63, 4 [ what is gone for: ṛ go ].

arth-ín, a. greedy, x. 127, 5 [ having an object, needy ].

ar-páya, cs. of ṛ go. úd- raise up, ii. 33, 4.

aryá, a. noble, vii. 86, 7; x. 34, 13; m. lord, ii. 35, 2.

Arya-mán, m. name of one of the Ādityas, vii. 63, 6.

ár-vant, m. steed, ii. 33, 1; vii. 54, 5 [ speeding: ṛ go ].

arvá̄k, adv. hither, x. 15, 4. 9; afterwards, x. 129, 6.

arvá̄ñc, a. hitherward, i. 35, 10; v. 83, 6.

árh-ant, pr. pt. worthy, ii. 33, 10 3 .

av help, I. P. ávati, i. 85, 7; ii. 12, 14; 35, 15; iv. 50, 9. 11; vii. 49, 1-4; 61, 2; x. 15, 1. 5; quicken, v. 83, 4.

ava-tá, m. well, i. 85, 10; iv. 50, 3 [áva down ].

a-vadyá, n. blemish, x. 14, 8 [gdv. not to be praised, blameworthy ].

avá-ni, f. river, v. 11, 5 [áva down ].

ava-páśyant, pr. pt. looking down on (acc.), vii. 49, 3.

ava-má, spv. a. lowest; nearest, ii. 35, 12; latest, vii. 71, 3 [áva down ].

ava-yātṛ́, m. appeaser, viii. 48, 2.

áva-ra, cpv. a. lower, x. 15, 1; nearer, ii. 12, 8 [áva down ].

áv-as, n. help, i. 35, 1; 85, 11; ii. 12, 9; iii. 59, 6; x. 15, 4 [av help ].

ava-sá̄na, n. resting place, x. 14, 9 [ unbinding, giving rest: áva + sā = si tie ].

avás-tāt, adv. below, x. 129, 5.

avas-yú, a. desiring help, iv. 50, 9.

a-vātá, a. (Bv.) windless, x. 129, 2 [vá̄ta wind ].

av-i-tṛ́, m. helper, ii. 12, 6.

a-ví̄ra, a. (Bv.) sonless, vii. 61, 4 [vīrá hero ].

a-vṛká, a. (K.) friendly, x. 15, 1 [ not harming: vṛ́ka wolf ].

a-vyathyá, gdv. immovable, ii. 35, 5 [vyath waver ].

aś reach, obtain, V. aśnóti, aśnuté, i. 1, 3; 85, 2; ii. 33, 2. 6; iii. 59, 2; vii, 103, 9.

abhí- attain to (acc.), i. 154, 5.

áś-man, m. rock, ii. 12, 3 [Av. asman ‘stone’; Gk. ἄκμων ‘anvil’].

áś-va, m. horse, ii. 12, 7; 35, 6; iv. 51, 5; v. 83, 3. 6; vii. 71, 3. 5; x. 34, 3. 11; 90, 10 [Lat. equu-s ‘horse’, Gk. ἵππο-ς, OS. ēhu ].

áśva-magha, a. (Bv.) rich in horses, vii. 71, 1 [maghá bounty ].

Aśv-ín, m. du. horsemen, name of the twin gods of dawn, vii. 71. 2. 3. 6.

aṣṭáu, nm. eight, i. 35, 8.

as be, II. P.: pr. 2. ási, i. 1, 4; ii. 12, 15; 33, 3; 3. ásti, ii. 12, 5; 33, 7. 10; vii. 71, 4; 86, 6; x. 34, 14; pl. 1. smási, vi. 54, 9; viii. 48, 9; 3. sánti, i. 85, 12; x. 90, 16; ipv. ástu, v. 11, 5; vii. 86, 8 2 ; x. 15, 2; sántu, vii. 63, 5; op. syá̄ma, iii. 59, 3; iv. 50, 6; 51, 10. 11; viii. 48, 12. 13; ipf. 3. á̄s, x. 129, 3; āsīt, x. 34, 2; 90, 6. 12. 14; 129, 1 4 . 2 2 . 3 2 . 4. 5 2 ; á̄san, x. 90, 15. 16; 129, 5 2 ; pf. āsa, vii. 86, 4; x. 129, 2; á̄sur, iv. 51, 7.

ápi- be or remain in (lc.); syāma, iii. 59, 4; x. 14, 6.

pári be around, celebrate, 2. pl. stha, vii. 103, 7.

prá- be pre-eminent, ipv. astu, iii. 59, 2.

ás-at, pr. pt. n. the non-existent, x. 129, 1. 4.

a-saścát, a. (Bv.) inexhaustible, i. 160, 2 [ having no second, saścát: sac follow ].

ás-ita, (pp.) a. black, iv. 51, 9.

á-saṃmṛṣṭa, pp. (K.) uncleansed, v. 11. 3 [mṛj wipe ].

ás-u, m. life, x. 14, 12; 15, 1 [1. as exist ].

asu-tṛ́p, a. (Tp.) life-stealing, x. 14, 12 [tṛp delight in ].

ásu-nīti, f. spirit-guidance, x. 15, 14.

ásu-ra, m. divine spirit, i. 35, 7. 10; v. 83, 6 [Av. ahura ].

asur-yà, n. divine dominion, ii. 33, 9; 35, 2.

asūyánt, pr. pt. displeased, resentful, x. 135, 2.

ás-ta, n. home, abode, x. 14, 8; 34, 10.

asmá, prn. stem of 1. prs. pl.; A. asmá̄n us, viii. 48, 3. 11; x. 15, 5; D. asmábhyàm to us, i. 85, 12; x. 14, 12; asmé to us, i. 160, 5; ii. 33, 12; Ab. asmád from us, ii. 33, 2; vii. 71, 1. 2; than us, ii. 33, 11; G. asmá̄kam of us, vi. 54, 6; L. asmé in or on us, ii. 35, 4; iv. 50, 10. 11; viii. 48, 10; asmá̄su on us, iv. 51, 10.

a-smín, L. of prn. root a, in this, ii. 35, 14; iv. 50, 10; x. 14, 5.

á-smera, a. (K.) not smiling, ii. 35, 4.

a-smái, D. of prn. root a, to him, ii. 35, 5. 12; for him, x. 14, 9; unaccented, asmai to or for him, ii. 12, 5. 13; 35, 2. 10; vi. 54, 4; vii. 63, 5; x. 14, 9. 11.

a-syá, G. of prn. root a, of this, ii. 33, 9; x. 129, 6; 168, 2; unaccented, asya his, of him, its, of it, i. 35, 7; 154, 5; 160, 3; ii. 12, 13; 35, 2. 6. 8. 11; iv. 50, 2; vi. 54, 3; vii. 86, 1; viii. 48, 12; x. 34, 4. 6; 90, 3 3 . 4. 6. 12 2 . 15; 129, 7; 135, 7; 168, 1.

ás-yant, pr. pt. scattering, x. 168, 1 [as throw ].

a-syái, D. f. of prn. root a, to that, ii. 33, 5.

ah say: pf. 3. pl. āhur, ii. 12, 5; v. 11, 6; vii. 86, 3; x. 34, 4.

áha, emphasizing pcl., indeed, i. 154, 6; v. 83, 3; vii. 103, 2.

áhan, n. day, viii. 48, 7; x. 129, 2.

ahám, prs. prn., I, viii. 86, 7; x. 15, 3; 34, 2. 3. 12.

áhar, n. day, vii. 103, 7.

áhas, n. day, x. 168, 3.

a-hastá, a. (Bv.) handless, x. 34, 9.

áh-i, m. serpent, ii. 12, 3. 11 [Av. aži, Gk. ἔχι-ς ‘viper’, Lat. angui-s ].

á-hṛṇāna, pr. pt. Ā. free from wrath [hṛ be angry ].

Ā, prp. with ab. from, ii. 35, 2; iv. 50, 3; 51, 10; with L., in, i. 85, 4; ii. 35, 7. 8; iii. 59, 3; viii. 48, 6.

á̄, pcl. quite, very, ii. 12, 15; with D., viii. 48, 4.

á̄-gata, pp. come, vii. 103, 3. 9 [gam go ].

á̄-gam-iṣṭha, a. spv. coming most gladly, x. 15, 3.

á̄g-as, n. sin, vii. 86, 4; x. 15, 6 [cp. Gk. ἄγος ‘guilt’].

á̄c-ya, gd. bending, x. 15, 6 [á̄ + ac bend ].

á̄-jāta, pp. produced, x. 129, 6 [jan generate ].

á̄j-ya, n. melted butter, x. 90, 6 [á̄-añj anoint ].

āṇí, m. axle-end, i. 35, 6.

á̄-tata, pp. extended, x. 135, 6 [tan stretch ].

ā-tasthivá̄ṃs, red. pf. pt. having mounted, ii. 12, 8 [á̄ + sthā stand ].

āt-mán, m. breath, x. 168, 4 [Old Saxon āthom ‘breath’].

Ādityá, m. son of Aditi, iii. 59, 2. 3. 5.

āp obtain, V. P. āpnóti; pf. āpa, iv. 51, 7 [Lat. ap-iscor ‘reach’, ap-ere ‘seize’].

ā-bhis, I. pl. f. of prn. root a, with these, v. 83, 1.

ā-bhú, a. coming into being, x. 129, 3.

āmá, a. raw, unbaked, ii. 35, 6 [Gk. ὠμὅ-ς ‘raw’].

ā-yat-í̄, pr. pt. f. coming, x. 127, 1. 3 [á̄ + i go ].

āyas-á, a. f. í̄, made of iron, viii. 29, 3 [áyas iron ].

āy-ú, a. active; m. living being, mortal, iii. 59, 9 [i go ].

á̄-yudh-a, n. weapon, viii.29, 5 [á̄ + yudh fight ].

á̄y-us, n. span of life, vii. 103, 10; viii. 48, 4. 7. 10. 11; x. 14, 14 [ activity: i go ].

āraṇyá, a. belonging to the forest, x. 90, 8 [áraṇya].

ā-róhant, pr. pt. scaling, ii. 12, 12 [ruh mount ].

āvís, adv. in view, with kṛ, make manifest, v. 83, 3.

āś-ú, a. swift, vii. 71, 5 [Gk. ὠκύ-ς].

āśu-héman, a. (Bv.), of swift impulse, ii. 35, 1.

ā-sām, gen. pl. f. of the prn. root a, of them, iv. 51, 6.

á̄s-īna, irr. pr. pt. Ā., sitting, x. 15, 7 [ās sit ].

á̄-hita, pp. placed in (lc.), viii. 29, 4; x. 14, 16; with sám placed upon (lc.), x. 135, 4 [dhā put ].

á̄-huta, pp. to whom offering is made, v. 11, 3.

I go, II. P. émi, x. 34, 5; éti, iv. 50, 8; x. 34, 6; 168, 1 2 ; yánti, vii. 49, 1; approach (acc.), viii. 48, 10; áyan, pr. sb. pass, vii. 61, 4; attain, vii. 63, 4; pf. īyúr, x. 15, 1. 2.

ánu- go after, vi. 54, 5; follow (acc.), viii. 63, 5.

ápa- go away, x. 14, 9.

abhí- come upon. ipf. á̄yan, vii. 103, 2.

áva- appease: op. iyām, vii. 86, 4.

á̄- come, ii. 33, 1; v. 83, 6; go to, x. 14, 8.

úpa á̄- come to (acc.), i. 1, 7.

úd- rise, vii. 61, 1; 63, 1-4; ipf. ait, x. 90, 4.

úpa- approach, vii. 86, 3; 103, 3; x. 14, 10; 34, 10; flow to, ii. 35, 3.

párā- pass away, pf. īyúr, x. 14, 2. 7.

pári- surround, ii. 35, 4. 9.

prá- go forth, i. 154, 3; x. 14, 7.

ánu prá- go forth after, vi. 54, 6.

ví- disperse, x. 14, 9.

sám- flow together, ii. 35, 3; unite, vii, 103, 2.

ichá-māna, pr. pt. Ā. desiring, x. 34, 10 [iṣ wish ].

i-tás, adv. from here, x. 135, 4.

í-ti, pcl. thus, ii. 12, 5 2 ; vi. 54, 1. 2; x. 34, 6 [180].

it-thá̄, adv. thus, ii. 35, 11; truly, i. 154, 5 [id + thā; 180].

í-d, emphasizing pcl. just, even, i. l, 4. 6; 85, 8; 154, 3; ii. 35, 8. 10; iv. 50, 7. 8; 51, 9; vii. 86, 3. 6; x. 14, 16; 34, 5. 7. 8. 13; 127, 3 [Lat. id: 180].

í-d-ám, dem. prn. n. this, i. 154, 3; ii. 12, 14; 33, 10; iv. 51, 1; v. 11, 5; x. 14, 15; 15, 2; 90, 2; 129, 3; 135, 7; this world, v. 83, 9; = here, vi. 54, 1 [111].

í-dá̄nīm, adv. now, i. 35, 7.

idh kindle, VII. Ā. inddhé.

sám- kindle, 3. pl. indhate, ii. 35, 11; pf. īdhiré, v. 11, 2.

ídh-má, m. fuel, x. 90, 6 [idh kindle ].

índ-u, m. drop, Soma, viii. 48, 2. 4. 8. 12. 13. 15; pl. iv. 50, 10; viii. 48, 5.

Índra, m. name of a god, i. 85, 9; ii. 12, 1-15; iv. 50, 10. 11; v. 11, 2; vii. 49, 1; viii. 48, 2. 10; x. 15, 10; 90, 13.

indr-iyá, n. might of Indra, i. 85, 2 [Índra].

i-nv go, I. P. ínvati [secondary root from i go according to class v.: i-nu].

sam- bring, i. 160, 5.

imá, dem. prn. stem, this, A. m. imám, ii. 35, 2; x. 14, 4; 15, 6; N. m. pl. imé, vi. 54, 2; viii. 48, 5; n. imá̄, ii. 12, 3; x. 15, 4; imá̄ni, vii. 61, 6; 71, 6 [111].

i-y-ám, dem. prn. f. this, v. 11, 5; vii. 61, 7; 71, 6 2 ; x. 129, 6. 7 [111].

írā, f. nurture, v. 83, 4.

ír-iṇa, n. dice-board, x. 34, 1. 9.

ír-ya, a. watchful, vi. 54, 8.

i-va, enc. pcl. like, i. 1, 9; 85, 5. 8 2 ; ii. 12, 4. 5; 33, 6; 35, 5. 13; iv. 51, 2; v. 11, 5; 83, 3; vii. 63, 1; 103, 5 2 ; viii. 29, 8; 48, 4 2 . 6. 7 2 ; x. 34, 1. 3. 5. 8; 127, 7. 8 [180].

iṣ-irá, a. devoted, viii. 48, 7.

iṣṭá-vrata, a. (Bv.) accordant with desired ordinances, iii. 59, 9.

iṣṭā-pūrtá, n. (Dv.) sacrifice and good works, x. 14, 8 [iṣ-ṭā, pp. du. of yaj sacrifice + pūrtá, pp. of pṝ fill, bestowed ].

i-há, adv. here, i. 1, 2; 35, 1. 6; ii. 35, 13. 15; vi. 54, 9; vii. 49, 1. 2. 3. 4; x. 14, 5. 12; 15, 3. 5. 7. 11. 13 2 ; 90, 4; 129, 6.

íḷā, f. consecrated food, iv. 50, 8.

ī go, IV. Ā. í̄yate, x. 168, 2; approach, īmahe, vi. 54, 8.

antár- go between (acc.), i. 35, 9; 160, 1.

īj-āná, pf. pt. Ā. (of yaj), sacrificer, iv. 51, 7.

īḍ praise, II. Ā., í̄ḷe, i. 1, 1.

í̄ḍ-ya, gdv. praiseworthy, i. 1, 2 [īḍ praise ].

īm, enc. pcl. (acc. of prn. i), i. 85, 11; ii. 12, 5; 33, 13 2 ; 35, 1; vii. 103, 3 [180].

í̄ya-māna, pr. pt. Ā. going, x. 168, 3 [ī go ].

īr stir, set in motion, II. Ā. í̄rte.

ánu sáṃ prá- speed on together after, x. 168, 2.

úd- arise, x. 15, 1; v. 83, 3.

prá-, cs. īráya, utter forth, ii. 33. 8.

īś be master of, overpower, II. Ā. í̄ṣṭe, with gen., viii. 48, 14.

í̄ś-āna, pr. pt. Ā. ruling over, disposing of (gen.), vi. 54, 8; x. 90, 2; m. ruler, ii. 33, 9.

īṣ more, I. í̄ṣati, -te, from (ab.), v. 83, 2.

īḷ-itá, pp. implored, x. 15, 12 [īḍ praise ].

U, enc. pcl. now, also, i. 35, 6; 154, 4; ii. 33, 9; 35, 10. 15; iv. 51, 1. 2; v. 83, 10 2 ; vi. 54, 3; vii. 61, 6; 63, 1. 2; 86, 3. 8; viii. 48, 3; x. 14, 2; 15, 3; 127, 3 2 ; 129, 1 2 [180].

uk-thá, n. recitation, iv. 51, 7 [vac speak ].

1. ukṣ sprinkle, VI. ukṣáti, -te, x. 90, 7.

pra- besprinkle, x. 90, 7.

2. ukṣ grow.

ukṣ-itá, pp. grown strong, i. 85, 2 [2. ukṣ = vakṣ grow ].

ug-rá, a. mighty, ii. 33, 9; x. 34, 8; fierce, terrible, ii. 33, 11; viii. 29, 5.

uchánt, pr. pt. shining, iv. 51, 2 [1. vas shine ].

u-tá, pcl. and, i. 85, 5; 154, 4; ii. 12, 5; 35, 11; iii. 59, 1; iv. 50, 9; v. 83, 2 2 . 10; vi. 54, 6; vii. 63, 5; 86, 2; viii. 48, 1. 5. 8. 14; x. 34, 2; 90, 2; utá vā, vii. 49, 2 2 ; = and, viii. 48, 15 [180].

utó, pcl. and also, x. 168, 1 [utá + u].

út-tara, cpv. a. upper, i. 154, 1 [úd up ].

út-sa, m. spring, i. 85, 11; 154, 5 [ud wet ].

ud wet, VII. P. unátti, undánti [cp. Lat. und-a ‘wave’].

ví- moisten, drench, i. 85, 5; v. 83, 8.

ud-án, n. water, i. 85, 5 [Go. watō ‘water’].

udan-vánt, a. water-laden, v. 83, 7.

úd-ita, pp. risen, vii. 63, 5 [i go ].

udumbalá, a. brown (?), x. 14, 12.

ud-vát, f. upward path, i. 35, 3; height, v. 83, 7; x. 127, 2 [úd up + sf. vat].

upa-kṣiyánt, pr. pt. abiding by (acc.), iii. 59, 3 [kṣi dwell ].

upa-má, spv. a. highest, viii. 29, 9.

upa-yánt, pr. pt. approaching, ii. 33, 12 [i go ].

úpa-ra, cpv. a. later, x. 15, 2 [Av. upara ‘upper’, Gk. ὕπερο-ς ‘pestle’, Lat. s-uperu-s ‘upper’].

upári, adv. upward, x. 34, 9; above, x. 129, 5 [Gk. ὑπέρ, ὑπείρ = ὑπέρι, Lat. s-uper, Old High German ubir ‘over’].

úpa-śrita, pp. impressed on (lc.), vii. 86, 8 [śri resort ].

upa-sádya, gdv. to be approached, iii. 59, 5 [sád sit ].

upá-stha, m. lap, i. 35, 5. 6; vii. 63, 3; x. 15, 7.

upa-hatnú, a. slaying, ii. 33, 11 [ha-tnu from han slay ].

úpa-hūta, pp. invited, x. 15, 5 [hū call ].

upārá, m. offence, vii. 86, 6 [upa + ara from ṛ go: striking upon, offence ].

ubj force, VI. P., ubjáti.

nir- drive out, i. 85, 9.

ubhá, a. both, i. 35, 9; x. 14, 7 [cp. Lat. am-bo, Gk. ἄμ-ϕω ‘both’, Eng. bo-th ].

ubhá-ya, a. pl. both, ii. 12, 8.

ubhayá̄-dat, a. having teeth on both jaws, x. 90, 10.

ur-ú, a., f. urv-í̄, wide, i. 85, 6. 7; 154, 2; vii. 61, 2; 86, 1; x. 127, 2 [Av. vouru, Gk. εὐρύ-ς].

uru-kramá, a. (Bv.) wide-striding, i. 154, 5 [kráma, m. stride ].

uru-gāyá, a. (Bv.) wide-paced, i. 154, 1. 3. 6; viii. 29, 7 [-gāya gait from gā go ].

uru-cákṣas, a. (Bv.) far-seeing, vii. 63, 4 [cákṣas, n. sight ].

uru-vyácas, a. (Bv.) far-extending, i. 160, 2 [vyácas, n. extent ].

uru-śáṃsa, a. (Bv.) far-famed. viii. 48, 4 [śáṃsa, m. praise ].

uru-ṣyú, a. freedom-giving, viii. 48, 5 [from den. uru-ṣya put in wide space, rescue ].

urū-ṇasá, a. (Bv.) broad-nosed, x. 14, 12 [urú + nás nose ].

urviyá̄, adv. widely, ii. 35, 8 [inst. f. of urví̄ wide ].

urv-í̄, f. earth, x. 14, 16 [urú wide ].

uś-ánt, pr. pt. eager, vii. 103, 3; x. 15, 8 2 [vaś desire ].

Uṣ-ás, f. Dawn, ii. 12, 7; vii. 63, 3; 71, 1; x. 127, 3. 7; pl. iv. 51, 1-9; 11 [1. vas shine; cp. Gk. ἠώς (for āus-ōs ), Lat. aur-ōr-a ].

usrá-yāman, a. (Bv.) faring at daybreak, vii. 71, 4 [usrá matutinal, yá̄man, n. course ].

usr-fyā, f. cow, iv. 50, 5 [f. of usr-íya ruddy from us-rá red ].

Ū, enc. pcl., ii. 35, 3; iv. 51, 2 [metrically lengthened for u].

ū-tí, f. help, i. 35, 1; viii. 48, 15; x. 15, 4 [av favour ].

ūrú, m. du. thigh, x. 90, 11. 12.

ú̄rj, f. vigour, strength, vii. 49, 4; x. 15, 7.

ūrjáyant, den. pr. pt. gathering strength, ii. 35, 7.

ūrdh-vá, a. upright, ii. 35, 9; upward, x. 90, 4 [Gk. ὀρθό-ς for ὀρθ-ϝό-ς; Lat. arduu-s ‘lofty’].

ūrdhvám, acc. adv. upwards, i. 85, 10.

ú̄rmyā, f. night. x. 127, 6.

ūr-vá, n. receptacle, ii. 35, 3; fold, herd, iv. 50, 2 [1. vṛ cover ].

Ṛ go, V. P. ṛṇóti, int. álarti arise, viii. 48, 8 [Gk. ὀρ-νῡ-μι ‘stir up’].

abhí- penetrate to (acc.), i. 35, 9.

prá- send forth, III. íyarti, vii. 61, 2.

ṛ́k-van, m. pl. name of a group of ancestors, x. 14, 3 [ singing from arc sing ].

ṛ́k-vant, a. singing, jubilant, iv. 50, 5 [arc sing ].

ṛ́c, f. stanza, ii. 35, 12; collection of hymns, Ṛgveda, x. 90, 9 [arc sing, praise ].

ṛcás-e, dat. inf. with prá, to praise, vi. 61, 6 [arc praise ].

ṛ-ṇá, n. debt, x. 127, 7.

ṛṇā-ván, a. indebted, x. 34, 10 [ṛṇá debt ].

ṛtá, n. settled order, i. 1, 8; iv. 51, 8; truth, x. 34, 12 [pp. of ṛ go, settled ].

ṛtá-jāta-satya, a. punctually true, iv. 51, 7 [ true as produced by established order ].

ṛta-jñá, a. knowing right, x. 15, 1.

ṛta-yúj, a. yoked in due time, iv. 51, 5; vii. 71, 3.

ṛta-spṛ́ś, a. cherishing the rite, iv. 50, 3.

ṛtá̄-van, a. holy, ii. 35, 8; x. 168, 3; pious, vii. 61, 2; f. -varī observing order, i. 160, 1.

ṛtú, m. season, vii. 103, 9 [ fixed time: from ṛ go ].

ṛté, adv. prp. with ab., without, ii. 12, 9 [loc. of ṛtá].

ṛtv-íj, m. ministrant, i. 1, 1 [ṛtú + ij = yaj sacrificing in season ].

ṛdūdára, a. compassionate, ii. 33, 5; wholesome, viii. 48, 10.

ṛdh thrive, V. P. ṛdhnóti.

ánu- bring forward, op. 2. s. ṛdhyās, viii. 48, 2.

ṛ́dhak, adv. separately, vii. 61, 3.

Ṛbh-ú, m. pl. name of three divine artificers, iv. 51, 6 [ skilful, from rabh take in hand ].

ṛ́ṣ-i, m. seer, i. 1, 2; iv. 50, 1; x. 14, 15; 90, 7.

ṛṣ-ṭí, f. spear, i. 85, 4 [ṛṣ thrust ].

ṛṣ-vá, a. high, lofty, vii. 61, 3; 86, 1.

É-ka, nm. one, i. 35, 6; 154, 3. 4; vii. 103, 6 4 ; viii. 29, 1-8. 10; x. 14, 16; 129, 2. 3 [prn. root e].

eka-pará, a. too high by one, x. 34, 2.

ékeṣa, a. having one pole, x. 135, 3 [īṣā + pole of a car].

e-tá, dem. prn. stem, this: n. etád, iii. 59, 5; acc. m. etám this, x. 14, 9; him, x. 34, 4; inst. eténa, v. 83, 6; n. pl. etá̄, x. 15, 14; m. pl. eté these, vii. 103, 9 [prn. root e + tá this ].

éta-śa, m. steed of the Sun, vii. 63, 2 [éta speeding, from i go ].

etá̄-vant, a. such, x. 90, 3 [prn. etá this + sf. vant].

e-na, enc. prn. stem of 3. prs. he, she, it: acc. enam him, ii. 12, 5; iii. 59, 3; vii. 103, 2; x. 14, 11; 34, 4; 168, 2; acc. pl. enān them, vii. 103, 3; gen. du. enos of them two, vii. 103, 4 [prn. root e].

én-as, n., ii. 12, 10; vii. 71, 4; 86, 3.

ená̄, inst. by it, x. 14, 4; adv. thither, x. 14, 2 [inst. of prn. root a].

e-bhis, I. pl. with them, x. 34, 5 [prn. root a].

e-bhyas, D. pl. to them, x. 34, 8 [prn. root a].

e-vá, pcl. thus, just, i. 1, 3; ii. 12, 1; iv. 51, 9; vi. 54, 1. 2; x. 90, 2 [prn. root e; cp. 180].

e-vá̄ (= evá), adv. thus, just, ii. 33, 15; iv. 50, 8 [prn. root e].

e-ṣá, dem. prn.: N. s. m. eṣáḥ this, x. 168, 4; he, ii. 12, 15; vii. 63, 3; viii. 29, 6; f. eṣá̄ this, x. 14, 2; she, x. 34, 2 [from prn. root e + sa].

e-ṣām, G. pl. m. of them, i. 85, 3; vii. 103, 5 2 . 6; x. 34, 5. 8; 129, 5 [prn. root a].

Ók-as, n. abode, iv. 50, 8 [ wonted place: uc be wont ].

ój-as, n. might, i. 85, 4. 10; 160, 5 [uj = vaj; cp. Lat. augus-tu-s ‘mighty’, ‘august’].

ojā-yámāna, den. pr. pt. Ā. showing one’s strength, ii. 12, 11 [ójas].

ój-īyāṃs, cpv. a. mightier, ii. 33, 10.

óṣa-dhī, f. plant, v. 83, 1. 4. 5. 10; vii. 61, 3 [áv(a)s-a nurture (av further ) + dhī holding, from dhā hold ].

Ká, inter. prn. who? i. 35, 7; x. 129, 6; 135, 5 2 ; G. kásya, x. 129, 1; du. káu, x. 90, 11 2 ; with cid: I. kéna cid by any, x. 15, 6; pl. N. ké cid some, viii. 103, 8.

ka-kúbh, f. peak, i. 35, 8.

ka-tamá, inter. prn. which ( of many ) ? i. 35, 7; iv. 51, 6; with caná any, x. 168, 3 [Lat. quo-tumu-s ].

kati-dhá̄, adv. into how many parts? x. 90, 11 [ká-ti how many? Lat. quot ].

ka-dā, inter. adv. when? vii. 86, 2; with caná, ever, vi. 54, 9 [ká who? ].

kánikradat, int. pr. pt. bellowing, iv. 50, 5; v. 83, 1. 9 [krand roar ].

kán-īyāṃs, cpv. younger, vii. 86, 6 [cp. kan-yà̄, f. girl; Gk. καινό-ς ‘new’ for κανi̮ό-ς].

kam, pcl., i. 154, 1 [ gladly: cp. p. 225, 2].

kár-tave, dat. inf. of kṛ do, i. 85, 9.

kalmalīk-ín, a. radiant, ii. 33, 8.

kav-í, m. sage, v. 11, 3; vii. 86, 3; x. 129, 4 [Av. kavi ‘king’].

kaví-kratu, a. (Bv.) having the intelligence of a sage, i. 1, 5; v. 11, 4.

kaví-tara, cpv. a. wiser, vii. 86, 7.

kavi-śastá, pp. (Tp.) recited by the sages, x. 14, 4.

kav-yá, a. wise, x. 15, 9; m. pl. name of a group of Fathers, x. 14, 3.

kaśá̄, f. whip, v. 83, 3.

ká̄m-a, m. desire, i. 85, 11; x. 34, 6; 129, 4 [kam desire ].

kāś appear, int. cākaśīti.

abhí- look upon, x. 135, 2.

kitavá, m. gambler, x. 34, 3. 6. 7. 10. 11. 13.

kí-m, inter. prn. what? vii. 86, 2. 4; viii. 48, 3 2 ; x. 90, 11; 129, 1 2 ; with caná anything, x. 129, 2 [Lat. qui-s, qui-d ].

kíla, adv. emphasizing preceding word, indeed, ii. 12, 15 [180].

kīr-í, m. singer, ii. 12, 6 [2. kṛ commemorate ].

ku-cará, a. wandering at will, i. 154, 2 [ku, inter. prn. root where? = anywhere + cara from car fare ].

ku-tás, inter. adv. whence? x. 129, 6 2 ; 168, 3 [prn. root where? ].

ku-mārá, m, boy, x. 135. 3. 4. 5; = son, ii. 33, 12.

kumārá-deṣṇa, a. (Bv.) presenting gifts like boys, x. 34, 7 [deṣṇá, n. gift from dā give ].

kul-yá̄, f. stream, v. 83, 8.

kuv-íd, inter. pcl. whether? ii. 35, 1. 2; iv. 51, 4 [ku + íd: cp. p. 226].

kú-ha, inter. adv. where? ii. 12, 5; x. 129, 1 [ku + sf. ha = dhā: cp. p. 212].

kṛ make, V. kṛṇóti, kṛṇuté, iv. 50, 9; v. 83, 3; = hold, x. 34, 12; = raise (voice), 8; pr. sb. 3. s. kṛṇávat, viii. 48, 3; 3. pl. kṛṇávan, iv. 51, 1; vii. 63, 4; 2. pl. Ā. kṛṇúdhvam, x. 34, 14; ipv. kṛṇuhí, x. 135, 3; pf. cakṛmá, vii. 86, 5; x. 15, 4; cakrúr, vii. 63, 5; Ā. cakré, x. 90, 8; cakrá̄te, viii. 29, 9; cakriré, i. 85, 1. 2. 7. 10; ft. kariṣyási, i. 1, 6; root ao. ákar, ii. 12, 4; iii. 59. 9; v. 83, 10; ákran, x. 14, 9; 3. pl. Ā. ákrata, vii. 103, 8; x. 34, 5; sb. kárati, ii. 35, 1; kárāma, x. 15, 6; ao. ps. ákāri, vii. 61, 7 [cp. Gk. κραίνω ‘accomplish’. Lat. creò ‘create’].

úpa á̄- drive up for: rt. ao. ákaram, x. 127, 8.

āvís- make manifest, v. 83, 3.

nís- turn out: rt. ao. askṛta, x. 127, 3.

kṛṇv-ánt, pr. pt. making = offering, vii. 103, 8; x. 168, 1 [kṛ make ].

kṛ-tá, pp. made, i. 85, 6; ii. 12, 4; vii. 61, 6 (= offered ); x. 90, 12. 15; 135, 6; n. lucky throw, x. 34, 6 [Av. kereta, Old Persian karta ‘made’].

kṛ́tā, f. breast (?), ii. 35, 5.

kṛ-tví̄, gd. having made, x. 15, 12.

kṛś-á, a. poor, ii. 12, 6 [kṛś grow lean ].

Kṛ́śana, n. pearl, i. 35, 4.

kṛṣ draw, I. P. kárṣati, v. 83, 7; VI. P. kṛṣá-ti till, x. 34, 13.

kṛṣ-í, f. field, x. 34, 13 [kṛṣ till ].

kṛṣ-ṭí, f. pl. people, i. 160, 5; iii. 59, 1 [ tillage, settlement: kṛṣ till ].

kṛṣ-ṇá, a. black, i. 35, 2. 4. 9; x. 127, 7; f. í̄, vii. 71, 1.

kḷp be fit, I. kálpati, cs. kalpáyati, -te arrange, x. 15, 14.

vi- dispose, x. 90, 11. 14.

ket-ú, m. banner, v. 11, 2. 3; vii. 63, 2 [cit appear: Go. haidu-s ‘manner’].

kévaṭa, in. pit, vi. 54, 7.

kóśa, m. bucket, v. 83, 8; well (of a car), vi. 54, 3.

kr-á-tu, m. power, ii. 12, 1; wisdom, vii. 61, 2 [kṛ do ].

krand bellow. I. P. krándati.

abhí- bellow towards, v. 83, 7.

kránd-as, n. battle array, ii. 12, 8 [ battle cry: krand shout ].

kram stride, I. P. krá̄mati, Ā. krámate.

*ví- stride out, pf. cakrame, viii. 29, 7.

abhí ví- spread asunder, develop into: ipf. ákràmat, x. 90, 4.

krīḍ play, I. krīḷa, x. 34, 8.

krudh be angry, IV. P. krúdhyati; red. ao. inj. cukrudhāma, ii. 33, 4.

kvà, inter. adv. where? i. 35, 7; ii. 33, 7; iv. 51, 6; x. 168, 3; with svid who knows where, x. 34, 10 [pronounced kúa].

kṣa-trá, n. dominion, i. 160, 5 [kṣa = kṣi rule ].

kṣam forbear, I. Ā. kṣámate.

abhí- be merciful to (acc.), ii. 33, 1. 7.

kṣi dwell, II. P. kṣéti, iv. 50, 8.

ádhi- dwell in (lc.), i. 154, 2.

kṣiy-ánt, pr. pt. dwelling, ii. 12, 11 [kṣí dwell ].

kṣé-ma, m. possession, viii. 86, 8. [kṣi: kṣáyati possess ].

Khan-í-trima, a. produced by digging, vii. 49, 2 [khan dig ].

khálu, adv. indeed, x. 34, 14 [p. 227].

khā-tá, pp. dug, iv. 50, 3 [khan dig ].

khyā see: no present; a ao. ákhyat.

abhí- perceive, vii. 86, 2.

ví- survey, i. 35, 5. 7. 8; x. 127, 1.

Gaṇ-á, m. throng, iv. 50, 5; x. 34, 12.

gabh-īrá, a. profound, x. 129, 1 [gabh = gāh plunge ].

gabhīrá-vepas, a. (Bv.) of deep inspiration, i. 35, 7.

gam go, I. gáchati, -te to (acc.), i. 1, 4; x. 14, 13; root ao. 3. pl. ágman, vii. 71, 6; 1. pl. áganma, viii. 48, 3. 11 [Gk. βαίνω, Lat. venio, Eng. come ].

á̄- come, i. 1, 5; 85, 11; root ao. ipv. gahí, vi. 54, 7; x. 14, 5; 2. pl. gatá, x. 15, 4; 3. gámantu, x. 15, 5 2 . 11; go to (acc.), x. 168, 2.

sám- go with (inst.), a ao. op., vi. 54, 2; unite with (inst.), x. 14, 8.

gám-a-dhyai, dat. ínf. (of gam) to go, i. 154, 6.

garta-sád, a. (Tp.) sitting on a car-seat, ii. 33, 11.

gárbh-a, m. germ, ii. 33, 13; v. 83, 1. 7; x. 168, 4 [gṛbh receive ].

gáv-y-ūti, f. pasturage, x. 14, 2 [Bv. having nurture for cows: go].

gáh-ana, a. unfathomable, x. 129, 1 [gāh plunge ].

gā go, III. P. jígāti.

abhí- approach, vii. 71, 4.

á̄- come: rt. ao. agāt, i. 35, 8.

pári- go by (acc.): root ao. inj. gāt, ii. 33, 14.

prá- go forward, ipv. jigāta, i. 85, 6; enter, root ao., viii. 48, 2.

gā-tú, m. path, way, iv. 51, 1; vii. 63, 5; x. 14, 2 [gā go ].

gá̄tre-gātre, lc. itv. cd., in every limb, viii. 48, 2 [gā go ].

gāya-trí̄, f. a metre, x. 14, 16 [ song: gā sing ].

gír, f. song, ii. 35, 1; v. 11, 5; 83, 1; vii. 71, 6; x. 135, 7 [gṛ sing ].

giri-kṣí-t, a. mountain-dwelling, i. 154, 3 [kṣi dwell ].

giri-ṣṭhā, a. mountain-haunting, i. 154, 2 [sthā stand ].

gup guard: pf. jugupur, vii. 103, 9 [secondary root from the den. go-pā-ya].

gúhā, adv. in hiding, v. 11, 6; with kṛ, cause to disappear, ii. 12, 4 [from guhá̄, inst. of gúh concealment, w. adverbial shift of accent].

gúh-ya, gdv. to be hidden, vii. 103, 8 [guh hide ].

gú̄h-ant, pr. pt. hiding, iv. 51, 9 [guh hide ].

gūḷhá, pp. hidden, x. 129, 3 [guh hide ].

1. gṛ sing, IX. gṛṇá̄ti, gṛṇīté, ii. 33, 8. 12.

abhí- greet favourably, x. 15, 6.

2. gṛ waken: red. ao. 2. du. ipv. jigṛtam, iv. 50, 11.

gṛṇ-ánt, pr. pt. singing; m. singer, iii. 59, 5 [gṛ sing ].

gṛṇ-āná, pr. pt. Ā. singing, praising, i. 35, 10; 160, 5 [gṛ sing ].

gṛ́t-sa, a. experienced, vii. 86, 7.

gṛdh be greedy, IV. P. gṛ́dhyati; a ao. ágṛdhat, x. 34, 4.

gṛbh-āyá, den. P. grasp.

úd- hold up, cease, v. 83, 10.

gṛh-á, m. house, pl., vi. 54, 2 [grah receive, contain ].

gṛhé-gṛhe, lc. itv. cd., in every house, v. 11, 4.

gó, f. cow, pl. N. gá̄vas, i. 154, 6; ii. 12, 7; viii. 48, 5 (= straps ); x 34, 13; 90. 10; A. gá̄s, ii. 12, 3; vi. 54, 5. 6; 127, 8; G. gávām, iv. 51, 8; vii. 103, 2. 10 [Av. N. gau-s, Gk. βον̂-ς, Lat. bo-s ( bov -), OI. bō, Eng. cow ].

Gó-tama, m. name of a seer, i. 85, 11 [spv. of go cow ].

go-pá̄, m. Tp. ( cow-protector ), guardian, i. 1, 8; v. 11, 1; viii. 48, 9 [gó cow + pā protect ].

gó-magha, a. (Bv.) rich in cows, vii. 71, 1 [ having abundance of cows ].

gó-mātṛ, a. (Bv.) having a cow for a mother, i. 85, 3.

gó-māyu, a. (Bv.) lowing like a cow, vii. 103, 6. 10 [māyú, m. lowing ].

grabh seize, IX. gṛbhṇá̄ti, gṛbhṇīté, vii. 103, 4.

ánu- greet, vii. 103, 4.

grá̄ma, m. village, x. 127, 5; pl. = clans, ii. 12, 7.

grām-yá, a. belonging to the village, x. 90, 8 [grá̄ma].

grīṣmá, m. summer, x. 90, 6.

Ghar-má, m. hot milk offering, vii. 103, 9 [Av. gar e ma, Lat. formu-s, Gk. θερμό-ς ‘warm’, Eng. warm ].

gharma-sád, a. (Tp.) sitting at the heating vessel, x 15, 9. 10 [sad sit ].

gharm-ín, a. heated, vii. 103, 8.

ghas eat: root ao. 3. pl. ákṣan, x. 15, 12 [= á-gh(a)s-an].

ghā, enc. emphasizing pcl., iv. 51, 7 [180].

ghṛ́-ṇi, f. heat, ii. 33, 6 [ghṛ = hṛ be hot ].

ghṛ-tá, (pp.) n. clarified butter, ghee, i. 85, 3; ii. 33, 11. 14; v. 11, 3; 83, 8 [ghṛ be hot ].

ghṛtá-nirṇij, a. (Bv.) having a garment of ghee, ii. 35, 4 [nir-níj, f. splendour from nís out + nij wash ].

ghṛtá-pratīka, a. (Bv.) butter-faced, v. 11, 1 [prátīka, n. front from pratyáño turned towards ].

ghṛtá-vant, a. accompanied with ghee, iii. 59, 1; abounding in ghee, x. 14, 14.

ghṛ́ṣ-vi, a. impetuous, i. 85, 1 [ghṛṣ = hṛṣ be excited ].

gho-rá, a. terrible; n. magic power, v. 34, 14.

ghóṣ-a, m. sound, x. 168, 1. 4 [ghuṣ make a noise ].

Ca, enc. pcl. and, i. 160, 2. 3; ii. 33, 13 2 ; 35, 6. 8; iv. 50, 10; v. 11, 5; vii. 86, 1; x. 14, 7. 9. 14; 34, 11; 90, 2. 3. 7. 8. 10; if, viii. 48, 2; x. 34, 5; ca-ca, i. 35, 11; iv. 51, 11; x. 14, 3. 11; 15, 3. 13 2 ; 90, 13 [Av. ca, Lat. que ‘and’; cp. 180].

cakr-á, n. wheel, vi. 54, 3; vii. 63, 2 [Gk. κύκλο-ς, Anglo-Saxon hweowol ].

cakṣ, see II. cáṣṭe [reduplicated form of kas = kāś shine: = ca-k(a)s].

abhí- regard, iii. 59, 1; vii. 61, 1.

prá-, cs. cakṣáya illumine, viii. 48, 6.

ví- reveal, x. 34, 13.

cákṣ-u, n. eye, x. 90, 13 [cakṣ see ].

cákṣ-us, n. eye, vii. 61, 1; 63, 1 [cakṣ see ].

cat hide (intr.), I. P. cátati; cs. cātáya drive away, ii. 33, 2.

catur-akṣá, a. (Bv.) four-eyed, x. 14, 10. 11 [akṣá = ákṣi eye ].

catuṣ-pá̄d, a. (Bv.) four-footed, iv. 51, 5 [catúr four, Lat. quattuor, Go. fidwōr ].

catvāriṃśá, ord., f. í̄, fortieth, ii. 12, 11.

ca-ná, pcl. and not, vii. 86, 6.

candrá-mās, m. moon, x. 90, 13 [K. cd. bright (candrá) moon. (má̄s)].

car fare, I. cárati, -te, iv. 51, 6. 9; viii. 29, 8; x. 14, 12; 168, 4.

abhí- bewitch, x. 34, 14.

á̄- approach, iv. 51, 8.

prá- go forward, enter, viii. 48, 6.

abhí sám- come together, viii. 48, 1.

cará-tha, n. motion, activity, iv. 51, 5 [car fare ].

cár-ant, pr. pt. wandering, x. 34, 10; faring, x. 135, 2.

car-í-tra, n. leg, viii. 48, 5 [car move ].

cár-man, n. skin, hide, i. 85, 5; vii. 63, 1.

carṣaṇī-dhṛ́-t, a. (Tp.) supporting the folk, iii. 59, 6 [carṣaṇí, a. active, f. folk + dhṛ-t supporting ].

cá̄-ru, a. dear, ii. 35, 11 [can gladden; Lat. cā-ru-s ‘dear’].

ci-kit-vá̄ṃs, red. pf. wise, vii. 86, 3 [cit think ].

cit perceive, I. cétati, -te; pf. cikéta, i. 35, 7; sb. cíketat, i. 35, 6; cs. citáya stimulate, iv. 51, 3; cetáya cause to think, vii. 86, 7.

á̄- observe: pf. ciketa, vii. 61, 1.

cit-rá, a. brilliant, iv. 51, 2; n. marvel, vii. 61, 5.

citrá-bhānu, a. (Bv.) of brilliant splendour, i. 35, 4; 85, 11.

citrá-śravas, a. (Bv.) having brilliant fame; spv. -tama of most brilliant fame, i. 1, 5; bringing most brilliant fame, iii. 59, 6.

cid, enc. pcl. just, even, i. 85, 4. 10; ii. 12, 8. 13. 15; 33, 12; vii. 86, 1. 3. 8; x. 34, 8 2 ; 127, 5 [Lat. quid ].

cekit-āna, int. pr. pt. famous, ii. 33, 15 [cit perceive ].

cod-i-tṛ́, m. furtherer, ii. 12, 6 [cud impel ].

cyáv-ana, a. unstable, ii. 12, 4 [cyu move ].

cyáv-āna, m. name of a seer, vii. 71, 5 [pr. pt. of cyu move ].

cyu waver, fall, I. cyávate.

prá-, cs. cyāváya overthrow, i. 85, 4.

Chand seem, II. P. chántti; pf. cachánda, vii. 63, 3; seem good, please, 3. s. s ao. áchān, x. 34, 1.

chánd-as, n. metre, x. 14, 16; 90, 9.

chāyá̄, f. shade, ii. 33, 6 [Gk. σκιá̄].

Jágat, n. world, i. 35, 1 [pr. pt. of gā go ].

jágm-i, n. nimble, speeding, i. 85, 8 [from red. stem jag(a)m of gam go ].

jajñ-āná, pf. pt. Ā. having been born, x. 14, 2 [jan generate ].

jan generate, create, I. jánati; pf. jajá̄na, i. 160, 4; ii. 12, 3. 7; 35, 2; jajñiré were born, x. 90, 9 2 . 10; iṣ ao. ájaniṣṭa has been born, iii. 59, 4; v. 11, 1; red. ao. ájījanas hast caused to grow, v. 83, 10; cs. janáya generate, ii. 35, 13; x. 135, 5 [Old Lat. gen-ō ‘generate’; Gk. ao. ἐ-γεν-ό-μην].

prá- be prolific, IV. Ā. jāya, ii. 33, 1; 35, 8.

ján-a, m. mankind, ii. 35, 15; iii. 59, 9; iv. 51, 1; v. 11, 1; pl. men, people, i. 35, 5; ii. 12, 1-14; iii. 59, 1. 8; iv. 51, 11; vii. 49, 3; 61, 5; 63, 2. 4; x. 14, 1 [jan generate; cp. Lat. gen-us, Gk. γέν-ος, Eng. kin ].

janáy-ant, cs. pr. pt. generating, i. 85, 2.

ján-i, f. woman, i. 85, 1.

ján-i-man, n. birth, ii. 35, 6.

jan-ús, n. generation, vii. 86, 1 [jan generate ].

jáy-ant, pr. pt. conquering; m. victor, x. 34, 7 [ji conquer ].

jár-ant, pr. pt. aging, old, x. 34, 3 [jṝ waste away; Gk. γέρ-οντ- ‘old man’].

jar-ás, m. old age, vii. 71, 5 [jṝ waste away; cp. Gk. γη̂ρας ‘old age’].

jar-i-tṛ́, m. singer, ii. 33, 11 [jṛ sing ].

jálāṣa, a. cooling, ii. 33, 7.

jálāṣa-bheṣaja, a. (Bv.) having cooling remedies, viii. 29, 5 [bheṣajá, n. remedy ].

jálp-i, f. idle talk, chatter, viii. 48, 14 [jalp chatter ].

jas be exhausted, I. jása; pf. ipv. jajastám weaken, iv. 50, 11.

jā be born, IV. Ā. já̄yate is born, v. 11, 3; 83, 4; x. 90, 5; já̄yase art born, v. 11, 6; ipf. ájāyata was born, x. 90, 9. 12. 13 2 ; 129, 3; 135, 6; ájāyanta, x. 90, 10.

já̄gṛ-vi, a. watchful, v. 11, 1; stimulating, x. 34, 1 [from red. stem of 2. gṛ wake ].

jā-tá, pp. born, ii. 12, 1; x. 90, 5. 7; 168, 3; = finite vb., were born, x. 90, 10. 13; n. what is born, ii. 33, 3 [jā be born ].

jātá-vedas, a. (Bv.) having a knowledge of beings, x. 15, 12. 13 [véd-as, n. knowledge from vid know ].

já̄n-u, n. knee, x. 15, 6 [Gk. γόν-υ, Lat. genu, Go. kniu, Eng. knee ].

já̄ya-māna, pr. pt. being born, iv. 50, 4 [jā be born ].

jā-yá̄, f. wife, x. 34, 2. 4. 10. 11. 13 [jā be born ].

jār-íṇ-ī, f. courtesan, x. 34, 5 [ having paramours: jārá].

Jāhuṣ-á, m. name of a protégé of the Aśvins, vii. 71, 5.

ji conquer, I. jáyati; ft. jeṣyá̄mi, x. 34, 6; ps. jīyate, iii. 59, 2 [when accented this form appears in the RV. as jí̄yate, i. e. it is then pr. Ā. of jyā overpower ].

ví- conquer, ii. 12, 9.

sám- win, iv. 50, 9.

jigī-vá̄ṃs, red. pf. pt. having conquered, ii. 12, 4; x. 127, 8 [ji conquer ].

jihmá, a. transverse = athwart, i. 85, 11; prone, ii. 35, 9.

jīrá-dānu, a. (Bv.) having quickening gifts, v. 83, 1.

jīv-á, n. living world, iv. 51, 5 [Lat. vīv-o-s ].

jīvás-e, dat. inf. to live, viii. 48, 4; with prá to live on, x. 14, 14.

juṣ enjoy, VI. juṣá, vii. 71, 6; 86, 2; x. 15, 4. 13; pf. sb. jújuṣan, vii. 61, 6; iṣ ao. sb. jóṣiṣat, ii. 35, 1 [cp. Gk. γεύω, Lat. gus-tus, Go. kiusan, Eng. choose ].

juṣ-āṇá, pr. pt. Ā. enjoying, viii. 48, 2.

júṣ-ṭa, pp. (with shifted accent) acceptable, iii. 59, 5 [juṣ enjoy ].

jū, IX. P. juná̄ti speed, vii. 86, 7.

jṛ, I. Ā. jára awake, be active, iv. 51, 8.

jéha-māna, pr. pt. Ā. gasping, x. 15, 9 [jeh gasp ].

jñā know, IX. jāná̄ti, x. 34, 4 [cp. Gk. ἔγνω-ν, Lat. co-gno-sco, Eng. know ].

ví-, ps. jñāyáte be distinguished, iv. 51, 6.

jmá̄, f. earth, gen. jmás, iv. 50, 1.

jyá̄-yāṃs, cpv. more, x. 90, 3; elder, vii. 86, 6 [jyā overpower; Gk. βίᾱ ‘force’].

jyé-ṣṭha, spv. highest, ii. 35, 9; chief, vii. 86, 4 [spv. of jyā].

jyót-is, n. light, iv. 50, 4; 51, 1; viii. 48, 3; x. 127, 2 [jyut = dyut shine ].

Tá, dem. prn., that; he, she, it; n. tád that, i. 1, 6; 35, 6; 154, 2. 5. 6; ii. 35, 11. 15; iv. 51, 10. 11; vii. 86, 2. 3. 4; 103, 5. 7; x. 34, 12. 13; 90, 12; 129, 2. 3. 4; 135, 5; m. A. tám him, ii. 33, 13; 35, 3. 4; iv. 50, 1. 9; vi. 54, 4; that, x. 90, 7; 135, 4; I. téna with it, viii. 29, 4. 10; with him, x. 90, 7; I. f. táyā with that, i. 85, 11; D. tásmai to him, iii. 59, 5; iv. 50, 8 2 ; x. 34, 12; for him, x. 135, 2; to that, viii. 48, 12. 13 (= as such ); x. 168, 4; for that, viii. 48, 10; ab. tásmād from him, x. 90, 5. 8. 9 3 . 10 3 ; than that, x. 129, 2; G. tásya of him, ii. 35, 9; iii. 59, 4; of that, viii. 48, 8; x. 15, 7; du. m. táu these two, x. 14, 12; f. té these two, i. 160, 1. 5; D. tá̄bhyām to those two, x. 14, 11; pl. N. m. té they, i. 85, 2. 7. 10; viii. 48, 5; x. 15, 3. 5 3 . 12. 13; those, x. 15, 1; 90, 16; = as such, x. 15, 4. 7; f. tá̄s they, iv. 51, 8; those, iv. 51, 7 2 . 9; vii. 49, 1. 2. 3. 4; n. tá̄ those, i. 154, 6; ii. 33, 13; x. 14, 16; tá̄ni those, i. 85, 12; x. 90, 16; A. tá̄n those = that, x. 90, 8; I. tébhis with them, i. 35, 11; x. 15, 8. 14; f. tá̄bhis with them, x. 168, 2; G. téṣām of them, x. 14, 6; L. tá̄su in them, ii. 33, 13.

taṃs shake.

abhí- attack: pf. tatasré, iv. 50, 2.

tatan-vá̄ṃs, pf. pt. having spread, vii. 61, 1 [tan stretch ].

tá-tas, adv. thence, x. 90, 4; so, x. 135, 6 [prn. root tá].

tá-tra, adv. there, x. 34, 13 [prn. root tá].

tá-thā, adv. thus, x. 90, 14 [prn. root tá].

ta-dá̄nīm, adv. then, x. 129, 1 [prn. root tá].

tan extend = perform, VIII. tanóti; ipf. átanvata, x. 90, 6 [cp. Gk. τάνυμαι ‘stretch’, Lat. tendo ‘stretch’].

abhí- extend over: red. pf. sb., i. 160, 5.

áva- slacken (Ā.), ii. 33, 14.

á̄- extend to (acc.), i. 35, 7.

ánu á̄- extend over, viii. 48, 13.

tán-aya, n. descendant, ii. 33, 14 [tan extend ].

tan-ú̄, f. body, i. 85, 3; ii. 35, 13; iv. 51, 9; viii. 48, 9; x. 14, 8; 15, 14; 34, 6; self, vii. 86, 2. 5 (pl.) [tan stretch: cp. Lat. ten-u-i-s, Gk. ταν-ύ-, Eng. thin ].

tanv-āná, pr. pt. Ā. performing, x. 90, 15 [tan extend ].

tap burn, I. tápa; pf. tatá̄pa = it pains, x. 34, 11; ps. tapyáte, is distressed, x. 34, 10 [cp. Lat. tep-ēre ‘be warm’].

táp-ana, a. burning, x. 34, 7 [tap burn ].

táp-as, n. heat, x. 129, 3 [Lat. tep-or ].

tap-tá, pp. heated, vii. 103, 9 [tap burn ].

tám-as, n. darkness, iv. 50, 4; 51, 1. 2. 3; vii. 63, 1; 71, 5; 127, 2. 3. 7; 129, 3 2 [tam faint ].

támiṣ-īc-ī, f. power of darkness, viii. 48, 11 [tamis = támas + īc = i-añc].

tar-áṇi, a. speeding onward, vii. 63, 4 [tṝ cross ].

tá-rhi, adv. then, x. 129, 2 [prn. root tá].

táva, gen. (of. tvám) of thee, i. 1, 6; vi. 54, 9; viii. 48, 8 [Av. tava, Lith. tavè ].

tav-ás, a. mighty, ii. 33, 3; v. 83, 1 [tu be strong ].

tavás-tama, spv. mightiest, ii. 33, 3.

táv-iṣ-ī, f. might, i. 35, 4 [távis = távas, n. might ].

táskara, m. thief, viii. 29, 6.

tasthi-vá̄ṃs, pf. pt. act. having stood, ii. 35, 14 [sthā stand ].

tāpay-iṣṇú, a. causing to burn, x. 34, 7 [from cs. of tap burn ].

tāy-ú, m. thief, vii. 86, 5 [= stāyú; cp. ste-ná thief ].

tig-má, a. sharp, viii. 29, 5 [tij be sharp ].

tiraśc-í̄na, a. across, x. 129, 5 [tirás].

tir-ás, prp. across, vii. 61, 7 [tṝ cross; Av. tarō; cp. Lat. trans = ‘crossing’, N. pr. pt.].

tisŕ, nm. f. of trí three, N. tisrás, i. 35, 6; ii. 35, 5.

tú, pcl. indeed, vii. 86, 1 [prn. root tu in tu-ám].

tuch-yá, n. void, x. 129, 3.

túbhya, D. (of tvám) to thee, v. 11, 5 [cp. Lat. tibi ].

túbhyam, D. (of tvám) for thee, iv. 50, 3; v. 11, 5; (angry) with thee, vii. 86, 3; = by thee, vii. 86, 8.

tur-á, a. cager, vii. 86, 4 [tur = tvar speed ].

tuvi-jātá, pp. high-born, iv. 50, 4 [tuvi from tu be strong ].

túviṣ-mant, a. mighty, ii. 12, 12 [tuv-is, n. might from tu be strong ].

tṛp be pleased, IV. P. tṛpṇoti; cs. tarpáya satisfy, i. 85, 11 [cp. Gk. τέρπω].

tṛṣ thirst, IV. tṛṣya; pf. tātṛṣúr, x. 15, 9 [cp. Gk. τέρσομαι ‘become dry’, Lat. torreo ‘scorch’, Eng. thirst ].

tṛṣ-ṇáj, a. thirsty, i. 85, 11.

tṛṣyá̄-vant, a. thirsty, vii. 103, 3 [tṛṣyā thirst ].

tṝ cross, VI. tirá.

prá- extend, increase (family), vii. 61, 4; prolong (life), 103, 10; iṣ ao., viii. 48, 4. 7. 11.

ví- run counter to (acc.), x. 34, 6.

te, enc. dat. (of tvám), to thee, ii. 33, 1; iii. 59, 2; viii. 48, 13; x. 127, 8; for thee, iv. 50, 3; gen. of thee, i. 35, 11; ii. 12, 15; 33, 7. 11; v. 11, 3; vi. 54, 9; viii. 48, 6. 7. 9; x. 14, 5. 11; 127, 4 [Av. tōi, Gk. τοὶ].

tok-á, m. offspring, children, ii. 33, 14; vii. 63, 6.

tmán, self, vii. 63, 6 [cp. ātmán].

tyá, dem. prn., n. tyád that, iv. 51, 1; pl. tyá̄ those, viii. 48, 11.

tras tremble, I. trasa [Gk. τρέω, Lat. terreo ‘frighten’].

nís- speed away, viii. 48, 11.

trá̄ protect, IV. Ā. trá̄yate; s ao. op., vii. 71, 2.

trá̄-tṛ, a. protecting, viii. 48, 14 [trā protect ].

trí, nm. three, i. 35, 8; 154, 2. 3. 4; viii. 29, 7 [Gk. τρι-, Lat. tri -, OI. trī, Eng. three ].

trí-kadruka, m. pl. three Soma vats, x. 14, 16 [kadrú̄, f. Soma vessel ].

tri-dhá̄tu, a. (Bv.) having three parts, threefold, i. 85, 12; 154, 4.

tri-pañcāśá, a. consisting of three fifties, x. 34, 8.

tri-pá̄d, a. (Bv.) consisting of three-fourths, x. 90, 4; m. three-fourths, x. 90, 3.

tri-vandhurá, a. three-seated, vii. 71, 4.

tri-ṣadhasthá, a. (Bv.) occupying three seats, iv. 50, 1; n. threefold abode, v. 11, 2 [sadhá-stha, n. gathering-place ].

tri-ṣṭúbh, f. name of a metre, x. 14, 16.

trí-s, adv. thrice, x. 90, 11 [Gk. τρίς].

tre-dhá̄, adv. in three ways, i. 154, 1.

tvákṣ-īyāṃs, cpv. most vigorous, ii. 33, 6.

tvád, ab. (of tvám) than thee, ii. 33, 10.

tvám, prs. prn. thou, i. 1, 6; 35, 8; ii. 33, 12; viii. 48, 9. 13. 15 3 ; x. 15, 12 2 . 13.

Tváṣ-ṭṛ, m. name of the artificer god, i. 85, 9; cp. viii. 29, 3 [tvakṣ = takṣ fashion ].

tvā, enc. A. (of tvám) thee, i. 1, 7; ii. 33, 4; v. 11, 3; vii. 86, 4; x. 14, 4.

tvá̄-datta, pp. (Tp. cd.) given by thee, ii. 33, 2.

tvá̄m, prs. prn. A. (of tvám) thee, v. 11, 5. 6 2 .

tveṣ-á, a. terrible, ii. 33, 8. 14 [tviṣ be agitated ].

tveṣá-saṃdṛś, a. (Bv.) of terrible aspect, i. 85, 8.

tvóta, pp. (Tp.) aided by thee, iii. 59, 2 [tvā inst. + ūta, pp. of av favour ].

Dákṣ-a, m. will, vii. 86, 6; might, viii. 48, 8 [dakṣ be able ].

dákṣ-iṇa, a. right, vi. 54, 10 [cp. Gk. δεξιό -ς, Lat. dexter ].

dakṣiṇa-tás, adv. to the south, x. 15, 6.

dád-at, pr. pt. giving, vii. 103, 10 [dā give ].

dádhat, pr. pt. bestowing, i. 35, 8; with á̄ (following), x. 34, 6 [dhā put ].

dádh-āna, pr. pt. Ā. committing, assuming, i. 35, 4; ii. 12, 10; = going, x. 15, 10 [dhā put ].

dám-a, m. house, i. 1, 8; ii. 35, 7 [Gk. δόμο-ς, Lat. domu-s ].

dáśá, nm. ten, x. 34, 12 [Gk. δέκα, Lat. decem, Eng. ten ].

daśāṅgulá, length of ten fingers, x. 90, 1 [dáśa + aṅgúli finger ].

Dáśa-gv-a, m. an ancient priest, iv. 51, 4 [ having ten cows: gu = go].

dás-yu, m. non-Aryan, ii. 12, 10 [das lay waste ].

dah burn, I. dáha.

nís- burn up, x. 34, 9.

1. dā give, III. dadá̄ti, ii. 35, 10; x. 14, 9; ao. ádāt, vii. 103, 10 3 ; ipv. 3. du. dātām, x. 14, 12; s ao. op. diṣīya, ii. 33, 5 [cp. Gk. δίδωμι, Lat. dă-re ].

ánu- forgive, ii. 12, 10.

á̄- take, ii. 12, 4.

párā- abandon: ao. inj., viii. 48, 8.

pári- give over to: ipv. dehi, x. 14, 11.

prá- present: root ao. ádās, x. 15, 12.

2. dā divide, IV. dáya wield, ii. 33, 10.

dādṛhāṇá, pf. pt. Ā. steadfast, i. 85, 10 [dṛh make firm ].

dā-tṛ́, m. giver, ii. 33, 12.

Dá̄nu, m. son of Dānu, a demon, ii. 12, 11.

dá̄-man, n. rope, viii. 86, 5 [3. dā bind ].

dāś-vá̄ṃs, pf. pt. worshipping, m. worshipper, i. 1, 6; 85, 12; vii. 71, 2; x. 15, 7 [dāś honour ].

dá̄s-a, a. non-Aryan, ii. 12, 4 [dās be hostile ].

dās-á, m. slave, vii. 86, 7.

didṛ́k-ṣu, adv. with a desire to see = find out, vii. 86, 3 [from ds. of drś see ].

div, m. sky, A. dívam, iii. 59, 7; G. divás, iv. 51, 1. 10. 11; v. 83, 6; vii. 61, 3; 63, 4; x. 15, 14; 127, 8; L. diví, i. 85, 2; v. 11, 3; viii. 29, 9; x. 90, 3 [Gk. Δίϝα, Διϝός, Διϝί].

div play, IV. dí̄vya, x. 34, 13.

dív-à, adv. by day, vii. 71, 1. 2 [w. shift of accent for div-á̄].

divi-spṛ́ś, a. touching the sky, v. 11, 1; x. 168, 1 [diví L. of div + spṛś touch ].

divé-dive, lc. itv. cd. every day, i. 1, 3. 7 [L. of divá day ].

div-yá, a. coming from heaven, divine, vii. 49, 1; 103, 2; x. 34, 9 [dív heaven ].

díś, f. quarter (of the sky), i. 85, 11; x. 90, 14 [diś point ].

1. dī fly, IV. dí̄ya.

pári- fly around, ii. 35, 14; v. 83, 7.

2. dī shine: pf. dīdá̄ya, ii. 33, 4.

dīdi-vá̄ṃs, pf. pt. shining, ii. 35, 3. 14 [dī shine ].

dí̄divi, a. shining, i. 1, 8 [dī shine ].

dí̄dhy-āna, pr. pt. Ā. pondering, iv. 50, 1 [dhī think ].

dīp shine, IV. Ā. dí̄pya.

sám- inflame: red. ao. inj. didīpas, viii. 48, 6 [cp. dī shine ].

dí̄y-ant, pr. pt. flying, vii. 63, 5 [dī fly ].

dīrghá, a. long, i. 154, 3; x. 14, 14 [Gk. δολιχό-ς].

dīrgha-śrú-t, a. heard afar, vii. 61, 2 [śru hear + t].

du go: is ao. sb. daviṣāṇi, x. 34, 5.

dudhrá, a. fierce, ii. 12, 15.

dur-i-tá, (pp.) n. faring ill, hardship, i. 35, 3 [dus ill + pp. of i go ].

dur-gá, n. hardship, vii. 61, 7 [dus + ga = gam go ].,

dur-matí, f. ill-will, ii. 33, 14 [dus̀ ill + matí thought ].

duvas-ya, den. present with (inst.), x. 14, 1 [dúvas, n. gift ].

duṣ-kṛ́t, m. evil-doer, v. 83, 2. 9 [dus + kṛ do + t].

dú-ṣṭuti, f. ill praise, ii. 33, 4 [dus ill + stutí praise ].

duh milk, II. P. dógdhi; ṣ ao. dukṣata, with two acc., i. 160, 3.

duh-i-tṛ́, f. daughter, iv. 51, 1. 10. 11; x. 127, 8 [Gk. θυγάτηρ, Go. dauhtar ].

dū-ḍábha, a. (Bv.) hard to deceive, vii. 86, 4 [dus + dábha deception ].

dū-tá, m. messenger, v. 11, 4; 83, 3; x. 14, 12.

dūrá̄d, ab. adv. from far, iii. 59, 2; v. 83, 3 [dū-rá, a. far ].

dūré-artha, a. (Bv.) whose goal is distant, vii. 63, 4.

dṛ pierce, int. dardarṣi, ii. 12, 15.

dṛ́-ti, m. water-skin, v. 83, 7; vii. 103, 2 [dṛ split; cp. Gk. δέρω, Eng. tear ].

dṛś see: pf. dádṛśe is seen, vii. 61, 5.

dṛśáye, dat. inf. to see, x. 14, 12.

dṛṣ-ṭvá̄ya, gd. having seen, x. 34, 11.

dṛh make firm, I. P. dṛ́ṃha; ipf. ádṛṃhat, ii. 12, 2.

dev-á, m. god, i. 1, 1. 2. 4. 5; 35, 1. 2. 3 2 . 8. 10. 11; 160, 1. 4; ii. 12, 1 2 ; 33. 15; 35, 5. 15; iii. 59, 6. 8. 9; iv. 50, 9; v. 11, 2; vii. 61, 1. 7; 63, 1. 3; 86, 7 2 ; viii. 29, 2. 3. 7; 48, 3. 9. 14; x. 14, 3 2 . 7. 14; 15, 10. 12; 34, 8; 90, 6. 7. 15. 16 2 ; 129, 6; 135, 1; 168, 2. 4 2 [ celestial from dív heaven ].

deva-trá̄, adv. among the gods, x. 15, 9.

deva-māná, n. abode of the gods. x. 135, 7.

deva-yú, a. devoted to the gods, i. 154, 5.

deva-vandá, a. god-praising, x. 15, 10 [vand greet ].

devá-hiti, f. divine order, viii. 103, 9 [devá god + hi-tí, f. impulse from hi impel ].

dev-í̄, f. goddess, i. 160, 1; ii. 35, 5; iv. 51, 4. 5. 8. 11; vii. 49, 1. 2. 3. 4; x. 127, 1. 2. 3 [f. of dev-á god ].

doṣā-vastṛ, m. (Tp.) illuminer of gloom, i. 1, 7 [doṣá̄ evening + vas-tṛ from vas shine ].

dáiv-ya, a. divine, i. 35, 5; viii. 48, 2; coming from the gods, ii. 33, 7; n. divinity, ii. 35, 8 [from devá god ].

Dyá̄vā-pṛthiví̄, du. (Dv.) Heaven and Earth, i. 35, 9; 160, 1. 5; v. 83, 8; viii. 48, 13; the parts of the ed. separated, ii. 12, 13.

dyu-mát, adv. brilliantly, v. 11, 1 [n. of dyu-mánt, a. bright ].

dyu-mná, n. wealth, iii. 59, 6.

dyó, m. heaven, N. dyáus, iv. 51, 11; x. 90, 14; acc. dyá̄m, i. 35, 7. 9; 154, 4; ii. 12, 2. 12; iii. 59, 1; N. pl. f. dyá̄vas, i. 35, 6 [Gk. Ζεύς, Ζη̂ν, Lat. diem ].

dyót-ana, a. shining, viii. 29, 2 [dyut shine ].

dráv-iṇa, n. wealth, iv. 51, 7 [ movable property, from dru run ].

dru run, I, dráva.

áti- run past (acc.), x. 14, 10.

drug-dhá, n. misdeed, vii. 86, 5 [pp. of druh be hostile ].

drúh, f. malice, ii. 35, 6; m. avenger, vii. 61, 5.

dvá, nm. two, i. 35, 6; viii. 29, 8. 9 [Gk. δύω, Lat. duo, Lith. dù, Eng. two ].

dvādaśá, a. consisting of twelve, m. twelve-month, vii. 103, 9.

dvá̄r, f. du. door, iv. 51, 2 [cf. Gk. θύρα, Lat. fores, Eng. door; perhaps from dhvṛ close with loss of aspirate through influence of dvá two, as having two folds].

dvi-tá̄, (inst.) adv. ( doubly ) as well, vii. 86, 1 [dvi two ].

dvi-pá̄d, a. (Bv.) two-footed, iv. 51, 5 [Gk. δί-ποδ-, Lat. bi-ped -].

dviṣ hate, II. dvéṣṭi, x. 34, 3.

dvéṣ-as, n. hatred, ii. 33, 2 [dviṣ hate ].

Dhán-a, n. wealth, money, iv. 50, 9; x. 34, 10. 12.

1. dhán-van, n. waste land, i. 35, 8; desert, v, 83, 10.

2. dhán-van, n. bow, ii. 33, 10.

dham blow, I. P. dhámati, ps. dham-yáte, x. 135, 7.

ví- blow asunder, iv, 50, 4.

dhám-ant, pr. pt. blowing, i. 85, 10.

dhár-man, n. ordinance, law, i. 160, 1; x. 90, 16 [that which holds or is established: dhṛ hold ].

1. dhá put, III. dádhāti, v. 83, 1; supply with (inst.), ii. 35, 12; bestow, ipv. dhehí, x. 14, 11; dhattá, i. 85, 12; ii. 12, 5; x. 15, 7; dadhāta, x. 15, 4. 7; dadhātana, x. 15, 11; dhattá̄m, iv. 51, 11; dadhantu, vii. 63, 6; perform, ipf. dhatta, i. 85, 9; bestow, s ao. sb. dhāsathas, i. 160, 5; establish, pf. dadhé, x. 129, 7; ds. desire to bestow, didhiṣanti, ii. 35, 5; support, dídhiṣāmi, ii. 35, 12 [Gk. τἰθημι].

ádhi- put on (acc.): pf. dadhire, i. 85, 2; ao. ádhita, x. 127, 1.

á̄- deposit, root ao. sb. dhās, v. 83, 7.

ní- deposit, root ao. dhātam, vii. 71, 5; ps. ao. ádhāyi, viii. 48, 10.

pári- put around, vi. 54, 10.

prá- put from (ab.) into (lc.), vii. 61, 3.

ví- impose: pf. dadhur, iv. 51, 6; divide, ipf. ádadhur, x. 90, 11.

canas- accept gladly, ii. 35, 1.

purás- place at the head, appoint Purohita: pf. dadhire, iv. 50, 1.

2. dhā suck, IV. P. dháya, ii. 33, 13; 35, 5.

dhá̄-man, n. power, i. 85, 11; ordinance, vii. 61, 4; 63, 3 [dhā put, establish ].

dhārayát-kavi, a. (gov.) supporting the sage, i. 160, 1 [dhāráyat, pr. pt. cs. of dhṛ hold ].

dhá̄-rā, f. stream, i. 85, 5; v. 83, 6 [dhāv run ].

dhiṣáṇā, f. bowl, i. 160, 1.

dhí̄, f. thought, i. 1, 7; iv. 50, 11.

dhī think, III. dí̄dhye.

á̄- think to oneself, ā- dí̄dhye, x. 34, 5.

dhí̄-ra, a. thoughtful, viii. 48, 4; wise, i. 160, 3; intelligent, vii. 86, 1 [dhī think ].

dhunéti, a. (Bv.) having a resounding gait, iv. 50, 2 [dhuna + iti].

dhúr, f. pole (of a car), vii. 63, 2; viii. 48, 2.

dhū-má, m. smoke, v. 11, 3 [dhū agitate; Gk. θυμό-ς, Lat. fumu-s ].

dhūr-tí, f. malice, viii. 48, 3 [dhvṛ injure ].

dhṛ support, fix firmly: pf. dādhá̄ra, i. 154, 4; iii. 59, 1.

dhṛṣ-ṇú, n. adv. forcibly, x. 34, 14 [dhṛṣ be bold, dare ].

dhe-nú, f. cow, i. 160, 3; ii. 35, 7 [ yielding milk: dhe = dhā suck ].

dhrú-ti, f. seduction, vii. 86, 6 [dhru = dhvṛ injure ].

1. Ná, pcl. as, like, i. 35, 6; 85, 1. 7. 8 2 ; 154, 2; ii. 33, 11; iv. 51, 8; vii. 61, 2; 63, 5; 86, 5 2 . 7; 103, 2 2 . 3. 7; viii. 48, 5. 6; x. 127, 4. 8; 168, 2 [180].

2. ná, neg. pcl. not, ii. 12, 5. 9. 10; 33, 9. 10. 15 2 ; 35, 6 2 ; iii. 59, 2 4 ; iv. 51, 6; vi. 54, 3 3 . 4. 9; vii. 61, 5 3 ; 63, 3; 86, 6; 103, 8; viii. 48, 10; x. 14, 2; 15, 13 2 ; 34, 2-5. 12; 129, 1 4 . 2. 7 2 ; 168, 3. 4 [180].

nákt-am, acc. adv. by night, vii. 71, 1. 2; x. 34, 10 [stem nakt, cp. Lat. nox = noct-s ].

ná-kṣatra, n. star; day-star, vii. 86, 1 [nák night + kṣatrá dominion = ruling over night ].

nad-í̄, f. stream, ii. 35, 3 [nad roar ].

ná-pāt, m. son, ii. 35, 1. 2. 3. 7. 10. 13; grandson, x. 15, 3 [Lat. nepōt- ‘nephew’].

náptṛ, m. (weak stem of nápāt) son: gen. náptur, ii. 35, 11; dat. náptre, ii. 35, 14 [ná-pitṛ having no father = ‘nephew’, ‘grandson’].

nábh-as, n. sky, v. 83, 3 [Gk. νἐϕος, OSl. nebo ].

nam bend, I. náma; Ā: ii. 12, 13; iv. 50, 8; before (dat.), x. 34, 8; int. nánnamīti bend low, v. 83, 5.

práti- bend towards: pf. nānāma, ii. 33, 12.

nám-as, n. homage, i. 1, 7; ii. 33, 4. 8; 35, 12; iii. 59, 5; iv. 50, 6; v. 83, 1; vii. 61, 6; 63, 5; 86, 4; x. 14, 15; 15, 2; 34, 8 [nam bend ].

namas-yá, den. adore, ii. 33, 8 [námas homage ].

namas-ya, a. adorable, iii. 59, 4.

nár-ya, a. manly, i. 85, 9.

náv-a, a. new, iv. 51, 4; vii. 61, 6; x. 135, 3 [Gk. νέο-ς, Lat. novu-s, OSl. novu, Eng. new ].

Náva-gv-a, m. an ancient priest, iv. 51, 4; pl. a family of ancient priests, x. 14, 6 [ having nine cows: gu = gó].

náv-yas, cpv. a. renewed, v. 11, 1 [Lat. nov-ior ].

1. naś be lost, IV. P. náśya; ao. neśat, vi. 54, 7.

2. naś reach, I. náśa.

ví- reach, ii. 35, 6.

náś, f. night, vii. 71, 1.

naṣ-ṭá, pp. lost, vi. 54, 10 [naś be lost ].

nas, prs. prn., A. us, i. 1, 9; 35, 11 2 ; ii. 33, 1. 2. 3. 5. 14; iv. 50, 11; vii. 61, 7 2 ; 63, 6; 71, 2. 4. 6; 86, 8; viii. 48, 6. 8. 15c; x. 14, 14; 15, 1. 6; 34, 14; to us, x. 127, 4; D., i. 1, 9 a; 85, 12; 160, 5; ii. 33, 15; iv. 50, 2; v. 83, 5. 6; vi. 54, 5. 10; vii. 63, 6 2 ; vii. 86, 8; 103, 10; viii. 48, 8. 9. 12. 14. 15 a; x. 14, 2; 15, 4; 34, 14; 127, 6; 135, 5; G. of us, ii. 33, 4. 13; v. 11, 4; 83, 6; vi. 54, 5; 86, 5; viii. 48. 4 2 . 7. 9; x. 14, 2. 6. 7; 15, 8; 135, 1.

nah bind, IV. náhya.

sám- knit together: irr. pf. 2. pl. anāha, viii. 48, 5.

ná̄ = ná not, x. 34, 8.

ná̄ka, n. firmament, i. 85, 7; vii. 86, 1; x. 90, 16.

nāḷí̄, f. flute, x. 135, 7.

nāth-itá, pp. distressed, x. 34, 3 [nāth seek aid ].

nādyá, m. son of streams, ii. 35, 1.

ná̄dh-amāna, pr. pt. Ā. seeking aid, suppliant, ii. 12, 6; 33, 6.

ná̄nā, adv. separately, ii. 12, 8.

ná̄bhi, f. navel, x. 90, 14.

ná̄-man, n. name, ii. 33, 8; 35, 11; vii. 103, 6 [Gk. ὄνομα, Lat. nōmen, Go. namō, Eng. name ].

ná̄rī, f. woman, ii. 33, 5 [from nár man ].

ná̄satya, m. du. epithet of the Aśvins, vii. 71, 4 [ná + asatyá not untrue ].

ni-kṛ́t-van, a. deceitful, x. 34, 7 [ní down + kr do ].

ni-citá, pp. known, ii. 12, 13 [ni + ci note ].

niṇyá, n. secret, vii. 61, 5.

ni-todín, a. piercing, x. 34, 7.

ni-drá̄, f. sleep, viii. 48, 14 [ní + drā sleep; cp. Gk. δαρ-θάνω, Lat. dor-mio ].

ni-dhí, m. treasure, viii. 29, 6; deposit, x. 15, 5 [ni down + dhi = dhā put ].

ni-dhruvi, a. persevering, viii. 29, 3 [ní + dhrúvi firm ].

ni-pādá, m. valley, v. 83, 7 [ní down + pá̄da, m. foot ].

nir-áyaṇa, n. exit, x. 135, 6 [nís out + áy-ana going: i go ].

ni-vát, f. depth, x. 127, 2 [ní down ].

ni-véśanī, a. causing to rest, 1. 35, 1 [from cs. of ní + viś cause to turn in ].

ní-ṣatta, pp. with ā, having sat down in (lc.), x. 15, 2 [ní + sad sit down ].

ni-ṣád-yâ̄, gd. having sat down, ii. 35, 10; x. 15, 6; with á̄, x. 14, 5.

ni-ṣiñc-ánt, pr. pt. pouring down, v. 83, 6 [sic sprinkle ].

niṣká, m. necklace, ii. 33, 10.

niṣ-kṛtá, n. appointed place, x. 34, 5 [pp. arranged: nís out + kṛ make ].

nī lead, I. náya; 2. pl. ipv., x. 34, 4.

sám- conjoin with (inst.), vi. 54, 1.

nīc-á̄, adv. down, x. 34, 9 [inst. of nyàñc downward ].

nú, adv. now, i. 154, 1; ii. 33, 7; iv. 51, 9; x. 34, 14 2 ; 168, 1; = inter. pcl. pray? vii. 86, 2 [Gk. νύ, OI. nu, OG. nu ].

nud push, VI. nudá; pf. 3. pl. Ā. nu-nudre, i. 85, 10. 11.

prá- push away: pf. vii. 86, 1.

nú̄, adv. = nú now, vii. 63, 6 [OG. nū ].

nú̄-tana, a. present, i. 1, 2 [nú̄ now ].

nū-nám, adv. now, iv. 51, 1; vii. 63, 4; viii. 48, 3; x. 15, 2 [nú̄ now ].

nṛ́, m. man, pl. N. náras, i. 85, 8; 154, 5; v. 11, 2. 4; vii. 103, 9 [Gk. ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός].

nṛ-cákṣas, a. (Bv.) observer of men, viii, 48, 9. 15; x. 14, 11 [nṛ man + cákṣas look ].

nṛ-páti, m. lord of men, vii. 71, 4.

nṛ-mṇá, a. manliness, valour, ii. 12, 1 [cp. nṛ-máṇas manly ].

ne-tṛ́, m. guide, ii. 12, 7 [nī lead ].

nó = ná + u also not, vi. 54, 3.

náu, f. ship, x. 135, 4 [Gk. ναν̂-ς, Lat. nāv-i-s ].

ny-añc, a. downward, v. 83, 7 [ní- down + -añc - ward ].

ny-ùpta, pp. thrown down, x. 34, 5. 9 [ní + vap strew ].

Pakṣ-ín, a. winged, x. 127, 5 [pakṣá, m. wing ].

pác-ant, pr. pt. cooking, ii. 12, 14. 15 [pac cook, Lat. coquo for pequo, OSl. 3. s. pečetŭ ].

páñca, nm. five, iii. 59, 8 [Av. panca, Gk. πέντε, Lat. quīnque ].

páṇ-i, m. niggard, iv. 51, 3 [paṇ bargain ].

pat fly, I. páta, x. 14, 16; cs. patáya fall, v. 83, 4 [Gk. πέτ-ε-ται flies, Lat. pet-o ].

pát-i, m. lord, pl. N. pátayas, iv. 50, 6; 51, 10; viii. 48, 13 [Gk. πόσι-ς].

páth, m. path, viii. 29, 6; x. 14, 10 [cp. Gk. πάτο-ς].

path-í, m. path, i. 35, 11; x. 14, 7: 168, 3.

pathi-kṛ́t, m. path-maker, x. 14, 15 [kṛ-t making: kṛ + determinative t].

pathi-ráksi, a. (Tp.) watching the path, x. 14, 11.

path-yā, f. path, x. 14, 2.

pad fall, IV. Ā. pádya; pp. papāda, x. 34, 11.

áva- fall down, vi. 54, 3.

pád, foot, du. ab. padbhyá̄m, x. 90, 12. 14 [Gk. ποδ-, Lat. ped -, Eng. foot ].

pad-á, n. step, i. 154, 3. 4. 5. 6; ii. 35, 14 [pad walk; Gk. πέδ-ο-ν ‘ground’].

pad-vánt, a. having feet, x. 127, 5.

pan-á̄yya, gdv. praiseworthy, i. 160, 5 [pan admire ].

pánthā, m. path, i. 35, 11; vii. 71, 1; x. 14, 1 [cp. Gk. πόντο-ς].

pánya-tama, spv. gdv. most highly to be praised, iii. 59, 5 [pánya, gdv. praiseworthy: pan admire ].

paprath-āná, pf. pt. Ā. spreading oneself, iv. 51, 8 [prath spread ].

páy-as, n. milk, moisture, i. 160, 3 [pī swell ].

pár-a, a. farther, ii. 12, 8; higher, x. 15, 1; remote, x. 15, 10 [pṛ pass ].

para-má, spv. a. farthest, iv. 50, 3; x. 14, 8; 129, 7; highest, i. 154, 5. 6; ii. 35, 14; iv. 50, 4.

par-ás, adv. far away, ii. 35, 6; beyond, x. 129, 1. 2.

paráṣ-tād, adv. from afar, vi. 54, 9; above, x. 129, 5.

parā-yánt, pr. pt. departing, x. 34, 5 [párā away, Gk. πέρᾱ beyond, + i go ].

parā-vát, f. distance, i. 35, 3; iv. 50, 3.

pári, prp. round; with ab. from, ii. 35, 10; x. 135, 4 [Av. pairi, Gk. πέρι].

pari-dhí, m. pl. sticks enclosing the altar, x. 90, 15 [pári round + dhi reduced form of dhā put ].

pari-bhú̄, a. being around, encompassing (acc.), i. 1, 4 [bhù be ].

parivatsar-Íṇa, a. yearly, vii. 10, 8 [pári- + vatsará, m. complete year ].

pári-ṣkṛta, pp. adorned, x. 135, 7 [pári round + skṛ = kṛ make = put ].

pareyi-vá̄ṃs, red. pf. pt. having passed away, x. 14, 1 [párā away + īy-i-vá̄ṃs: from i go ].

Parjánya, m. a god of rain, v. 83, 1-5. 9.

Parjánya-jinvita, pp. quickened by Parjanya, vii. 103, 1 [jinv sec. root = jinu from j́i quicken ].

pary-ā-vívṛtsant, pr. pt. ds. wishing to revolve hither (acc.), vii. 63, 2 [vṛt turn ].

párva-ta, m. i. 85, 10; ii. 12, 2. 11. 13 [ jointed; Lesbian Gk. πέρρατα ‘limits’].

pár-van, n. joint, section, vii. 103, 5; viii. 48, 5 [cp. Gk. περϝαν in περαίνω ‘finish’ for περϝανi̮ω].

pav-í, m. felly, vi. 54, 3.

pavítra-vant, a. purifying, i. 160, 3 [pavítra, n. means of purification; root pū purify ].

paś = spaś see, i. 35, 2; x. 14, 7 [Av. spas, Lat. spec-iō ].

paś-ú, m. beast, x. 90, 8; victim, x. 90, 15 [Av. pasu -, Lat. pecu-s, Go. faihu ].

paśu-tṛ́p, a. cattle-stealing, vii. 86, 5 [tṛp be pleased with ].

paścá̄-tād, adv. behind, viii. 48, 15 [paścá̄ inst. adv. Av. pasca ‘behind’].

paścá̄d, (ab.) adv. behind, x. 90, 5; afterwards, x. 135, 6.

1. pā drink, I. píba, iv. 50, 10; root ao. ápāma, viii. 48, 3 [cp. Lat. bibo ‘drink’].

sám- drink together, x. 135, 1.

2. pā protect, II. pá̄ti, from (ab.), ii. 35, 6; vii. 61, 7; 63, 6; 71, 6; 86, 8; viii. 48, 15.

pá̄th-as, n. path, vii. 63, 5; domain, i. 154, 5 [related to páth, m. path ].

pá̄d-a, m. foot, x. 90, 11; one-fourth, x. 90, 3. 4 [sec. stem formed from acc. pá̄d-am of pád foot ].

pāpáyā, inst. f. adv. evilly, x. 135, 2 [pāpá, a. bad ].

pār-á, m. farther shore, ii. 33, 3 [pr pass = crossing; Gk. πόρο-ς ‘passage’].

pá̄rthiva, a. earthly, i. 154, 1; x. 15, 2 [a. from pṛthiví̄ earth ].

pāv-aká, a. purifying, iv. 51, 2; vii. 49, 2. 3 [pū purify ].

pi swell, I. páyate; pf. pīpá̄ya, ii. 35, 7; viii. 29, 6.

pi-tú, m. drink, x. 15, 3 [pā drink ].

pi-tṛ́, m. father, i. 1, 9; 160, 2 2 . 3; ii. 33, 1. 12. 13; iv. 50, 6; v. 83, 6; vii. 103, 3; viii. 48, 4; x. 14, 5. 6; 34, 4; 135, 1; pl. fathers, ancestors, viii. 48, 12. 13; x. 14, 2. 4. 7. 8. 9; 15, 1-13 [Gk. πατήρ, Lat. pater, Go. fadar ].

pítr-ya, a. paternal, vii. 86, 5; viii. 48, 7 [pitṛ́ father ].

pinv yield abundance, I. pínva, iv. 50, 8; overflow, v. 83, 4 [sec. root = pi-nu from pī swell ].

prá- pour forth, v. 83, 6.

piś adorn, VI. piṃśá: pf. pipiśúr, vii. 103, 6; Ā. pipiśe, ii. 33, 9.

pī-tá, pp. drunk, viii. 48, 4. 5. 10. 12.

pīyú̄ṣa, m. n. milk, ii. 35, 5 [pī swell ].

putrá, m. son, i. 160, 3; v. 11, 6; vii. 103, 3; x. 15, 7; 34, 10.

púnar, adv. again, vi. 54, 10; x. 14, 8; 90, 4; 135, 2; back, x. 14, 12.

punar-hán, a. striking back, x. 34, 7.

punāná, pr. pt. purifying, vii. 49, 1 [pū purify ].

púr, f. citadel, ii. 35, 6 [pṛ fill ].

púraṃ-dhi, f. reward, iv. 50, 11 [a. dhi bestowing (reduced form of dhā) abundance, púr-am acc.].

purás-tād, adv. in the east, iv. 51, 1. 2. 8; forward, v. 83, 8; before, viii. 48, 15; in front, x. 135, 6.

purá̄, adv. formerly, iv. 51, 7.

purā-ṇá, a., f. í̄, ancient, iv. 51, 6; m. pl. ancients, x. 135, 1. 2 [purá̄ formerly ].

puru-táma, a. spv. most frequent, iv. 51, 1 [purú, Gk. πολύ-ς].

puru-trá̄, adv. in many places, x. 127, 1; in many ways, vii. 103, 6.

puru-rú̄pa, a. (Bv.) having many forms, ii. 33, 9.

Púru-ṣa, m. the primaeval Male, x. 90, 1. 2. 4. 6. 7. 11. 15.

puruṣá-tā, f. human frailty, x. 15, 6.

puró-hita, pp. placed in front, m. domestic priest, i. 1, 1; v. 11, 2 [purás + hitá, pp. of dhā put ].

puró-hiti, f. priestly service, vii. 61, 7.

puṣ-ṭá, n. (pl.) earnings, ii. 12, 4 [pp. of puṣ thrive ].

puṣ-ṭí, f. earnings, ii. 12, 5; prosperity, viii. 48, 6.

pū purify, IX. puná̄ti, i. 160, 3.

pūr-ṇá, pp. full, i. 154, 4; vii. 103, 7 [pṝ fill: cp. Gk. πολλοί ‘many’, Eng. full ].

pú̄ruṣa, m. metrical for púruṣa, x. 90, 3. 5.

pú̄r-va, a. former, i. 1, 2; being in front, iv. 50, 8; early, ancient, x. 14, 2. 7. 15; 15, 2. 8. 10; 90, 16.

pūrva-já, a. born of old, x. 14, 15 [jā be born ].

pūrva-bhá̄j, a. receiving the preference, iv. 50, 7 [bhaj share ].

pūrva-sú̄, a. bringing forth first, ii. 35, 5.

pūrvāhṇ-á, m. morning, x. 34, 11 [pūrvá early + ahna = áhan day ].

pūrv-yá, a. ancient, i. 35, 11; x. 14, 7.

Pūṣ-án, m. a solar deity, vi. 54, 1-6. 8-10 prosperer [puṣ thrive ].

pṛ take across, III. P. píparti; ipv. pipṛtám, vii. 61, 7; II. P. párṣi = ipv., ii. 33, 3.

pṛc mix, VII. pṛṇákti.

sám-, Ā. pṛṅkté, mingle, vii. 103, 4.

pṛchá-māna, pr. pt. Ā. asking oneself, x. 34, 6 [prach ask ].

pṛ́t-anā, f. battle, i. 85, 8.

pṛthiv-í̄, f. earth, i. 35, 8; 154, 4; ii. 12, 2; iii. 59, 1. 3. 7; iv. 51, 11; v. 83, 4. 5. 9; vii. 61, 3; x. 168, 1 [ the broad one = pṛthví̄, f. of pṛthú from prath spread ].

pṛ́ś-ni, a. speckled, i. 160, 3; vii. 103, 4. 6. 10.

Pṛśni-mātṛ, a. (Bv.) having Pṛśni as a mother, i. 85, 2.

pṛ́ṣat-ī, (pr. pt.) f. spotted mare, i. 85, 4. 5.

pṛṣad-ājyá, n. clotted butter, x. 90, 8.

pṛ́ṣ-ant, (pr. pt.) a. variegated, iv. 50, 2.

pṝ fill, IX. pṛṇá̄ti, ii. 35, 3.

á̄- fill up, v. 11, 5; vii. 61, 2.

pépiś-at, pr. pt. int. thickly painting, x. 127, 7 [piś paint ].

póṣ-a, m. prosperity, i. 1, 3 [puṣ thrive ].

pra-ketá, m. beacon, x. 129, 2 [prá + cit appear ].

prach ask, VI. pṛchá, ii. 12, 5; vii. 86, 3 [sec. root: praś + cha; cp. Lat. posco = porc-sco and prec-or, OG. forsc-ōn ].

pra-já̄, f. offspring, ii. 33, 1; pl. progeny, ii. 35, 8; = men, v. 83, 10 [cp. Lat. pro-gen-ies ].

prajá̄-vant, a. accompanied by offspring, iv. 51, 10.

prati-kāmám, adv. at pleasure, x. 15, 8 [ká̄ma desire ].

prátijan-ya, a. belonging to adversaries, iv. 50, 9; n. hostile force, iv. 50, 7 [prati-janá, m. adversary ].

prati-dí̄van, m. adversary at play, x. 34, 6 [div play ].

prati-doṣám, adv. towards eventide, i. 35, 10 [doṣá̄ evening ].

prati-búdhyamāna, pr. pt. awaking towards (acc.), iv. 51, 10.

prati-má̄na, n. match, ii. 12, 9 [ countermeasure: mā measure ].

prá-tir-am, acc. inf. to prolong, viii. 48, 10 [tṛ cross ].

pra-tná, a. ancient, iv. 50, 1 [prá before ].

prath spread out, I. Ā. prátha: ppf. papráthat, vii. 86, 1.

pra-thamá, ord. first, i. 35, 1 4 ; v. 11, 2; vi. 54, 4; x. 14, 2; 34, 12; 90, 16; 129, 4; chief, ii. 12, 1 [= pra-tamá foremost; OP. fra-tama ].

prathama-já̄, a. first-born, x. 168, 3 [jā = jan].

prathamá-m, adv. first, iv. 50, 4.

pra-díś, f. control, ii. 12, 7 [diś point ].

pra-bodháyant, cs. pr. pt. awakening, iv. 51, 5 [budh wake ].

prá-yata, pp. extended, i. 154, 3; offered, x. 15, 11. 12 [yam stretch out ].

prá-yati, f. impulse, x. 129, 5 [yam extend ].

práyas-vant, a. offering oblations, iii. 59, 2 [práy-as enjoyment from prī please ].

pra-yotṛ́, m. warder off, vii. 86, 6 [2. yu separate ].

pra-vát, f. slope, downward path, i. 35, 3; height, x. 14, 1 [prá forward ].

pravāte-já, a. born in a windy place, x. 34, 1 [pra-vātá + ja = jan].

pra-vāsá, m. traveller, viii. 29, 8 [prá + vas dwell away from home].

prá-viṣṭa, pp. having entered, vii. 49, 4 [viś enter ].

pra-sargá, m. discharge, vii. 103, 4 [sṛj emit ]

pra-savītṛ́, m. rouser, vii. 63, 2 [sū stimulate ].

prá-siti, f. toils, x. 34, 15 [si bind ].

prá-sūta, pp. aroused, vii. 63, 4 [sū impel ].

pra-stará, m. strewn grass, x. 14, 4 [stṛ strew ].

prā fill [extended form, pr-ā, of pṝ fill ].

á̄- pervade, s ao. áprās, x. 127, 2.

prá̄ñc, a., f. prāc-í̄, forward, x. 34, 12; facing, x. 135, 3 [prá + añc].

prāṇá, m. breath, x. 90, 13 [prá + an breathe ].

prā-vṛ́ṣ, f. rainy season, vii. 103, 3. 9 [vṛṣ rain ].

prāvṛṣ-á, a., f. í̄, belonging to the rains, vii. 103, 7.

prā-vep-á, a. dangling, x. 34, 1 [prá + vip tremble ].

priy-á, a. dear, i. 85, 7; 154, 5; ii. 12, 15; viii. 48, 14; x. 15, 5 [prī please ].

Phaligá, cave, iv, 50, 5.

Bad-dhá, pp. bound, x. 34, 4 [bandh bind ].

bandh bind, ix. badhná̄ti: ipf. ábadhnan, x. 90, 15.

bándh-u, a. akin, i. 154, 5; m. bond, x. 129, 4 [bandh bind ].

babhrú, a. ( ruddy ) brown, ii. 33, 5. 8. 9. 15; vii. 103, 10; viii. 29, 1; x. 34, 5. 11. 14.

barh-áṇa magic power, x. 34, 7 [bṛh make big ].

barhi-ṣád, a. (Tp.) sitting on the sacrificial grass, x. 15, 3. 4 [for barhiḥ-ṣád: sad sit ].

barhiṣ-yà, a. placed on the sacrificial grass, x. 15, 5 [barhís].

barh-ís, n. sacrificial grass, i. 85, 6. 7; v. 11, 2; x. 14, 5; 15, 11; 90, 7.

bah-ú, a. many, ii. 35, 12; x. 14, 1; 34, 13.

bādh drive away, I. Ā. bá̄dhate, x. 127, 2; int. badbadhe press apart, vii. 61, 4.

ápa- drive away, i. 35, 3. 9; 85, 3.

bāh-ú, m. arm, i. 85, 6; du. x. 90, 11. 12 [Av. bāzu, Gk. πη̂χυ-ς, OG. buog ].

bíbhy-at, pr. pt. fearing, x. 34, 10 [bhī fear ].

bíbhr-at, pr. pt. bearing, vii. 103, 6 [bhṛ bear ].

bíl-ma, n. shavings, ii. 35, 12.

budh-āná, ao. pt. Ā. waking, iv. 51, 8.

budh-ná, m. n. bottom, x. 135, 6 [Lat. fundu-s ].

bṛh-át, (pr. pt.) adv. aloud, ii. 33, 15; 35, 15.

bṛh-ánt, a. lofty, i. 35, 4; v. 11, 1; vii. 61, 3; 86, 1; x. 34, 1; ample, i. 160, 5; n. the great world, x. 14, 16 [pr. pt. of bṛh make big ].

Bṛ́has-páti, m. Lord of prayer, name of a god, iv. 50, 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 10. 11; x. 14, 3 [bṛ́h-as prob. gen. = bṛhás; cp. bráhmaṇas páti].

bodhi, 2. s. ipv. ao. of bhū be, ii. 33, 15 [for bhū-dhí].

bráh-man, n. prayer, ii. 12, 14; vii. 61, 2. 6; 71, 6; 103, 8 [bṛh swell ].

brah-mán, m. priest, iv. 50, 8. 9; Brahmin, ii. 12, 6 [bṛh swell ].

brāhmaṇá, m. Brahmin, vii. 103, 1. 7. 8; 90, 12.

bruv-ánt, pr. pt. calling (acc.), viii. 48, 1 [brū speak ].

bruv-āṇá, pr. pt. speaking, iii. 59, 1 [brū speak ].

brū speak, II. bravīti, i. 35, 6; sb. bravat, vi. 54, 1. 2; tell, op. x. 135, 5.

ádhi- speak for (acc.), i. 35, 11; x. 15, 5.

úpa-, Ā. implore, iv. 51, 11.

Bhakṣ-á, m. draught, x. 34, 1 [bhak-ṣ, sec. root consume from bhaj partake of ].

bhaj partake of (gen.), x. 15, 3; s ao., viii. 48, 1. 7.

bhad-rá, a. auspicious, i. 1, 6; ii. 35, 15; iii. 59, 4; iv. 51, 7; x. 14, 6. 12 [ praiseworthy: bhand be praised ].

Bhar-atá, m. pl. name of a tribe, v. 11, 1.

bhár-ant, pr. pt. bearing, i. 1, 7 [bhṛ bear ].

bháv-ya, a. that will be, future, x. 90, 2 [gdv. of bhū be ].

bhā shine, II. P. bhá̄ti.

áva- shine down, i. 154, 6.

ví- shine forth, ii. 35, 7. 8; v. 11, 1.

bhid split, VII. bhinátti [Lat. find-o ].

ví- split open, i. 85, 10.

bhiṣák-tama, m. spv. best healer, ii. 33, 4 [bhiṣáj healing ].

bhiṣáj, m. physician, ii. 33, 4.

bhī fear, I. Ā. bháyate, i. 85, 8; ii. 12, 13; pf. bibhá̄ya, v. 83, 2; s ao.

ábhaisur, viii. 48, 11.

bhī-má, a. terrible, i. 154, 2; ii. 33, 11 [bhī fear ].

bhur quiver, int. járbhurīti, v. 83, 5.

bhúv-ana, n. creature, i. 35, 2. 5. 6; 85, 8; 154, 2. 4; 160, 2. 3; ii. 35, 2. 8; vii. 61, 1; world, ii. 33, 9; v. 83, 2. 4; iv. 51, 5; x. 168, 2. 4 [bhū be ].

bhū become, be, I. bháva, i. 1, 9; v. 83, 7. 8; ipv., x. 127, 6; pr. sb., viii. 48, 2; ipf. ábhavat, v. 11, 3. 4; x. 135, 5. 6; come into being, x. 90, 4; pf. babhú̄va, ii. 12, 9; vii. 103, 7; x. 34, 12; pf. op. babhūyá̄t, iv. 51, 4; root ao., viii. 48, 3; ábhūvan, vii. 61, 5; root ao. sb. bhuvāni, vii. 86, 2; ipv. bhú̄tu, iv. 50, 11 [cp. Gk. ϕύ-ω, Lat. fu-i-t ].

abhí- be superior to (acc.), iii. 59, 7.

á̄- arise, pf., x. 129, 6. 7; 168, 3.

āvis- appear, vii. 103, 8.

sám- do good to (dat.), viii. 48, 4.

bhū-tá, pp. been, x. 90, 2; n. being, x. 90, 3.

bhú̄-man, n. earth, i. 85, 5; vii. 86, 1; x. 90, 1. 14 [cp. Gk. ϕν̂-μα ‘growth’].

bhú̄-ri, a. great, ii. 33, 9; much, ii. 33, 12; adv. greatly, i. 154, 6.

bhú̄ri-śṛṅga, a. (Bv.) many-horned, i. 154, 6.

bhú̄r-ṇi, a. angry, vii. 86, 7.

bhūṣ strive, I. P. bhú̄ṣati [extended form of bhū be ].

pári- surpass, ii. 12, 1.

bhṛ bear, III. bíbharti, ii. 33, 10; iii. 59, 8; hold, iv. 50, 7; viii. 29, 3. 4. 5 [Gk. ϕέρω, Lat. ferō, Arm. berem, OI. berim, Go. baira ].

ví-, I. bhara, carry hither and thither, v. 11, 4.

Bhṛ́g-u, m. pl. a family of ancient priests, x. 14, 6.

bheṣaj-á, a. healing, ii. 33, 7, n. medicine, remedy, ii. 33, 2. 4. 12. 13 [bhiṣáj healing ].

bhóg-a, m. use, x. 34, 3 [bhuj enjoy ].

bhoj-á, m. liberal man, iv. 51, 3.

bhój-ana, n. food, v. 83, 10 [bhuj enjoy ].

bhyas = bhī fear, I. Ā. bhyásate, ii. 12, 1.

bhrāj shine, I. Ā. bhrá̄jate.

ví- shine forth, i. 85, 4.

bhrá̄ja-māna, pr. pt. Ā. shining, vii. 63, 4.

bhrá̄-tṛ, m. brother, x. 34, 4 [Gk. ϕρá̄τωρ, Lat. frāter, OI. brāthir, Go. brōthar, OSI. bratrŭ ].

Mah, máṃh be great, máṃhate and máhe (3. s.).

sám- consecrate, vii. 61, 6.

maghá-vant, m. liberal patron, ii. 33, 14; 35, 15 [magh-á bounty: mah be great ].

maghónī, a. f. bounteous, iv. 51, 3 [f. of maghávan].

maṇḍú̄ka, m. frog, vii. 103, 1. 2. 4. 7. 10.

math-itá, pp. kindled by friction, viii. 48, 6.

math-yá-māna, pr. pt. ps. being rubbed, v. 11, 6.

mad rejoice, I. máda, in (lc.), i. 85, 1; 154, 5; in (inst.), 154, 4; x. 14, 3. 7; with (inst.), x. 14, 10; be exhilarated, viii. 29, 7; drink with exhilaration, vii. 49, 4; cs. mādaya, Ā. rejoice, x. 15, 14; in (inst.), x. 14, 14; (gen.), i. 85, 6; with (inst.), x. 14, 5; gladden, x. 34, 1 [Gk. μαδάω, Lat. madeō ‘drip’].

mád-a, m. intoxication, i. 85, 10; viii. 48, 6.

mada-cyút, a. reeling with intoxication, i. 85, 7 [cyu move ].

mád-ant, pr. pt. rejoicing, iv. 50, 2; delighting in (inst.), iii. 59, 3.

mádh-u, n. honey, mead, i. 154, 4. 5; iv. 50, 3; viii. 48, 1; x. 34, 7; a. sweet, i. 85, 6 [Gk. μέθυ, Lith. medù-s, OSl. medǔ, Eng. mead ].

mádhu-mat-tama, spv. a. most honied, v. 11, 5; x. 14, 15.

madhu-ścút, a. (Tp.) dripping with honey, distilling sweetness, vii. 49, 3 [ścut drip ].

mádhya, a. middle, vii. 49, 1. 3; x. 15, 14 [Lat. mediu-s ].

madhya-má, spv. a. middlemost, x. 15, 1.

man think, VIII. Ā. manute, viii. 29, 10; IV. Ā. mányate, viii. 48, 6; x. 34, 13.

mán-as, n. mind, x. 90, 13; 129, 4; 135, 3 [Av. manō, Gk. μένος].

mánas-vant, a. wise, ii. 12, 1.

man-á̄, f. jealousy, ii. 33, 5 [man think ].

man-īṣá̄, f. thought, vii. 71, 6; wisdom, x. 129, 4: prayer, v. 11, 5; hymn of praise, v. 83, 10 [man think ].

Mán-u, m. an ancient sage, ii. 33, 13.

mano-jú̄, a. swift as thought, i. 85, 4 [mánas mind + jù to speed ].

mán-tra, m. hymn, ii. 35, 2; spell, x. 14, 4.

mand exhilarate, I. mánda: is ao. Ā. ámandiṣātām, vii. 103, 4.

úd- gladden, pf. mamanda, ii. 33, 6 [= mad rejoice ].

mand-as-āná, ao. pt. rejoicing, iv. 50, 10 [mand = mad rejoice ].

mand-rá, a. gladdening, v. 11, 3 [mand exhilarate ].

mandrá-jihva, a. (Bv.) pleasant-tongued, iv. 50, 1.

mán-man, n. thought, vii. 61, 6; hymn, i. 154, 3; vii. 61, 2 [man think ].

man-yú, m. intention, vii. 61, 1; wrath, vii. 86, 6; viii. 48, 8; x. 34, 8. 14 [man think ].

mayo-bhú, a. benificent, ii. 33, 13 [máy-as gladness + bhu = bhū being for = conducing to ].

Mar-út, m. pl. the storm gods, i. 85, 1. 4-6. 8. 10. 12; ii. 33, 1. 13; v. 83, 6.

marút-vant, a. accompanied by the Maruts, ii. 33, 6.

marḍ-i-tṛ́, m. one who pities, x. 34, 3 [mṛḍ be gracious ].

már-ta, m. mortal, iii. 59, 2 [Gk. μορ-τό-ς, βρο-τό-ς ‘mortal’, Lat. mor-ta ‘goddess of death’].

márt-ya, a. mortal; m. mortal man, i. 35, 2; vii. 61, 1; 71, 2; viii. 48, 1. 3. 12; x. 15, 7.

marmṛjyá-māna, pr. pt. int. making bright, ii. 35, 4 [mṛj wipe ].

máh, a. great, ii. 33, 8; G. mahás, iv. 50, 4; f. -í̄, v. 11, 5 [Av. maz ‘great’; from mah be great ].

mah-án, m. greatness, ii. 12, 1; 35, 2 [mah be great ].

mah-ánt, a. great, iii. 59, 5; v. 11, 6; 83, 8; vii. 63, 2; x. 34, 12 [pr. pt. of mah be great ].

mahá̄-vadha, a. (Bv.) having a mighty weapon, v. 83, 2.

máh-i, a. great, i. 160, 5; ii. 12, 10; v. 83, 5; viii. 29, 10 [mah be great ].

mahi-tvá, n. greatness, vii. 61, 4.

mahi-tvaná, n. greatness, i. 85, 7.

mah-ín, a., f. -ī, great, i. 160, 2. 5.

mah-i-mán, m. greatness, i. 85, 2; ii. 35, 9; iii. 59, 7; vii. 86, 1; x. 90, 3. 16; 168, 1; power, x. 129, 3; pl. powers, x. 129, 5.

mah-í̄, a. f. great, ii. 33, 8. 14; x. 14, 1 [mah be great ].

má-hyam, prs. prn. D. to me, x. 34. 1. 2 [cp. Lat. mihi ].

mā measure, III. Ā. mímīte.

ví- measure out: pf. vi-mamé, i. 154, 1. 3; 160, 4; ii. 12, 2.

mā, enc. prs. prn. A. me, ii. 33, 6. 7; viii. 48, 5 3 . 6. 10; x. 34, 1. 2; 127, 7 [Lat. mē, Eng. me ].

má̄, proh. pcl. not, ii. 33, 1. 4 3 . 5; viii. 48, 8. 14 2 ; x. 15, 6; 34, 13. 14 [Gk. μή ‘not’].

má̄-kis, proh. prn. pcl. not any one, vi. 54, 7 [Gk. μή-τις ‘no one’].

má̄-kīm, proh. prn. pcl. no one, vi. 54, 7 2 .

Má̄talī, m. a divine being, x. 14, 3.

mā-tṛ́, f. mother, i. 160, 2; v. 11, 3; x. 34, 4. 10 [Gk. μήτηρ, Lat. māter, OI. māthir, Eng. mother ].

mādhvī, m. du. lovers of honey, vii. 71, 2 [mádhu honey ].

má̄nuṣa, a. human; m. man, vii. 63, 1 [mánus man ].

má̄m, prs. prn. A. me, vii. 49, 1-4.

mā-yá̄, f. mysterious power, i. 160, 3 [mā make ].

mā-yú, a. lowing, vii. 103, 2 [mā bellow ].

má̄s-a, m. month, vii. 61, 4 [má̄s moon

mi-tá, pp. set up, iv. 51, 2 [mi set up ].

mitá-jñu, a. (Bv.) firm-kneed, iii. 59, 3.

Mi-trá, m. a sun god, iii. 59, 1-9; vii. 61, 4; 63, 1. 6; n. friendship, x. 34, 14.

Mitrá̄-Váruṇā, du. cd. Mitra and Varuṇa, i. 35, 1; vii. 61, 2. 3. 6. 7; 63, 5.

mī damage, IX. miná̄ti [cp. Gk. μι-νύ-ω, Lat. mi-nu-o ].

á̄- diminish, ii. 12, 5.

prá- infringe, vii. 63, 3; 103, 9; viii. 48, 9.

mīḍh-vá̄ms, a. bounteous, ii. 33, 14; vii. 86, 7 [unred. pf. pt., probably from mih rain ].

múkha, n. mouth, x. 90, 11-13.

muc release, VI. muñcá: ppf. ámumuktam, vii. 71, 5.

mud be merry, I. Ā. móda.

práti- exult, v. 83, 9.

mṛg-á, m. beast, i. 154, 2; ii. 33, 11.

mṛj wipe, II. má̄rjmi.

sám- rub bright, ii. 35, 12.

mṛḍ be gracious, VI. mṛḷá, ii. 33, 11. 14; viii. 48, 9; x. 34, 14; cs. mṛḷáya, id., viii. 48, 8.

mṛḷay-á̄ku, a. merciful, ii. 33, 7 [mṛḍ be gracious ].

mṛḷ-īká, n. mercy, vii. 86, 2; viii. 48, 12 [mṛḍ be gracious ].

mṛ-tyú, m. death, x. 129, 2 [mṛ die ].

mṛś touch, VI. mṛśá.

pári- embrace, x. 34, 4.

mṛṣ be heedless, IV. mṛ́ṣya.

ápi- forget, vi. 54, 4.

me, enc. prs. prn. D. to me, vii. 63, 3; 86, 3. 4; x. 34, 13; G. of me, ii. 35, 1; vii. 86, 2; viii. 29, 2 [Gk. μοι].

maujavatá, a. coming from Mūjavant, x. 34, 1.

Yá, rel. prn. who, which, that: N. yás, i. 35, 6; 154, 1 2 . 3. 4; 160, 4; ii. 12, 1-7. 9-15; 33, 5. 7; iii. 59, 2. 7; iv. 50, 1. 7. 9; vi. 54, 1. 2. 4; vii. 61, 1; 63, 1. 3; vii. 71, 4; 86, 1; viii. 48, 10 2 . 12; x. 14, 5; 34, 12; 129, 7; f. yá̄, iv. 50, 3; n. yád, i. 1, 6; ii. 35, 15; vii. 61, 2; 63, 2; 103, 5. 7; x. 15, 6; 90, 2 3 . 12; 129, 1. 3. 4; 135, 7; with kíṃ ca whatever, v. 83, 9; A. yám, i. 1, 4; ii. 12, 5. 7. 9; 35, 11; viii. 48, 1; x. 135, 3. 4; I. yéna, i. 160, 5; ii. 12, 4; iv. 51, 4; f. yáyā, iv. 51, 6; Ab. yásmād, ii. 12, 9; G. yásya, i. 154, 2; ii. 12, 1. 7 4 . 14 2 ; 35, 7; v. 83, 4 3 ; vii. 61, 2; x. 34, 4; f. yásyās, x. 127, 4; L. yásmin, iv. 50, 8; x. 135, 1; du. yáu, x. 14, 11; pl. N. yé, i. 35, 11; 85, 1. 4; iv. 50, 2; x. 14, 3. 10; 15, 1-4. 8-10. 13 2 . 14 2 ; 90, 7. 8; with ké whatever, x. 90, 10; f. yá̄s, vii. 49, 1. 2. 3; n. yá̄ni, ii. 33, 13; yá̄, i. 85, 12; ii. 33, 18 3 ; iv. 50, 9; vii. 86, 5; A. m. yá̄n, x. 14, 3; 15, 13 2 ; G. f. yá̄sām, vii. 49, 3; L. f. yá̄su, iv. 51, 7; vii. 49, 4 4 ; 61, 5.

yakṣ-á, n. mystery, vii. 61, 5.

yaj sacrifice, I. yája; ipf. áyajanta, x. 90, 7. 16.

yaj-atá, a. adorable, i. 35, 3. 4; ii. 33, 10 [Av. yazata; from yaj worship ].

yaj-átha, m. sacrifice, v. 11, 2 [yaj worship ].

yája-māna, m. sacrificer, vi. 54, 6 [pr. pt. Ā. of yaj worship ].

yáj-us, n. sacrificial formula, x. 90, 9 [yaj worship ].

yaj-ñá, m. worship, sacrifice, i. 1, 1. 4; ii. 35, 12; iv. 50, 6. 10; v. 11, 2. 4; vii. 61, 6. 7; x. 14, 5. 13; 15, 6. 13; 90, 7-9. 15.16 2 [Av. yasna, Gk. ἁγνό-ς].

yajñá-ketu, a. (Bv.) whose token is sacrifice, iv. 51, 11.

yajdá-manman, a. (Bv.) whose heart is set on sacrifice, vii. 61, 4.

yajñ-íya, a. worthy of worship, holy, iii. 59, 4; adorable, x. 14, 5. 6 [yajñá worship ].

yat array oneself, I. yáta: pf. i. 85, 8; cs. yātáya marshal, stir, iii. 59, 1; clear off, x. 127, 7.

yá-tas, adv. whence, x. 129, 6. 7 [prn. root yá].

yá-ti, prn. how many, x. 15, 13 [prn. root yá].

yá-tra, rel. adv. where, i. 154, 5. 6; vii. 63, 5; viii. 29, 7; 48, 11; x. 14, 2. 7; 90, 16 [prn. root yá].

yá-thā, rel. adv. how, x. 135, 5. 6; so that, ii. 33, 15; unaccented = iva like, viii. 29, 6 [prn. root yá].

yathā-vaśám, adv. according to (thy, his) will, x. 15, 14; 168, 4 [váśa, m. will ].

yá-d, cj. when, i. 85, 3. 4. 5. 7. 9; iv. 51, 6; v. 83, 2-4. 9; vii. 103, 2-5; x. 34, 5; 90, 6. 11. 15; in order that, vii. 71, 4; so that, vii. 86, 4; since, i. 160, 2; if, viii. 48, 9 [n. of rel. yá].

yád-i vā, cj. whether, x. 129, 7; or, or else, ibid. [yá-d-i if, rel. adv. + vā or ].

y-ánt, pr. pt. going, vii. 61, 3 [i go ].

yam extend, bestow, I. yácha, iv. 51, 10; v. 83, 5; pf. Ā. yemire submit to (dat.), iii. 59, 8; s ao. bestow on (dat.), ii. 35, 15 2 .

ádhi- extend to (dat.), i. 85, 12.

á̄- guide to (lc.), root ao. inj. yamat, x. 14, 14.

ní- bestow, iv. 50, 10.

prá- present a share of (gen.), x. 15, 7.

ví- extend to, i. 85, 12.

Yam-á, m. god of the dead, i. 35, 6; x. 14, 1-5. 7-16; 15, 8; 135, 1. 7.

yaś-ás, a. glorious, i. 1, 3; iv. 51, 11; viii. 48, 5.

yahví̄, f. swift one, ii. 33, 9; 35, 14.

yā go, II. yāti, i. 35, 3 3 . 10; vii. 49, 3; x. 168, 1.

á̄- come, i. 35, 2; x. 15, 9.

úpa á̄- come hither, vii. 71, 2.

á̄ úpa come hither to, vii. 71, 4.

pári prá- proceed around, iv. 51, 5.

yātayáj-jana, a. (gov. cd.) stirring men, iii. 59, 5 [yātáyant, pr. pt. cs. of yat array oneself + jána man ].

yātu-dhá̄na, m. sorcerer, i. 35, 10 [yātú, m. sorcery + dhāna practising from dhā put, do ].

yá̄-ma, m. course, iv. 51, 4 [yā go ].

yá̄-man, n. course, i. 85, 1; approach, x, 127, 4 [yā go ].

yu separate, III. yuyóti, ii. 33, 1. 3; vii. 71, 1. 2; s ao. depart from (ab.), ii. 33. 9; cs. yaváya save from, viii. 48, 5; yāváya ward off, x. 127, 6 2 .

yuk-tá, pp. yoked, vii. 63, 2 [yuj yoke, Gk. ζευκτό-ς, Lat. iunctu-s, Lith. jùnkta-s ].

yuktá-grāvan, a. (Bv.) who has to work the stones, ii. 12, 6.

yuj yoke, VII. yunákti: pf. yuyujé, x. 34, 11; rt. ao. áyugdhvam, i. 85, 4.

prá- yoke in front, i. 85, 5.

yúdhya-māna, pr. pt. Ā. fighting; m. fighter, ii. 12, 9 [yudh fight ].

yúyudh-i, m. warrior, i. 85, 8 [from red. stem of yudh fight ].

yuva-tí, f. young maiden, ii. 35, 4. 11 [f. of yúvan youth ].

yúv-an, a. young, ii. 33, 11; m. youth, ii. 35, 4 [Lat. iuven-i-s ].

yuv-ám, prs. prn. N. you two, vii. 71, 5; dat. yuvábhyām to you two, vii. 61, 7 [= yū- + am].

yuva-yú, a. addressed to you, vii. 71, 7.

yūy-ám, prs. prn. pl. N. you, iv. 51, 5; vii. 61, 7; 63, 6; 71, 6; 86, 8 [for yūṣ-ám, Av. yūš, yūšem, Go. yūs ].

yóg-a, m. acquisition, vii. 86, 8 [yuj yoke ].

yój-ana, n. league, i. 35, 8 [ yoking from yuj yoke ].

yó-ni, m. womb, ii. 35, 10; abode, iv. 50, 2; x. 34, 11; receptacle, viii. 29, 2 [ holder from yu hold ].

yóṣ-ā, f. woman, x. 168, 2.

yós, n. blessing, ii. 33, 13; x. 15, 4.

Raṃh hasten, I. ráṃha; cs. raṃháya cause to speed, i. 85, 5.

rakṣ protect, I. rákṣa, i. 35, 11; 160, 2; iv. 50, 2; vi. 54, 5; viii. 48, 5 [Gk. ἀλέξω ‘ward off’].

rákṣa-māṇa, pr. pt. Ā. protecting, vii. 61, 3 [rakṣ protect ].

rakṣ-ás, m. demon, i. 35, 10; v. 83, 2.

rakṣ-i-tṛ́, m. guardian, x. 14, 11 [rakṣ protect ].

raghu-pátvan, a. (Tp.) flying swiftly, i. 85, 6 [raghú swift: Gk. ἐλαχύ-ς].

raghu-ṣyád, a. swift-gliding, i. 85, 6 [raghú swift + syand run ].

ráj-as, n. space, air, i. 35, 4. 9; 154, 1; 160, 1. 4; x. 15, 2; 129, 1 [Gk. ἔρεβος, Go. riqiz-a ].

ráṇ-ya, a. glorious, i. 85, 10 [raṇ rejoice ].

rá-tna, n. gift, treasure, i. 35, 8 [rā give ].

ratna-dhá̄, a. (Tp.) bestowing treasure, i. 1, 1.

rá-tha, m. car, i. 35, 2. 4. 5; 85, 4. 5; ii. 12, 7. 8; v. 83, 3. 7; vii. 71, 2-4; viii. 48, 5; x. 135, 3-5; 168, 1 [ṛ go ].

ráth-ya, a. belonging to a car, i. 35, 6.

rad dig, I. ráda: pf. rará̄da, vii. 49, 1.

radh-rá, a. rich, ii. 12, 6 [rādh succeed ].

randh make subject, IV. P. rádhya: red. ao., ii. 33, 5.

ráp-as, n. bodily injury, ii. 33, 3. 7.

ram set at rest, IX. ramṇá̄ti: ipf. ii. 12, 2; I. Ā. ráma rejoice in (lc.), x. 34, 13.

ray-í, m. wealth, i. 1, 3; 85, 12; iv. 50, 6. 10; 51, 10; viii. 48, 13; x. 15, 7. 11 [probably from ri = reduced form of rā give ].

ráv-a, m. roar, iv. 50, 1. 4. 5 [ru cry ].

raś-mí, m. ray, i. 35, 7; cord, x. 129, 5.

rā give, II. rá̄ti; 2. ind. rāsi = ipv., ii. 33, 12; III. ipv. 2. pl. rarīdhvam, v. 83, 6.

rāj rule, over (gen.), I. P. rá̄jati, i. 1, 8.

rá̄j-an, m. king, i. 85, 8; iii. 59, 4; iv. 50, 7. 9; vii. 49, 3. 4; 86, 5; viii. 48, 7. 8; x. 14, 1. 4. 7. 11. 15; 34, 8. 12; 168, 2 [rāj rule, Lat. regō -].

rá̄j-ant, pr. pt. ruling over (gen.), i. 1, 8 [rāj rule ].

rājan-yà, a. royal; m. warrior (earliest name of the second caste), x. 90, 12.

rá̄trī, f. night, i. 35, 1; x. 127, 1. 8; 129, 2.

rá̄dh-as, n. gift, blessing, ii. 12, 14 [rādh gratify ].

rādho-déya, n. bestowal of wealth, iv. 51, 3 [déya, gdv. to be given from dā give ].

ri release, IX. riṇá̄ti, ii. 12, 3.

ánu- flow along, i. 85, 3.

ric leave, VII. P. riṇákti, vii. 71, 1 [Gk. λείπω, Lat. linquo ].

áti- extend beyond: ps. ipf. áricyata, x. 90, 5.

ríṣ, f. injury, ii. 35, 6.

riṣ be hurt, IV. ríṣyati, vi. 54, 3; a ao. inj., vi. 54, 7. 9; injure, viii. 48, 10.

rih kiss, II. réḍhi, ii. 33, 13.

ruk-má, m. golden gem, vii. 63, 4 [ruc shine ].

ruc shine, I. róca; cs. rocáya cause to shine, viii. 29, 10.

ruc-āná, rt. ao. pt. Ā. beaming, iv. 51, 9.

ruj burst, VI. P. rujá: pf. rurója, iv. 50, 5.

ruj-ánt, pr. pt. shattering, x. 168, 1.

Rud-rá, m. name of a god, i. 85, i; ii. 33, 1-9. 11-13. 15; pl. = sons of Rudra, the Maruts, i. 85, 2 [rud cry, howl ].

rudh obstruct, VII. ruṇaddhí, runddhé, x. 34, 3.

ápa- drive away: rt. ao. arodham, x. 34, 3.

rúś-ant, pr. pt. gleaming, iv. 51, 9.

ruh grow, I. róhati, róhate.

áti- grow beyond (acc.), x. 90, 2.

á̄- rise up in (acc.), viii. 48, 11.

rūpá, n. form, x. 168, 4; beauty, i. 160, 2.

re-ṇú, m. dust, x. 168, 1 [perhaps from rí run = disperse ].

ré-tas, n. seed, v. 83, 1. 4; x. 129, 4 [rí flow ].

reto-dhá̄, m. impregnator, x. 129, 5 [ré-tas seed + dhā placing ].

rebh-á, m. singer, vii. 63, 3 [ribh sing ].

revát, adv. bountifully, ii. 35, 4 [n. of revánt].

re-vát-ī, f. wealthy, iv. 51, 4 [f. of revánt].

re-vánt, a. wealthy, viii. 48, 6 [re = rai wealth ].

ródas-ī, f. du. the two worlds (= heaven and earth), i. 85, 1; 160, 2. 4; ii. 12, 1; vii. 64, 4; 86, 1.

rái, m. wealth, vi. 54, 8; vii. 86, 7; viii. 48, 2; G. rāyás, viii. 48, 7 [ bestowal from rā give; Lat. rě-s ].

Rauhiṇá, m. name of a demon, ii. 12, 12 [metronymic: son of Róhiṇī ].

Lak-ṣá, n. stake (at play), ii. 12, 4 [ token, mark: lag attach ].

lok-á, m. place, x. 14, 9; world, x. 90, 14 [ bright space = rok-á light; cp. Gk. λευκό-ς ‘white’, Lat. lux, lūc-is ].

Vag-nú, m. sound, vii. 103, 2 [vac speak ].

vac utter, III. P. vívakti; ao. op., ii. 35, 2; speak, ps. ucyáte, x. 90, 11; 135, 7 [Lat. voc-āre ‘call’].

ádhi- speak for (dat.), viii. 48, 14.

prá- proclaim, i. 154, 1; vii. 86, 4; declare, x. 129, 6.

vác-as, n. speech, v. 11, 5 [vac speak; Gk. ἔπος].

vacas-yá̄, f. eloquence, ii. 35, 1.

váj-ra, m. thunderbolt, i. 85, 9; viii. 29, 4 [vaj be strong; Av. vazra ‘club’].

vájra-bāhu, a. (Bv.) bearing a bolt in his arm, ii. 12, 12. 13; 33, 3.

vájra-hasta, a. (Bv.) having a bolt in his hand, ii. 12, 13.

vajr-ín, m. bearer of the bolt, vii. 49, 1.

vatsá, m. calf, vii. 86, 5 [ yearling from *vatas, Gk. ϝέτος year, Lat. vetus in vetus-tas ‘age’].

vats-ín, a., f. -ī, accompanied by calves, vii. 103, 2.

vad speak, I. váda, ii. 33, 15; op. ii. 35, 15; vii. 103, 5 2 ; x. 34, 12.

áchā- invoke, v. 83, 1.

á̄- utter, ii. 12, 15; viii. 48, 14.

prá- utter forth, iṣ ao., avādiṣur, vii. 103, 1.

sám- converse about (acc.) with (inst.), vii. 86, 2.

vád-ant, pr. pt. speaking, vii. 103, 3. 6. 7.

van win, VIII. vanóti win [Eng. win; cp. Lat. ven-ia ‘favour’].

á̄-, ds. vivāsa seek to win, ii. 33, 6; v. 83, 1.

van-ús, m. enemy, iv. 50, 11 [ eager, rival: van win ].

váne-vane, lc. itv. cd. in every wood, v. 11, 6.

vand praise, I. A. vándate, iv. 50, 7 [nasalized form of vad].

pári- extol, with (inst.), ii. 33, 12.

vánda-māna, pr. pt. Ā. approving, ii. 33. 12.

vap strew, I. vápati, vápate.

ní- lay low, ii. 33, 11.

vapuṣ-yà, a. fair, i. 160, 2 [vápus, n. beautiful appearance ].

vay-ám, prs. prn. N. pl. we, i. 1, 7; ii. 12, 15; iii, 59, 3. 4; iv. 50, 6; 51, 11; vi. 54, 8. 9; vii. 86, 5; viii. 48, 9. 13. 14; x. 14, 6; 127, 4 [Av. vaem, Go. wais, Eng. we ].

váy-as, n. force, ii. 33, 6; viii. 48, 1 [ food, strength: vī enjoy ].

vay-á̄, f. offshoot, ii. 35, 8.

vayúnā-vat, a. clear, iv. 51, 1 [vayúnā].

vayo-dhá̄, m. bestower of strength, viii. 48, 15 [váyas force + dhā bestowing ].

vár-i-man, n. expanse, iii. 59, 3 [vṛ cover ].

vár-i-vas, n. wide space, vii. 63, 6; prosperity, iv. 50, 9 [ breadth, freedom: vṛ cover ].

varivo-vít-tara, cpv. m. best finder of relief, best banisher of care, viii. 48, 1 [várivas + vid find ].

vár-īyas, cpv. a. wider, ii. 12, 2 [urú wide ].

Vár-uṇa, m. vii. 49, 3. 4; 61, 1. 4; 63, 1. 6; 86, 2. 3 2 . 4. 6. 8; x. 14, 7 [Gk. οὐρανό-ς ‘heaven’; vṛ cover, encompass ].

vár-ṇa, m. colour, ii. 12, 4 [ coating: vṛ cover ].

várta-māna, pr. pt. Ā., with á̄ rolling hither, i. 35, 2 [vṛt turn ].

várt-man, n. track, i. 85, 3 [vṛt turn ].

várdh-ana, n. strengthening, ii. 12, 14 [vṛdh increase ].

várdha-māna, pr. pt. Ā. growing, i. 1, 8 [vṛdh grow ].

várvṛt-āna, pr. pt. Ā. int. rolling about, x. 34, 1 [vṛt turn ].

varṣ-á, n. rain, v. 83, 10 [vṛṣ rain ].

varṣ-yà, a. rainy, v. 83, 3 2 .

val-á, m. enclosure, cave, iv. 50, 5 [vṛ cover ].

valgū-yá, den. honour, iv. 50, 7.

vaś desire, II. váṣṭi, s. 1. váśmi, ii. 33, 13; pl. 1. uśmasi, i. 154, 6.

1. vas shine, VI. P. ucháti: pf. pl. 2. ūsa, iv. 51, 4 [Av. usaiti ‘shines’]..

2. vas wear, II. Ā. váste [cp. Gk. ἕννυμι = ϝέσνυμι, AS. werian, Eng. wear ].

abhí-, cs. clothe, i. 160, 2.

3. vas dwell, I. P. vásati [AS. wesan ‘be’, Eng. was; in Gk. ἄστυ = ϝάστυ].

prá- go on journeys, viii. 29, 8.

vas, enc. prs. prn. A. you, i. 85, 6; iv. 51, 10. 11; D. to or for you, i. 85, 6. 12; iv. 51, 4; x. 15, 4. 6; G. of you, ii. 33, 13; x. 34, 12. 14 [Av. vō, Lat. vōs ].

vas-atí, f. abode, nest, x. 127, 4 [vas dwell ].

vas-ant-á, m. spring, x. 90, 6 [vas shine ].

vás-āna, pr. pt. Ā. clothing oneself in (acc.), ii. 35, 9 [2. vas wear ].

vás-iṣṭha, spv. a. best; m. name of a seer, vii. 86, 5; pl. a family of ancient seers, x. 15, 8 [vas shine ].

vás-u, n. wealth, vi. 54, 4; vii. 103, 10; x. 15, 7 [vas shine ].

vasu-déya, n. granting of wealth, ii. 33, 7.

vásu-mant, a. laden with wealth, vii. 71, 3. 4.

vásn-ya, a. for sale, x. 34, 3 [vasná, n. price, Gk. ὡνο-ς = ϝω̂σ-νο-ς ‘purchase price’, Lat. vēnu-m = ves-num ].

vás-yas, acc. adv. for greater welfare, viii. 48, 9 [cpv. of vásu good ].

vás-yāṃs, cpv. a. wealthier, viii. 48, 6 [cpv. of vás-u].

vah carry, draw, drive, I. váha, vii. 63, 2; s ao. ávāṭ, x. 15, 12 [Lat. veh-ere, Eng. weigh ].

ánu- drive after: pf. anūhiré, x. 15, 8.

á̄- bring, i. 1, 2; 85, 6; vii. 71, 3; x. 14, 4.

ní- bring: pf. ūhathur, vii. 71, 5.

váh-ant, pr. pt. carrying, i. 35, 5; bearing, ii. 35, 9; bringing, vii. 71, 2.

váh-ant-ī, pr. pt. f. bringing, ii. 35, 14.

váh-ni, m. driver, i. 160, 3 [vah drive ].

vā blow, II. P. váti [Av. vaiti, Gk. ἄησι = ἄ-ϝη-σι; cf. Go. waian, German wehen ‘blow’].

prá- blow forth, v. 83, 4.

vā, enc. cj. or, iv. 51, 4; x. 15, 2 [Lat. ve ].

vá̄c, f. voice, vii. 103, 1. 4. 5. 6. 8; x. 34, 5 [vac speak; Lat. vōx = vōc-s ].

vá̄j-a, m. conflict, i. 85, 5; booty, ii. 12, 15; vi. 54, 5 [vaj be strong ].

vāja-yú, a. desirous of gain, ii. 35, 1.

vāj-ín, a. victorious, x. 34, 4 [vá̄ja].

vāṇá, m. pipe, i. 85, 10.

vá̄-ta, m. wind, v. 83, 4; x. 168, 1. 2. 4 [vā blow; cp. Lat. ven-tu-s, Gk. ἀήτη-ς].

vām, enc. prs. prn. du. A. you two, iv. 50, 10; vii. 61, 6 3 ; 63, 5; 71, 1; D. for you two, vii. 61, 2. 5 2 ; vii. 71, 4; G. of you two, i. 154, 6; iv. 50, 11; vii. 61, 1; 71, 3, 4.

vā-má, n. wealth, vii. 71, 2 [vā = van win ].

vᾱyav-yȧ, a. relating to the wind, aërial, x. 90, 8 [vāyú].

vā-yú, m. wind, x. 90, 13 [vā blow ].

vá̄r-ya, gdv. desirable, i. 35, 8 [vṛ choose ].

vá̄vaś-at, pr. pt. int. lowing, iv. 50, 5 [vāś low ].

vāvṛdh-āná, pr. pt. Ā. having grown, x. 14, 3 [vṛdh grow ].

vá̄śī, f. axe, viii. 29, 3.

vāsar-á, a. vernal, viii. 48, 7 [*vasar spring; Gk. ἔαρ, Lith. vasarà ].

vá̄s-tu, n. abode, i. 154, 6 [vas dwell: Gk. ϝάστυ].

ví, m. bird, i. 85, 7; viii. 29, 8; pl. N. váyas, x. 127, 4 [Av. vi -, Lat. avi-s ].

vi-krámaṇa, n. wide stride, i. 154, 2; x. 15, 3.

vi-cakramāṇá, pf. pt. Ā. having strode out, i. 154, 1 [kram stride ].

ví-carṣaṇi, a. active, i. 35, 9.

víj, pl. stake at play, ii. 12, 5.

ví-tata, pp. extended, x. 129, 5 [tan stretch ].

vi-tarám, adv. far away, ii. 33. 2 [cpv. of prp. ví away ].

vit-tá, n. property, x. 34, 13 [pp. of vid find, acquire: acquisition ].

1. vid know, II. P. vétti; pr. sb. know of (gen.), ii. 35, 2; ipv. viddhi, viii. 48, 8; pf. véda, viii. 29, 6; s. 2. véttha, x. 15, 13; 3. véda, x. 129, 6 2 . 7 2 ; pl. 1. vidmá, x. 15, 13 [Gk. οɩ̂̓δα, ἴδμεν; AS. ic wāt, wē witon; Eng. I wot; Lat. vid-ēre ‘see’].

prá- know, x. 15, 13.

2. vid find, VI. vindá, vi. 54, 4; x. 34, 3 2 ; pf. víveda, x. 14, 2; a ao., v. 83, 10; viii. 48, 3.

ánu- find out, ii. 12, 11; v. 11, 6.

á̄-, s ao. win hither, x. 15, 3.

nís- find out, x. 129, 4.

vid-átha, m. divine worship, i. 85, 1; ii. 12, 15; 33, 15; 35, 15; viii. 48, 14 [vidh worship ].

vi-dyút, f. lightning, ii. 35, 9; v. 83, 4 [ví afar + dyut shine ].

vid-vá̄ṃs, unred. pf. pt. knowing, vi. 54, 1 [Gk. ϝειδώς].

vidh worship, VI. vidhá, ii. 35, 12; iv. 50, 6; vi. 54, 4; viii. 48, 12. 13; x. 168, 4.

práti- pay worship to, vii. 63, 5.

vidh-ánt, pr. pt. m. worshipper, ii. 35, 7.

vi-dhá̄na, n. task, iv. 51, 6 [ dis-position: ví prp. + dhá̄na from dhā put ].

vi-pṛ́ch-am, acc. inf. to ask, vii. 86, 3.

víp-ra, a. wise, iv. 50, 1; m. sage, i. 85, 11; vii. 61, 2; x. 135, 4 [ inspired: vip tremble with emotion ].

vi-bhāt-í̄, pr. pt. f. shining forth, iv. 51, 1. 10. 11 [bhā shine ].

vi-bhí̄daka, m. a nut used as a die for gambling, vii. 86, 6; x. 34, 1 [probably from ví-bhid split asunder, but the meaning here applied is obscure].

vi-bhrá̄ja-māna, pr. pt. Ā. shining forth, vii. 63, 3 [bhrāj shine; Av. brāzaiti ‘beams’, Gk. ϕλέγω ‘flame’].

ví-madhya, m. middle, iv. 51, 3.

vi-rapśá, m. abundance, iv. 50, 3 [ví + rapś be full ].

Vi-rá̄j, m. name of a divine being identified with Puruṣa, x. 90, 5 2 [ farruling ].

virā-ṣá̄h, a. overcoming men, i. 35, 6 [= vīra-ṣá̄h for. vīra-sá̄h].

vi-rúk-mant, m. shining weapon, i. 85, 3 [ruc shine ].

ví-rūpa, a. having different colours, vii. 103, 6 [rūpá, n. form ].

Vivás-vant, m. name of a divine being, v. 11, 3; x. 14, 5 [ví + vas shine afar ].

víś, f. settlement, x. 15, 2; abode, vii. 61, 3; settler, i. 35, 5; subject, iv. 50, 8.

viś enter, VI. viśá.

á̄- enter, iv. 50, 10; viii. 48, 12. 15.

ní- come home, go to rest, x. 34, 14; 168, 3; s ao., avikṣmahí, x. 127, 4; cs. veśáya cause to rest, i. 35, 2.

viś-páti, m. master of the house, x. 135, 1.

víśva, prn. a. all, i. 35, 3. 5; 85, 3. 8; 154, 2. 4; ii. 12, 4. 7. 9; 33, 3. 10; 35, 2. 15; iii. 59, 8; iv. 50, 7; v. 83, 2. 4. 9; vii. 61, 1. 5. 7; 63, 1. 6; x. 15, 6; 90, 3; 127, 1; 168, 2.

viśvá-tas, adv on every side, i. 1, 4; viii. 48, 15; x. 90, 1; in all directions, x. 135, 3.

viśva-dá̄nīm, adv. always, iv. 50, 8.

viśvá-deva, a. [Bv.] belonging to all the gods, iv. 50, 6.

viśvá-psnya, a. laden with all food, vii. 71, 4 [psnya from psā eat ].

viśvá-rūpa, a. (Bv.) omniform, i. 35, 4; ii. 33, 10; v. 83, 5.

viśvá-śambhū, a. beneficial to all, i. 160, 1. 4 [śám prosperity + bhū being for, conducing to ].

viśvá-ha, adv. always, ii. 12, 15; viii. 48, 14; -hā, id., i. 160, 5; for ever, ii. 35, 14.

viśvá̄hā, adv. always, i. 160, 3 [víśvā áhā all days ].

víśve devá̄s, m. pl. the all-gods, vii. 49, 4; viii. 48, 1.

viṣ work, III. víveṣṭi: pf. vivéṣa, ii. 35, 13.

ví-ṣita, pp. unfastened, v. 83, 7. 8 [ví + si bind ].

víṣu-ṇa, a. varied in form, viii. 29, 1.

víṣūcī, a. f. turned in various directions, ii. 33, 2 [f. of víṣv-añc].

vi-ṣṭhá̄ host (?), x. 168, 2.

Víṣ-ṇu, m. a solar deity, i. 85, 7; 154, 1. 2. 3. 5; x. 15, 3 [viṣ be active ].

víṣv-añc, a. turned in all directions, x. 90, 4.

vi-sargá, m. release, vii. 103, 9 [ví + sṛj let go ].

vi-sárjana, n. creation, x. 129, 6 [vi + sṛj let go ].

ví-sṛṣṭi, f. creation, x. 129, 6. 7 [ví + sṛj let go ].

vi-srásas, ab. inf. from breaking, viii. 48, 5 [vi + sras fall ].

ví-hāyas, a. mighty, viii. 48, 11.

vī guide, II. véti, i. 35, 9.

úpa- come to (acc.), v. 11, 4.

vī-rá, m. hero, i. 85, 1; ii. 33, 1; 35, 4 [Av. vīra, Lat. vir, OI. fer, Go. wair, Lith. výra, ‘man’].

vīrá-vat-tama, spv. a. most abounding in heroes, i. 1, 3.

vīrá-vant, a. possessed of heroes, iv. 50, 6.

vīrúdh, f. plant, ii. 35, 8 [ví asunder + rudh grow ].

vīr-yà, n. heroic deed, i. 154, 1. 2; heroism, iv. 50, 7 [vīrá hero ].

1. vṛ cover, V. vṛṇóti, vṛṇute. á̄-, int. ipf. á̄-varīvar contain, x. 129, 1. ví- unclose, rt. ao. avran, iv. 51, 2.

2. vṛ choose, IX. Ā. vṛṇīte, ii. 33, 13; v. 11, 4; x. 127, 8.

vṛ́k-a, m. wolf, x. 127, 6 [Gk. λύκο-ς, Lat. lupu-s, Lith. vilka-s, Eng. wolf ].

vṛk-í̄, f. she-wolf, x. 127, 6.

vṛktá-barhis, a. (Bv.) whose sacrificial grass is spread, iii. 59, 9 [vṛktá, pp. of vṛj + barhís, q. v.].

vṛk-ṣá, m. tree, v. 83, 2; x. 127, 4; 135, 1 [vṛk simpler form of vraśc cut, fell ].

vṛj twist, VII. vṛṇákti, vrṅkté.

pári- pass by, ii. 33, 14.

vṛj-ána, n. circle ( = family, sons), vii. 61, 4 [ enclosure = vṛj].

vṛṇāná, pr. pt. Ā. choosing, v. 11, 4 [vṛ choose ].

vṛt turn, I. Ā. vártate roll, x. 34, 9; cs. vartáya turn, i. 85, 9.

á̄-, cs. whirl hither, vii. 71, 3.

nís-, cs. roll out, x. 135, 5.

prá-, cs. set rolling, x. 135, 4.

ánu prá- roll forth after,, x. 135, 4.

sám- be evolved, x. 90, 14.

ádhi sám- come upon, x. 129, 4.

Vṛ-trá, m. name of a demon, i. 85, 9; n. foe (pl.), viii. 29, 4 [ encompasser: vṛ cover ].

vṛ-tvá̄, gd., having covered, x. 90, 1.

vṛdh grow, I. várdha, i. 85, 7; ii. 35, 11; cause to prosper, iv. 50, 11; increase, pf. vāvṛdhúr, x. 14, 3; cs. vardháya strengthen, v. 11, 3. 5.

vṛdh-é, dat. inf. to increase, i. 85, 1.

vṛṣ rain, I. várṣa rain: iṣ ao. ávarṣīs, v. 83, 10.

abhí- rain upon, ao. vii. 103, 3.

vṛ́ṣaṇ-vasu, a. (Bv.) of mighty wealth, iv. 50, 10 [vṛ́ṣan bull ].

vṛ́ṣ-an, m. bull, i. 85, 7. 12; 154, 3. 6; ii. 33, 13; 35, 13; iv. 50, 6; v. 83, 6 (with áśva = stallion ); vii. 61, 5; 71, 6; stallion, vii. 71, 3 [Av. arz̆an, Gk. ἔρσην].

vṛṣa-bhá, m. bull, i. 160, 3; ii. 12, 12; 33, 4. 6-8. 15; v. 83, 1; vii. 49, 1.

vṛṣa-lá, m. beggar, x. 34, 11 [ little man ].

vṛ́ṣa-vrāta, a. (Bv.) having mighty hosts, i. 85, 4 [vṛ́ṣan bull, stallion ].

vṛṣ-ṭí, f. rain, v. 83, 6 [vṛṣ rain ].

vṛ́ṣṇyā-vant, a. mighty, v. 83, 2 [vṛ́ṣṇya manly strength, from vṛ́ạan bull ].

véd-ana, n. possession, x. 34, 4 [vid find, acquire ].

vedh-ás, m. disposer, iii. 59, 4 [vidh worship, be gracious ].

ven long, I. P. vénati.

ánu- seek the friendship of, x. 135, 1.

voḷhṛ́, n. vehicle, vii. 71, 4 [vah draw + tṛ; Av. vaśtar ‘draught animal’ Lat. vector ].

vái, pcl., ii. 33, 9. 10 [180].

Vairūpá, m. son of Virūpa, x. 14, 5.

Vaivasvatá, m. son of Vivasvant, x. 14, 1.

váiśya, m. man of the third caste, x. 90, 12 [ belonging to the settlement = víś].

vaiśvānará, a. belonging to all men, epithet of Agni, vii. 49, 4 [viśvá̄-nara].

vy-ȧkta, pp. distinguished by (inst.), x. 14, 9; palpable, x. 127, 7 [ví + añj adorn ].

vyac extend, III. P. vivyakti.

sám- roll up, ipf. ávivyak, vii. 63, 1.

vyath waver, I. vyátha, vi. 54, 3.

vyátha-māna, pr. pt. Ā. quaking, ii. 12, 2.

vyùṣṭi, f. daybreak, vii. 71, 3 [ví + vas shine ].

vy-òman, n. heaven, iv. 50, 4; x. 14, 8; 129, 1. 7 [ví + oman of doubtful etymology].

vraj-á, m. pen, fold, iv. 51, 2 [vṛj enclose ].

vra-tá, n. will, ordinance, iii. 59, 2. 3; v. 83, 5; viii. 48, 9; service, vi. 54, 9 [vṛ choose ].

vrata-cārín, a. practising a vow, vii. 103, 1 [cār-ín, from car go, practise ].

vrá̄ta, m. troop, host, x. 34, 8. 12.

Śaṃs praise, I. śáṃsa, vii. 61, 4 [Lat. censeo ].

śáṃs-ant, pr. pt. praising, ii. 12, 14; iv. 51, 7.

śatá, n. hundred, ii. 33, 2; vii. 103, 10 [Gk. ἑκατό-ν, Lat. centum, Go. hund ].

śáṃ-tama, spv. a. most beneficent, ii. 33, 2. 13; x. 15, 4 [śám, n. healing ].

śaphá-vant, a. having hoofs, v. 83, 5.

śabála, a. brindled, x. 14, 10.

śám, n. healing, ii. 33, 13; comfort, v. 11, 5; viii. 48, 4; health, x. 15, 4; prosperity, viii. 86, 8 2 .

Śámbara, m. name of a demon, ii. 12, 11.

śáy-āna, pr. pt. Ā. lying, ii. 12, 11; vii. 103, 2 [śī lie ].

śarád, f. autumn, ii. 12, 11; vii. 61, 2; x. 90, 6.

śár-u, f. arrow, ii. 12, 10; vii. 71, 1 [Go. hairu-s ].

śárdh-ant, pr. pt. arrogant, ii. 12, 10 [śṛdh be defiant ].

śár-man, n. shelter, i. 85, 12; v. 83, 5; x. 129, 1 [Lith. szátma-s ‘helmet’, OG. helm ‘helmet’].

śáv-as, n. power, v. 11, 5 [śū swell ].

śaśam-āná, pf. pt. Ā. having prepared (the sacrifice), i. 85, 12; ii. 12, 14; strenuous, iv. 51, 7 [śam toil ].

śaśay-āná, pf. pt. Ā. lying, vii. 103, 1 [śī lie ].

śáś-vant, a. ever repeating itself, many, ii. 12, 10; -vat, adv. for ever, i. 35, 5 [for sá + śvant, orig. pt. of śū swell, Gk. ἅ-παντ-].

śāktá, m. teacher, vii. 103, 5 [śak be able ].

śās order, II. śá̄sti, śá̄ste.

ánu- instruct, vi. 54, 1.

abhí- guide to (acc.), vi. 54, 2.

śík-van flame (?), ii. 35, 4.

śikṣ be helpful, pay obeisance, I. śíkṣa, iii. 59, 2 [ds. of śak be able ].

śíkṣa-māṇa (pr. pt. Ā.), m. learner, vii. 103, 5.

śiti-pád, a. (Bv.) white-footed, i. 35, 5.

śithirá, a. loose; n. freedom, vii. 71, 5 [Gk. καθαρό-ς ‘free, pure’].

śivá, a. kind, x. 34, 2.

śíśu, m. child, ii. 33, 13 [śū swell, cp. Gk. κυέω].

śiśriy-āṇá, pf. pt. Ā. abiding, v. 11, 6 [śri resort ].

śī-tá, a. cold, x. 34, 9 [old pp. of śyā coagulate ].

śīrṣ-án, n. head, x. 90, 14 [śir(a)s head + an; cp. Gk. κόρσ-η ‘head’].

śuk-rá, a. shining, i. 160, 3; bright, ii. 33, 9; iv. 51, 9; clear, ii. 35, 4 [śuc be bright, Av. sux-ra ‘flaming’].

śúc-i, a. bright, i. 160, 1; bright, ii. 35, 8; iv. 51, 2. 9; v. 11, 1. 3; viii. 29, 5; clear, vii. 49, 2. 3; pure, ii. 33, 13; 35, 3 2 [śuc shine ].

śúbh, f. brilliance; = shining path (cog. acc.), iv. 51, 6.

śubh-áya, Ā. adorn oneself, i. 85, 3.

śubh-rá, a. bright, i. 35, 3; 85, 3; iv. 51, 6 [śubh adorn ].

śumbh, adorn, I. Ā. śúmbhate.

prá- adorn oneself, i. 85, 1.

śúṣ-ka, a. dry, vii. 103, 2 [for suṣ-ka, Av. huš-ka ].

śúṣ-ma, m. vehemence, ii. 12, 1. 13; impulse, iv. 50, 7; force, vii. 61, 4 [śvas blow, snort ].

śú̄-ra, m. hero, i. 85, 8 [Av. sūra ‘strong’, Gk. ἄ-κυρο-ς ‘in-valid’].

śūdrá, m. man of the servile caste, x. 90, 12.

śú̄śuj-ána, pf. pt. A. trembling (?), x. 34, 6.

śūṣ-á, a. inspiring, i. 154, 3 [śvas breathe ].

śṛṇv-ánt, pr. pt. hearing, vi. 54, 8 [śru hear ].

śṛdh-yá̄, f. arrogance, ii. 12, 10 [śṛdh be arrogant ].

śṛ̃ crush, IX. śṛṇá̄ti.

sám- be crushed: ps. ao. śāri, vi. 54, 7.

ścut drip, I. ścóta, iv. 50, 3.

śyā-vá, a. dusky, i. 35, 5 [OSl. si-vŭ ‘grey’].

śyená, m. eagle, vii. 63, 5; m. hawk, x. 127, 5.

śrád heart only with dhā = put faith in, believe in (dat.), ii. 12, 5 [Lat. cord-, Gk. καρδ-ίη ‘heart’].

śráv-as, n. fame, i. 160, 5; iii. 59, 7 [śru hear; Gk. κλέϝος ‘fame’, OSl. slovo ‘word’].

śravas-yú, a. fame-seeking, i. 85, 8.

śri-tá, pp. reaching to (lc.), v. 11, 3.

śrí̄, f. glory, i. 85, 2; iv. 33, 3; x. 127, 1.

śru, V. śṛṇóti, hear, ii. 33, 4; x. 15, 5; pl. 3. śṛṇvire = ps., x. 168, 4.

śru-tá, pp. heard; famous, ii. 33, 11 [śru hear, Gk. κλυ-τό-ς ‘famous’, Lat. in-clu-tu-s ‘famous’].

śré-ṣṭha, spv. a. best, ii. 33, 3.

śró-tra, n. ear, x. 90, 14 [śru hear ].

śráuṣ-ṭī, f. obedient mare, viii, 48, 2 [śruṣ hear, extension of śru].

śva-ghn-ín, m. gambler, ii. 12, 4.

śván, m. dog, x. 14, 10. 11 [Av. span, Gk. κύων].

śva-śrú̄, f. mother-in-law, x. 34, 3 [OSl. svekry, svekrǔve ].

śvity-áñc, a. whitish, ii. 33, 8 [śviti (akin to śvetá, Go. hweits, Eng. white ) + añc].

Ṣáṣ, nm. six, x. 14, 16 [Av. xšvaš, Gk. ἕξ, Lat. sex, OI. sē, Go. saihs, Eng. six ].

Sá, dem. prn. N. s. m. that, he, i. 1, 2. 4. 9; 154, 5; 160, 3; ii. 12, 1-14; ii. 33, 13 3 ; 35, 1. 4. 5. 8. 10; iii. 59, 2. 8; iv. 50, 5 2 . 7. 8; 51, 4; v. 11, 2. 6; 83, 5; vii. 61, 1. 2; 86, 6; x. 14, 14; 34, 11; 90, 1. 5; 129, 7; as such = thus, ii. 12, 15; viii. 48, 9 [Av. hō, Gk. ὁ, Go. sa ].

saṃ-yánt, pr. pt. going together, ii. 12, 8 [sám + i go ].

saṃ-rarāṇá, pf. pt. Ā. sharing gifts, x. 15, 8 [sám + rā give ].

saṃ-vatsará, m. year, vii. 103, 1. 7. 9.

saṃ-vid-āná, pr. pt. Ā. uniting, with (inst.), viii. 48, 13; x. 14, 4 [vid find ].

saṃ-vṛ́j, a. conquering, ii. 12, 3.

sákh-i, m. friend, ii. 35, 12; vii. 86, 4; viii. 48, 4 2 . 10; x. 34, 2. 5; 168, 3.

sakh-yá, n. friendship, viii. 48, 2.

saṃ-gámana, m. assembler, x. 14, 1.

sac accompany, I. Ā. sácate, i. 1, 9; vii. 61, 5; associate with, viii. 48, 10; reach, x. 90, 16 [Gk. ἕπεται, Lat. sequitur, Lith. sekù ].

sác-ā, adv. prp. with (lc.), iv. 50, 11 [sac accompany ].

sájan-ya, a. belonging to his own people, iv. 50, 9 [sa-jana, kinsman ].

sa-jóṣas, a. acting in harmony with (inst.), viii. 48, 15 [jóṣas, n. pleasure ].

sat, n. the existent, x. 129, 1 [pr. pt. of as be ].

sát-pati, m. true (?) lord, ii. 33, 12.

sat-yá, a. true, i. 1, 5. 6; ii. 12, 15; x. 15, 9. 10 [sat, n. truth + ya].

satyá-dharman, a. (Bv.) whose ordinances are true, x. 34, 8.

satyānṛtá, n. Dv. cd. truth and falsehood, vii. 49, 3 [satyá + ánṛta].

sad sit down, I. P. sí̄dati, i. 85, 7; sit down on (acc.). a ao. sadata, x. 15, 11 [Lat. sīdo ].

á̄- seat oneself on (acc.), i. 85, 6; occupy: pf. sasāda, viii. 29, 2.

ní- sit down, pf. (ní)ṣedur, iv. 50, 3; inj. sīdat, v. 11, 2; settle: pf. s. 2. sasáttha, viii. 48, 9.

sád-as, n. seat, iv. 51, 8; viii. 29, 9; abode, i. 85, 2. 6. 7 [Gk. ἕδος].

sádas-sadas, acc. itv. ed. on each seat, x. 15, 11.

sá-dā, adv. always, vii. 61, 7; 63, 6; 71, 6; 86, 8.

sa-dṛ́ś, a., f.-ī, alike, iv. 51, 6 [ having a similar appearance ].

sa-dyás, adv. in one day, iv. 51, 5; at once, iv. 51, 7.

sadha-má̄da, m. joint feast, x. 14. 10 [ co-revelry; sadhá = sahá together ].

sadhá-stha, n. gathering place, i. 154, 1. 3.

san gain, VIII. P. sanóti, vi. 54, 5.

sanáya, a. old, iv. 51, 4 [from sána; Gk. ἕνο-ς, OI. sen, Lith. sẽnas ‘old’].

sánt, pr. pt. being, x. 34, 9 [as be; Lat. ( prae )- sent -].

saṃ-dṛ́ś, f. sight, ii. 33, 1.

saptá, nm. seven, i. 35, 8; ii. 12, 3. 12; x. 90, 15 2 [Gk. ἑπτά, Lat. septem, Eng. seven ].

saptá-raśmi, a. (Bv.) seven-reined, ii. 12, 12; seven-rayed, iv. 50, 4.

saptá̄sya, a. (Bv.) seven-mouthed, iv. 50, 4; 51, 4 [saptá + āsya, n. mouth ].

sáp-ti, m. racer, i. 85, 1. 6.

sa-práthas, a. (Bv.) renowned, iii. 59, 7 [ accompanied by práthas, n. fame ].

sa-bá̄dha, a. zealous, vii. 61, 6 [bādhá, m. stress ].

sabhá̄, f. assembly hall, x. 34, 6 [OG. sippa ‘kinship’, AS. sib ].

samá, a. level, v. 83, 7 [Av. hama ‘equal’, Gk. ὁμό-ς, Eng. same, cp. Lat. simi-li-s ].

sam-ád, f. battle, ii. 12, 3.

sám-ana, n. festival, x. 168, 2 [ coming together ].

samaná̄, adv. in the same way, iv. 51, 8 2 [inst., with shift of accent, from sámana being together ].

samāná, a., f. ī, same, ii. 12, 8; iv. 51, 9; vii. 86, 3; uniform, vii. 63, 2; common, ii. 35, 3; vii. 63, 3; 103, 6.

samāná-tas, adv. from the same place, iv. 51, 8.

sam-ídh, f. faggot, x. 90, 15 [sám + idh kindle ].

samudrá-jyeṣṭha, a. (Bv.) having the ocean as their chief, vii. 49, 1 [samudrá, m. collection of waters + jyeṣṭha, spv. chief ].

samudrá̄rtha, a. (Bv.) having the ocean as their goal, vii. 49, 2 [ártha, m. goal ].

sam-ṛ́dh, f. unison, vii. 103, 5 [sám + ṛdh thrive ].

sáṃ-pṛkta, pp. mixed with (inst.), x. 34, 7 [pṛc mix ].

saṃ-pṛ́cas, ab. inf. from mingling with, ii. 35, 6 [pṛc mix ].

sáṃ-bhṛta, pp. collected, x. 90, 8 [bhṛ bear ].

sam-rá̄j, m. sovereign king, viii. 29, 9.

sa-yúj, a. united with (inst.), x. 168, 2.

sa-rátham, adv. (cog. acc.) on the same car, with (inst.), v. 11, 2; x. 15, 10; 168, 2.

sár-as, n. lake, vii. 103, 7 [sṛ run ].

saras-í̄, f. lake, vii. 103, 2.

sárg-a, m. herd, iv. 51, 8 [sṛj let loose ].

sárt-ave, dat. inf. to flow, ii. 12, 12 [sṛ flow ].

sṛp creep, I. P. sárpati.

ví- slink off, x. 14, 9.

sarpír-āsuti, a. (Bv.) having melted butter as their draught, viii. 29, 9 [sarpís (from sṛp run = melt ) + ā-sutí brew from su press ].

sárva, a. all, vii. 103, 5; x. 14, 16; 90, 2; 129, 3 [Gk. ὅλο-ς = ὅλ-ϝο-ς, Lat. salvu-s ‘whole’].

sárva-vīra, a. consisting entirely of sons, iv. 50, 10; x. 15, 11.

sarva-hút, a. (Tp.) completely offering, x. 90, 8. 9 [hu-t: hu sacrifice + determinative t].

sal-ilá, n. water, x. 129, 3; sea, vii. 49, 1 [sal = sṛ flow ].

Sav-i-tṛ́, m. a solar god, i. 35, 1-6. 8-10; vii. 63, 3; x. 34, 8. 13 [ Stimulator from sù stimulate ].

sas sleep, II. P. sásti, iv. 51, 3.

sas-ánt, pr. pt. sleeping, iv. 51, 5.

sah overcome, I. sáha, x. 34, 9 [Gk. ἔχω, ao. ἔσ(ε)χ-ον].

sáh-as, n. might, iv. 50, 1; v. 11, 6 2 [sah overcome ].

sa-hásra, nm. a thousand, x. 15, 10 [Gk. χίλιοι, Lesbian χέλλιοι from χέσλο].

sahásra-pād, a. (Bv.) thousand-footed, x. 90, 1 [pad foot ].

sahásra-bhṛṣṭi, a. (Bv.) thousand-edged, i. 85, 9 [bhṛṣ-ṭí from bhṛṣ = hṛṣ stick up ].

sahásra-śīrṣan, a. thousand-headed, x. 34, 14.

sahasra-sāvá, m. thousandfold Soma-pressing, vii. 103, 10 [sāvá, m. pressing from su press ].

sahasrākṣá, a. (Bv.) thousand-eyed, x. 90, 1 [akṣá eye = ákṣi].

sá-hūti, f. joint praise, ii. 33, 4 [hūti invocation from hū call ].

sā bind, VI. syáti.

ví- discharge, i. 85, 5.

sá̄, dem. prn. N. s. f. that, iv. 50, 11; vii. 86, 6; as such = so, x. 127, 4.

sá̄d-ana, n. seat, x. 135, 7 [sad sit ].

sá̄dhāraṇa, a. belonging jointly, common, vii. 63, 1 [sa-ādhāraṇa having the same support ].

sādh-ú, a. good, x. 14, 10.

sādhu-yá̄, adv. straightway, v. 11, 4.

Sādh-yá, m. pl. a group of divine beings, x. 90, 7. 16.

sān-as-í, a. bringing gain, iii. 59, 6 [san gain ].

sá̄n-u, n. m. back, ii. 35, 12.

sá̄-man, n. chant, viii. 29, 10; x. 90, 9; 135, 4.

sá̄ya-ka, n. arrow, ii. 33, 10 [ suitable for hurling: si hurl ].

sārameyá, m. son of Saramā, x. 14, 10.

sāśanānaśaná, n. (Dv.) eating and noneating things, x. 90, 4 [sa-aśana + anaśana].

siṃhá, m. lion, v. 83, 3.

sic pour, VI. siñcá, i. 85, 11 [OG. sīg-u ‘drip’, Lettic sik-u ‘fall’ of water].

ní- pour down, v. 83, 8.

sidh repel, I. P. sédhati.

ápa- chase away, i. 35, 10.

síndh-u, m. river, i. 35, 8; ii. 12, 3. 12; Indus, v. 11, 5 [Av. hind-u-s ].

siṣvid-āná, pf. pt. Ā. sweating, vii. 103, 8 [svid perspire: Eng. sweat ].

sīm, enc. prn. pcl. him c., i. 160, 2.

su press, V. sunóti, sunuté, V. 14, 13 [Av. hu ].

sú, adv. well, ii. 35, 2; v. 83, 7; vii. 86, 8 [Av. hu -, OI. su -].

sú-kṛta, pp. well-made, i. 35, 11; 85, 9; well prepared, x. 15, 13; 34, 11.

su-krátu, a. (Bv.) very wise, v. 11, 2; vii. 61, 2 [krátu wisdom ].

sukratū-yá̄, f. insight, i. 160, 4.

su-kṣatrá, a. (Bv.) wielding fair sway, iii. 59, 4.

su-kṣití, f. safe dwelling, ii. 35, 15.

su-gá, a. easy to traverse, i. 35, 11; vii. 63, 6.

su-jánman, a. (Bv.) producing fair creations, i. 160, 1.

su-tá, pp. pressed, viii. 48, 7; x. 15, 3.

sú-taṣṭa, pp. well-fashioned, ii. 35, 2 [takṣ fashion ].

sutá-soma, (Bv.) m. Soma-presser, ii. 12, 6.

su-tára, a. easy to pass, x. 127, 6.

su-dáṃsas, a. (Bv.) wondrous, i. 85, 1 [dáṃsas wonder ].

su-dákṣa, a. (Bv.) most skilful, v. 11, 1.

su-dá̄nu, a. bountiful, i. 85, 10; vii. 61, 3.

su-dúgha, a. (Bv.) yielding good milk, ii. 35, 7 [dúgha milking: dugh = duh].

sú-dhita, pp. well-established, iv. 50, 8 [dhita, pp. of dhā put ].

su-dhṛ́ṣ-ṭama, spv. a. very proud, i. 160, 2.

su-nīthá, a. (Bv.) giving good guidance, i. 35, 7. 10.

sunv-ánt, pr. pt. pressing Soma, ii. 12, 14. 15; vi. 54, 6 [su press ].

su-pátha, n. fair path, vii. 63, 6.

su-parṇá, a. (Bv.) having beautiful wings; m. bird, i. 35, 7.

su-palāśá, a. fair-leaved, x. 135, 1.

su-péśas, a. (Bv.) well-adorned, ii. 35, 1 [péśas, n. ornament ].

su-praketá, a. conspicuous, iv. 50, 2 [praketá, m. token ].

su-prajá, a. (Bv.) having good offspring, iv. 50, 6 [prajá̄].

su-prátīka, a. (Bv.) lovely, vii. 61, 1 [ having a fair countenance: prátīka, n.].

su-práṇīti, a. (Bv.) giving good guidance, x. 15, 11.

su-prapāṇá, a. (Bv.) giving good drink; n. good drinking place, v. 83, 8.

su-bhága, a. having a good share, opulent; genial, vii. 63, 1.

su-bh u̇, a. excellent, ii. 35, 7 [sú well + bhu being ].

sú-bhṛta, pp. well cherished, iv. 50, 7.

sú-makha, m. great warrior, i. 85, 4.

su-matí, f. good-will, iii. 59, 3. 4; iv. 50, 11; viii. 48, 12; x. 14, 6.

su-mánas, a. (Bv.) cheerful, vii. 86, 2 [Av. hu-manah - ‘well-disposed’; cp. second part of εὐ-μενής].

sv-mṛ́ḷīka, a. (Bv.) very gracious, i. 35, 10 [mṛḷīká, n. mercy ].

su-medhás, a. (Bv.) having a good understanding, wise, viii. 48, 1.

su-mná, n. good-will, ii. 33, 1. 6.

sumnā-yú, a. kindly, vii. 71, 3.

su-rabhí, a. fragrant, x. 15, 12.

súrā, f. liquor, vii. 86, 6 [Av. hura ].

su-rétas, a. (Bv.) abounding in seed, i. 160, 3.

su-várcas, a. (Bv.) full of vigour, x. 14, 8.

su-vá̄c, a. (Bv.) eloquent, vii. 103, 5.

suv-itá, n. welfare, v. 11, 1 [su well + itá, pp. of i go: opposite of duritá].

su-vidátra, a. bountiful, x. 14, 10; 15, 3. 9.

su-ví̄ra, a. (Bv.) having good champions = strong sons, i. 85, 12; ii. 12, 15; 33, 15; 35, 15; viii. 48, 14.

su-ví̄rya, n. host of good champions, iv. 51, 10.

su-vṛktí, f. song of praise, ii. 35, 15; vii. 71, 6 [sú + ṛk-ti from arc praise, cp. ṛc].

su-vṛjána, a. (Bv.) having fair abodes, x. 15, 2.

su-śípra, a. (Bv.) fair-lipped, ii. 12, 6; 33, 5.

su-śéva, a. most propitious, iii. 59, 4. 5; viii. 48, 4.

su-ṣakhí, m. good friend, viii. 48, 9 [sákhi friend ].

su-ṣṭutí, f. eulogy, ii. 33, 8 [stuti praise ].

su-ṣṭúbh, a. well-praising, iv. 50, 5 [stubh praise ].

su-háva, a. (Bv.) easy to invoke, ii. 33, 5 [háva invocation ].

sú̄, adv. well, v. 83, 10 [= sú well ].

sū-nára, a. bountiful, viii. 29, 1 [Av. hunara ].

sū-nú, m. son, i. 1, 9; 85, 1; viii. 48, 4 [Av. hunu, OG. sunu, Lith. sūnù, Eng. son ].

sūpāyaná, a. (Bv.) giving easy access, easily accessible, i. 1, 9 [sú + upá̄yana].

sú̄r-a, m. sun, vii. 63, 5 [svàr light ].

sūrí, m. patron, ii. 35, 6.

sú̄r-ya, m. sun, i. 35, 7. 9; 160, 1; ii. 12, 7; 33, 1; vii. 61, 1; 63, 1. 2. 4; viii. 29, 10; x. 14, 12; 90, 13 [svàr light ].

sṛ flow, III. sísarti.

úpa prá- stretch forth to, int. 3. s. sarsr-e, ii. 35, 5.

sṛj emit, VI. sṛjáti [Av. her e zaiti ].

áva- discharge downward, ii. 12, 12; cast off, vii. 86, 5.

úpa- send forth to (acc.), ii. 35, 1.

sṛp-rá, a. extensive, iv. 50, 2 [sṛp creep ].

sé-nā, f. missile, ii. 33, 11 [si discharge ].

senā-ní̄, m. leader of an army, general, x. 34, 12.

só-ma, m. juice of the Soma plant, i. 85, 10; ii. 12, 14; iv. 50, 10; vii. 49, 4; viii. 48, 3. 4 2 . 7-15; x. 14, 13; 34, 1; Soma sacrifice, vii. 103, 7 [su press: Av. haoma ].

soma-pá̄, m. Soma drinker, ii. 12, 13.

soma-pīthá, m. Soma draught, x. 15, 8 [pīthá from pā drink ].

som-ín, a. soma-pressing, vii. 103, 8.

som-yá, a. Soma-loving, x. 14, 6; 15, 1. 5. 8.

saumanas-á, n. good graces, iii. 59, 4; x. 14, 6 [su-mánas].

skand leap, I. P. skándati, int. inj. kániṣkan, vii. 103, 4.

skabhāya, den. prop, establish, i. 154, 1 [from skabh, IX. skabhnāti].

skámbh-ana, n. prop, support, i. 160, 4.

stan thunder, II. P.; cs. stanáyati, id., v. 83, 7. 8 [Gk. στένω ‘lament’].

stan-átha, m. thunder, v. 83, 3.

stanáyant, pr. pt. thundering, v. 83, 2; x. 168, 1.

stanayi-tnú, m. thunder, v. 83, 6.

stabh or stambh prop, support, IX. stabhná̄ti, ii. 12, 2.

ví- prop asunder, pf. tastambha, iv. 50, 1; vii. 86, 1.

stăv-ᾱna, pr. pt. Ā. = ps. being praised, ii. 33, 11 [stu praise ].

sthi-rá, a. firm, ii. 33, 9. 14 [sthā stand ].

stu praise, II. stáuti, ii. 33, 11; v. 83, 1.

prá- praise aloud, i. 154, 2.

stu-tá, pp. praised, ii. 33, 12.

stuv-ánt, pr. pt. praising, iv. 51, 7; vi. 54, 6.

ste-ná, m. thief, x. 127, 6 [stā be stealthy ].

sto-tṛ́, m. praiser, vi. 54, 9; vii. 86, 4 [stu praise ].

stó-ma, m. song of praise, ii. 33, 5; vii. 86, 8; x. 127, 8 [stu praise ].

stóma-taṣṭa, a. (Tp.) fashioned into (= being the subject of) praise, x. 15, 9.

strí̄, f. woman, x. 34, 11 [Av. strī ].

sthā stand, I. tiṣṭha; pf. tasthur, i. 35, 5; rt. ao. s. 3. ásthāt, i. 35, 10; iv. 51, 1; pl. 3. ásthur, iv. 51, 2 [Av. hištaiti, Gk. ἵστημι, Lat. sisto ].

áti- extend beyond, x. 90, 1.

ádhi- ascend, x. 135, 3; stand upon, i. 35, 6.

ápa- start off, viii. 48, 11.

abhí- overcome, iv. 50, 7.

á̄- mount, i. 35, 4; mount to (acc.), i. 85, 7; occupy, ii. 35, 9.

úd- arise, v. 11, 3.

úpa- approach, rt. ao. asthita, x. 127, 7.

pári- surround, pf. tasthur, ii. 35, 3.

prá- step forth, x. 14, 14.

spáś, m. spy, vii. 61, 3 [Av. spas; cp. Lat. au-spex, Gk. σκώψ ‘owl’].

spṛ win, V. spṛṇóti.

nís- rescue, rt. ao. 2. du. spartam, vii. 71, 5.

spṛh, cs. spṛháya long for, x. 135, 2 [Av. sper e zaite ].

sphúr spurn, VI. sphurá, ii. 12, 12; spring, x. 34, 9 [Av. sparaiti, Gk. σπαίρω ‘quiver’, Lat. sperno, Lith. spiriù ‘kick’, OG. spurnu ‘kick’].

sma, enc. pcl. just, indeed, ii. 12, 5 [180].

syá, dem. prn. that, ii. 33, 7 [OP. hya, f. hyā; OG. f. siu ].

syand flow, I. Ā. syándate, v. 83, 8.

syú̄ma-gabhasti, a. (Bv.) drawn with thongs, vii. 71, 3 [syú̄-man band; Gk. ὑ-μήν ‘sinew’].

syoná, n. soft couch, iv. 51, 10.

srá̄ma, m. disease, viii. 48, 5.

sru flow, I. sráva, vii. 49, 1 [Gk. ῥέϝει ‘flows’].

svá, poss. prn. own, i. 1, 8; ii. 35, 7; iv. 50, 8; vii. 86, 2. 6; x. 14, 2 [Av. hva, Gk. σό-ς, ὅ-ς, Lat. suu-s ].

svá-tavas, a. (Bv.) self-strong, i. 85, 7.

1. svadhá̄, f. funeral offering, x. 14, 3. 7; 15, 3. 12-14.

2. sva-dhá̄, f. own power, x. 129, 2; energy, x. 129, 5; vital force, ii. 35, 7; bliss, i. 154, 4 [svá own and dhā put; cp. Gk. ἔ-θο-ς ‘custom’].

svadhá̄-vant, a. self-dependent, vii. 86, 4. 8.

sv-ápas, a. (Bv.) skilful, i. 85, 9 [sú + ápas ‘ doing good work ’].

sváp-na, m. sleep, vii. 86, 6 [Gk. ὕπνο-ς, Lat. somnu-s, Lith. sãpna-s ].

svayaṃ-já, a. rising spontaneously, vii. 49, 2.

sva-y-ám, ref. prn. self, ii. 35, 14; of their own accord, iv. 50, 8 [115 a ].

svàr, n. light; heaven, ii. 35, 6; v. 83, 4.

sva-rá̄j, m. sovereign ruler, x. 15, 14.

sváru, m. sacrificial post, iv. 51, 2.

svar-víd, m. finder of light, viii. 48, 15.

svá-vant, a. bountiful, i. 35, 10 [ possessing property: svá, n.].

svásṛ, f. sister, vii. 71, 1; x. 127, 3 [Lat. soror, OSl. sestra, Go. swistar, Eng. sister ].

sv-astí, f. n. well-being, i. 1, 9; 35, 1; ii. 33, 3; vii. 71, 6; 86, 8; x. 14, 11; inst. s. svastí for welfare, viii. 48, 8; pl. blessings, vii. 61, 7; 63, 6 [sú well + asti being ].

svād-ú, a. sweet, viii. 48, 1 [Gk. ἡδύ-ς, Lat. svāvi-s, Eng. sweet ].

sv-ādhí̄, a. (Bv.) stirring good thoughts, viii. 48, 1.

sv-ābhú, a. invigorating, iv. 50, 10.

svá̄hā, ij. hail, as a sacrificial call, x. 14, 3.

svid, enc. emph. pcl., iv. 51, 6; x. 34, 10; 129, 5 2 ; 135, 5; 168, 3.

Ha, enc. emph. pcl., i. 85, 7; vii. 86, 3; x. 14, 13; 90, 10. 16; 129, 2 [later form of gha].

ha-tvá̄, gd. having slain, ii. 12, 3 [han strike ].

han slay, II. hántṙ, i. 85, 9; ii. 33, 15; smite, v. 83, 2 3 . 9; I. jíghna slay, viii. 29, 4; pf. jaghá̄na, ii. 12, 10. 11; ps. hanyáte, iii. 59, 2; ds. jíghāṃsa, vii. 86, 4.

han-tṛ́, m. slayer, ii. 12, 10.

hár-as, n. wrath, viii. 48, 2 [ heat; from hṛ be hot: Gk. θέρ-ος ‘summer’].

hár-i, m. bay steed, i. 35, 3 [Av. zairi - ‘yellowish’; Lat. helu-s, Lith. zelù, OG. gělo ].

hár-ita, a. yellow, vii. 103, 4. 6. 10 [Av. zairita ‘yellowish’].

háry-aśva, a. (Bv.) drawn by bay steeds, viii. 48, 10.

háv-a, m. invocation, x. 15, 1 [hū call ].

havana-śrút, a. (Tp.) listening to invocations, ii. 33, 15 [hávana (from hū call ) + śrú-t hearing from śru hear with determinative t].

havir-ád, a. (Tp.) eating the oblation, x. 15, 10 [havís + ad].

havis-pá̄, a. drinking the oblation, x. 15, 10 [havís + pā].

hav-ís, n. oblation, ii. 33, 5; 35, 12; iii. 59, 5; iv. 50, 6; vi. 54, 4; viii. 48, 12. 13; x. 14, 1. 4. 13. 14; 15, 8. 11. 12; 90, 6 2 ; 168, 4 [hu sacrifice ].

háv-ī-man, n. invocation, ii. 33, 5 [hū call ].

hav-yá, (gdv.) n. what is to be offered, oblation, iii. 59, 1; vii. 63, 5; 86, 2; x. 14, 15; 15, 4 [hu sacrifice ].

havya-vá̄hana, m. carrier of oblations, v. 11, 4 [vá̄hana from vah carry ].

havya-sú̄d, a. (Tp.) sweetening the oblation, iv. 50, 5 [sūd = svād sweeten ].

hásta, m. hand, ii. 33, 7; vi. 54, 10; viii. 29, 3-5.

hásta-vant, a. having hands, x. 34, 9.

1. hā leave, III. P. jahá̄ti.

áva-, ps. hīyate, be left behind, x. 34, 5.

2. hā go away, III. Ā. jihīte.

ápa- depart, vii. 71, 1: 3. s. sb. s. ao. hāsate, x. 127, 3.

úd- spring up, v. 83, 4.

hí, cj. for, i. 85, 1; 154, 5; 160, 1; ii. 35, 1. 5. 9; iv. 51, 5; viii. 48, 6; since, viii. 48, 9; x. 34, 11; pray, x. 14, 4.

hiṃs, injure, VII. hinásti injure; is ao. inj., x. 15, 6 [probably a ds. of han strike ].

hi-tá, pp. placed, v. 11, 6 [later form of dhita from dhā put; Gk. θετό-ς set ].

hi-tvá̄ya, gd. leaving behind, x. 14, 8 [1. hā leave ].

himá, m. winter, ii. 33, 2 [Av. zima, OSl. zima ‘winter’; Gk. δύσ-χιμο-ς ‘subject to bad storms’, ‘horrid’].

híraṇ-ya, n. gold ornament, ii. 33, 9.

hiraṇya-dá̄, a. (Tp.) giver of gold, ii. 35, 10.

híraṇya-pāṇi, a. (Bv.) golden-handed, i. 35, 9.

híraṇya-praüga, a. (Bv.) having a golden pole, i. 35, 5.

hiraṇyá-ya, a. golden, i. 35, 2; 85, 9; ii. 35, 10; viii. 29, 1.

híraṇya-rūpa, a. (Bv.) having a golden form, ii. 35, 10.

híraṇya-vaṛṇa, a. (Bv.) golden-coloured, ii. 35, 9-11.

híraṇya-śamī, a. (Bv.) having golden pins, i. 35, 4.

híraṇya-saṃdṛś, a. (Bv.) having a golden aspect, ii. 35, 10.

híraṇya-hasta, a. (Bv.) golden-handed, i. 35, 10.

hiraṇyākṣá, a. (Bv.) golden-eyed, i. 35, 8 [akṣá = akṣí eye ].

hīḍ be angry, I. héḍa: pf. jihīḷa, x. 34, 2.

hī-ná, pp. forsaken, x. 34, 10 [hā leave ].

hu sacrifice, offer, III. juhóti, iii. 59, 1; x. 14, 13-15.

á̄- offer, iii. 59, 5.

hù call, I. Ā. hávate, ii. 12, 8. 9; 33, 5; VI. Ā. huvé, vii. 61, 6; 71, 1; x. 14, 5.

hṛ be angry, IX. Ā. hṛṇīte, ii. 33, 15; with (dat.), vii. 86, 3.

hṛ́d, n. heart, ii. 35, 2; v. 11, 5; vii. 86, 8; viii. 48, 4. 12; x. 129, 4 [Av. zard ].

hṛ́d-aya, n. heart, x. 34, 9.

he-tí, f. dart, ii. 33, 14 [hi impel ].

he-tú, m. cause: ab. hetós for the sake of, x. 34, 2 [ impulse: hi impel ].

hó-tṛ, m. invoker, i. 1, 1. 5; v. 11, 2 [hū call ].

hotrā-víd, a. (Tp.) knowing oblations, x. 15, 9 [hó-trā, Av. zao-thra; cp. Gk. χύ-τρᾱ ‘pot’].

hvā call, IV. hváya, i. 35, 1 4 .

ví- call divergently, ii. 12, 8.

PRINTED IN ENGLAND AT THE OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS

P. 14, line 27,

for śitipá̄do read śitipādǒ.

P. 28, line 1,

read [Page Number xxxii, Line Number 2 in PDF for Sanskrit Version]

P. 31, line 29, and p. 46, l. 29,

for yó read yố.

P. 48,

head-line, for i. 12, 4 read ii. 12, 4.

P. 51, line 31,

for yó read yố.

P. 60, line 13,

for no read nǒ.

P. 69, line 2,

for ṭáṃ read ṭaṃ.

Pp. 68, 70, 71, 75,

head-lines, for APAṂ read APĀṂ.

P. 118,

head-line, for APAS read ĀPAS.

P. 125, line 12,

for viśvácakṣās read viśvácakṣās.

P. 128, line 3,

for nũ̄ read nú̃̄.

P. 139, line 14,

for vibhí̄dako read vibhí̄dakǒ.

P. 142, last line, and p. 143, line 11,

for anyó read anyṓ.

P. 144, head-line,

for MAṆḌŪKAS read MAṆḌŪKĀS.

P. 179, line 26,

for té read té̆

P. 184, line 17,

for tĕ read té̆.

P. 224, head-line and line 1,

for abhīti read abhì̄ti.